Yamaha PSR-OR700 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: PSR-OR700

Categoría: Instrumentos musicales

Tipo: El manual del propietario

OWNER'S MANUAL

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO

NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one

described in the manual, on the name plate, or speciﬁcally recom-

mended by Yamaha.

WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could

walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any

kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use

an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18

AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current han-

dling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.

This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a

cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is

used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accom-

pany the accessory product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the

time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify

any of the speciﬁcations without notice or obligation to update existing

units.

This product, either alone or in combination with an ampliﬁer and head-

phones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that

could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods

of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you

experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an

audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before

damage occurs.

Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting

ﬁxtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accesso-

ries. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or

installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional ﬁx-

tures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using.

Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other

uses are recommended.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a

function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not

covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners

responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer

before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environ-

mentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the produc-

tion methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with

both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the

following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if

applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of bat-

tery is approximately ﬁve years. When replacement becomes necessary,

contact a qualiﬁed service representative to perform the replacement.

This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these

may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a

rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being

charged.

When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries

of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or

incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture.

Warning:

Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batter-

ies away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regu-

lated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of

household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason

its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local,

state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that

contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist

you, please contact Yamaha directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model num-

ber, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate.

You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of pur-

chase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a perma-

nent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

92-BP (bottom)

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The required

voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Use the speciﬁed adaptor (PA-301, PA-300 or an equivalent recommended by

Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument

or overheating.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have

accumulated on it.

• Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,

and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects

on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll

anything over it.

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into

any openings.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

• If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a

sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or

smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,

disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected

by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold

the plug itself and not the cord.

• Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during

electrical storms.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.

Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the

outlet.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or

heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to

prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal

components.

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,

mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio

may generate noise.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is

easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off

the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power

switch is turned off, electricity is still ﬂowing to the product at the minimum

level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug

the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

• Use only the stand speciﬁed for the instrument. When attaching the stand, use

the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal

components or result in the instrument falling over.

• Do not place objects in front of the instrument’s air vent, since this may prevent

adequate ventilation of the internal components, and possibly result in the

instrument overheating.

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Location

(3)-10

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all

components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes

of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume

controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners,

solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

• Do not insert a ﬁnger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel

or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the

power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed

Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might

discolor the panel or keyboard.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not

use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

•

Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss.

If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

Saving and backing up your data

• The data of the types listed below are lost when you turn off the power to the

instrument. Save the data to the USER tab display (page 27), or USB storage

device (USB ﬂash memory/ﬂoppy disk, etc).

• Recorded/Edited Songs (page 43, 143, 158)

• Created/Edited Styles (page 114)

• Edited Voices (page 92)

• Memorized One Touch Settings (page 51)

• Edited MIDI settings (page 177)

• Scale tune settings (page 99)

Moreover, the above-mentioned data can be saved all at once. Refer to page 75.

Data in the USER tab display (page 27) may be lost due to malfunction or

incorrect operation. Save important data to a USB storage device (USB ﬂash

memory/ﬂoppy disk, etc).

When you change settings in a display page and then exit from that page,

System Setup data (listed in the Parameter Chart of the Data List

downloadable from the web) is automatically stored. However, this edited

data is lost if you turn off the power without properly exiting from the relevant

display. Refer to page 5 for how to obtain the Data List.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still ﬂowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long

time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.

Connections

Maintenance

Handling caution

Saving data

(3)-10

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha PORTATONE!

We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and

convenient functions of the instrument.

We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

About this Owner’s Manual and Data List

This manual consists of the following sections.

Owner’s Manual

Introduction (page 12).......................... Please read this section ﬁrst.

Quick Guide (page 24)......................... This section explains how to use the basic functions.

Basic Operation (page 60).................... This section explains how to use the basic operations including display-

based controls.

Reference (page 77) ............................. This section explains how to make detailed settings for the various func-

tions.

Appendix (page 183)............................ This section contains additional information such as Troubleshooting and

Speciﬁcations.

Data List

The Data List contains various important preset content lists such as Voices, Styles, Effects, as well as MIDI-

related information. The Data List is available for downloading from the Yamaha Manual Library.

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

•The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different

from those on your instrument.

•The example Operation Guide displays shown in this Manual are in English.

• Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except

for your personal use.

•This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the

device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended.

• Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original.

•The mandolin and pan ﬂute, shown in the displays of the PSR-OR700, are on display at the Hamamatsu Museum of Musical Instruments.

•The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.

•This product utilizes NF, an embedded Internet browser from ACCESS Co., Ltd. NF is used with the patented LZW, licensed

from Unisys Co., Ltd. NF may not be separated from this product, nor may it be sold, lent or transferred in any way. Also, NF

may not be reverse-engineered, reverse-compiled, reverse-assembled or copied.

This software includes a module developed by the Independent JPEG Group.

• All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has

license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style ﬁles, MIDI ﬁles,

WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not per-

mitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Accessories

Guide to Yamaha Online Member Product User Registration

Accessory CD-ROM for Windows

Owner’s Manual

Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide

Music rest

AC Power Adaptor

*May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer.

The followings are the titles, credits and copyright notices for two (2) of the songs pre-installed in this instrument:

Beauty And The Beast

from Walt Disney's BEAUTY AND THE BEAST

Lyrics by Howard Ashman

Music by Alan Menken

Hey Jude

Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney

All Rights Administered by Sony/ATV Music Publishing, 8 Music Square West, Nashville, TN 37203

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Table of Contents

Introduction

What can you do with the PORTATONE? ....... 12

Panel Controls ................................................. 14

Playing the Keyboard ...................................... 16

Power Supply ............................................... 16

Powering Up ................................................ 17

Setting Up ....................................................... 18

Music Rest ................................................... 18

Using Headphones ....................................... 18

Changing the Display Language .................. 19

Display Settings ........................................... 19

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and

Floppy Disks .................................................... 22

Handling the USB Storage Device

(USB Flash Memory/Floppy Disk, etc) ............ 23

Quick Guide

Playing the Demos .......................................... 24

Operations in Basic Displays ........................... 26

Operation of the Main Display ............................. 26

Operation of the File Selection Display ................. 27

Operation of the Function Display ........................ 28

Playing Voices ................................................. 30

Playing Preset Voices ............................................ 30

Practicing with the Preset Songs .................... 36

Playing Back and Listening to Songs Before

Practicing ............................................................. 36

Displaying Music Notation (Score) ....................... 39

Muting the Right- or Left-hand Part Viewing the

Score .................................................................... 40

Practicing with the Repeat Playback Function ....... 42

Recording Your Performance ................................ 43

Playing Backing Parts with the performance

assistant Technology ....................................... 44

Playing Accompaniment with the Auto

Accompaniment Feature (Style Playback) ...... 46

Playing “Mary Had a Little Lamb” with the Auto

Accompaniment Feature ...................................... 46

The Multi Pads ................................................ 52

Playing the Multi Pads .......................................... 52

Using Chord Match .............................................. 53

Voice Effects .................................................... 53

Applying Harmony to Your Right-hand Melody

(HARMONY/ECHO) .............................................. 54

Calling Up Ideal Setups for Each Song

(Music Finder) ................................................. 55

Calling up the panel settings to match the Style

(Repertoire) .......................................................... 56

Singing Along with Song Playback (Karaoke)

or Your Own Performance .............................. 57

Singing with the Lyrics Display ............................. 57

Convenient Functions for Karaoke ........................ 58

Convenient Functions for Singing Along with

Your Own Performance ........................................ 58

Setting an Oriental Scale ................................ 59

Basic Operation

Selecting Message Language .......................... 60

The Messages Shown in the Display .............. 60

Instant Selection of the Displays

— Direct Access .............................................. 61

Basic Displays (Main Display and File

Selection Display) ............................................ 62

Main Display ........................................................ 62

File Selection Display Configuration and Basic

Operation ............................................................. 63

File/Folder Operations in the File Selection

Display ................................................................. 66

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings ... 72

Restoring the Factory-programmed System .......... 72

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings

Independently by Item ......................................... 72

Saving and Recalling Your Original Settings as a

Single File ............................................................. 74

Data Backup .................................................... 75

Backup procedure ................................................ 75

Reference

Using, Creating and Editing Voices ..77

Voice Characteristics ....................................... 77

Playing Different Voices Simultaneously ........ 78

Keyboard Parts (Right 1, Right 2, Left) .................. 78

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously

(Right 1 and 2 Parts) ............................................ 79

Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right

Hands (Right 1 and Left Parts) .............................. 80

Changing Pitch ................................................ 81

Transpose ............................................................. 81

Fine-tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument ...... 81

Selecting the Harmony/Echo type .................. 82

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance

(MIXING CONSOLE) ........................................ 84

Basic Procedure .................................................... 84

Voice Creating — Voice Set ............................ 92

Basic Procedure .................................................... 92

Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices .......... 96

Using Oriental Scales

— Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/

Scale Memory .................................99

Setting an Oriental Scale — Scale Setting ...... 99

Scale Tuning .................................................... 99

Memorizing the Scale Setting

— Scale Memory ........................................... 101

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Saving Your Scale Settings ........................... 101

Recalling the Scale Setting ........................... 102

Using, Creating and Editing the

Auto Accompaniment Styles ........ 103

Style Characteristics ...................................... 103

Selecting a Chord Fingering Type ................ 103

Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a

Style ............................................................... 104

Style Playback-related Settings ..................... 106

Split Point Settings ....................................... 107

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance of the

Style (MIXING CONSOLE) ............................ 108

Convenient Music Finder feature ................. 108

Searching the Records ........................................ 108

Creating a Set of Favorite Records ...................... 110

Editing Records .................................................. 111

Saving the Record .............................................. 112

Style Creator ................................................. 114

Style Structure .................................................... 114

Creating a Style .................................................. 114

Editing the Created Style .................................... 120

The Multi Pads ............................. 128

Multi Pad Creating (Multi Pad Creator) ....... 128

Multi Pad Realtime Recording ............................ 128

Multi Pad Step Recording (EDIT) ........................ 129

Multi Pad Editing (Multi Pad Creator) ......... 130

Registering and Recalling Custom

Panel Setups

— Registration Memory ............... 131

Registering and Saving Custom Panel

Setups ............................................................ 131

Recalling the Registered Panel Setups ......... 132

Deleting an Unneeded Panel Setup/Naming a

Panel Setup ........................................................ 133

Disabling Recall of Specific Items

(Freeze Function) ............................................... 134

Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order

— Registration Sequence ................................... 134

Using, Creating and Editing

Songs ............................................ 136

Compatible Song Types ................................ 136

Operations for Song Playback ...................... 137

Adjusting the Volume Balance and Voice

Combination, etc. (MIXING CONSOLE) ....... 140

Practicing Songs with the Guide Functions .. 141

Selecting the Guide Function Type ..................... 141

Recording Your Performance to MIDI .......... 143

Recording Methods ............................................ 143

Editing a Recorded Song .................................... 158

Using Your Instrument with Other

Devices ........................................167

Connecting Audio Devices ............................ 167

Using External Audio Devices for Playback

(1 [OUTPUT] jacks) ........................................... 167

Playing External Audio Devices with the Built-in

Speakers (2 [AUX IN] jacks) ............................... 167

Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller

(3 [FOOT PEDAL 1/2] jacks) .............................. 168

Assigning Specific Functions to Each Foot Pedal .. 168

Connecting External MIDI Devices

(4 [MIDI] terminals) .......................................... 171

Connecting to a computer and USB device ... 171

Connecting a Computer

(4 [MIDI] and 5 [USB TO HOST] terminals) ...... 171

Connecting to a USB Storage Device

(6 via the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal) ................ 172

What is MIDI? ................................................ 174

MIDI Settings ................................................ 177

Basic Operation .................................................. 177

Pre-Programmed MIDI Templates ....................... 179

MIDI System Settings ......................................... 180

MIDI Transmit Settings ....................................... 180

MIDI Receive Settings......................................... 181

Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback via MIDI

Receive ............................................................... 182

Setting the Chord Type for Style Playback via MIDI

Receive ............................................................... 182

Appendix

Troubleshooting ............................................ 183

Specifications ................................................ 187

Index .............................................................. 189

Panel Button Chart ........................................ 192

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Using

Your

Instrument

with

Other

Devices

Introduction

Quick Guide

Basic Operation

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto

Accompaniment Styles

The Multi Pads

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Appendix

Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

Reference

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Using Your Instrument with Other

Devices

Using Oriental Scales

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Application Index

Starting up before turning the power on

• Setting up the music rest.......................................................................................................................................... page 18

• Connecting headphones.......................................................................................................................................... page 18

•Turning the power on/off ......................................................................................................................................... page 17

Listening to the PSR-OR700

• Playing the Demos .................................................................................................................................................. page 24

• Playing songs........................................................................................................................................................... page 36

– Playing a Preset Song ........................................................................................................................................... page 36

–Turning parts (channels) of the Song on/off......................................................................................................... page 142

– Adjusting the balance between the Song and keyboard...................................................................................... page 140

• Playing Styles ........................................................................................................................................................ page 103

– Playing Preset Styles............................................................................................................................................. page 46

–Turning parts (channels) of the Style on/off ......................................................................................................... page 105

– Adjusting the balance between the Style and keyboard...................................................................................... page 108

• Playing the Multi Pads ............................................................................................................................................. page 52

Playing the Keyboard

• Selecting a Voice (RIGHT1) and playing the keyboard ............................................................................................. page 78

• Playing two or three Voices simultaneously ............................................................................................................. page 79

• Playing different Voices with the left and right hands ............................................................................................... page 80

• Playing the drum/percussion Voices......................................................................................................................... page 77

• MegaVoices............................................................................................................................................................. page 77

• Setting the touch sensitivity of the keyboard ............................................................................................................ page 33

•Turning Initial Touch on or off for each keyboard part (RIGHT1, 2, LEFT)................................................................. page 53

• Setting the Modulation wheel for each keyboard part (RIGHT 1, 2, LEFT)................................................................ page 34

Practicing the keyboard performance

• Using the Metronome.............................................................................................................................................. page 34

• Displaying and playing along with the music notation of the song during playback................................................. page 39

Selecting the programs of the PSR-OR700

•Voices ..................................................................................................................................................................... page 77

• Styles..................................................................................................................................................................... page 103

• Multi Pad banks..................................................................................................................................................... page 128

• Songs .................................................................................................................................................................... page 136

• Music Finder records...................................................................................................................................... pages 55, 108

• Registration Memory bank..................................................................................................................................... page 134

• Registration Memory number ................................................................................................................................ page 134

• One Touch Setting numbers..................................................................................................................................... page 51

• Harmony/Echo types ............................................................................................................................................... page 82

• MIDI templates...................................................................................................................................................... page 179

• Effect types .............................................................................................................................................................. page 88

• Master EQ types ...................................................................................................................................................... page 90

Using the LCD display

• Understanding and using the Main display .............................................................................................................. page 26

•Viewing the Song Lyrics on the LCD display............................................................................................................ page 57

•Viewing the Song Score on the LCD display ............................................................................................................ page 39

Playing Style chords with your left hand and melodies with your right

• Learning how to play speciﬁc chord types ..............................................................Chord Tutor .............................. page 50

• Learning how to play (indicate) chords for Style playback.......................................Chord Fingering........................ page 50

• Applying automatic harmony or echo to your right-hand melodies.........................Harmony/Echo ......................... page 82

•Automatically changing the chords of the Multi Pads with your left-hand play........Chord Match ............................ page 53

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Instantly selecting custom panel settings

• Calling up ideal panel setups..................................................................................Music Finder ................... pages 55, 108

• Changing setups to match the Style ........................................................................One Touch Setting .................... page 51

•Saving and recalling custom panel setups...............................................................Registration Memory .............. page 131

Creating Voices, Styles, Songs, and more

• Creating your original Voices..................................................................................Voice Set .................................. page 92

• Creating your original Organ Flutes Voices .............................................................Voice Set .................................. page 96

• Creating your original Styles...................................................................................Style Creator........................... page 114

• Creating your original Songs.................................................................................................................................... page 43

– MIDI recording of your keyboard performance ........................................................................................... pages 43, 143

– Inputting notes one by one..................................................................................Song Creator .......................... page 149

– Inputting and editing ..........................................................................................Song Creator .......................... page 158

• Creating your original Multi Pads............................................................................Multi Pad Creator ................... page 128

• Creating a Registration Memory bank.................................................................................................................... page 134

• Creating new Music Finder records ....................................................................................................................... page 110

• Creating new Effect types ........................................................................................................................................ page 88

• Creating custom Master EQ settings......................................................................................................................... page 90

Using Oriental Scales

• Setting an Oriental Scale — Scale Setting ................................................................................................................ page 99

• Adjusting the Scale Tuning — Scale Tuning.............................................................................................................. page 99

• Memorizing the Scale Setting — Scale Memory ................................................................................................... page 101

•Saving Your Scale Settings...................................................................................................................................... page 101

• Recalling the Scale Setting..................................................................................................................................... page 102

Controlling and adjusting the pitch

• Adjusting the overall pitch of the PSR-OR700.........................................................Master Tune.............................. page 81

• Adjusting the octave of the keyboard....................................................................................................................... page 86

•Transposing notes (Master Transpose, Keyboard Transpose, Song Transpose) ............................................................ page 58

• Setting [TRANSPOSE] button to independently control separate parts ..................................................................... page 86

• Using the PITCH BEND wheel ................................................................................................................................ page 33

• Using the MODULATION wheel............................................................................................................................. page 34

Live performance tips and techniques

• Assigning speciﬁc panel operations/functions for foot control................................................................................ page 168

• Calling up Registration Memory numbers in custom-set order ................................Registration Sequence ............ page 134

• Using a foot pedal to change Registration Memory numbers ................................................................................. page 168

• Using the Fade In/Out ..................................................................................................................................... pages 48, 49

Group performance tips and techniques

• Independently transposing the Song and keyboard pitch to match your singing range ............................................. page 58

•Tuning the overall sound of the PSR-OR700 to match other instruments.................................................................. page 81

• Synchronizing the PSR-OR700 to other MIDI instruments ..................................................................................... page 180

Other Tips

• Registering your name to the PSR-OR700................................................................................................................ page 21

• Importing custom icons for Voice/Style/Song indications in the Selection display .................................................... page 70

• Displaying the bank select and program numbers in the Voice Selection display ................................................... page 182

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

What can you do with the PORTATONE?

SONG

Playback previously

recorded songs

(page 36, 57, 137)

Enjoy a wide variety of

preset songs as well as

songs on commercially

available disks.

DEMO

Explore the Demos (page 24)

These not only showcase the

stunning voices and styles of the

instrument, they introduce you to

the various functions and features —

and give you hands-on experience

using the PSR-OR700!

STYLE

Back up your performance with Auto

Accompaniment (page 46, 103)

Playing a chord with your left hand automati-

cally plays the auto accompaniment backing.

Select an accompaniment style — such as pop,

jazz, Latin, etc. — and let the PORTATONE be

your backing band!

SCALE SETTING/SCALE

MEMORY

Using oriental scales (page 99)

The Scale Setting feature lets you easily

lower the pitches of speciﬁc notes by 50

cents to create your own oriental scales.

Up to six scale settings can be stored for

instant recall (Scale Memory), whenever

you need them.

LCD

The large LCD (together with

the various panel buttons)

provides comprehensive and

easy-to-understand control of

the instrument’s operations.

The lyrics, music scores can

also be displayed in the LCD.

DIGITAL RECORDING

Record your performances (page 43, 143)

With the powerful and easy-to-use song

recording features, you can record your own

keyboard performances, and create your own

complete, fully orchestrated compositions —

which you can then save to the USER drive or a

USB storage device for future recall.

And since the recorded data is MIDI, you can

easily edit your songs, too.

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

LAN

USB

TO DEVICE

TO HOST

MIDI FOOT PEDAL

OUT

MUSIC FINDER

Call up the perfect accompaniment

style (page 55, 108)

If you know what song you want to play,

but you don’t know which style or voice

would be right for it, let the Music Finder

help you. Just select the song title, and

the instrument automatically calls up the

most appropriate style and voice.

VOICE

Enjoy a huge variety of realistic voices

(page 30, 77)

The PSR-OR700 features a wealth of

exceptionally authentic and dynamic voices —

including piano, strings, woodwinds, and more!

The instrument also has MegaVoices.

MegaVoices feature different performance

sounds of the same instrument in different

velocity ranges — designed speciﬁcally for

recorded MIDI data.

Organ Flutes

Craft your own organ

voices (page 96)

This special function not only

gives you a full set of rich and

luscious organ sounds, it also

lets you create your own

original organ voices, just as

on a traditional organ, by

increasing and decreasing the

ﬂute footages, and adding

percussive sounds.

USB TO HOST terminal

Make music with a computer

— quickly and easily (page 171)

Dive in and take advantage of the

wide world of computer music

software. Connections and setup

are exceptionally easy, and you

can play back your computer

recorded parts with different

instrument sounds — all from a

single instrument!

USB TO DEVICE

terminal

Connect the instrument

to the USB storage device

(page 172)

Connecting the USB storage

device (such as USB ﬂash

memory and hard disk drive)

to this terminal lets you save

various types of data created

on the instrument.

Multi Pads

Add spice to your performance with

special dynamic phrases (page 52, 128)

By simply pressing one of the Multi Pads,

you can play short rhythmic or melodic

phrases. You can also create your original

Multi Pad phrases by recording them

directly from the keyboard.

SCALE TUNE

Create your own scales

(page 99)

You can select a desired scale

template including oriental scales

and create your own scales by

ﬁne tuning the scale notes.

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Panel Controls

STANDBY/ON

1 [STANDBY/ON] switch.................................................... P. 17

VOLUME

2 [MASTER VOLUME] dial.................................................. P. 17

WHEEL

3 [PITCH BEND] wheel ...................................................... P. 33

4 [MODULATION] wheel................................................... P. 34

SCALE SETTING

5 [SCALE SETTING] buttons................................................ P. 59

SCALE MEMORY

6 [MEMORY] button .......................................................... P. 59

7 [SCALE MEMORY] buttons............................................... P. 59

PHONES

8 [PHONES] ....................................................................... P. 18

DEMO

9 [DEMO] button................................................................ P. 24

SONG

0 [SELECT] button............................................................... P. 36

A [SCORE] button ............................................................... P. 39

B [LYRICS] button............................................................... .P. 57

C [REPEAT] button............................................................... P. 42

D [GUIDE] button ............................................................... P. 40

E [EXTRA TR] button ......................................................... P. 143

F [TR 2] button ................................................................... P. 42

G [TR 1] button ................................................................... P. 40

H [REC] button .................................................................... P. 43

I [J] (STOP) button ......................................................... P. 37

J [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button ....................................... P. 36

K [G]/[H] (REW/FF) buttons......................................... P. 138

STYLE

L STYLE buttons .................................................................. P. 46

TRANSPOSE

M [–] [+] buttons .................................................................. P. 58

METORONOME

N [METRONOME] button.................................................... P. 34

TAP TEMPO

O [TAP TEMPO] button ........................................................ P. 48

TEMPO

P [–] [+] buttons .................................................................. P. 34

FADE IN/OUT

Q [FADE IN/OUT] button..................................................... P. 48

STYLE CONTROL

R [OTS LINK] button ........................................................... P. 51

S [AUTO FILL IN] button..................................................... P. 49

T [ACMP] button ................................................................. P. 47

U INTRO [I]/[II]/[III] buttons................................................. P. 48

V MAIN VARIATION [A]/[B]/[C]/[D] buttons........................ P. 49

W [BREAK] button ................................................................ P. 49

X ENDING/rit. [I]/[II]/[III] buttons ........................................ P. 49

Y [SYNC STOP] button ........................................................ P. 49

Z [SYNC START] button....................................................... P. 48

[ [START/STOP] button ....................................................... P. 48

USB

TO DEVICE

TO HOST

13 14 15 16 17

30 31 32 33 34 35 36

24 25

37 55 56 57 58

28 29

19 20

229

11 12

See page 167

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

\ [LCD CONTRAST] knob .................................................. P. 19

] [A]–[J] buttons.................................................................. P. 26

^ [BALANCE] button........................................................... P. 41

a [MIXING CONSOLE] button............................................ P. 84

b [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button ................................. P. 105, 142

c [DIRECT ACCESS] button................................................. P. 61

d [1

π†

]–[8

π†

] buttons ................................................ P. 26

e TAB [

√

][

] buttons......................................................... P. 27

f [FUNCTION] button........................................................ P. 28

g [USB] button.................................................................... P. 65

h [SCALE TUNE] button ...................................................... P. 99

i [EXIT] button.................................................................... P. 27

j DATA ENTRY dial ............................................................ P. 65

k [ENTER] button................................................................ P. 65

MUSIC FINDER

l [MUSIC FINDER] button.................................................. P. 55

PART

m [PART SELECT], [PART ON/OFF] buttons ......................... P. 78

VOICE

n VOICE buttons ................................................................. P. 30

REGISTRATION MEMORY

o REGIST BANK [–]/[+] buttons......................................... P. 132

p [FREEZE] button............................................................. P. 134

q [MEMORY] button ......................................................... P. 131

r [1]–[8] buttons............................................................... P. 131

MULTI PAD CONTROL

s [SELECT] button ............................................................. P. 130

t [1]–[4] buttons ............................................................... P. 130

u [STOP] button ................................................................ P. 128

ONE TOUCH SETTING

v [1]–[4] buttons ................................................................. P. 51

VOICE CONTROL

w [HARMONY/ECHO] button ....................................... P. 53, 82

x [TOUCH] button .............................................................. P. 53

y [SUSTAIN] button............................................................. P. 53

z [MONO] button............................................................... P. 53

{ [DSP] button .................................................................... P. 53

| [VARI.] button .................................................................. P. 53

UPPER OCTAVE

} UPPER OCTAVE [–]/[+] buttons........................................ P. 62

~ Drum Kit icons....................................... Data List (See page 5)

REAR PANEL

å DC IN (terminal) .............................................................. P. 16

MIDI FOOT PEDAL

OUT

50 52

53 54

59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68

•For quick reference, also see the alphabetically

sorted “Panel Button Chart” on page 192.

•For information on the jacks and connectors

located on the rear panel, see page 167.

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Playing the Keyboard

Power Supply

Make sure that the instrument’s STANDBY/ON switch is set to

STANDBY (off).

Connect one end of the AC cable to the power adaptor.

Connect the power adaptor’s DC plug to the instrument’s DC IN ter-

minal on the rear panel.

Connect the other end (normal AC plug) to the nearest electrical out-

let.

WARNING

• Use the speciﬁed adaptor

(PA-301/PA-300 or an equiv-

alent recommended by

Yamaha) only.

• The use of an incompatible

adaptor may cause irrepara-

ble damage to the PSR-

OR700, and may even pose

a serious shock hazard!

ALWAYS UNPLUG THE AC

ADAPTOR FROM THE AC

POWER OUTLET WHEN THE

PSR-OR700 IS NOT IN USE.

CAUTION

Never interrupt the power sup

ply (e.g. unplug the AC adap-

tor) during any PSR-OR700

record operation! Doing so can

result in a loss of data.

CAUTION

Even when the switch is in the

“STANDBY” position, electric-

ity is still ﬂowing to the

instrument at a minimum

level. When not using the

PSR-OR700 for an extended

period of time, be sure to

unplug the AC power adaptor

from the wall AC outlet.

To electrical outlet

DC IN

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Powering Up

Before you switch your PSR-OR700 on or off, ﬁrst turn down the volume of any connected audio equip-

ment.

1 Press the [STANDBY/ON] switch.

The Main display appears in the display.

When you’re ready to turn off the power, press the [STANDBY/ON]

switch again.

2 Setting the volume

Use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to adjust the volume to an appropriate

level.

CAUTION

In order to avoid possible

damage to the speakers or

other connected electronic

equipment, always switch on

the power of the PSR-OR700

before switching on the

power of the ampliﬁed speak-

ers or mixer and ampliﬁer.

Likewise, always switch off

the power of the PSR-OR700

after switching off the power

of the ampliﬁed speakers or

mixer and ampliﬁer.

Air Vents

CAUTION

This instrument has special air vents in the top panel (see below) and rear panel. Do not

place objects where they might block the air vent, since this may prevent adequate ven-

tilation of the internal components, and possibly result in the instrument overheating.

SCALE TUNE

Air Vents

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Setting Up

Music Rest

The PSR-OR700 is supplied with a music rest that can be attached to the instru-

ment by inserting it into the slot at the rear of the control panel.

Using Headphones

Connect a pair of headphones to the [PHONES] jack. The internal stereo speaker

system is automatically shut off when a pair of head phones is plugged into the

[PHONES] jack.

CAUTION

Do not listen with the head-

phones at high volume for

long periods of time. Doing

so may cause hearing loss.

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Changing the Display Language

This determines the language used in the display for messages, ﬁle names, and

character input.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[

√

][

] OWNER

2 Press the [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] button to select a language.

Display Settings

Adjusting the Contrast of the Display

You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [LCD CONTRAST] knob

located to the left of the display.

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Adjusting the Brightness of the Display

Adjust the brightness of the display.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[

√

][

] CONFIG 2

2 Press the [2

ππ

††

] button to adjust the brightness of the display.

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Entering the Owner Name in the Opening Dis-

play

You can have your name appear in the opening display (the display that appears

when the power is turned on).

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[

√

][

] OWNER

2 Press the [I] (OWNER NAME) button and call up the Owner Name dis-

play.

Refer to page 71 for character-entry details.

Displaying the version number

To check the version number of this instrument, press the [7

π†

] (VERSION) buttons in the display in step 1 above. Press the [EXIT]

or [8

π†

] button to return to the original display.

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks

An optional ﬂoppy disk drive UD-FD01 can be connected

to this instrument. It lets you save original data you’ve cre-

ated on the instrument to ﬂoppy disk, and allows you to

load data from ﬂoppy disk to the instrument.

Be sure to handle ﬂoppy disks and treat the disk drive with

care. Follow the important precautions below.

Floppy Disk Compatibility

• 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type ﬂoppy disks can be used.

Formatting a Floppy Disk

• If you ﬁnd that you are unable to use new, blank disks or

old disks that have been used with other devices, you

may need to format them. For details on how to format a

disk, see page 66. Keep in mind that all data on the disk

will be lost after formatting. Make sure to check before-

hand whether or not the disk contains important data.

Floppy disks formatted on this device may or may not be usable as

is on other devices.

Inserting/Removing Floppy Disks

Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Disk

Drive:

• Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing

upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards

the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly

pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the

eject button pops out.

Never insert anything but ﬂoppy disks into the disk drive. Other

objects may cause damage to the disk drive or ﬂoppy disks.

Removing a Floppy Disk

• After checking that the instrument is not accessing* the

ﬂoppy disk (checking that the use lamp on the ﬂoppy

disk drive is off), ﬁrmly press the eject button at the

upper right of the disk slot all the way in.

When the ﬂoppy disk is ejected, pull it out of the drive. If

the ﬂoppy disk cannot be removed because it is stuck,

do not try to force it, but instead try pressing the eject

button again, or try re-inserting the disk and attempt to

eject it again.

* Access of the disk indicates an active operation, such as

recording, playback, or deletion of data.

If a ﬂoppy disk is inserted while the power is on, the disk is

automatically accessed, since the instrument checks whether

the disk has data.

• Be sure to remove the ﬂoppy disk from the disk drive

before turning off the power. A ﬂoppy disk left in the

drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and

dirt that can cause data-read and -write errors.

Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write

Head

• Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument

employs a precision magnetic read/write head which,

after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of

magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventu-

ally cause read and write errors.

•To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order

Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-avail-

able dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about

once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the avail-

ability of proper headcleaning disks.

About Floppy Disks

Handle ﬂoppy disks with care, and fol-

low these precautions:

• Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply

pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep ﬂoppy disks

in their protective cases when they are not in use.

• Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high

or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liq-

uids.

• Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed

surface of the ﬂoppy disk inside.

• Do not expose the disk to magnetic ﬁelds, such as those

produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since

magnetic ﬁelds can partially or completely erase data on

the disk, rendering it unreadable.

• Never use a ﬂoppy disk with a deformed shutter or hous-

ing.

• Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to

a ﬂoppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in

the proper location.

To Protect Your Data (Write-protect Tab):

•To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the

disk's write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab

open). When saving data, make sure that the disk's

write-protect tab is set to the “overwrite” position (tab

closed).

CAUTION

Do not remove the ﬂoppy disk or turn off the instrument

itself while the disk is being accessed.

Doing so may result not only in loss of data on the disk

but also damage to the ﬂoppy disk drive.

Write-protect tab open

(protect position)

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/Floppy Disk, etc)

This instrument features a built-in [USB TO DEVICE] termi-

nal. By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device

with a standard USB cable, you can save data you’ve cre-

ated to the connected device, as well as read data from the

connected device. Be sure to handle USB storage device

with care. Follow the important precautions below.

For more information about the handling of USB stor-

age device, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB stor-

age device.

Compatible USB storage devices

• Up to two USB storage devices, such as a ﬂoppy disk

drive, hard disk drive, CD-ROM drive, ﬂash memory

reader/writer, etc., can be connected to the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal. (If necessary, use a USB hub. The

number of USB storage devices that can be used with

musical instruments simultaneously even when a USB

hub is used is a maximum of two.) This instrument can

recognize up to four drives in one USB storage device.

Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or

mouse cannot be used.

•The instrument does not necessarily support all commer-

cially available USB storage devices. Yamaha cannot

guarantee operation of USB storage devices that you

purchase. Before purchasing USB storage devices,

please consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized

Yamaha distributor (see list at end of the Owner’s Man-

ual) for advice, or visit the following web page:

http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard/

Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to

the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data.

Formatting USB storage media

• When a USB storage device is connected or media is

inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format

the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation.

Using USB Storage Devices

• When connecting a USB storage device to the [USB TO

DEVICE], make sure that the connector on the device is

appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direc-

tion. Before removing the media from the device, make

sure that the instrument is not accessing data (such as in

the Save, Copy and Delete operations).

• If you are connecting two or three devices at the same

time (such as two USB storage devices and a LAN adap-

tor), you should use a USB hub device. The USB hub

must be self-powered (with its own power source) and

the power must be on. Only one USB hub can be used.

If an error message appears while using the USB hub,

disconnect the hub from the instrument, then turn on the

power of the instrument and re-connect the USB hub.

•Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard,

you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with

the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is

that of USB 1.1.

To protect your data (write-protect):

To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased,

apply the write-protect provided with each storage device

or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device,

make sure to disable write-protect.

CAUTION

The format operation overwrites any previously existing

data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does

not contain important data. Proceed with caution, espe-

cially when connecting multiple USB storage medias.

CAUTION

Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB

storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the cable

too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the

instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instru-

ment is accessing data (such as in the Save, Copy and

Delete operations), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do

NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn

the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the

data on either or both devices.

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Playing the Demos

The Demos are more than just songs — they also provide helpful, easy-to-understand introductions to the

features, functions and operations of the instrument. In a way, the Demos are an interactive “mini-manual”

— complete with sound demonstrations and text showing what it can do for you.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]

→ [J]UTILITY → TAB[

√

][

] OWNER

2 Press the [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] buttons

to select the desired language.

Demos will play back continuously until

stopped.

When the Demo stops, the display returns

to the MAIN display.

1 Select the desired Language.

2 Press the [DEMO] button to start the Demos.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to stop the Demo playback.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Showing Speciﬁc Demo Topics

To return back to the previous display,

press the [J] (Play Overview Demo) but-

ton.

When the Demo has more

than one screen.

Press [1

π†

]–[8

π†

] but-

tons corresponding to the

screen number.

1 Press the [7ππ

ππ

††

]/[8ππ

ππ

††

] buttons in the Demo display to call up the speciﬁc Demo

menu.

2 Press one of the [A]–[H] buttons to show a speciﬁc Demo.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Demos.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Operations in Basic Displays

To start with, you should know a little about the basic displays that appear in the Quick Guide. There are

three basic displays:

Main display ➤ See below.

File selection display ➤ page 27

Function display ➤ page 28

Operation of the Main Display

The Main display shows the basic settings and important information for the instrument (It is the same display that

appears when the instrument is turned on.).You can also call up display pages related to the displayed function from

the Main display.

n About information in the Main display

See page 62.

1 [A]–[J] buttons

The [A]–[J] buttons correspond to the

settings indicated next to the buttons.

For example, press the [F] button, and

the Voice (RIGHT 1) selection display

will appear in the display.

2 [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons

The [1

π†

]–[8

π†

] buttons corre-

spond to the parameters which are

indicated above the buttons.

For example, pressing the [1

] but-

ton will increase the Song (page 36)

volume.

3 [DIRECT ACCESS] and [EXIT]

buttons

Here’s a convenient way to return to

the Main display from any other dis-

play: Simply press the [DIRECT

ACCESS] button, then the [EXIT] button.

1 1

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Operation of the File Selection Display

In the File Selection display, you can select the Voice (page 30)/Song (page 36)/Style (page 46), etc.

In the example here, we’ll call up and use the Song Selection display.

About PRESET/USER/USB

PRESET .............. Internal memory to which the preprogrammed data are installed as preset data.

USER ................. Internal memory that allows both reading and writing of data.

USB ...................USB storage device, such as USB ﬂash memory/ﬂoppy disk drive, etc., which is connected

to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

n Hereafter in this manual, any USB storage device such as USB ﬂash memory/ﬂoppy disk drive, etc. will be referred to as

“USB storage device.”

Several Songs may be together in a

folder. In this case, the folder(s) will

appear in the display (see the illustration

at right). Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons

to select a folder.

Press the [8

] (UP) button to call up

the next highest level folder.

When the drive contains more than ten Songs, the display is divided up into several pages. The page indica-

tions are shown at the bottom of the display. Press one of the [1

]–[7

] buttons to select a page.

n The number of pages shown varies depending on the selection display of the Voices/Songs/Styles. Press the button corre-

sponding to “P1, P2 ...” in the display.

You can also select a Song by using the DATA ENTRY dial, then press the [ENTER] button to execute.

53,

1 Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display.

2 Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select the desired drive (PRESET/USER/USB).

3 Select a folder (if necessary).

4 Select a page (if the display has several pages).

5 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Song.

6 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Operation of the Function Display

In the Function display, you can make detailed settings.

In the example here, we’ll call up and use the keyboard touch sensitivity setting display.

Categories of detailed settings are shown.

When the selected category is further

divided into sub-categories, the tab(s)

will be shown in the display.

When the setting is further divided into

additional settings, a list will be shown

in the display.

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button.

2 Press the [D] button to select the category CONTROLLER.

3 Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select the KEYBOARD/PANEL tab.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

For details on the touch sensitivity settings, see page 33.

4 Press the [A] button to select the “1 INITIAL TOUCH.”

5 Press the [1

ππ

††

]/[2

ππ

††

] button to select touch sensitivity for the keyboard.

Throughout this manual, arrows are used in the instructions, indicating in shorthand the process of calling up certain

displays and functions.

For example, the instructions above can be indicated in shorthand as: [FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB

[

√

][

] KEYBOARD/PANEL → [A] 1 INITIAL TOUCH.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Playing Voices

The instrument features a wide variety of exceptionally realistic Voices, including piano, guitar, strings, wind

instruments and more.

Playing Preset Voices

The preset Voices are categorized and contained in appropriate folders. Voice buttons on the panel correspond to the

categories of the preset Voices. For example, press the [PIANO] button to display various piano Voices.

n About the various Voices

Refer to the Voice List in the Data List available at the Yamaha website. (See page 5.)

The Voice selected here is for the RIGHT 1 part. For the Voice part, see page 78.

Make sure that the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT1] button is also turned on. If it is turned off, the right-hand part

will not sound.

[METRONOME] button

(page 34)

VOICE buttons (page 30)

1 Press the PART SELECT [RIGHT1] button to call up the Voice selection display.

Determining how the Voice selection display is opened (when one of the VOICE category selection

buttons is pressed).

You can select how the Voice selection display is opened (when one of the VOICE category selection buttons is pressed).

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

] CONFIG 2

2 Select the [B] (2 VOICE CATEGORY BUTTON OPTIONS) button, and use the [1

π†

]/[2

π†

] buttons to change

how the Voice selection display is opened.

• OPEN&SELECT:

Opens the Voice selection display with the top (ﬁrst) voice of the voice category automatically selected

(when one of the VOICE category selection buttons is pressed). With the default settings, the OPEN&SELECT

function is turned on.

• OPEN ONLY:

Opens the Voice selection display with the currently selected voice (when one of the VOICE category selec-

tion buttons is pressed).

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

•The Voice type and its deﬁning characteristics are indicated above the Preset Voice name. For details on the character-

istics, see page 77.

•You can instantly jump back to the original display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A]–[J] buttons.

2 Press one of the VOICE buttons to select a Voice category and call up the Voice selec-

tion display.

3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Voice.

4 Play the keyboard.

Recalling your favorite Voices easily

The instrument has a huge amount of high-quality Voices, covering an exceptionally broad range of instrument sounds

— making it perfect for virtually every musical application. However, the sheer number of Voices may seem over-

whelming at ﬁrst. To easily recall your favorite Voice, there are two methods:

● Save your favorite Voice to the USER display in the Voice Selection display and recall it by using

the VOICE [USER] button

1 Copy your favorite Voices from the Preset drive to the User drive.

Refer to page 68 for details on the copy operation.

2 Press the Voice [USER] button to call up the Voice Selection display and press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to

select the desired Voice.

● Register your favorite Voice to Registration Memory and recall it with the REGISTRATION MEM-

ORY [1]–[8] buttons

Refer to page 131 for details on Registration Memory operations.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Playing the Voice Demos

To listen to the various Voices and hear how they sound especially in context, listen to the demo songs for each Voice.

1 In the Voice Selection display (page 31 step 3), press the [8

††

] (DEMO) button to start

the Demo for the selected Voice.

2 To stop the Demo, press the [8

††

] (DEMO) button again.

Selecting percussion sounds

When one of the Drum Kit Voices in the [PERCUSSION & DRUM KIT] group is selected, you can play various drums and

percussion instrument sounds on the keyboard. Details are given in the Drum List provided in the Data List (page 5).

To check which “Standard Kit 1” percussion sounds are assigned to each key, look at the Drum Kit icons printed below

the keys (page 15).

Selecting sound effects

You can play individual sound effects, such as bird chirps and ocean sounds from the keyboard. The sound effects are

categorized as “GM&XG”/“GM2.”

1 Press the PART SELECT [RIGHT 1] button to call up the Voice selection display.

2 Press the [8

] (UP) button to call up the Voice categories.

3 Press the [2

] button to display page 2.

4 Press the [E]/[F] button to select “GM&XG”/“GM2.”

5 Press the [2

] button to display page 2.

6 Press the [F] button to select “SoundEffect.”

7 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired sound effect.

8 Play the keyboard.

Selecting GM/XG/GM2 Voices

n For details on the Voice allocation format, see page 177.

You can select the GM/XG/GM2 Voices directly via the panel operation. Perform steps 1–4 described in the “Selecting

sound effects” above, select the desired category, then select the desired voice.

Playing different Voices simultaneously

The instrument can play different Voices simultaneously (page 78).

• Layering two different Voices

This is useful for creating rich and thick sounds.

• Setting separate Voices for the left and right sections of the keyboard

You can play different Voices with the left and right hands. For example, you can set up the keyboard to play the

bass Voice with your left hand and the piano Voice with your right hand.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Using the Pitch Bend Wheel

Use the PITCH BEND wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from you) or down (roll the wheel toward you)

while playing the keyboard. The Pitch Bend is applied to all the keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, 2 and LEFT). The PITCH

BEND wheel is self-centering and will automatically return to normal pitch when released.

• If the Pitch Bend range is set to more than 1200 cents (1 octave) via MIDI, the pitch of some voices may not be raised or lowered

completely.

•The effects caused by using the PITCH BEND Wheel will not be applied to the LEFT part when the Chord Fingering type is set to

the one other than “FULL KEYBOARD” or “AI FULL KEYBOARD” with the [ACMP] and PART ON/OFF [LEFT] turned on.

Setting the touch sensitivity of the keyboard

You can adjust the touch response of the instrument (how the sound responds to the way you play the keys). The touch

sensitivity type becomes the common setting for all Voices.

1 Call up the operation display:

[FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [

√

][

] KEYBOARD/

PANEL → [A] 1 INITIAL TOUCH

2 Press the [1

π†

]/[2

π†

] buttons to specify the touch response.

HARD 2 ..... Requires strong playing to produce high volume. Best

for players with a heavy touch.

HARD 1 ..... Requires moderately strong playing for high volume.

NORMAL... Standard touch response.

SOFT 1....... Produces high volume with moderate playing strength.

SOFT 2....... Produces relatively high volume even with light play-

ing strength. Best for players with a light touch.

• This setting does not change the weight of the keyboard.

• When you do not want to apply touch sensitivity, set Touch to OFF for

the corresponding parts by pressing the [5

†

]–[7

†

] buttons. When

Touch is set to OFF, you can specify the ﬁxed volume level by press-

ing the [4

π†

] button.

•The touch sensitivity settings may have no effect with certain voices.

PITCH BEND

MODULATION

The maximum pitch bend range can be changed via the following instructions.

1 Call up the display for setting the Pitch Bend Range.

[MIXING CONSOLE] → TAB [

√

][

] → TUNE → [H] PITCH BEND RANGE

2 Set each of the Pitch Bend Range of the keyboard part by using the [5

π†

]/[6

π†

]/[7

π†

] button.

π†

] button..........Sets the Pitch Bend Range of the LEFT part.

π†

] button..........Sets the Pitch Bend Range of the RIGHT1 part.

π†

] button..........Sets the Pitch Bend Range of the RIGHT2 part.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Using the Modulation Wheel

The Modulation function applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. This is applied to all the keyboard

parts (RIGHT 1, 2 and LEFT). Moving the MODULATION wheel down (towards MIN) decreases the depth of the effect,

while moving it up (towards MAX) increases it.

•To avoid accidently applying modulation, make sure the MODULATION Wheel is set at MIN before you start playing.

•The effects caused by using the MODULATION wheel will not be applied to the LEFT part when the Chord Fingering type is set to

the one other than “FULL KEYBOARD” or “AI FULL KEYBOARD” with the [ACMP] and PART ON/OFF [LEFT] turned on.

Using the Metronome

The metronome provides a click sound, giving you an accurate tempo guide when you practice, or letting you hear and

check how a speciﬁc tempo sounds.

Adjusting the Tempo or Setting the Time Signature of the Metronome Sound

■ Adjusting the Metronome Tempo

1 Press the TEMPO [–]/[+] button to call up the pop-up tempo setting display.

PITCH BEND

MODULATION

You can set whether the effects caused by the MODULATION Wheel will be applied or not to each of the key-

board part.

1 Call up the display.

[FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [

√

][

] → KEYBOARD/PANEL → [A]/[B] 2 MODULATION WHEEL

2 Set whether the effects caused by the MODULATION Wheel will be applied or not to each of the keyboard

part by using the [5

π†

]/[6

π†

]/[7

π†

] button.

π†

] button..........Sets whether the effects caused by the MODULATION Wheel will be applied or not to the

LEFT part.

π†

] button..........Sets whether the effects caused by the MODULATION Wheel will be applied or not to the

RIGHT1 part.

π†

] button..........Sets whether the effects caused by the MODULATION Wheel will be applied or not to the

RIGHT2 part.

1 Press the METRONOME button to start the metronome.

2 To stop the metronome, press the METRONOME button again.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

2 Press the TEMPO [–]/[+] buttons to set the tempo.

Pressing and holding either button lets you continuously increase or decrease the value.

You can also use the DATA ENTRY dial to adjust the value. To reset the tempo, press the TEMPO [–]/[+] but-

tons simultaneously.

n About the Tempo display

The number in the display indicates how many quarter-note beats there are in one minute. The range is between 5 and

500. The higher the value, the faster the tempo.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to close the Tempo display.

■ Determine the Metronome Time Signature and Other Settings

1 Call up the operation display:

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

] CONFIG 1 → [B] 2 METORONOME

2 Set the parameters by pressing the [2

ππ

††

]–[7

ππ

††

]

buttons.

VOLUME Determines the level of the metronome

sound.

SOUND Determines which sound is used for the met-

ronome.

Bell Off............... Conventional metronome

sound, with no bell.

Bell On............... Conventional metronome

sound, with bell.

TIME

SIGNATURE

Determines the time signature of the metro-

nome sound.

Set the Popup Display Time

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]

→

[J] UTILITY

→

TAB [

√

][

]

CONFIG 2

2 Select the [B] (2 POPUP DISPLAY TIME) button, and use the [7

π†

]/[8

π†

] buttons to set the time.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Practicing with the Preset Songs

n Song

In this manual, the word “Song” refers to performance data.

Playing Back and Listening to Songs Before Practicing

The instrument includes several preset Songs. This section covers basic information on playing back the preset Songs.

You can also select the ﬁle by using the DATA ENTRY dial, then press the [ENTER] button to execute.

n You can instantly jump back to the original display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A]–[E] buttons.

1 Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song selection display.

2 Press the [A] button to select the Sample Song category.

3 Press one of the [A]–[E] buttons to select the desired Song.

4 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

5 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop playback.

Playing Songs saved to USER (page 67)

1 Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song selection display.

2 Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select the USER tab.

3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Song.

Playing Songs saved to a USB storage device (page 67)

CAUTION

Before using a USB storage device, be sure to read “Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/Floppy Disk,

etc)” on page 23.

1 Connect the USB storage device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

2 Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song selection display.

3 Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select the USB tab (“USB1”/“USB2”), corresponding to the USB storage device

you inserted in Step 1.

The indication “USB1”/“USB2” will be displayed depending on the number of the connected devices.

4 Use the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Song.

n You can also select a speciﬁed ﬁle in the USB storage device by pressing the [USB] button.

[USB] → [A] SONG → [A]–[J]

Playing Songs in sequence

You can play all Songs in a folder continuously.

1 Select a Song in the desired folder.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING

3 Press the [H] (REPEAT MODE) button to select “ALL.”

4 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback.

All Songs in the folder play back continuously, in order.

5 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop continuous playback.

6 To turn off the Song sequence playback, press the [H] button to select “OFF” in the display in step 2.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Boost the volume of the part to be practiced

On the instrument, a single Song can contain separate data for up to sixteen MIDI channels. Specify the channel for

practicing and increase the playback volume for the channel.

1 Select a Song. The method for selecting a Song is the same as “Playing Back and Listening to Songs Before Practic-

ing” (page 36 step 1–3).

2 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE display.

3 Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select the VOL/VOICE tab.

4 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button until “MIXING CONSOLE (SONG CH1-8)” is shown at the top of the dis-

play.

5 Press the [E]/[J] button to select “VOLUME.”

6 To raise the level of the desired channel(s), press the appropriate buttons [1

π†

]–[8

π†

If the desired channel is not shown in the MIXING CONSOLE (SONG CH1-8) display, press the [MIXING CON-

SOLE] button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE (SONG CH9-16) display.

If you don’t know which channel’s volume to raise:

• Look at the illustrations of the instruments indicated below “VOICE.”

• Look at the channel indicators, which light as the Song plays back. Watching these as you listen can show you

which channel you wish to boost.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Displaying Music Notation (Score)

You can view the music notation of the selected Song. We suggest that you read through the music notation before

starting to practice.

•The instrument can display the music notation of commercially-available music data or your recorded Songs.

•The displayed notation is generated by the instrument based on the Song data. As a result, it may not be exactly the same as com-

mercially available sheet music of the same song — especially when displaying notation of complicated passages or many short

notes.

•The notation functions cannot be used to create Song data by inputting notes. For information on creating Song data, see

page 143.

n Look through the entire score before playing back the Song

Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select subsequent pages.

You can also use the footswitch to select subsequent pages (page 169).

The “ball” bounces along through the score, indicating the current position.

Changing the Notation Display

You can change the notation display as desired to suit your personal

preferences.

1 Press the [SCORE] button to display the music nota-

tion.

n The music notation at right is for instructional purposes only,

and the song depicted is not one of the preset Songs on your

instrument.

2 Change the following settings as desired.

● Changing the size of the music notation

Press the [7

π†

] button to change the size of the music

notation.

● Displaying only right-hand part/left-hand part

notation

Press the [1

π†

]/[2

π†

] button to disable display of

the left-hand part/right-hand part.

● Customizing the notation display

• Display the note name at the left of the note

1 Press the [5

ππ

††

] (NOTE) button to display the note name.

2 Press the [8

ππ

††

] (SET UP) button to call up the detailed setting display.

3 Press the [6

†

] (NOTE NAME) button to select “Fixed Do.”

4 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to apply the setting.

● Increase the number of measures in the display

You can increase the number of measures that will be displayed by decreasing the other items to be dis-

played (part, lyrics, chords, etc.).

Use the [1

π†

]–[4

π†

] buttons to turn off the items you want not to be displayed.

1 Select a Song (page 36).

2 Press the [SCORE] button to display the music notation.

3 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback.

4 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop playback.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Set the detailed parameters of the view type as desired.

1 Press the [8

ππ

††

] (SET UP) button to call up the detailed setting display.

2 Press the [1

ππ

††

]–[6

ππ

††

] buttons to set the view type.

3 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to apply the setting.

n Save the notation view settings

The notation view settings can be saved as part of a Song (page 162).

Muting the Right- or Left-hand Part Viewing the Score

The Guide function indicates the notes you should play, when you should play them, and how long you should hold

them down. You can also practice at your own pace — since the accompaniment waits for you to play the notes cor-

rectly. Here, mute the right- or left-hand part and try practicing the part.

Practicing the Right-hand Part (TRACK 1)

LEFT CH/RIGHT CH

Determines which MIDI channel in the Song data is used for the left-hand/right-hand part. This set-

ting returns to AUTO when a different Song is selected.

AUTO

The MIDI channels in the Song data for the right- and left-hand parts are assigned automatically

— setting the parts to the same channel as the channel which is speciﬁed in the [FUNCTION] →

[B] SONG SETTING.

1–16

Assigns the speciﬁed MIDI channel (1–16) to each of the left- and right-hand parts.

OFF (LEFT CH only)

No channel assignment: This disables display of the left-hand key range.

KEY SIGNATURE

This lets you enter key signature changes in the middle of a song, at the stopped position. This menu

is useful when the selected Song contains no key signature settings for displaying notation.

QUANTIZE

This gives you control over the note resolution in the notation, letting you shift or correct the timing

of all displayed notes so that they line up to a particular note value. Make sure to select the smallest

note value used in the song.

NOTE NAME

Selects the type of the note name indicated at the left of the note in the notation from among the fol-

lowing three types. The settings here are available when the NOTE parameter in “Display the note

name at the left of the note” step 1 is set to ON.

A, B, C

Note names are indicated as letters (C, D, E, F, G, A, B).

FIXED DO

Note names are indicated in solfeggio and differ depending on the selected language.

The language is speciﬁed in LANGUAGE of the OWNER display (page 19).

MOVABLE DO

Note names are indicated in solfeggio according to the scale intervals, and as such are relative to

the key. The root note is indicated as Do. For example, in the key of G major the root note of “So”

would be indicated as “Do.” As with “Fixed Do,” the indication differs depending on the selected

language.

1 Select a Song (page 36), then press the [SCORE] button to call up the Score display.

2 Turn the [GUIDE] button on.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

The indicator of the [TR 1] button goes out. You can now play that part by yourself.

Practice the muted part viewing the Score display.

n Adjusting the tempo

Refer to page 34.

Quickly changing tempo during a performance (Tap function)

The tempo can also be changed during Song playback by tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button twice at the desired tempo.

3 Press the SONG [TR 1] button to mute the right-hand part.

4 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback.

5 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop playback.

6 Turn the [GUIDE] button off.

Adjusting the volume balance between the Song and the keyboard

This lets you adjust the volume balance between Song playback and the sound you play on the keyboard.

1 Press the [BALANCE] button to call up the volume balance display.

2 To adjust the Song volume, press the [1

π†

] button. To adjust the keyboard (RIGHT 1) volume, press the [6

π†

]

button.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to close the volume balance display.

n About keyboard parts (Right 1, Right 2, Left)

See page 78.

Other guide functions

The initial setting “Follow Lights” was used in the instructions “Muting the Right- or Left-hand Part Viewing the Score” on

page 40. There are additional functions in the Guide feature, as described below.

To select a guide function, see page 141.

For keyboard performance

• Any Key

This lets you practice the timing of playing the keys.

For Karaoke

• Karao-Key

This function lets you control the Song playback timing with just one ﬁnger, while you sing along.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Practicing the Left-hand Part (TRACK 2) Viewing the Score

The indicator of the [TR 2 (L)] button goes out. You can now play that part by yourself.

Practicing with the Repeat Playback Function

The Song Repeat functions can be used to repeatedly play back a Song or a speciﬁc range of measures in a Song. This

is useful for repeated practicing of difﬁcult-to-play phrases.

Playing Back a Song Repeatedly

1 Select a Song (page 36).

2 Press the [REPEAT] button to turn on Repeat playback.

3 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback.

The Song will be played back repeatedly until you press the SONG [

J] (STOP) button.

4 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop playback.

5 Press the [REPEAT] button to turn off Repeat playback.

Specifying a Range of Measures and Playing them Back Repeat-

edly (A-B Repeat)

1 Select a Song (page 36).

2 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback.

3 Specify the repeat range.

Press the [REPEAT] button at the starting point (A) of the range to be repeated. Press the [REPEAT] button

again at the ending point (B). After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the range from

Point A to Point B is played back repeatedly.

n Instantly returning to Point A

Regardless of whether the Song is playing back or is stopped, pressing the [J] (STOP) button returns to Point A.

4 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop playback.

5 Press the [REPEAT] button to turn off Repeat playback.

1,2 Follow the same steps as in “Practice the right-hand part (TR 1)” on page 40.

3 Press the [TR 2] button to mute the left-hand part.

4 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback and practice the

muted part.

5 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop playback.

6 Turn the [GUIDE] button off.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Other Methods for Specifying the A–B Repeat Range

● Specifying the repeat range while Songs are stopped

1 Press the [H] (Fast Forward) button to advance to the Point A location.

2 Press the [REPEAT] button to specify Point A.

3 Press the [H] (Fast Forward) button to advance to the Point B location.

4 Press the [REPEAT] button again to specify Point B.

● Specifying the repeat range between Point A and the end of the Song

Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between Point A and the end of the Song.

Recording Your Performance

Record your performance by using the Quick Recording feature. This is an effective practice tool, allowing you to easily

compare your own performance to the original song you are practicing. You can also use it to practice duet pieces by

yourself, if you have your teacher or partner record his or her part beforehand.

A blank Song for recording is automatically set.

Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard.

A message prompting you to save the recorded performance appears. To close the message, press the [EXIT]

button.

1 Press the [REC] and [J] (STOP) buttons simultaneously.

2 Select a Voice (page 30). The selected Voice will be recorded.

3 Press the [REC] button.

4 Start recording.

5 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop recording.

6 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to play back the recorded performance.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

1 Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song selection display.

2 Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select the appropriate tab (USER, USB, etc.) to which you want to

save the data. Select USER to save the data to internal memory, or select USB to save the data to a

USB storage device.

3 Press the [6

††

] (SAVE) button to call up the ﬁle naming display.

4 Enter the ﬁle name (page 71).

5 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to save the ﬁle.

To cancel the Save operation, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

CAUTION

The recorded song will be lost if you change to another Song or you turn the power off without executing the Save oper-

ation.

Playing Backing Parts with the performance

assistant Technology

This feature makes it exceptionally easy to play the backing parts along with Song playback.

n Before using performance assistant technology

To use the performance assistant technology, the Song must contain chord data. If the Song contains this data, the current chord name

will be displayed in the Main display during Song playback, letting you easily check whether the Song contains chord data or not.

In these example instructions, use the Songs in the “SampleSongs” folder.

[FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING

7 Save the recorded performance.

When the following message appears: “Song” changed. Save?/“Song” speichern?/

“Song” modiﬁé. Sauv.?/“Song” cambiado. ¿Guardar?/Salvare “Song”?

The recorded data has not yet been saved. To save the data, press the [G] (YES) button to open the Song selection dis-

play and save the data (see above). To cancel the operation, press the [H] (NO) button.

Playing Songs saved to USER or a USB storage device.

Refer to page 37.

1 Select a Song (page 36).

2 Call up the operation display.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

The instrument automatically matches your performance on the keyboard to the Song playback and chords,

no matter what keys you play. It even changes the sound according to the way you play. Try playing in the

three different ways below.

3 Press the [8

ππ

††

] button to turn the [P.A.T.] (Performance Assistant) on.

4 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback.

5 Play the keyboard.

Playing the left and right hand together

(method 1).

Playing the left and right hand together

(method 2).

Playing the left hand and right hand

alternately.

Play three notes at the

same time with your

right hand.

Play several notes one after

the other with different ﬁn-

gers of your right hand.

Play three notes at the

same time with your

right hand.

●● ●

6 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop playback.

7 Press the [8

ππ

††

] button to turn the [P.A.T.] (Performance Assistant) off.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Playing Accompaniment with the Auto Accom-

paniment Feature (Style Playback)

The Auto Accompaniment features let you produce automatic accompaniment playback simply by playing

“chords” with your left hand. This lets you automatically recreate the sound of a full band or orchestra — even if

you’re playing by yourself. The Auto Accompaniment sound is made up of the rhythm patterns of the Styles. The

Styles of the instrument cover a wide range of different musical genres including pop, jazz, and many others.

Playing “Mary Had a Little Lamb” with the Auto

Accompaniment Feature

122 233 35

1 1 1

21 2 3 2 3 2 1

1 1 4 1

CGC

GCC

MARY HAD A LITTLE LAMB

Traditional

Style: Straight 8 Pop

Ending

1 Press the STYLE CONTROL “POP & ROCK” button.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

•The Style type and its deﬁning characteristics are indicated above the Preset Style name. For details on the character-

istics, see page 103.

• When the [7

] (REPERTOIRE) button is pressed after selecting a Style, you can call up the custom panel settings (for

voices and tempos, etc.) designed to best match the selected Style. For details on Repertoire, see page 56. To return to

the previous display, press the [EXIT] button.

•You can instantly jump back to the original display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A]–[J] buttons.

Use the left-hand section (lower part) of the keyboard to play the chords for sounding the Auto Accompaniment.

Try playing chords with your left hand and play a melody with your right hand.

n Chord Fingerings

There are seven different ﬁngering methods you can use to specify chords (page 103).

Enabling tempo display above Style name

You can select whether the tempo is displayed above the Style name or not.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

] CONFIG 2

2 Select the [B] (2 DISPLAY STYLE TEMPO) button, and use the [5

π†

]/[6

π†

] buttons to switch the tempo dis-

play on/off.

• ON:

Tempo is displayed above the Style name.

With the default settings, the Display Style Tempo function is on.

• OFF:

Tempo is not displayed above the Style name.

2 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Style “Straight 8 Pop.”

3 Press the [ACMP] button to turn on Auto Accompaniment.

53 4 6

4 Press the [SYNC START] button to set Auto Accompaniment to standby — letting you

simultaneously start the accompaniment as soon as you start playing.

5 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Auto Accompaniment starts.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

When Ending playback is ﬁnished, the Style automatically stops.

• About the various Styles

Refer to the Style List in the Data List available at the Yamaha website. (See page 5.)

• Quickly changing the Style tempo during a performance (Tap function)

The tempo can also be changed during playback by tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button twice at the desired tempo.

• Specifying the split point (the border between the right- and left-hand range)

See page 107.

• Turns touch response on/off for the Style playback (Style Touch)

See page 106.

Pattern Variation

While you play, you can automatically add specially created intros and endings, as well as variations in the rhythm/

chord patterns, for more dynamic, professional-sounding performances. There are several different auto accompani-

ment pattern variations for each situation: starting your performance, during your performance, and ending your per-

formance. Try out the variations and combine them freely.

To Start Playing

● Start/Stop

Styles start playing back as soon as the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button is pressed.

● Intro

This is used for the beginning of the song. Each preset Style features three different intros. When the intro ﬁnished play-

ing, accompaniment shifts to the Main section (see “Main” in the “During Style playback”).

Press one of the INTRO [I]–[III] buttons before starting Style playback and press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP]

button to start Style playback.

● Synchro Start

This lets you start playback as soon as you play the keyboard.

Press the [SYNC START] button when Style playback is stopped and play a chord in the chord section of the keyboard

to start Style playback.

● Fade In

The Fade In produces smooth fade-ins when starting the Style.

Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button when Style playback is stopped and press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button

to start Style playback.

● Tap

Tap out the tempo and automatically start the Style at that tapped speed. Simply tap (press/release) the [TAP TEMPO]

button (four times for a 4/4 time signature), and the Style playback starts automatically at the tempo you tapped.

n The particular drum sound and the velocity (loudness) of the sound when the Tap function is used can be selected in the following

display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY →

TAB [

√

][

] CONFIG 1 → [B] 4 TAP

6 Automatically play an appropriate ending by pressing any of the [ENDING/rit.] but-

tons, at the point in the score (page 46) indicated by “Ending.”

Adjusting the volume balance between the Style and the keyboard

This lets you adjust the volume balance between Style playback and the sound you play on the keyboard.

1 Press the [BALANCE] button to call up the volume balance display.

2 To adjust the Style volume, press the [2

π†

] button. To adjust the keyboard (RIGHT 1) volume, press the [6

π†

]

button.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to close the volume balance display.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

During Style Playback

● Main

This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays an accompaniment pattern of several measures, and repeats

indeﬁnitely. Each preset Style features four different patterns.

Press one of the MAIN [A]–[D] buttons during Style playback.

● Fill In

The ﬁll-in sections let you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your per-

formance sound even more professional.

Turn on the [AUTO FILL IN] button before starting Style playback or during playback. Then, simply press one of the

MAIN VARIATION (A, B, C, D) buttons as you play, and the selected ﬁll-in section plays automatically (AUTO FILL),

spicing up the auto accompaniment. When the ﬁll-in is ﬁnished, it leads smoothly into the selected main section (A, B,

C, D).

Even when [AUTO FILL IN] button is turned off, pressing the same button of the currently playing section automatically

plays a ﬁll-in before returning to the same main section.

● Break

This lets you add dynamic breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your performance sound even more

professional.

Press the [BREAK] button during Style playback.

To Finish Playing

● Start/stop

Styles stop as soon as the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button is pressed.

● Ending

This is used for the ending of the Song. Each preset Style features three different endings. When the ending is ﬁnished,

the Style stops automatically.

Press one of the ENDING/rit. [I]–[III] buttons during Style playback. You can have the ending gradually slow down

(ritardando) by pressing the same ENDING/rit. button again while the ending is playing back.

n If you press the ENDING/rit. [I] button in the middle of your performance, a ﬁll-in automatically plays before the ENDING/rit. [I].

● Fade Out

The Fade Out produces smooth fade-outs when stopping the Style.

Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button during Style playback.

n For details on setting the fade-in and fade-out time, see page 105.

Others

● Synchro Stop

When Synchro Stop is on, you can stop and start the Style anytime you want by simply releasing or playing the keys (in

the chord section of the keyboard). This is a great way to add dramatic breaks and accents to your performance.

Press the [SYNC STOP] button before starting the Style playback.

• Enable Synchro Stop by pressing/releasing keys (Synchro Stop Window)

See page 106.

• Fixing the section pattern to either Intro or Main (Section Set)

For example, you can set this function to Intro to conveniently have an Intro play automatically whenever you select a Style

(page 107).

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Learning How to Play (Indicate) Chords for Style Playback

Learning the Notes to Play for Certain Chords

If know the name of a chord but don’t know how to play it, you can have the instrument show you the notes to play

(Chord Tutor function).

[FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING → TAB[√][®] CHORD FINGERING

The notes you need to play to make the selected chord are shown in the display.

n The notes that are displayed correspond to Fingered, no matter which ﬁngering type is selected (page 104).

About the section button (INTRO/MAIN/ENDING, etc.) lamps

• Green

The section is not selected.

• Red

The section is currently selected.

• Off

The section contains no data and cannot be played.

Holding the LEFT part Voice (Left Hold)

This function causes the LEFT part Voice to be held even when the keys are released. Non-decaying voices such as

strings are held continuously, while decay-type voices such as piano decay more slowly (as if the sustain pedal has

been pressed).

1 Press the PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button to turn the left-hand part on.

2 Press the [LEFT HOLD] button to turn the Left Hold function on.

1 Call up the operation display.

2 Press the [6

ππ

††

] button to select the root note.

3 Press the [7

ππ

††

]/[8

ππ

††

] button to select the chord type.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Appropriate Panel Settings for the Selected Style — One Touch

Setting

One Touch Setting is a powerful and convenient feature that automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings

(Voices or effects, etc.) for the currently selected Style, with the touch of a single button. If you’ve already decided

which Style you wish to use, you can have One Touch Setting automatically select the appropriate Voice for you.

Not only does this instantly call up all the

settings (Voices, effects, etc.) that match the

current Style — it also automatically turns

on ACMP and SYNC START, so that you can

immediately start playing the Style.

n Parameter Lock

You can “lock” speciﬁc parameters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.) to make them selectable only via the panel controls

(page 133).

1 Select a Style (page 46).

2 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1]–[4] buttons.

3 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the selected Style starts.

Helpful hints for using One Touch Setting

● Automatically changing One Touch Settings with the Main sections (OTS Link)

The convenient OTS (One Touch Setting) Link function lets you automatically have One Touch Settings change when

you select a different Main section (A–D).To use the OTS Link function, press the [OTS LINK] button.

● Memorizing the panel settings to the OTS

You can also create your own One Touch Setting setups.

1 Set up the panel controls (such as Voice, Style, effects,

and so on) as desired.

2 Press the [MEMORY] button.

3 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1]–[4] buttons.

As it is possible to save the panel settings with another

ﬁle (step 4), register it in a favorite number from 1 to 4.

A message appears in the display prompting you to save

the panel settings.

4 Press the [F] (YES) button to call up the Style selection display and save the panel settings as a Style ﬁle (page 67).

CAUTION

The panel settings memorized to each OTS button will be lost if you change the Style or turn the power off without

executing the Save operation.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

The Multi Pads

The Multi Pads can be used to play a number of short pre-recorded rhythmic and melodic sequences that can be used

to add impact and variety to your keyboard performances.

Multi Pads are grouped in Banks or four each. The PSR-OR700 features a variety of Multi Pad Banks in a variety of dif-

ferent musical genres.

Playing the Multi Pads

Select pages using the [1

]–[7

] buttons that correspond to “P1, P2...” in the display, then use the [A]–[J]

buttons to select the desired bank.

The corresponding phrase (in this case, for Pad 1) starts playing back in its entirety as soon as the pad is

pressed. To stop it, press and release the [STOP] button.

Simply tap any of the Multi Pads at any time to play back the corresponding phrase at the currently set

tempo. You can even play two, three, or four Multi Pads at the same time. Pressing the pad during its play-

back will stop playing and begin playing from the top again.

1 Press the MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT] button to call up the Multi Pad Bank selection

display, then select the desired Bank.

2 Press any of the MULTI PAD CONTROL [1]–[4] buttons to play the Multi Pad phrase.

● About the color of the Multi Pads

• Green: Indicates that the corresponding pad contains data (phrase).

• Red: Indicates that the corresponding pad is playing back.

● Multi Pad data

There are two types of Multi Pad data. Some types will play back once and stop when they reach to the end. Others

will play back repeatedly until you press the [STOP] button.

● Stopping playback of the Multi Pads

•To stop all pads, press and release the [STOP] button.

•To stop speciﬁc pads, simultaneously hold down the [STOP] button and press the pad or pads you wish to stop.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Using Chord Match

Many of the Multi Pad phrases are melodic or chordal and you can have these phrases automatically change chords as

you do with your left hand. While a style is playing back and [ACMP] is on, simply play a chord with your left hand

and press any of the Multi Pads — Chord Match changes the pitch to match the chords you play. You can also use this

with the style stopped (with the Stop Accompaniment function). Keep in mind that some Multi Pads are not affected by

Chord Match.

Voice Effects

The PSR-OR700 features a sophisticated multi-processor effect system which can add extraordinary depth and expres-

sion to your sound. This effect system can be turned on or off by using the following buttons.

• HARMONY/ECHO

The Harmony/Echo types are applied to the right-hand Voices. Refer to “Applying Harmony to Your Right-

hand Melody” on page 54.

•TOUCH

This button turns the touch response of the keyboard on or off. When OFF, the same volume is produced

no matter how strongly or softly you play the keyboard.

• SUSTAIN

When this Sustain function is on, all notes played on the keyboard (RIGHT 1/2 parts only) have a longer

sustain. You can also set the sustain depth (page 95).

• MONO

When this button is on, the part’s Voice is played monophonically (only one note at a time). Using the

MONO mode lets you play single, lead sounds (such as brass instruments) more realistically. It also lets

you expressively control the Portamento effect (depending on the selected Voice) by playing legato.

When this button is off, the part’s Voice played polyphonically.

n Portamento

Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the ﬁrst note played on the keyboard to the next.

The portamento time (the pitch transition time) can be set via the MIXING CONSOLE display (page 86).

• DSP/DSP VARI.

With the digital effects built into the instrument, you can add ambience and depth to your music in a vari-

ety of ways — such as adding reverb that makes you sound like you are playing in a concert hall.

•The DSP switch is used to turn the DSP (Digital Signal Processor) effect on or off for the currently

selected keyboard part.

•The DSP VARI. (Variation) switch is used to change between variations of the DSP effect. You could use

this while you play, for example, to change the rotating speed (slow/fast) of the rotary speaker effect.

n DSP

Stands for Digital Signal Processor (or Processing). DSP changes and enhances the audio signal in the digital realm to

produce a wide range of effects.

In this example, the phrase for Pad 1

will be transposed into F major

before playing back. Try out other

various chord types while playing the

Multi Pads.

Chord

section

These three effect systems are applied

to the currently selected keyboard part

(RIGHT 1, 2, or LEFT).

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Applying Harmony to Your Right-hand Melody

(HARMONY/ECHO)

Among the Voice Effects, Harmony is one of the most impressive. It automatically adds harmony parts to the notes you

play with your right hand — immediately giving you a more full and professional sound. For details on the Harmony/

Echo types, see page 82. An optional foot pedal can also be used to turn the effect on and off (page 168).

You can also use the Harmony effect with the style stopped (with the Stop Accompaniment function;

page 106). Simply hold down a chord with your left hand and play a melody with your right. Since the Har-

mony effect is added by detecting chords, if you play a melody with your right hand before playing any

chord, no Harmony effect is added to the notes.

1 Turn the [Harmony/Echo] button on.

2 Turn on both the [ACMP] button and [SYNC START] button (page 47) and make sure

that the RIGHT 1 part is on (page 30).

3 Play a chord with your left hand to start the style (page 47) and play some notes in

the right-hand range of the keyboard.

Split Point

Chord

section

In this example, harmony

notes in the scale of C major

(the chord played in the left

hand) are automatically

added to the notes played in

the Chord section right-hand

range of the keyboard.

Try out Harmony/Echo with some of the voices below...

Many of the voices have been automatically set to play certain Harmony/Echo types that match the particular voice.

Try out some of the voices below — playing chords with your left hand and melodies with your right — and listen to

the various Harmony and Echo effects.

Category Voice Name Harmony/Echo Type

Piano Live! GrandPiano Standard Trio

Accordion & Harmonica TuttiAccordion Country Trio

Strings

Live! Strings Block

ChamberStrings 4-way Open

Harp Strum

Guitar & Bass

Cool! PowerLead RockDuet

Cool! ElectricGtr CountryDuet

Perc. & Drum Kit Vibraphone Trill

Timpani Tremolo

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Calling Up Ideal Setups for Each Song

(Music Finder)

If you want to play in a certain genre of music but don’t know which Style and Voice settings would be appropriate, the

convenient Music Finder function can help you out. Simply select the desired music genre from among the Music Finder

“Records,” and the instrument automatically makes all appropriate panel settings to let y ou play in that music style.

A new record can be created by editing the currently selected one (page 111).

n The data (records) of the Music Finder are not the same as Song data and cannot be played back.

The ALL tab contains the preset records.

•You can also select the desired record by using the DATA ENTRY dial, then press the [ENTER] button to execute.

• Searching the records

The Music Finder is also equipped with a convenient search function that lets you enter a song title or keyword — and

instantly call up all the records that match your search criteria (page 108).

• MUSIC ...............Contains the song title or music genre that describes each record, letting you easily

ﬁnd the desired music style.

n Skipping up or down through the song alphabetically

When sorting records by song title, use the [1

π†

] button to skip up or down through the songs

alphabetically. Simultaneously press the [

π†

] buttons to move the cursor to the ﬁrst record.

• STYLE.................This is the preset Style assigned to the record.

n Skipping up or down through the Style alphabetically

When sorting records by Style name, use the [4

π†

]/[5

π†

]

button to skip up or down through the

Styles alphabetically. Simultaneously press the [

π†

] buttons to move the cursor to the ﬁrst record.

• BEAT ..................This is the time signature registered to each record.

• TEMPO ..............This is the assigned tempo setting for the record.

1 Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER display.

2 Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select the ALL tab.

3 Select the desired record by using the following four search categories.

To select a record, press the [2

ππ

††

]/[3

ππ

††

] buttons

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Notice that the panel settings have been automatically changed to match the music genre of the selected

record.

• Tempo Lock

Tempo Lock function lets you avoid changing the Tempo during Style playback when selecting another record. To turn on the

Tempo Lock function, press the [I] (TEMPO LOCK) button in the Music Finder display.

• Parameter Lock

You can “lock” speciﬁc parameters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.) to make them selectable only via the panel controls (page 133).

Calling up the panel settings to match the Style

(Repertoire)

The convenient Repertoire function automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings (voice number, etc.) for

the currently selected Style.

n The Repertoire function is valid for Styles in the “PRESET”/“USER” tab. The Repertoire function cannot be used for Styles

saved to a USB storage device. To use the Repertoire function, save the desired Style in “USER” tab.

The panel settings that match the Style under selection is searched according to the record group of the

Music Finder. The list of the search results is shown on the “SEARCH 2” display of the Music Finder.

CAUTION

When the result of searching the record in the “SEARCH 2” display has already been shown, the searched result is

lost.

4 Play the keyboard.

1 Select the desired Style for which you want to call up the panel settings from the

“PRESET”/“USER” tab on Style selection display.

2 Press the [7

ππ

] (REPERTOIRE) button.

3 Press the [2

ππ

††

]–[3

ππ

††

] buttons to select the desired panel settings.

Sorting the records

Press the [F] (SORT BY) button to sort the records.

• MUSIC .................. The record is sorted by song title.

• STYLE.................... The record is sorted by Style name.

• BEAT ..................... The record is sorted by beat.

• TEMPO ................. The record is sorted by tempo.

Changing the order of the records

Press the [G] (SORT ORDER) button to change the order of the records (ascending or descending).

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Singing Along with Song Playback (Karaoke) or

Your Own Performance

If the selected song has lyric data, you can have the lyrics shown in the display by playing back the song.

Sing the song while viewing the lyrics on the display.

Singing with the Lyrics Display

Try singing while playing back a Song containing lyric data

Sing while following along with the lyrics on the display. The color of the lyrics changes as the Song plays.

• When the lyrics are unreadable

You may need to change the Lyrics Language setting to “International” in the Song Setting display ([FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SET-

TING), if the lyrics shown are garbled or unreadable. This setting can be memorized as part of the Song data (page 162).

• Changing the lyrics

You can change the lyrics as desired (page 166).

1 Select a Song (page 36).

2 Press the [LYRICS] button to display the lyrics.

3 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback.

4 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop playback.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Convenient Functions for Karaoke

Transpose

You can use this to adjust the key of the Song if it is too high or low.

•Transposing the Song key up................ Press the TRANSPOSE [+] button.

•Transposing the Song key down........... Press the TRANSPOSE [–] button.

• Resetting the transposition ................... Press the TRANSPOSE [+][–] buttons simultaneously.

n Selecting an effect type

You can select the effect type in the Mixing Console (page 88).

Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your

Own Performance

Changing the Key (Transpose)

You can match both the Song and your keyboard performance to a certain key. For example, the Song data is in F, but

you feel most comfortable singing in D, and you are accustomed to playing the keyboard part in C. To match up the

keys, set the Master Transpose to “0,” the Keyboard Transpose to “2,” and the Song Transpose to “-3.” This brings the

keyboard part up and the song data down to your desired singing key.

[FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [

√

][

] KEYBOARD/PANEL → [B] TRANSPOSE ASSIGN

The following types are available. Select the one most suited to your purpose.

● KEYBOARD

Transpose pitch of the keyboard played Voices and Style playback (controlled by what you play in the chord

section of the keyboard).

● SONG

Transposes the pitch of Song playback.

● MASTER

Transpose the overall pitch of the instrument.

You can set the value in semitone steps.

To reset the transpose value, press the [+][–] buttons simultaneously.

Adjusting the tempo ➤ page 34

Transpose ➤ See below.

1 Call up the operation display.

2 Press the [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] button to select the desired transpose type.

3 Press the TRANSPOSE [–]/[+] button to transpose.

Quick Guide

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Setting an Oriental Scale

The Scale Setting feature lets you easily lower the pitches of speciﬁc notes by 50 cents to create your own oriental

scales. Up to six scale settings can be stored for instant recall (Scale Memory), whenever you need them.

n For details on scale tuning, see page 99.

While holding the [MEMORY] button, press one of the SCALE MEMORY buttons. You can recall the memo-

rized setting by pressing the appropriate button at any time.

•To maintain the memorized scale settings even after the power is turned off, make sure to save the settings as a ﬁle (page 101).

• In the SCALE TUNE display, you can select a desired scale template including oriental scales and create your own scales by ﬁne

tuning the scale notes (page 99).

4 Press the [EXIT] button to close the TRANSPOSE display.

Scale related buttons

1 The [SCALE SETTING] buttons simulate an one-octave keyboard (C through B). Press

the button corresponding to the key whose pitch you want to lower (the button

lights). Press again to return to normal pitch.

2 The scale settings you set are memorized by the Scale Memory function.

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Selecting Message Language

You can select the desired language of the display messages.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

] OWNER

2 Use [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] (LANGUAGE) buttons to select the language.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.

The Messages Shown in the Display

A message (information or conﬁrmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen

to facilitate operation. When the message appears, simply press the appropriate

button.

The language selected here is

also used for various “Mes-

sages” shown during operations.

In this example, press the [F] (YES) button

to start formatting the USB storage device

(USB ﬂash memory, ﬂoppy disk, etc.).

Basic Operation

Instant Selection of the Displays — Direct Access

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Instant Selection of the Displays

— Direct Access

With the convenient Direct Access function, you can instantly call up the desired

display — with just a single additional button press.

1 Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button.

A message appears in the display prompting you to press the appropriate

button.

2 Press the button corresponding to the desired setting display to

instantly call up that display.

Refer to the Data List for a list of the displays that can be called up with the

Direct Access function. The Data List is available at the Yamaha website.

(See page 5.)

Example of calling up the Guide function display

Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then press the [GUIDE] button.

Returning to the Main display

Here’s a convenient way to return to the Main display from any other dis-

play: Simply press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then the [EXIT] button.

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Basic Displays (Main Display and File

Selection Display)

There are two basic display types – Main and Selection. Here are explanations of

each display segment and its basic operation.

Main Display

The Main display shows the current basic settings of the instrument such as the cur-

rently selected Voice and Style, allowing you to see them at a single glance. The

Main display is the one you’ll usually see when you play the keyboard.

1 Song name and related information

Displays the currently selected Song name, time signature and tempo.

If the Song contains the chord data, the current chord name will be displayed in the

“CHORD” segment (see 4 below).

Pressing the [A] button calls up the Song Selection display (page 36).

2 BAR/BEAT/Tempo

Displays either the current position and tempo of the Song or the current bar and beat number of

Style playback.

3 Style name and related information

Displays the currently selected Style name, time signature and tempo. Pressing the [C]

button calls up the Style Selection display (page 46).

4 Current chord name

If the [ACMP] button is set to On, the chord speciﬁed in the chord section of the key-

board will be displayed.

5 Scale Tune Bank name

Displays the currently selected Scale Tune Memory.

6 Transpose

Displays the amount of transposition in semitone units (page 58).

7 Octave

The [UPPER OCTAVE] buttons allow the pitch of the keyboard to be shifted down or up

in octave steps. This shows the amount that the octave value is shifted.

8 Split Point

Split Points are speciﬁc positions (notes) on the keyboard that divide the keyboard into

separate sections. There are two kinds of Split Points: “S”, which separates the chord sec-

tion from the rest of the keyboard, and “L”, which divides the left-hand and right-hand

sections.

9 Registration Sequence

Appears when the Registration Sequence is active (page 134).

eturn

ng to t

Here’s a convenient way to

return to the Main display from

any other display: Simply press

the [DIRECT ACCESS] button,

then the [EXIT] button.

678

)

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

) Voice name

• RIGHT 1 (indicated at the right edge of the display):

Voice name currently selected for the RIGHT 1 part (page 78).

• RIGHT 2 (indicated at the right edge of the display):

Voice name currently selected for the RIGHT 2 part (page 78).

• LEFT (indicated at the right edge of the display):

Voice name currently selected for the LEFT part (page 78).

When the Left Hold function is ON, an “H” indication appears (page 50).

Pressing one of the [F], [G] and [H] buttons calls up the Voice Selection display for each

part (page 31).

! Multi Pad Bank name

Indicates the names of the selected Multi Pad Banks (page 128). Pressing the [I] button

calls up the Multi Pad Bank Selection display (page 129).

@ Registration Memory Bank name

Displays the currently selected Registration Memory Bank name.

Pressing the [J] button calls up the Registration Memory Bank Selection display (page 132).

When the Freeze function is ON, an “F” indication appears (page 134).

# Volume Balance

Displays the volume balance among the parts.

Adjust the volume balance among the parts by using the [1

π†

]–[8

π†

] buttons.

File Selection Display Conﬁguration and Basic Operation

The File Selection display appears when you press one of the buttons shown below. From here you can select

Voices, Styles, and other data.

VOICE category

selection buttons

SONG SELECT

button

MULTI PAD

SELECT button

STYLE category

selection buttons

REGIST. BANK

buttons

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

File Selection Display Conﬁguration

• Location (drive) of data

• Data ﬁles and folders

The data, both pre-programmed and your own original, are saved as “ﬁles.”

You can drop ﬁles into a folder.

Preset

Location where pre-programmed

(preset) data is stored.

User

Location where recorded or

edited data is saved.

USB

Location where data on USB storage device

(USB ﬂash memory, ﬂoppy disk, etc.) is saved.

Hereafter in this manual, any USB storage device such as USB ﬂash memory, ﬂoppy disk drive, etc. will

be referred to as “USB storage device.”

Folder

Icon

File

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

File Selection Display Basic Operation

1 Select the tab containing the desired ﬁle by using the TAB [

√

][

]

buttons.

2 Select the page containing the desired ﬁle by using the [1

ππ

]–[7

ππ

]

buttons.

3 Select the ﬁle. There are two ways to do so.

• Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons.

• Select the ﬁle by using the DATA ENTRY dial, then press the [ENTER] but-

ton to execute.

4 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.

Selecting a ﬁle saved to the

USB storage device.

You can also select a speciﬁed

ﬁle in the USB storage device by

pressing the [USB] button.

[USB] → [A] SONG/[B] STYLE/

[F] VOICE/[G] MULTI PAD →

[A]–[J]

The number of pages shown var-

ies depending on the selection

display of the Voices/Songs/

Styles. Press the corresponding

button to “P1, P2 ...” in the dis-

play.

When other pages follow, the

“NEXT” button appears, and for

the previous page, the “PREV”

button appears.

This display shows the

Voice ﬁles in a folder.

The next highest level — in this case,

folder — is shown. Each folder shown

in this display contains appropriately

categorized Voices.

Closing the current folder and calling up the next highest

level folder

To close the current folder and call up the next highest level folder,

press the [8

] (UP) button.

Example of the PRESET Voice Selection display

The PRESET Voice ﬁles are categorized and contained in appropriate

folders.

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

File/Folder Operations in the File Selection

Display

•Saving Files .............................................................................................page 67

• Copying Files/Folders (Copy & Paste).......................................................page 68

•Moving Files (Cut & Paste).......................................................................page 69

• Deleting Files/Folders .............................................................................. page 69

• Renaming Files/Folders............................................................................ page 70

• Selecting Custom Icons for Files (shown at the left of ﬁle name) .............. page 70

• Creating a New Folder ............................................................................page 71

• Entering characters.................................................................................. page 71

The indications USB 1, USB 2,

etc. will be displayed depending

on the number of the connected

devices.

Formatting USB storage media

When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a message

may appear prompting you to format the device/media. If so, execute the

format operation.

CAUTION

The format operation deletes any previously existing data. Make sure that the media you

are formatting does not contain important data. Proceed with caution, especially when

connecting multiple USB storage medias.

1 Insert a USB storage device for formatting into the [USB TO DEVICE].

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

] MEDIA

3 Press the [A]/[B] buttons to select the USB device to be formatted

from the device list.

4 Press the [H] button to format the device/media.

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Saving Files

This operation lets you save your original data (such as Songs and Voices you’ve

created) to a ﬁle.

1 After you’ve created a Song or Voice in the relevant SONG CREATOR

or VOICE SET display, press the [SAVE] display button.

The File Selection display for the corresponding data appears. Keep in mind

that the Save operation is executed from the File Selection display.

2 Select the appropriate tab (USER, USB, etc.) to which you want to

save the data by using the TAB [

√

][

] buttons.

3 Press the [6

††

] (SAVE) button to call up the ﬁle naming display.

4 Enter the ﬁle name (page 71).

5 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to save the ﬁle.

If you want to cancel the Save operation, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

The saved ﬁle will be automatically located at the appropriate position

among the ﬁles in alphabetical order.

Internal memory (User tab

displays) capacity

The internal memory capacity of

the instrument is about 560KB.

This capacity applies to all ﬁle

types, including Voice, Style,

Song, and Registration data ﬁles.

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Copying Files/Folders (Copy & Paste)

This operation lets you copy a ﬁle/folder and paste it to another location (folder).

1 Call up the display containing the ﬁle/folder you want to copy.

2 Press the [3

††

] (COPY) button to copy the ﬁle/folder.

The pop-up window for the Copy operation appears at the bottom of the dis-

play.

3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired ﬁle/

folder.

To cancel the selection, press the same [A]–[J] button again.

■ Selecting all ﬁles/folders

Press the [6

†

] (ALL) button to select all ﬁles/folders indicated on the cur-

rent display including the other pages.

To cancel the selection, press the [6

†

] (ALL OFF) button again.

4 Press the [7

†

] (OK) button to conﬁrm the ﬁle/folder selection.

To cancel the Copy operation, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

5 Select the destination tab (USER, USB) to paste the ﬁle/folder, by

using the TAB [

√

][

] buttons.

6 Press the [4

††

] (PASTE) button to paste the ﬁle/folder.

The folder/ﬁle copied and pasted appears on the display at the appropriate

position among the ﬁles in alphabetical order.

Restrictions for protected Songs

Commercially available song data may be copy protected to prevent illegal

copying or accidental erasure. They are marked by the indications at the

upper left side of the ﬁle names. The indications and relevant restrictions

are detailed below.

Note for “Prot. 2 Orig” and “Prot. 2 Edit” Song ﬁle operation

Make sure to save the “Prot. 2 Edit” Song to the same folder containing its

original “Prot. 2 Orig” Song. Otherwise the “Prot. 2 Edit” Song cannot be

played back. Also, if you move a “Prot. 2 Edit” Song, be sure to move its

original “Prot. 2 Orig” Song to the same location (folder) at the same time.

Prot. 1 Indicates Preset Songs saved to the User tab display, Disk Orchestra

Collection (DOC) Songs, and Disklavier Piano Soft Songs. These

cannot be copied/moved/saved to USB storage device.

Prot. 2 Orig Indicates Yamaha-protection-formatted Songs. These cannot be

copied. These can be moved/saved only to the USER tab display

and USB storage device.

Prot. 2 Edit Indicates edited “Prot. 2 Orig” Songs. Make sure to save these to

the same folder containing the corresponding “Prot. 2 Orig” Song.

These cannot be copied. These can be moved/saved only to the

USER tab display and USB storage device.

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Moving Files (Cut & Paste)

This operation lets you cut a ﬁle and paste it to another location (folder).

1 Call up the display containing the ﬁle you want to move.

2 Press the [2

††

] (CUT) button to cut the ﬁle.

The pop-up window for the Cut operation appears at the bottom of the display.

3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired ﬁle.

To cancel the selection, press the same [A]–[J] button again.

■ Selecting all ﬁles

Press the [6

†

] (ALL) button to select all ﬁles indicated on the current dis-

play including the other pages.

To cancel the selection, press the [6

†

] (ALL OFF) button again.

4 Press the [7

††

] (OK) button to conﬁrm the ﬁle selection.

To cancel the Cut operation, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

5 Select the destination tab (USER, USB) to which the ﬁle is to be

pasted, by using the TAB [

√

][

] buttons.

6 Press the [4

††

] (PASTE) button to paste the ﬁle.

The ﬁle moved and pasted appears on the display at the appropriate position

among the ﬁles in alphabetical order.

Deleting Files/Folders

This operation lets you delete a ﬁle/folder.

1 Call up the display containing the ﬁle/folder you want to delete.

2 Press the [5

††

] (DELETE) button.

The pop-up window for the Delete operation appears at the bottom of the

display.

3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired ﬁle/

folder.

To cancel the selection, press the same [A]–[J] button again.

■ Selecting all ﬁles/folders

Press the [6

†

] (ALL) button to select all ﬁles/folders indicated on the cur-

rent display including the other pages.

To cancel the selection, press the [6

†

] (ALL OFF) button again.

4 Press the [7

†

] (OK) button to conﬁrm the ﬁle/folder selection.

To cancel the Delete operation, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

5 Follow the on-display instructions.

YES ........................Delete the ﬁle/folder

YES ALL .................Delete all selected ﬁles/folders

NO ........................Leave the ﬁle/folder as is without deleting

CANCEL ................Cancel the Delete operation

Deleting all data in a USB

storage device at once

Formatting a USB storage device

completely erases all data on the

USB storage device (page 66).

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Renaming Files/Folders

This operation lets you rename ﬁles/folders.

1 Call up the display containing the ﬁle/folder you want to rename.

2 Press the [1

††

] (NAME) button.

The pop-up window for the Rename operation appears at the bottom of the

display.

3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired ﬁle/

folder.

4 Press the [7

††

] (OK) button to conﬁrm the ﬁle/folder selection.

To cancel the Rename operation, press the [8

††

] (CANCEL) button.

5 Input the name (characters) of the selected ﬁle or folder (page 71).

The renamed folder/ﬁle appears on the display at the appropriate position

among the ﬁles in alphabetical order.

6 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to actually enter the new name.

Selecting Custom Icons for Files (Shown at the

Left of File Name)

You can select custom icons for ﬁles (shown at the left of ﬁle name).

1–4 Operations are the same as the above “Renaming Files/Folders”

section.

5 Press the [1

††

] (ICON) button to call up the ICON display.

6 Select the icon by using the [A]–[J] buttons or [3

ππ

††

]–[5

ππ

††

] but-

tons.

The ICON display includes several pages. Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to

select different pages.

To cancel the operation, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

7 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to apply the selected icon.

8 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to actually enter the new name.

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Creating a New Folder

This operation lets you create new folders. Folders can be created, named and

organized as desired, making it easier to ﬁnd and select your original data.

1 Call up the page of the File Selection display for which you wish to

create a new folder.

2 Press the [7

††

] (FOLDER) button to call up the naming display for a

new folder.

3 Input the name of the new folder (see below).

Entering Characters

The instructions that follow show you how to enter characters in naming your ﬁles/

folders and when inputting the Keyword for Music Finder function/website. The

method is much the same as inputting names and numbers to a conventional

mobile phone. Entering characters should be done in the display shown below.

1 Change the type of character by pressing the [1

ππ

] button.

• The following different types of characters are available:

CASE......................Alphabet (capital letters, half size), numbers (half

size), marks (half size)

case .......................Alphabet (lowercase letters, half size), numbers (half

size), marks (half size)

2 Use the DATA ENTRY dial to move the cursor to the desired position.

3 Press the [2

ππ

††

]–[6

ππ

††

] and [7

ππ

] buttons, corresponding to the

character you wish to enter.

Entering letters, numerals and symbols can be done by moving the cursor or

pressing one of the character entry buttons. Alternately, you can wait for a

short time and the characters will be entered automatically.

For details on entering characters, refer to the following section, step 4.

A new folder cannot be made in

the PRESET tab.

Folder directories for the

USER tab display

In the USER tab display, folder

directories can contain up to

four levels. The maximum total

number of ﬁles and folders

which can be stored is 363, but

this may differ depending on the

length of the ﬁle names. The

maximum number of ﬁles/folders

which can be stored in a folder

in the USER tab is 250.

Depending on the display for

character entry you are working

in, some types of characters can-

not be entered.

The following half-size marks

cannot be entered for a ﬁle/

folder name.

\ / : * ? " < > |

Several different characters are assigned to each button, and

the characters change each time you press the button.

Basic Operation

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

4 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to actually enter the new name and

return to the previous display.

• Deleting characters

Move the cursor to the character you wish to delete by using the DATA

ENTRY dial, and press the [7

†

] (DELETE) button. To delete all charac-

ters on the line at once, press and hold the [7

†

] (DELETE) button.

• Entering marks

1 After actually entering a character by moving the cursor, press the

†

] button to call up the mark list.

2 Use the DATA ENTRY dial to move the cursor to the desired mark,

then press the [8

] (OK) button.

• Entering numbers

First, select one of the following: “ABC” “CASE” (half-size capital alpha-

bet) and “case” (half-size lowercase alphabet). Then, press and hold

down the appropriate button, [2

π†

]–[5

π†

], [6

] and [7

] but-

ton, for a while, or press it repeatedly until the desired number is

selected.

• Inserting a Character

1 Move the cursor to the desired position.

Use the same operation as in “Deleting Characters” above.

2 Press the [2

π†

]–[6

π†

], or [7

] buttons to enter numbers and

symbols.

3 Press the [8

] (OK) button to enter characters.

• Entering a Space

1 Move the cursor to the desired position.

Use the same operation as in “Deleting Characters” above.

2 Press [6

†

] button to call up the mark list.

3 Make sure the cursor is at the beginning space (blank) of the mark list,

and press the [8

] (OK) button.

Restoring the Factory-programmed

Settings

Restoring the Factory-programmed System

While holding the C6 key (right-most key on the keyboard), turn the [POWER] but-

ton ON.

This operation has the same result as and is a shortcut for the System Setup restore

operation explained in step 2 of the following section.

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings

Independently by Item

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

] SYSTEM RESET

CAUTION

This operation deletes all your

original data for the respec-

tive item (MIDI SETUP, USER

EFFECT, MUSIC FINDER, and

FILES&FOLDERS).

Basic Operation

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

2 Select items by pressing the [1

ππ

††

]–[3

ππ

††

] buttons.

3 Checkmark the box of the item to be reset to the factory pro-

grammed settings by pressing the [4

ππ

] button.

4 Press the [D] button to execute the Factory Reset operation for all

checkmarked items.

SYSTEM SETUP

Restores the System Setup parameters to the original factory settings. Refer to

the Data List for details about which parameters belong to the System Setup.

The Data List is available at the Yamaha website. (See page 5.)

MIDI SETUP Restores the MIDI settings including the MIDI templates on the User tab dis-

play to the original factory status.

USER EFFECT Restores the User Effect settings including the user effect types and user

master EQ types created via the Mixing Console display to the original fac-

tory settings.

MUSIC FINDER Restores the Music Finder data (all records) to the original factory settings.

FILES&FOLDERS Deletes all ﬁles and folders stored in the User tab display.

REGIST Temporarily deletes the current Registration Memory settings of the selected

Bank. The same can be done also by turning the [POWER] button ON while

holding the B5 key (right-most B key on the keyboard).

Basic Operation

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Saving and Recalling Your Original Settings as

a Single File

For the items below, you can save your Original Settings as a Single File for future recall.

1 Make all desired settings on the instrument.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

] SYSTEM RESET

3 Press one of the [F]–[I] buttons to call up the relevant display for sav-

ing your data.

4 Select one of the tabs (other than the PRESET) by pressing the TAB

[

√

][

] buttons.

Note that the ﬁle in the PRESET tab display is the ﬁle of factory-programmed

settings. If you select it, the factory-programmed settings for the respective

item will be restored. (This is the same results as on page 72 “Restoring the

Factory-programmed Settings Independently by Item.”)

5 Save your ﬁle (page 67).

6 To recall your ﬁle, select the tab and page to which you’ve saved the

ﬁle (same tab and page as speciﬁed in step 4), and press the corre-

sponding [A]–[J] button.

SYSTEM SETUP Parameters set on the various displays such as the [FUNCTION] → UTILITY

are handled as a single System Setup ﬁle. Refer to the Data List for details

on which parameters belong to the System Setup. The Data List is available

at the Yamaha website. (See

page 5

MIDI SETUP The MIDI settings including the MIDI templates on the User tab display are

handled as a single ﬁle.

USER EFFECT The User Effect settings including the user effect types and user master EQ

types created via the Mixing Console displays are managed as a single ﬁle.

MUSIC FINDER

All the preset and created records of the Music Finder are handled as a single ﬁle.

Basic Operation

Data Backup

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Data Backup

For maximum data security Yamaha recommends

that you copy or save your important data to a USB

storage device. This provides a convenient backup if

the internal memory is damaged.

The backup procedure is different for the data types

in 1, 2, and 3 above.

Backup procedure

1 Insert/connect the backup USB storage

device (destination).

2 Call up the display containing the desired

ﬁle to be copied.

Song:

Press the SONG [SELECT] button.

Style:

Press one of the STYLE buttons.

Multi Pad:

Press the MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT] button.

Registration Memory Bank:

Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [–] buttons

simultaneously.

Scale Memory Bank:

Call up the Main display and press the [E] but-

ton.

Voice:

Press one of the VOICE buttons.

3 Select the USER tab by using the TAB

[

√

][

] buttons.

4 Press the [3

††

] (COPY) button to copy the

ﬁle/folder.

The pop-up window for the Copy operation

appears at the bottom of the display.

5 Press the [6

††

] (ALL) button to select all

ﬁles/folders indicated on the current dis-

play and all other pages.

To cancel the selection, press the [6

†

] (ALL

OFF) button again.

6 Press the [7

††

] (OK) button to conﬁrm the

ﬁle/folder selection.

To cancel the Copy operation, press the [8

†

]

(CANCEL) button.

7 Select the destination USB tab to which

the ﬁle/folder is to be copied, by using the

TAB [

√

][

] buttons.

8 Press the [4

††

] (PASTE) button to paste

the ﬁle/folder.

1 Insert/connect the backup USB storage

device (destination).

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

]

SYSTEM RESET

3 Press one of the [F]–[I] buttons to call up

the relevant display for saving your data.

4 Select the appropriate USB tab to which

you want to save the data by using the

TAB [

√

][

] buttons.

5 Save your data (page 67).

Data that can be saved

1 Song*, Style, Multi Pad, Registration Memory

Bank, Scale Memory Bank and Voice.

2 Music Finder Record, Effect**, MIDI Template

and System File

* Protected Songs (those with a “Prot.1/Prot.2” indi-

cation at the upper left of the ﬁle name) cannot be

saved.

However, Songs with a “Prot.2” indication can be

moved (cut-and-paste operation) to a USB ﬂash

memory.

**Effect data includes the following:

- Edited or saved data in the Mixing Console

“EFFECT/EQ.”

3 All data listed in 1 and 2 above

1 Song, Style, Multi Pad, Registration

Memory Bank, Scale Memory Bank and

Voice Data

2 Music Finder Record, Effect, MIDI Tem-

plate and System Data

If a message appears indicating data

cannot be copied

Protected Songs (“Prot. 1/Prot.2” is indicated

at the upper left side of the ﬁle names) are

included in the copied ﬁles. These protected

Songs cannot be copied. However, Songs

with a “Prot.2” indication can be moved (cut-

and-paste operation) to a USB ﬂash memory.

Basic Operation

Data Backup

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

1 Insert/connect the backup USB storage

device (destination).

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

]

OWNER

3 Press the [D] (BACKUP) button to save

the data to the USB storage device.

To restore the data, press the [E] (RESTORE)

button in step 3 above.

• It takes a few minutes to complete the backup/restore

operation.

• Backup data which has not been created on the PSR-

OR700 cannot be restored.

CAUTION

Move the Protected Songs which are saved to the USER dis-

play before restoring. If the songs are not moved, the oper-

ation deletes the data.

3 All data listed in 1 and 2

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Reference

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Voice Characteristics

The Voice type and its deﬁning characteristics are indicated above the Preset Voice

name.

Reference to Quick Guide pages

Playing Voices ................................................................................page 30

Playing Preset Voices ............................................................... page 30

Using the Pitch Bend Wheel.................................................... page 33

Using the Modulation Wheel ................................................. page 34

Using the Metronome ............................................................ page 34

Voice Effects .................................................................................. page 53

MegaVoices Compatibility

MegaVoices are not compatible

with other models. Any song/style

data you’ve created on the PSR-

OR700 using the MegaVoices

will not sound properly when

played back on other instruments.

MegaVoice The MegaVoices are not intended to be played from the keyboard. They

are primarily designed for use with recorded MIDI sequence data (such

as songs and styles). Some of the guitar and bass Voices in particular

have been created as MegaVoices.

What makes MegaVoices special is their use of velocity switching. Nor-

mal Voices use velocity switching, too — to make the sound quality

and/or level of a Voice according to how strongly or softly you play it.

This makes the instrument’s Voices sound authentic and natural. How-

ever, with MegaVoices, each velocity range (the measure of your play-

ing strength) has a completely different sound.

For example, a Mega guitar Voice includes the sounds of various perfor-

mance techniques. In conventional instruments, different Voices having

those sounds would be called up via MIDI and played in combination

to achieve the desired effect. However, now with MegaVoices, a con-

vincing guitar part can be played with just a single Voice, using speciﬁc

velocity values to play the desired sounds.

Because of the complex nature of these Voices and the precise veloci-

ties need to play the sounds, they’re not intended for playing from the

keyboard. They are, however, very useful and convenient when creating

MIDI data — especially when you want to avoid using several different

Voices just for a single instrument part.

Live! These acoustic instrument sounds were sampled in stereo, to produce a

truly authentic, rich sound — full of atmosphere and ambience.

Cool! These Voices capture the dynamic textures and subtle nuances of elec-

tric instruments — thanks to a huge amount of memory and some very

sophisticated programming.

Sweet! These acoustic instrument sounds also beneﬁt from Yamaha’s sophisti-

cated technology — and feature a sound so ﬁnely detailed and natural,

you’ll swear you’re playing the real thing!

Drums Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys,

letting you play the sounds from the keyboard.

SFX Various special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you

play the sounds from the keyboard.

Organ Flutes! This authentic organ Voice lets you use the Voice Set to adjust the vari-

ous footages and craft your own original organ sounds. See page 96 for

details.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Playing Different Voices Simultaneously

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Playing Different Voices Simultaneously

The PSR-OR700 keyboard features various functions and performance conve-

niences that are simply unavailable on an acoustic instrument. It allows you to play

several different Voices together in a layer, or play one Voice with your left hand

while you play a different Voice (or even two layered Voices!) with your right.

Keyboard Parts (Right 1, Right 2, Left)

Voices can be assigned independently to each keyboard part: Right 1, Right 2, and

Left. You can combine these parts by using the PART ON/OFF buttons to create a

rich, ensemble sound.

Keyboard Part Combinations

■ Playing a single Voice (Right 1 part)

You can play a single Voice over the entire keyboard range. This is used for nor-

mal performance — for example, with the piano Voice.

■ Playing two Voices simultaneously (Right 1 and 2 parts)

You can simulate a melody duet or combine two similar Voices to create a thicker sound.

Refer to page 79 for Voice selection operations for the Right 2 part.

■

Playing different Voices with the left and right Hands (Right 1 and Left parts)

You can play different Voices with the left and right hands. For example, try play-

ing the bass Voice with your left hand and the piano Voice with your right.

Refer to page 80 for Voice selection operations for the Left part.

■ Playing three different Voices with the left and right Hands (Right 1, 2

and Left parts)

You can combine these three parts to create a rich, ensemble sound.

Adjusting the volume balance

among parts

Adjust the volume balance

among the parts in the BALANCE

display (page 41).

Specifying the split point (the

border between the right-

and left-hand range)

See page 107.

Right 1 part

Right 2 part

Right 1 part

Left part

Right 1 part

Left part

Right 1 part

Right 2 part

Playing Different Voices Simultaneously

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously (Right 1

and 2 Parts)

You can play two Voices simultaneously with the Right 1 and 2 parts.

1 Make sure the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 1] button is turned on.

2 Press the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 2] button to turn it on.

3 Press one of the VOICE buttons to call up the Voice selection display

for the Right 2 part.

4 Press the TAB [

√

] button to select the PRESET display.

5 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Voice.

6 Play the keyboard.

7 Press the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 2] button again to turn it off.

For the selected part, the name

of the currently selected Voice is

highlighted (reverse display) in

the Main display.

Quickly selecting Voices for

Right 1 and 2 parts

You can quickly select the Right

1 and 2 part Voices, just from the

Voice buttons. Press and hold

one Voice button, then press

another. The Voice of the ﬁrst

pressed button is automatically

set for the Right 1 part, while the

Voice of the second pressed but-

ton is set for the Right 2 part.

Switching the Right 2 part

on/off with a pedal

You can use a pedal to switch the

Right 2 part on/off (when the

Right 2 part is appropriately

assigned; page 168). This is use-

ful for turning the Right 2 part on

and off while you play.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Playing Different Voices Simultaneously

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Playing Different Voices with the Left and

Right Hands (Right 1 and Left Parts)

You can play different Voices with the Left and Right Hands (Right 1 and Left parts).

1 Make sure the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 1] button is turned on.

2 Press the PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button to turn it on.

3 Press one of the VOICE buttons to call up the Voice selection display

for the Left part.

4 Press the TAB [

√

] button to select the PRESET display.

5 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Voice.

6 Play the keyboard.

7 Press the PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button again to turn it off.

For the selected part, the name

of the currently selected Voice is

highlighted (reverse display) in

the Main display.

Switching the Left part on/off

with a pedal

You can use a pedal to switch the

Left part on/off (when the Left

part is appropriately assigned;

page 168). This is useful for turn-

ing the Left part on and off while

you play.

Specifying the split point (the

border between the right-

and left-hand range)

See page 107.

Changing Pitch

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Changing Pitch

Transpose

Transpose the pitch of the keyboard up or down (in semitones).

•Transposing during performance

You can easily set the desired transposition of the overall sound of the instru-

ment by pressing the TRANSPOSE [–]/[+] buttons.

•Transposing before performance

Change the transpose settings in the MIXING CONSOLE display. You can set the

transposition for the keyboard pitch (KBD), song playback (SONG), or overall

sound of the instrument (MASTER), respectively.

1 Call up the operation display.

[MIXING CONSOLE] → TAB [

√

][

] TUNE

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[3

ππ

††

] buttons to set the transposition.

Fine-tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument

You can ﬁne-tune the pitch of the entire instrument — useful when you play the

PSR-OR700 along with other instruments or CD music.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [A] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE → TAB [

√

][

] MASTER

TUNE

2 Use the [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] buttons to set the tuning.

Press the 4 or 5’s [

] and [

†

] buttons simultaneously to reset the value to

the factory setting of 440.0 Hz.

Please note that the Tune func-

tion does not affect the Drum Kit

or SFX Kit Voices.

Hz (Hertz):

This unit of measurement refers

to the frequency of a sound and

represents the number of times a

sound wave vibrates in a second.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Selecting the Harmony/Echo type

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Selecting the Harmony/Echo type

You can select the desired Harmony/Echo effect from a variety of types.

1 Turn the [Harmony/Echo] button on.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [H] HARMONY/ECHO

3 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[3

ππ

††

] buttons to select the Harmony/Echo type.

4 Use the [4

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to select various Harmony/Echo set-

tings (page 83).

The available settings differ depending on the Harmony/Echo type.

Harmony/Echo Types

The Harmony/Echo types are divided into the following groups, depending on the

particular effect applied.

● Harmony Types

When one of the Harmony Types is selected, the Harmony effect is applied to

notes played in the right-hand section of the keyboard according to the type

Echo Types

These types apply echo

effects to notes played in

the right-hand section of

the keyboard in time with

the currently set tempo.

Harmony Types

These types apply the harmony

effect to notes played in the

right-hand section of the key-

board according to the chord

speciﬁed in the left-hand sec-

tion of the keyboard. (Note that

the “1+5” and “Octave” settings

are not affected by the chord.)

Multi Assign Type

This type applies a special effect

to chords played in the right-

hand section of the keyboard.

Canceling the chord sound

for the harmony effect

This cancels the sound of the

chord played in the chord range

of the keyboard — letting you

hear only the Harmony effect.

Set [ACMP] to On, set [SYNC

START] to Off, and select “Off”

for the Stop Accompaniment

parameter.

Selecting the Harmony/Echo type

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

selected above and the chord speciﬁed in the chord section of the keyboard

shown below.

● Multi Assign Type

Multi Assign effect automatically assigns notes played simultaneously in the right-hand

section of the keyboard to separate parts (Voices). Both of the keyboard part [RIGHT

1] and [RIGHT 2] should be turned on when using the Multi Assign effect. The Right 1

and Right 2 Voices are alternately assigned to the notes in the order you play.

● Echo Types

When one of the Echo Types is selected, the corresponding effect (echo, tremolo,

trill) is applied to the note played in the right-hand section of the keyboard in time

with the currently set tempo, regardless of the [ACMP] and the LEFT part on/off sta-

tus. Keep in mind that Trill works when you hold down two notes on the keyboard

simultaneously (last two notes if more than two notes are held), and it plays those

notes alternately.

Harmony/Echo Settings

VOLUME This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi

Assign.” It determines the level of the harmony/echo notes generated by

the Harmony/Echo effect.

SPEED This parameter is only available when Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected

in Type above. It determines the speed of the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill

effects.

ASSIGN This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi

Assign.” This lets you determine the keyboard part via which the har-

mony/echo notes will be sounded.

CHORD NOTE

ONLY

This parameter is available when one of the Harmony Types is selected.

When this is set to “ON,” the Harmony effect is applied only to the note

(played in the right-hand section of the keyboard) that belongs to a

chord played in the chord section of the keyboard.

TOUCH LIMIT This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi

Assign.” It determines the lowest velocity value at which the harmony

note will sound. This allows you to selectively apply the harmony by

your playing strength, letting you create harmony accents in the mel-

ody. The harmony effect is applied when you play the key strongly

(above the set value).

Split point

Chord section for Style playback and

Harmony effect

Left Voice and

chord section for

Harmony effect

Split Point

(for Style)

Split Point

(for keyboard Voice)

Right 1

Right 2

Voices

Chord section

for Style

playback and

Harmony effect

Left Voice Right 1

Right 2

Voices

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance

(MIXING CONSOLE)

The Mixing Console gives you intuitive control over aspects of the keyboard parts

and Song/Style channels, including volume balance and the timbre of the sounds.

It lets you adjust the levels and stereo position (pan) of each Voice to set the opti-

mum balance and stereo image, and lets you set how the effects are applied.

Basic Procedure

1 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button to call up the MIXING CON-

SOLE display.

2 Use the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to call up the relevant setting display.

For information on the available parameters, see the section “Adjustable

items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE displays” on page 85.

3 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button repeatedly to call up the MIX-

ING CONSOLE display for the relevant parts.

The MIXING CONSOLE displays actually consist of several different

part displays. The part name is indicated at the top of the display. The

various MIXING CONSOLE displays alternate among the following:

PANEL PART display → STYLE PART display → SONG CH 1-8 display →

SONG CH 9-16 display

4 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired parameter.

5 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to set the value.

1, 3

out

arts

See below.

Instantly setting all parts to

the same value

Once you’ve selected a parame-

ter in step 4, you can instantly

set the same value to all other

parts. To do this, simultaneously

hold down one of the [A]–[J] but

tons, and use the [1]–[8] buttons

or the DATA ENTRY dial.

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

6 Save your MIXING CONSOLE settings.

• Saving the PANEL PART display settings

• Saving the STYLE PART display settings

Save them as Style data.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU

2 Press the [B] button to call up the STYLE CREATOR display.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to close the RECORD display.

4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display for sav-

ing your data, then save it (page 67).

• Saving the SONG CH 1-8/9-16 display settings

First register the edited settings as part of the Song data (SET UP), then save

the Song.

See the SONG CREATOR → CHANNEL display → SETUP item explana-

tion on page 162.

Adjustable Items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE Dis-

plays

The following explanations cover the available items (parameters) in the MIXING

CONSOLE displays.

VOL/VOICE

About Parts

PANEL PART

In the PANEL PART display of the MIXING CONSOLE, you can indepen-

dently adjust the level balance among the Keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, RIGHT

2 and LEFT), SONG, STYLE, and MULTI PAD. The part components are the

same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel [BAL-

ANCE] button.

STYLE PART

A Style consists of eight separate channels. Here you can adjust the level

balance among these eight channels or parts. These part components are the

same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel [CHAN-

NEL ON/OFF] button to call up the STYLE display.

SONG CH 1-8/9-16

A Song consists of sixteen separate channels. Here you can adjust the level

balance among these sixteen channels or parts. These part components are

the same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel

[CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the SONG display.

•The RHY2 channel in the

STYLE PART display can only

be assigned to Drumkit Voices

and SFX kit Voices.

• When playing GM song data,

channel 10 (in the SONG CH

9-16) can only be used for a

Drum Kit Voice.

SONG AUTO REVOICE See page 87.

VOICE Allows you to re-select the Voices for each part. When the Style

channels are called up, neither Organ Flutes Voices nor User

Voices can be selected. When the Song channels are called up,

User Voices cannot be selected.

PANPOT Determines the stereo position of the selected part (channel).

VOLUME Determines the level of each part or channel, giving you ﬁne

control over the balance of all the parts.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

FILTER

TUNE

EFFECT

EQ (Equalizer)

HARMONIC CONTENT Allows you to adjust the resonance effect (page 94) for each part.

BRIGHTNESS Determines the brightness of the sound for each part by adjusting

the cutoff frequency (page 94).

PORTAMENTO TIME Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch

from the ﬁrst note played on the keyboard to the next. The

Portamento Time determines the pitch transition time. Higher

values result in a longer pitch change time. Setting this to “0”

results in no effect. This parameter is available when the selected

keyboard part is set to Mono (page 93).

PITCH BEND RANGE Determines the range of the PITCH BEND in semitones for each

keyboard part (when a pedal is assigned to this function).

OCTAVE Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves for each

keyboard part.

TUNING Determines the pitch of each keyboard part.

TRANSPOSE Allows you to set the transposition for the keyboard pitch (KEY-

BOARD), Song playback (SONG), or overall sound of the instru-

ment (MASTER), respectively.

TYPE Select the desired effect type (page 88). After editing various

parameters for the selected effect type, you can save it as an orig-

inal effect.

REVERB Adjusts the amount of the Reverb sound for each part or chan-

nel.

CHORUS Adjusts the amount of the Chorus sound for each part or chan-

nel.

DSP Adjusts the amount of the DSP sound for each part or channel.

TYPE Select the desired EQ type to suit the type of music and the per-

formance environment (page 90). This affects the overall sound

of the instrument.

EDIT For editing the EQ (page 91).

EQ HIGH Determines the center frequency of the high EQ band that is

attenuated/boosted for each part.

EQ LOW Determines the center frequency of the low EQ band that is

attenuated/boosted for each part.

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Song Auto Revoice

This feature lets you use the high-quality sounds of the instrument to full advantage

with XG-compatible song data. When you play back any commercially available

XG song data or that created on other instruments, you can use Auto Revoice to

automatically assign the specially created Voices of the PSR-OR700 (Live!, Cool!,

etc.) instead of the conventional XG Voices of the same type.

1–3 Same operation as in the “Basic Procedure” on page 84. In step 2,

select the VOL/VOICE tab.

4 Press the [G] (SETUP) button to call up the AUTO REVOICE SETUP dis-

play.

5 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[3

ππ

††

] buttons to select the Voice to be replaced.

6 Use the [4

ππ

††

]–[6

ππ

††

] buttons to select the Voice for replacing the

XG selected in step 5.

Several different Revoice settings are available by using the [F]/[I]/[J] but-

tons, for conveniently calling up the recommended Revoice settings in one

action.

ALL REVOICE: Replaces all of the replaceable XG Voices with the

high-quality Voices of the PSR-OR700.

BASIC REVOICE: Replaces only the recommended Voices that are suit-

able for playing back the song.

ALL NO REVOICE: All Voices are returned to the original XG Voices.

7 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to apply your Revoice settings.

To cancel the Revoice operation, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

8 In the VOL/VOICE tab display, press the [F] button to set SONG AUTO

REVOICE to ON.

56 7

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Effect Type

■ Selecting an Effect type

1–3 Same operation as in the “Basic Procedure” on page 84. In step 2,

select the EFFECT tab.

4 Press the [F] (TYPE) button to call up the Effect Type selection display.

5 Use the [1

ππ

††

]/[2

ππ

††

] buttons to select the effect BLOCK.

6 Use the [3

ππ

††

]/[4

ππ

††

] buttons to select the part to which you want

to apply the effect.

7 Use the [5

ππ

††

]/[6

ππ

††

] buttons to select the effect CATEGORY.

DSP:

Stands for Digital Signal Proces-

sor (or Processing). DSP changes

and enhances the audio signal in

the digital realm to produce a

wide range of effects.

Effect Block Effect-applicable parts Effect characteristics

REVERB All parts Reproduces the warm ambience of playing

in a concert hall or jazz club.

CHORUS All parts Produces a rich “fat” sound as if several

parts are being played simultaneously.

DSP1 STYLE PART

SONG CHANNNEL 1–16

In addition to the Reverb and Chorus types,

the instrument has special DSP effects, that

include additional effects usually used for a

speciﬁc part, such as distortion and tremolo.

DSP2

DSP3

DSP4

RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT,

SONG CHANNEL 1-16

Any unused DSP blocks are automatically

assigned to the appropriate parts (channels)

as needed.

5678

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

8 Use the [7

ππ

††

]/[8

ππ

††

] buttons to select the effect TYPE.

If you want to edit the effect parameters, go on to the next operation.

■ Editing and Saving the effect

9 Press the [F] (PARAMETER) button to call up the display for editing

the effect parameters.

10 If you have selected one of the DSP 2-4 effect blocks in step 5:

You can edit its standard parameters as well as its variation parameter.

To select the standard type of parameters, press the [B] button. To select its

variation parameter, press the [E] button.

11 Select one of the parameters you want to edit by using the [4

ππ

††

ππ

††

] buttons.

Available parameters differ depending on the selected Effect type.

12 Adjust the value for the selected parameter by using the [6

ππ

††

ππ

††

] buttons.

If you have selected the REVERB, CHORUS or DSP1 effect block in step 5:

Adjust the Effect Return Level by pressing [8

π†

] button.

13 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the display for saving your origi-

nal effect.

Re-selecting the Effect block,

category and type

Use the [1

π†

]–[3

π†

] but-

tons. The re-selected effect con-

ﬁguration is displayed at the

upper left side box in the display.

11 12

Effect Return Level:

Determines the level or amount

of effect applied.

This is set for all parts or channels.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

14 Use the [3

ππ

††

]–[6

ππ

††

] buttons to select the destination for saving

the effect.

The maximum number for effects that can be saved differs depending on the

effect block.

15 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save the effect (page 67).

When recalling the saved effect, use the same procedure as in step 8.

EQ (Equalizer)

Equalizer (also called “EQ”) is a sound processor that divides the frequency spec-

trum into multiple bands that can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall

frequency response. Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound from speak-

ers to match the special character of the room. For example, you can cut some of

the low range frequencies when playing in large spaces where the sound is too

“boomy,” or boost the high frequencies in rooms and close spaces where the sound

is relatively “dead” and free of echoes. The instrument possesses a high-grade ﬁve-

band digital EQ. With this function, a ﬁnal effect — tone control can be added to

the output of your instrument. You can select one of the ﬁve preset EQ settings in

the EQ display. You can even create your own custom EQ settings by adjusting the

frequency bands, and save the settings to one of two User Master EQ types.

■ Select a Preset EQ type

1–3 Same operation as in the “Basic Procedure” on page 84. In step 2,

select the EQ tab.

4 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a preset EQ type to suit your perfor-

mance (music style or environment).

Gain

5 bands →

Bandwidth

(also called “Shape” or “Q”)

Freq (Frequency)

EQ1 EQ2 EQ3 EQ4 EQ5

LOW LOW MID MID HIG MID HIGH

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

If you want to edit the EQ parameters, go on to the next operation.

■ Editing and Saving the selected EQ

5 Press the [F] (EDIT) button to call up the MASTER EQ EDIT display.

6 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a preset EQ type.

7 Use the [3

ππ

††

]–[7

ππ

††

] buttons to boost or cut each of the ﬁve

bands.

Use the [8

π†

] button to boost or cut all the ﬁve bands at the same time.

8 Adjust the Q (bandwidth) and the FREQ (center frequency) of the

band selected in step 7.

• Bandwidth (also called “Shape” or “Q”)

Use the [1

π†

]button. The higher the value of Q, the narrower the band

width.

• FREQ (center frequency)

Use the [2

π†

]button. The available FREQ range is different for each

band.

9 Press the [H] or [I] (STORE 1 or 2) button to save the edited EQ type

(page 67).

Up to two types of EQ can be created and saved. When recalling the saved

EQ type, use the same procedure as in step 6.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Voice Creating — Voice Set

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Voice Creating — Voice Set

The PSR-OR700 has a Voice Set feature that allows you to create your own Voices

by editing some parameters of the existing Voices. Once you’ve created a Voice,

you can save it as a User Voice to the USER/(USB) for future recall. The editing

method is different for the ORGAN FLUTES Voices and for other Voices.

Basic Procedure

1 Select the desired Voice (other than an Organ Flutes Voice)

(page 31).

2 Press the [6

ππ

] (VOICE SET) button to call up the VOICE SET display.

3 Use the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to call up the relevant setting display.

For information on the available parameters, see the “Editable Parameters in

the VOICE SET Displays” on page 93.

4 As necessary, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the item (parameter)

to be edited.

5 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to edit the Voice.

6 Press the [D] (COMPARE) button to compare the sound of the edited

Voice with the unedited Voice.

Editing the ORGAN FLUTES

Voices

The editing method is different

for the ORGAN FLUTES Voices

compared to other Voices. For

instructions on editing the

ORGAN FLUTES Voices, see

page 96.

CAUTION

If you select another Voice

without saving the settings,

the settings will be lost. If you

wish to store the settings

here, make sure to save the

settings as a User Voice before

selecting another Voice or

turning the power off.

Voice Creating — Voice Set

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

7 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save your edited Voice (page 67).

Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays

The following covers in detail the editable parameters that are set in the displays

explained in step 3 of the “Basic Procedure” on page 92. The Voice Set parameters

are organized into ﬁve different displays. The parameters in each display are

described separately, below. These are also treated as part of the Voice Set parame-

ters (page 98), which are automatically called up when the Voice is selected.

COMMON

CONTROLLER

MODULATION

The MODULATION wheel can be used to modulate the parameters below as well

as the pitch (vibrato). Here, you can set the degree to which the pedal modulates

each of the following parameters.

The available parameters differ

depending on the Voice.

Changes to velocity curve

according to Touch sensitivity

TOUCH SENSE DEPTH

Changes to velocity curve

according to VelDepth (with Off-

set set to 64)

TOUCH SENSE OFFSET

Changes to velocity curve

according to VelOffset (with

Depth set to 64)

127

ctual Velocity

or tone generator

Depth=127

(twice)

Depth=32

(half)

Depth=64

(normal)

Depth=0

Received Velocity

(Actual KeyOn speed)

127

Actual Velocity

for tone generator

Offset=96 (+64)

Offset=127

(+127)

Offset=64

(normal)

Offset=32

(-64)

Received

Velocity

(Actual

KeyOn speed)

Offset=0 (-127)

Depends on

offset

Depends on

offset

VOLUME Adjusts the volume of the current edited Voice.

TOUCH SENSE

Adjusts the touch sensitivity (velocity sensitivity), or how greatly the

volume responds to your playing strength.

DEPTH

Determines the velocity sensitivity, or how much the level of the

voice changes in response to your playing strength (velocity).

OFFSET

Determines the amount by which received velocities are adjusted

for the actual velocity effect.

PART OCTAVE Shifts the octave range of the edited Voice up or down in octaves.

When the edited Voice is used as any of the RIGHT 1-2 parts, the

R1/R2 parameter is available; when the edited Voice is used as the

LEFT part, the LEFT parameter is available.

MONO/POLY Determines whether the edited Voice is played monophonically or

polyphonically. This setting can also be made from the VOICE

CONTROL “MONO” button on the panel (page 53).

PORTAMENTO TIME Sets the portamento time when the edited Voice is set to “MONO”

above.

n Portamento Time:

The Portamento Time determines the pitch transition time. Portamento is

a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the ﬁrst note

played on the keyboard to the next.

FILTER Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the Filter Cut-

off Frequency. For details about the ﬁlter, see page 94.

AMPLITUDE Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the amplitude

(volume).

LFO PMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the pitch, or

the vibrato effect.

LFO FMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the Filter

modulation, or the wah effect.

LFO AMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the amplitude,

or the tremolo effect.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Voice Creating — Voice Set

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

SOUND

● FILTER

Filter is a processor that changes the timbre or tone of a sound by either blocking

or passing a speciﬁc frequency range. The parameters below determine the overall

timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a certain frequency range. In addition to

making the sound either brighter or mellower, Filter can be used to produce elec-

tronic, synthesizer-like effects.

● EG

The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the sound

changes in time. This lets you reproduce many sound characteristics of natural

acoustic instruments — such as the quick attack and decay of percussion sounds,

or the long release of a sustained piano tone.

BRIGHTNESS Determines the cutoff frequency or effective frequency range of the

ﬁlter (see diagram). Higher values result in a brighter sound.

HARMONIC CONTENT Determines the emphasis given to the cutoff frequency (resonance),

set in BRIGHTNESS above (see diagram). Higher values result in a

more pronounced effect.

ATTACK Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum level after

the key is played. The lower the value, the quicker the attack.

DECAY Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain level (a

slightly lower level than maximum). The lower the value, the

quicker the decay.

RELEASE Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is

released. The lower the value, the quicker the decay.

Volume

Cutoff frequency

These frequencies are

“passed” by the ﬁlter.

Frequency (pitch)

Cutoff range

Volume

Frequency (pitch)

Resonance

Level

Sustain level

Time

Key on Key off

AT TACK DECAY RELEASE

Voice Creating — Voice Set

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

● VIBRATO

EFFECT/EQ

1. REVERB DEPTH/CHORUS DEPTH/DSP DEPTH

2. DSP

3. EQ

HARMONY

Harmony sets the Right 1 and 2 parts together. Press the PART SELECT [RIGHT 1]

button before you set it.

This has the same settings as the display of “Selecting the Harmony/Echo type” on

page 82 in step 2.

Vibrato:

A quavering, vibrating sound

effect that is produced by regu-

larly modulating the pitch of the

Voice.

DEPTH Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect. Higher settings result

in a more pronounced Vibrato.

SPEED Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect.

DELAY Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of

a key and the start of the Vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the

delay of the Vibrato onset.

REVERB DEPTH Adjusts the reverb (page 88) depth.

CHORUS DEPTH Adjusts the chorus (page 88) depth.

DSP DEPTH Adjusts the DSP (page 88) depth.

If you want to re-select the DSP type, you can do so in the DSP

menu explained below.

DSP ON/OFF Determines whether the DSP is on or off.

This setting can also be made from the VOICE CONTROL “DSP”

button on the panel (page 53).

PANEL SUSTAIN Determines the sustain level applied to the edited voice when the

VOICE CONTROL [SUSTAIN] button on the panel is turned on

(page 53).

DSP TYPE Selects the DSP effect category and type. Select a type after select-

ing a category.

VARIATION Two variations are provided for each DSP type.

Here, you can edit the VARIATION on/off status and variation-

parameter value setting.

ON/OFF

The factory-programmed assignments are set to variation-off for all

Voices (standard variation of DSP is assigned). If you select VARIA-

TION ON here, a variation of the DSP effect is assigned to the

Voice. The variation parameter value can be adjusted in the

VALUE menu explained below. This setting can also be made from

the VOICE CONTROL “DSP VARI.” button on the panel (page 53).

This button is effective only when the [DSP] button is on.

PARAMETER

Displays the variation parameter.

VALUE

Adjusts the value of the DSP variation parameter.

EQ LOW/HIGH These determine the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ

bands.

Pitch

Time

SPEED

DEPTH

DELAY

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Voice Creating — Voice Set

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices

The PSR-OR700 features a variety of lush, dynamic organ Voices that you can call

up with the [ORGAN FLUTES] button. It also gives you the tools to create your

own original organ sounds by using the Voice Set function. Just as on a traditional

organ, you can create your own sounds by adjusting the levels of the ﬂute footages.

Basic Procedure

1 Select the desired Organ Flutes Voice to be edited (page 31).

2 In the ORGAN FLUTES Voice Selection display, press the [6

ππ

] (FOOT-

AGE) button to call up the VOICE SET [ORGAN FLUTES] display.

3 Use the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to call up the relevant setting display.

For information on the available parameters, see the “Editable Parameters in

the VOICE SET [ORGAN FLUTES] displays” on page 97.

4 If you select the EFFECT/EQ tab display, use the [A]/[B] buttons to

select the parameter to be edited.

(When selecting

the EFFECT/EQ

tab display.)

Voice Creating — Voice Set

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

5 Use the [A]–[D], [F]–[H] and [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to edit the

Voice.

6 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save your edited ORGAN FLUTES Voice

(page 67).

Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET [ORGAN FLUTES] displays

The following covers in detail the editable parameters that are set in the displays

explained in step 3 of the “Basic Procedure.” The Organ Flutes parameters are

organized into three different pages. The parameters in each page are described

separately, below. These are also treated as part of the Voice Set parameters

(page 98), which are automatically called up when the Voice is selected.

FOOTAGE, VOLUME/ATTACK (common parameters)

FOOTAGE

CAUTION

If you select another Voice

without saving the settings,

the settings will be lost. If you

wish to store the settings

here, make sure to save the

settings as a User Voice before

selecting another Voice or

turning the power off.

ORGAN TYPE Speciﬁes the type of organ tone generation to be simulated: Sine or

Vintage.

ROTARY SP SPEED Alternately switches between the slow and fast rotary speaker

speeds when a rotary speaker effect is selected for the Organ Flutes

(see “EFFECT/EQ” DSP TYPE parameter on page 95), and the Voice

Effect DSP (page 95) is turned on (this parameter has the same effect

as the Voice Effect VARIATION ON/OFF parameter).

VIBRATO ON/OFF Alternately turns the vibrato effect for the Organ Flutes Voice ON or

OFF.

VIBRATO DEPTH Sets the Vibrato depth to one of three levels: 1 (low), 2 (mid), or 3

(high).

Footage:

The term “footage” is a reference

to the sound generation of tradi-

tional pipe organs, in which the

sound is produced by pipes of

different lengths (in feet).

16' ← → 5 1/3'

Which footage (16' or 5 1/3') is operated with the [1

π†

] button can

be switched by pressing the [D] button.

16'–1'

Determines the basic sound of the organ ﬂutes. The longer the pipe, the

lower the pitch of the sound. Hence, the 16' setting determines the low-

est pitched component of the Voice, while the 1' setting determines the

highest pitched component. The higher the value of the setting, the

greater the volume of the corresponding footage. Mixing various vol-

umes of the footages lets you create your own distinctive organ sounds.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Voice Creating — Voice Set

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

VOLUME/ATTACK

EFFECT/EQ

Same parameters as in the VOICE SET “EFFECT/EQ” tab display explained on

page 95.

VOL Adjusts the overall volume of the Organ Flutes. The longer the

graphic bar, the greater the volume.

RESP Affects both the attack and release (page 94) portion of the sound,

increasing or decreasing the response time of the initial swell and

release, based on the FOOTAGE controls. The higher the value, the

slower the swell and release.

VIBRATO SPEED Determines the speed of the vibrato effect controlled by the Vibrato

On/Off and Vibrato Depth on the previous page.

MODE The MODE control selects between two modes: FIRST and EACH.

In the FIRST mode, attack is applied only to the ﬁrst notes played

and held simultaneously; while the ﬁrst notes are held, any subse-

quently played notes have no attack applied. In the EACH mode,

attack is applied equally to all notes.

4', 2 2/3', 2' These determine the attack sound volume of the ORGAN FLUTE

Voice. The 4', 2-2/3' and 2' controls increase or reduce the volume

of attack sound at the corresponding footages. The longer the

graphic bar, the greater the attack sound volume.

LENG Affects the attack portion of the sound producing a longer or shorter

decay immediately after the initial attack. The longer the graphic

bar, the longer the decay.

Disabling automatic selection of Voice Sets (effects, etc.)

Each Voice is linked to its related parameter settings that are indicated in the

VOICE SET displays, including effects and EQ. Usually these settings are

automatically called up when a Voice is selected. However, you can also

disable this feature by the operation in the relevant display as explained

below.

For example, if you want to change the Voice yet keep the same Harmony

effect, set the HARMONY/ECHO parameter to OFF (in the display explained

below).

You can set these independently by keyboard part and parameter group.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [E] REGIST.SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET → TAB [

√

][

]

VOICE SET

2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a keyboard part.

3 Use the [4

ππ

††

]–[7

ππ

††

] buttons to enable/disable automatic calling

up of the settings (ON or OFF) independently for each parameter

group.

Refer to the Data List for a list of parameters contained in each parameter

group. The Data List is available at the Yamaha website. (See page 5.)

Using Oriental Scales

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

Using Oriental Scales — Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/Scale Memory

The Oriental Scales feature lets you simply and easily raise or lower the pitches of

speciﬁc notes and create your own scales. You can change the scale settings at any

time–even when you are playing. Up to six scale settings can be stored for instant

recall, whenever you need them.

Setting an Oriental Scale

— Scale Setting

The [SCALE SETTING] buttons simulate an one-octave keyboard (C through B).

You can easily change the scale setting at any time by pressing one of the [SCALE

SETTING] buttons, located at the left side of the panel.

Pressing each button turns the Scale Setting feature for the speciﬁc note on and off.

The Scale Setting feature affects all the notes having the same note name in all

octaves. When set to on (the selected button itself is lit), you can play the keyboard

in the selected oriental scale.

The scale setting for each note is -50 cents. You can also adjust the scale tuning in

1-cent units in the SCALE TUNE display.

Scale Tuning

You can select various scales for playing in custom tunings for speciﬁc historical

periods or music genres.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [A] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE → TAB [

√

][

] SCALE

TUNE

2 Select the desired part for which you want to set the scale by using

the [6

ππ

††

]/[7

ππ

††

] buttons.

Checkmark the box by pressing the [8

] button.

3 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired scale.

The tuning of each note for the currently selected scale is indicated in the

keyboard illustration at the upper right of the display.

The [SCALE SETTING] buttons

will light or go out according to

the song playback data.

The Scale Setting function has no

effect on the Drum Kit/SFX Kit

voices.

You also can call up the SCALE

TUNE display by pressing the

[SCALE TUNE] button.

Using Oriental Scales

Scale Tuning

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

100

4 Change the following settings as necessary.

•Tuning the individual notes of the keyboard (TUNE)

1 Press the [3

ππ

††

] button to select the note for tuning.

2 Use the [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] buttons to set the tuning in cents.

• Determines the base note for each scale.

Press the [2

π†

] button to select the base note.

When the base note is changed, the pitch of the keyboard is transposed,

yet maintains the original pitch relationship between the notes.

Preset Scale Types

Tuning values for Preset Scales (base note: C) (in cents)

* In the display, the rounded off value is shown.

Cent:

In musical terms a “cent” is 1/

100th of a semitone. (100 cents

equal one semitone.)

Instantly recalling the desired

scale

Registration Memory. Be sure to

checkmark the SCALE item when

registering (page 131).

EQUAL

TEMPERAMENT

The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with

each half-step evenly spaced in pitch. This is the most commonly used

tuning in music today.

BAYAT/ RAST Use these tunings when playing Arabic music.

PURE MAJOR

PURE MINOR

These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale,

especially for triad chords (root, third, ﬁfth). You can hear this best in

actual vocal harmonies – such as choirs and a cappella singing.

PYTHAGOREAN This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created

from a series of perfect ﬁfths, which are collapsed into a single octave.

The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unstable, but the 4th and 5th are

beautiful and suitable for some leads.

MEAN-TONE This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale, by

making the major third interval more “in tune.” It was especially popu-

lar from the 16th century to the 18th century. Handel, among others,

used this scale.

WERCKMEISTER

KIRNBERGER

This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger sys-

tems, which were themselves improvements on the mean-tone and

Pythagorean scales. The main feature of this scale is that each key has

its own unique character. The scale was used extensively during the

time of Bach and Beethoven, and even now it is often used when per-

forming period music on the harpsichord.

CC# DEb EFF# GAb ABb B

EQUAL TEM-

PERAMENT

0 00 0 0 0000000

Bayat

00-50.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -50.0 0 0

Rast

0000-50.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -50.0

PURE MAJOR

0 -29.7 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 -9.4 2.3 -27.3 -15.6 18.0 -11.7

PURE MINOR

0 33.6 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 31.3 2.3 14.1 -15.6 18.0 -11.7

PYTHAGOREAN

0 14.1 3.9 -6.3 7.8 -2.3 11.7 2.3 15.6 6.3 -3.9 10.2

MEAN-TONE

0 -24.2 -7.0 10.2 -14.1 3.1 -20.3 -3.1 -27.3 -10.2 7.0 -17.2

WERCKMEISTER

0 -10.2 -7.8 -6.3 -10.2 -2.3 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8

KIRNBERGER

0 -10.2 -7.0 -6.3 -14.1 -2.3 -10.2 -3.1 -7.8 -10.2 -3.9 -11.7

Memorizing the Scale Setting — Scale Memory

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

101

Using Oriental Scales

Memorizing the Scale Setting

— Scale Memory

The scale settings you set (using the [SCALE SETTING] buttons or in the SCALE

TUNE display) are memorized by the Scale Memory function. Up to six scale set-

tings can be stored for instant recall, whenever you need them.

1 Set up the scale settings as desired using the [SCALE SETTING] but-

tons or in the SCALE TUNE display.

2 While holding the [MEMORY] button, press one of the SCALE MEM-

ORY [1]–[6] buttons.

The corresponding SCALE MEMORY button will light. Any data that was

previously in the selected location is erased and replaced by the new set-

tings.

Saving Your Scale Settings

The scale settings memorized to the SCALE MEMORY [1]–[6] buttons are saved as

a single ﬁle.

1 Press the [E] button to call up the SCALE TUNE BANK Selection Dis-

play.

The memorized scale settings

here will be lost when the power

is turned off, unless you perform

the Save operation (see next sec-

tion).

Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] but-

ton and [EXIT] button to call up

the MAIN display.

About the lamp status:

Off ...... no data registered,or not

currently selected

On ...... data registered, and cur-

rently selected

BANK 01

BANK 02

BANK 03

BANK 04

All settings memorized to the buttons [1]–[6]

are referred to as a “bank.” The banks can be

saved to “USER” or “USB” as Scale Tune

Bank ﬁles.

Using Oriental Scales

Recalling the Scale Setting

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

102

2 Save the settings you’ve made to the SCALE MEMORY buttons as a

single Scale Tune Bank ﬁle (page 67).

Recalling the Scale Setting

To recall the memorized scale settings, select the desired bank in the SCALE TUNE

BANK display (page 99). Press the appropriate SCALE MEMORY [1]–[6] button to

which you memorized the setting. The corresponding SCALE MEMORY button will

light.

The Scale Memory function can be turned off by pressing the SCALE MEMORY

button which is currently lit, so that the light goes out. The default Equal Tempera-

ment Scale settings (pitch settings for all notes are “0” will be restored.

n If you press a SCALE MEMORY button to which nothing is memorized, the current scale set-

tings remain and nothing changes.

The SCALE TUNE EDIT display appears.

For details on this display, see below.

SCALE TUNE EDIT display

The contents of the current Scale Tune Bank are listed in the SCALE TUNE

EDIT screen. The names of the stored Scale Settings are shown in the dis-

play.

From this screen, you can select, name, or delete each of the Scale Settings.

Select...........Press the [A]–[C] / [F]–[H] buttons. The SCALE TUNE EDIT

display is linked to the SCALE MEMORY [1]–[6] buttons.

When you select the Scale Settings in the display, the corre-

sponding SCALE MEMORY button lights.

Name ..........This operation is the same as that in “Renaming Files/Folders”

(page 70) in “Basic Operation.”

Delete..........This operation is the same as that in “Deleting Files/Folders”

(page 69) in “Basic Operation.”

n The result of the Name/Delete operation will be lost when the power is turned off unless

you return to the SCALE TUNE BANK display by pressing the [8] (

) button and save the

data (page 67).

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

103

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Characteristics

The Style type and its deﬁning characteristics are indicated above the Preset Style

name.

Selecting a Chord Fingering Type

Style playback can be controlled by the chords you play in the chord section of the

keyboard. There are seven types of ﬁngerings.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING →

TAB [

√

][

] CHORD FINGERING

2 Press the [1

ππ

††

]–[3

ππ

††

] buttons to select a ﬁngering.

Reference to Quick Guide pages

Playing “Mary Had a Little Lamb” with the Auto

Accompaniment Feature .....................................................................page 46

Pattern Variation ...................................................................... page 48

Learning How to Play (Indicate) Chords for Style Playback ...... page 50

Appropriate Panel Settings for the Selected Style

(One Touch Setting)................................................................. page 51

Pro

These Styles provide professional and exciting arrangements combined

with perfect playability. The resulting accompaniment exactly follows the

chords of the player. As a result, your chord changes and colorful harmo-

nies are instantly transformed into lifelike musical accompaniment.

Session These Styles provide even greater realism and authentic backing by

mixing in original chord types and changes, as well as special riffs with

chord changes, with the Main sections. These have been programmed

to add “spice” and a professional touch to your performances of certain

songs and in certain genres. Keep in mind, however, that the Styles may

not necessarily be appropriate — or even harmonically correct — for

all songs and for all chord playing. In some cases for example, playing a

simple major triad for a country song may result in a “jazzy” seventh

chord, or playing an on-bass chord may result in inappropriate or unex-

pected accompaniment.

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a Style

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

104

Playing Only the Rhythm Channels

of a Style

Rhythm is one of the most important parts of a Style. Try to play the melody along

with just the rhythm. You can sound different rhythms for each Style. Keep in mind,

however, that not all Styles contain rhythm channels.

1 Select a Style (page 46).

2 Press the [ACMP] to turn Auto Accompaniment off.

3 Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to play back the

rhythm channels.

AI:

Artiﬁcial Intelligence

Starting the rhythm with Sync

Start

You can also start the rhythm

simply by playing the keyboard,

if Sync Start is enabled (turn on

the [SYNC START] button).

SINGLE FINGER Makes it simple to produce

orchestrated accompani-

ment using major, seventh,

minor and minor-seventh

chords by pressing a mini-

mum number of keys on the

Chord section of the key-

board. This type is available

only for Style playback.

The abbreviated chord ﬁn-

gerings described at right are

used:

MULTI FINGER Automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord ﬁngerings, so you

can use either type of ﬁngering without having to switch ﬁngering types.

FINGERED Lets you ﬁnger your own chords on the Chord section of the keyboard,

while the instrument supplies appropriately orchestrated rhythm, bass,

and chord accompaniment in the selected Style. The Fingered type rec-

ognizes the various chord types which are listed on the Data List avail-

able at the Yamaha website (page 5) and can be looked up using the

Chord Tutor function (page 50).

FINGERED ON

BASS

Accepts the same ﬁngerings as the Fingered, but the lowest note played

in the Chord section of the keyboard is used as the bass note, allowing

you to play “on bass” chords (in the Fingered mode the root of the

chord is always used as the bass note).

FULL KEYBOARD Detects chords in the entire key range. Chords are detected in a way

similar to Fingered, even if you split the notes between your left and

right hands — for example, playing a bass note with your left hand and

a chord with your right, or by playing a chord with your left hand and a

melody note with your right.

AI FINGERED Basically the same as Fingered, with the exception that less than three

notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously

played chord, etc.).

AI FULL KEYBOARD When this advanced ﬁngering type is engaged, the instrument will auto-

matically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about

anything, anywhere on the keyboard using both hands. You don’t have

to worry about specifying the Style chords. Although the AI Full Key-

board type is designed to work with many songs, some arrangements

may not be suitable for use with this feature. This type is similar to Full

Keyboard, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to

indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). 9th,

11th and 13th chords cannot be played. This type is available only for

Style playback.

For a major chord,

press the root key only.

For a minor chord,

simultaneously press the root

key and a black key to its left.

For a seventh chord,

simultaneously press the root

key and a white key to its left.

For a minor-seventh chord,

simultaneously press the root key and

both a white and black key to its left.

Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a Style

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

105

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

4 Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to stop the rhythm.

Turning channels of the Style on/off

A Style contains eight channels: RHY1 (Rhythm 1) – PHR2 (Phrase 2). You

can add variations and change the feeling of a Style by selectively turning

channels on/off as the Style plays.

1 Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the CHANNEL ON/

OFF display.

When the STYLE tab is not selected, press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] but-

ton again.

2 Press the [1

††

]–[8

††

] buttons to turn the channels on or off.

To listen to only one instrument by itself, hold down the appropriate but-

ton for the channel to set the channel to SOLO. To cancel SOLO, simply

press the appropriate channel button again.

Playing the chords in free tempo (without Style playback)

You can have the accompaniment chords sound without playing back the

Style, by setting [ACMP] to on (see page 106, Stop Accompaniment), and

[SYNC START] to off. For example, if MULTI FINGER is selected

(page 104), you can perform with your own pace while sounding the

chord by pressing the chord section of the keyboard with your one ﬁnger.

Setting the fade in/out time

You can set the time of the fade in and fade out (pages 48, 49).

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[

√

][

] CONFIG 1 → [A] FADE IN/

OUT/HOLD TIME

2 Set the parameters by using the [3

ππ

††

]–[5

ππ

††

] buttons.

FADE IN TIME Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade in, or go from

minimum to maximum.

FADE OUT

TIME

Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade out, or go

from maximum to minimum.

FADE OUT

HOLD TIME

Determines the time the volume is held at 0 following the fade out.

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Playback-related Settings

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

106

Style Playback-related Settings

The PSR-OR700 has a variety of Style playback functions which can be accessed in

the display below.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING →

TAB[

√

][

] STYLE SETTING

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons for each setting.

• Stop Accompaniment

When [ACMP] is turned on and [SYNC START] is off, you can play chords in the

chord section of the keyboard with the Style stopped, and still hear the accompa-

niment chord. In this condition — called “Stop Accompaniment” — any valid

chord ﬁngerings are recognized and the chord root/type are shown in the display.

Here, you can determine whether the chord played in the chord section will

sound or not in the Stop Accompaniment status.

OFF...............................The chord played in the chord section will not sound.

STYLE...........................The chord played in the chord section will sound via the

Voices of the selected Style.

FIXED ...........................The chord played in the chord section will sound via the

speciﬁed Voice, regardless of the selected Style.

• Synchro Stop Window

This determines how long you can hold a chord before the Synchro Stop function

is automatically cancelled. When the [SYNC STOP] button is turned on and this

is set to a value other than “OFF,” this automatically cancels the Synchro Stop

function if you hold a chord for longer than the time set here. This conveniently

resets Style playback control to normal, letting you release the keys and still have

the Style play. In other words, if you release the keys sooner than the time set

here, the Synchro Stop function works.

• Style Touch

Turns touch response for the Style playback on/off. When this is set to “ON,” the

Style volume changes in response to your playing strength in the chord section of

the keyboard.

Data that is recorded when

recording a Song

Please note that both the Voice

that is sounded and the chord

data will be recorded when set

to “STYLE,” and only the chord

data will be recorded when set

to “OFF” or “FIXED.”

Split Point Settings

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

107

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

• Style Change Behavior

There are three types as shown below.

Section Set

Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting differ-

ent Styles (when Style playback is stopped). When set to “OFF” and Style playback

is stopped, the active section is maintained even if the different Style is selected.

When any of the MAIN A-D sections is not included in the Style data, the nearest

section is automatically selected. For example, when MAIN D is not contained in

the selected Style, MAIN C will be called up.

Tempo

This determines whether the tempo changes or not when you change Styles dur-

ing Style playback.

HOLD ..........................The tempo setting of the previous Style is maintained.

RESET...........................The tempo changes to that of the initial default tempo

for the selected Style.

Part On/Off

This determines whether the Style Channel On/Off status changes or not when

you change Styles during Style playback.

HOLD

..........................The Style Channel On/Off status of the previous Style is

maintained.

RESET...........................All Style Channels are set to On.

Split Point Settings

These are the settings (there are two Split Points) that separate the different sec-

tions of the keyboard: the Chord section, the LEFT part section and the RIGHT 1

and 2 section. The two Split Point settings (below) are speciﬁed as note names.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING →

TAB [

√

][

] SPLIT POINT

2 Use the [F]–[H] buttons to set the Split Point.

• Split Point (S)—separates the Chord section for Style playback from the

section(s) for playing Voices (RIGHT 1, 2 and LEFT)

• Split Point (L)—separates the two sections for playing Voices, LEFT and

RIGHT 1- 2.

These two settings can be set to the same note (as in the default) or two different

notes as desired.

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance of the Style (MIXING CONSOLE)

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

108

Split Point (L) cannot be set lower than Split Point (S), and Split Point (S) cannot be

set higher than Split Point (L).

Editing the Volume and Tonal Bal-

ance of the Style (MIXING CONSOLE)

You can set various mixing-related parameters of the Style. (See “Adjustable items

(parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE displays” on page 85.) Call up the “STYLE

PART” display in step 3 of the Basic Procedure in “Editing the Volume and Tonal

Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)” on page 84, and follow the instructions.

Convenient Music Finder feature

Music Finder (page 55) is a convenient feature that calls up pre-programmed panel

settings (for Voices, Styles, etc.) that match the song or type of music you want to

play. The records of the Music Finder can be searched and edited.

Searching the Records

You can search the records by specifying a song name or keyword, using the

Search function of the Music Finder. You can also save your favorite records in the

FAVORITE display.

1 Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER dis-

play.

2 Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select the ALL tab.

The ALL tab display contains all the preset Records.

Specifying the Split Point by

note name

Press the [1

π†

]–[4

π†

]

but-

tons. You can specify the Split

Point of the Voice and chord sec-

tion of the keyboard by using

STYLE in the display, and you can

specify the Split Point of the left

and right Voices by using LEFT.

Setting the Split Point (S) and the Split Point (L) to the same note

Setting the Split Point (S) and the Split Point (L) to different notes

Press the [F] (S+L) button and rotate the DATA ENTRY dial.

Split Point (S+L)

Chord section +

Voice LEFT

Voice RIGHT 1and 2

Press the [H] (S) button or the [G] (L) button and rotate the DATA ENTRY dial.

Split Point (S)

Split Point (L)

Chord section

Voice LEFT

Voice RIGHT 1and 2

Convenient Music Finder feature

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

109

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

3 Press the [6

ππ

] (SEARCH 1) button to call up the Search display.

4 Enter the search criteria.

• Search by song title or music genre (MUSIC) or keyword

1 Press the [A] (MUSIC)/[B](KEYWORD) button to call up the character

entry display.

2 Enter the song title or music genre, or the keyword (page 71).

• Search by Style name

1 Press the [C] (STYLE) button to call up the Style selection display.

2 Use the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Style.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the search display.

• Adding other Search Criteria

You can specify other search criteria in addition to the song name/keyword/Style

name.

BEAT ............................Select the beat (time signature) you want to use in your

performance by pressing the [D] button. All beat settings

are included in the search if you select ANY.

SEARCH AREA .............Select the pages to be included in the search by pressing

the [E] button. (These correspond to the tabs at the top

of the Music Finder display.)

TEMPO.........................Set the range of the tempo you want to use in your per-

formance by using the [1

π†

]/[2

π†

] (TEMPO) but-

tons.

GENRE .........................Select the desired music genre by using the [5

π†

] (GENRE) buttons.

Clear the search criteria

To clear the entered Music/Key-

word/Style, press the [F]/[G]/[H]

(CLEAR) button.

Entering several different key-

words

You can search several different

keywords simultaneously by

inserting a separator (comma)

between each.

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Convenient Music Finder feature

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

110

5 Press the [8

ππ

] (START SEARCH) button to start the search.

The Search 1 display appears, showing the results of the search. To cancel

searching, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

Creating a Set of Favorite Records

As convenient as the Search function is in plumbing the depths of the Music Finder

records, you may want to create a “folder” of favorite records — so you can

quickly call up those Styles and settings you use most often in your performance.

1 Select the desired record from the Music Finder display.

2 Press the [H] (ADD TO FAVORITE) button to add the selected record

to the FAVORITE display.

3 Call up the FAVORITE display by using the TAB [

√

][

] buttons, and

check to see if the record has been added.

Deleting Records from the FAVORITE Display

1 Select the record you want to delete from the FAVORITE display.

2 Press the [H] (DELETE FROM FAVORITE) button.

Searching other music genres

When you want to search other music genres, press the [6

†

] (SEARCH 2)

button in the Music Finder display. The search result is displayed in the

SEARCH 2 display.

Calling up the panel settings to match the style (REPERTOIRE)

When searching by style name, the same search result is obtained even if the

search is done by using the Repertoire function. See page 56 for details.

Convenient Music Finder feature

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

111

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Editing Records

You can create a new record by editing the currently selected record. The newly

created records are automatically saved in the internal memory.

1 Select the desired record to be edited in the Music Finder display.

2 Press the [8

ππ

††

] (RECORD EDIT) button to call up the Edit display.

3 Edit the record as desired.

• Editing the song name/keyword/Style name

Input each item in the same way as done in the Search display (page 109).

• Changing the Tempo

Press the [1

π†

] (TEMPO) button.

• Memorizing the Section (Intro/Main/Ending)

Use the [2

π†

]/[4

π†

] buttons to select the section that will automatically be

called up set when the record is selected. This is useful, for example, when you

want to have a selected Style automatically be set up to start with an Intro sec-

tion.

• Editing the Genre

Select the desired genre by using the [5

π†

]/[6

π†

] (GENRE) buttons. When

creating a new genre, press the [7

π†

] (GENRE NAME) button and input the

genre name. (page 71)

• Deleting the Currently Selected Record

Press the [I] (DELETE RECORD) button.

• Canceling and Quitting the Edit functions

Press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

4 To enter the edited record to the FAVORITE display, press the [E]

(FAVORITE) button to turn on the FAVORITE.

5 Enter the edits you’ve made to the record as described below.

• Creating a new record

Press the [J] (NEW RECORD) button. The record is added to the ALL display. If

you’ve entered the record to the FAVORITE display in step 4 above, the record is

added to both the ALL display and the FAVORITE display.

• Overwriting an existing record

Press the [8

] (OK) button. If you set the record as a Favorite in step 4 above,

the record is added to the FAVORITE display. When you edit the record in the

FAVORITE display, the record is overwritten.

CAUTION

You can also change a preset

record to create a new one. If

you want to keep the original

preset, make sure to change

the name and register the

edited record as a new record

(see step 5, page 111).

Keep in mind that the Beat set-

ting made here is only for the

Music Finder search function;

this does not affect the actual

Beat setting of the Style itself.

The maximum number of

records is 1200, including inter-

nal records.

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Convenient Music Finder feature

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

112

Saving the Record

The Music Finder feature handles all the Records including the presets and addi-

tionally created records as a single ﬁle. Keep in mind that individual records (panel

setups) cannot be handled as separate ﬁles.

1 Call up the Save display.

[MUSIC FINDER] → TAB [

√

][

] ALL → [7

π†

] (FILES)

2 Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select the location for saving (USER/

USB).

3 Press the [6

††

] button to save the ﬁle (page 67).

All records are saved together as a single ﬁle.

Convenient Music Finder feature

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

113

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

CAUTION

Selecting “REPLACE” auto-

matically deletes all your orig-

inal records from internal

memory. Make sure that all

important data has been

archived to another location

beforehand.

Restoring the Music Finder

Data

You can restore the instrument’s

Music Finder to its original fac-

tory settings (page 72).

Calling up Music Finder Records Saved to USER/USB

To call up the Music Finder records you’ve saved to USER/USB, follow the

instructions below.

1 Call up the [MUSIC FINDER] display.

[MUSIC FINDER] → TAB [

√

][

] ALL

2 Press the [7

ππ

††

] (FILES) button to open the File selection display of

the Music Finder.

3 Use the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select USER/USB.

4 Press the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Music Finder ﬁle.

When the ﬁle is selected, a message is displayed according to the content

of the ﬁle. Press the desired button.

• REPLACE

All Music Finder records currently in the instrument are deleted and

replaced with the records of the selected ﬁle.

• APPEND

The records called up are added to the records currently in the instrument.

Execute the operation to call up the Music Finder ﬁle. Select “CANCEL” to

abort this operation.

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Creator

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

114

Style Creator

You can create your own styles — recording them by yourself or by combining the

internal Style data. The created Styles can be edited.

Style Structure

Styles are made up of ﬁfteen different sections and each section has eight separate

channels. With the Style Creator feature, you can create a Style by separately

recording the channels, or by importing pattern data from other existing Styles.

Creating a Style

You can use one of the three different methods described below to create a Style.

The created Styles can also be edited (page 120).

■ Realtime Recording ➤ See page 115

This method lets you record the Style by simply playing the instrument. You can

select an internal Style that most closely matches your image of the Style you want

to create and then re-record parts of the Style as desired, or you can create a new

Style from scratch.

■ Step Recording ➤ See page 118

This method is like writing music notation on paper, since it allows you to enter

each note or individually, and specify its length.

This allows you to create a Style without having to play the parts on the instrument,

since you can enter each event manually.

■ Style Assembly ➤ See page 119

This convenient feature lets you create composite Styles by combining various pat-

terns from the internal preset Styles. For example, if you want to create your own

original 8-beat Style, you could take rhythm patterns from the “70’s 8Beat” Style,

use the bass pattern from “60’s Rock1” Style and import the chord patterns from the

“Cool8Beat” Style — combining the various elements to create one Style.

Style

Section

Four different

Fill-ins are

available.

Channel

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

60’s Rock1

70’s 8Beat

Cool8Beat

Style Creator

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

115

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Realtime Recording (BASIC)

Create a single Style by recording the individual channels one-by-one, using

realtime recording.

Realtime Recording Characteristics

• Loop Recording

Style playback repeats the rhythm patterns of several measures in a “loop,” and

Style recording is also done using loops. For example, if you start recording with

a two-measure main section, the two measures are repeatedly recorded. Notes

that you record will play back from the next repetition (loop), letting you record

while hearing previously recorded material.

• Overdub Recording

This method records new material to a channel already containing recorded

data, without deleting the original data. In Style recording, the recorded data is

not deleted, except when using functions such as Rhythm Clear (page 117) and

Delete (page 116). For example, if you start recording with a two-measure MAIN

section, the two measures are repeated many times. Notes that you record will

play back from the next repetition, letting you overdub new material to the loop

while hearing previously recorded material.

When creating a Style based on an existing internal Style, overdub recording is

applied only to the rhythm channels. For all other channels (except rhythm),

delete the original data before recording.

When using realtime recording based on the internal Styles:

1 Select the desired Style to serve as the basis for recording/editing

(page 46).

When creating a new Style from scratch, press the [C] (NEW STYLE) button

from the display shown in step 5 below.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU

3 Press the [B] button to call up the Style Creator display.

4 Use the TAB [

√

][

] buttons, then select the BASIC tab to call up the

RECORD display.

5 Call up the display for selecting sections, etc. by pressing the [EXIT]

button.

When recording channels BASS-

PHR2 based on an internal Style,

delete the original data before

recording. Overdub recording is

not possible on channels BASS-

PHR2.

When the RECORD display (chan

nel indication) at the lower part of

the STYLE CREATOR display dis-

appears, you can press the [F]

(REC CH) button to re-display it.

Overdub recording possible.

Overdub recording not possible.

Delete the data before recording.

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Creator

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

116

6 Use the [3

ππ

††

]/[4

ππ

††

] buttons to select the section (page 114) to

be recorded.

7 Use the [5

ππ

††

]/[6

ππ

††

] buttons to determine the length (number of

measures) of the selected section.

Actually enter the speciﬁed length for the selected section by pressing the

[D] (EXECUTE) button.

8 Specify the channel to be recorded by simultaneously holding down

the [F] (REC CH) button and pressing the appropriate numbered but-

ton, [1

††

]–[8

††

To cancel the selection, press the appropriate numbered button [1

†

]–[8

†

]

again.

9 Call up the Voice Selection display by using the [1

ππ

]–[8

ππ

]

buttons

and select the desired Voice for the corresponding recording channels.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.

10 To delete a channel, simultaneously hold down the [J] (DELETE) but-

ton and press the appropriate numbered button, [1

ππ

]–[8

ππ

You can cancel the deletion by pressing the same numbered button again,

before releasing your ﬁnger from the [J] button.

Specifying sections from the

panel buttons

You can specify the sections to

be recorded by using the Section

buttons ([INTRO]/[MAIN]/[END-

ING], etc.) on the panel. Pressing

one of the Section buttons calls

up the SECTION display. Change

the sections by using the

π†

]/[7

π†

] buttons and

execute the selection by pressing

the [8

] button.

The INTRO 4/ENDING 4 sec-

tions cannot be speciﬁed with

the panel controls.

Muting speciﬁc channels dur-

ing recording

Turn off the desired channels by

pressing the [1

†

]–[8

†

] buttons.

Recordable Voices

• RHY1 channel:

Any except Organ Flute Voices

are recordable.

• RHY2 channel:

Only drum/SFX kits are record-

able.

• BASS-PHR2 channels:

Any except Organ Flute Voices

and Drum/SFX kits are record-

able. (Preset Organ Flute

Voices can be selected only on

the LCD display.)

67-1

7-2

Style Creator

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

117

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

11 Start recording by pressing the Style Control [START/STOP] button.

Playback of the speciﬁed section starts. Since the accompaniment pattern

plays back repeatedly in a loop, you can record individual sounds one by

one, listening to the previous sounds as they play. For information on

recording to channels other than the rhythm channels (RHY1, 2), refer to the

section “Rules when recording non-rhythm channels” (see below).

12 To continue recording with another channel, simultaneously hold

down the [F] (REC CH) button and press the appropriate [1

††

]–[8

††

]

button to specify the channel, then play the keyboard.

13 Stop recording by pressing the Style Control [START/STOP] button.

14 Call up the display for selecting sections, etc. by pressing the [EXIT]

button.

15 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display to

save your data.

Save the data in the Style Selection display (page 67).

Deleting the recorded rhythm

channel (RHY 1, 2)

To delete a speciﬁc instrument

sound, simultaneously hold

down the [E] (RHY CLEAR) but-

ton (from the display where the

recorded channels are shown)

and press the appropriate key.

CAUTION

The recorded Style will be lost

if you change to another Style

or you turn the power off

without executing the Save

operation (page 67).

Any desired chord or chord pro-

gression can be used for the

INTRO and ENDING sections.

Changing the Source Chord

If you want to record the pattern

with a Source Chord other than

CM7, set the PLAY ROOT and

PLAY CHORD parameters on the

PARAMETER page (page 124)

before recording.

Rules when recording non-rhythm channels

• Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording the BASS and PHRASE

channels (i.e., C, D, E, G, A, and B).

• Use only the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD chan-

nels (i.e., C, E, G, and B).

Using the data recorded here, the auto accompaniment (Style playback) is

appropriately converted depending on the chord changes you make dur-

ing your performance. The chord which forms the basis for this note con-

version is called the Source Chord, and is set by default to CM7 (as in the

example illustration above). You can change the Source Chord (its root and

type) from the PARAMETER display on page 124. Keep in mind that when

you change the Source Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the

chord notes and recommended notes will also change. For details on

chord notes and recommended notes, see page 125.

CRC CRC

C = Chord notes

C, R = Recommended notes

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Creator

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

118

Step Recording (EDIT)

The explanation here applies when selecting the EDIT tab in step 4 of “Realtime

Recording” (page 115).

In the EDIT display, you can record notes with absolutely precise timing. This Step

Recording procedure is essentially the same as that for Song Recording (page 148),

with the exception of the points listed below:

• In the Song Creator, the End Mark position can be changed freely; in the Style Cre-

ator, it cannot be changed. This is because the length of the Style is automatically

ﬁxed, depending on the selected section. For example, if you create a Style based on

a section of four measures length, the End Mark position is automatically set to the

end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed in the Step Recording display.

• Recording channels can be changed in the Song Creator 1-16 tab display; how-

ever, they cannot be changed in the Style Creator. Select the recording channel

in the BASIC tab display.

• In the Style Creator, the channel data can be entered and System Exclusive data

can be edited (delete, copy, or move). You can switch between the two by press-

ing the [F] button. However, Chord, Lyrics, and System Exclusive data cannot be

entered.

Style Creator

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

119

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Assembly (ASSEMBLY)

Style Assembly allows you to create a single Style by mixing the various patterns

(channels) from existing internal Styles.

1 Select the basic Style, then call up the display for Style Assembly.

The operation steps are the same as steps 1–4 in “Realtime recording”

(page 115). In step 4, select the ASSEMBLY tab.

2 Select the desired section (Intro, Main, Ending, etc.) for your new

Style.

Call up the SECTION display by pressing one of the Section buttons

([INTRO]/[MAIN]/[ENDING], etc.) on the panel. Change the section as

desired by using the [6

π†

]/[7

π†

] buttons and execute the operation by

pressing the [8

] (OK) button.

3 Select the channel for which you wish to replace the pattern by using

the [A]–[D] and [F]–[I] buttons. Call up the Style Selection display by

pressing the same button again. Select the Style containing the pat-

tern you want to replace in the Style Selection display.

To return to the previous screen, press the [EXIT] button after selecting the

Style.

4 Select the desired section of the newly imported Style (chosen in step

3 above) by using the [2

ππ

††

]/[3

ππ

††

] (SECTION) buttons.

5 Select the desired channel for the section (chosen in step 4 above) by

using the [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] (CHANNEL) buttons.

Repeat steps 3–5 above to replace the patterns of other channels.

6 Press the [J] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display, and

save your data from the display (page 67).

52-2

2-1

Section display

Indicates the channels that make up the section.

You cannot select the SECTION

INTRO 4/ENDING 4 directly via

the panel operation.

CAUTION

The recorded Style will be lost

if you change to another Style

or you turn the power off

without executing the Save

operation (page 67).

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Creator

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

120

Editing the Created Style

You can edit the Style you’ve created by using Realtime recording, Step recording

and/or Style Assembly.

Basic Operation for Editing Styles

1 Select a Style to be edited.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU

3 Call up the Style Creator/Edit display by pressing the [B] button.

4 Press the TAB[

√

][

] buttons to select a tab.

• Changing the Rhythmic Feel (GROOVE) ➤ See page 121

These versatile features give you a wide variety of tools for changing the

rhythmic feel of your created Style.

• Editing Data for each Channel (CHANNEL) ➤ See page 123

The editing features let you delete data as desired and apply quantize set-

tings for each channel in the Style data.

• Making Style File Format Settings (PARAMETER) ➤ See page 124

For playback of your created Style, you can decide how notes will be con-

verted and sounded for the accompaniment when changing chords in the

chord section of the keyboard.

5 Edit the selected Style.

Playing the Style During Style Assembly

While you are assembling a Style, you can play back the Style and select

the method of playback. Use the [6

π†

]/[7

π†

] (PLAY TYPE) buttons in

the Style Assembly display to select the playback method.

• SOLO

Mutes all but the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display. Any

channels set to ON in the RECORD display on the BASIC page are played

back simultaneously.

•ON

Plays back the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display. Any chan-

nels set to something other than OFF in the RECORD display on the BASIC

page are played back simultaneously.

• OFF

Mutes the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display.

Selecting a ﬁle saved to the

USB storage device.

You can also select a speciﬁed

ﬁle in the USB storage device by

pressing the [USB] button.

[USB] → [B] STYLE → [A]–[J]

Style Creator

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

121

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Changing the Rhythmic Feel (GROOVE)

The explanation here applies when you select the GROOVE tab in step 4 of “Basic

Operation for Editing Styles” (page 120).

1 Press the [A]/[B] button to select the edit menu (page 122).

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to edit the data.

For details on editable parameters, see page 122.

3 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the edits for each

display.

After the operation is completed, you can execute the edition and this but-

ton changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data if you’re not

satisﬁed with the Groove or Dynamics results. The Undo function only has

one level; only the previous operation can be undone.

4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display to

save your data.

Save the data in the Style Selection display (page 67).

CAUTION

The edited Style will be lost if

you change to another Style

or you turn the power off

without executing the Save

operation (page 67).

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Creator

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

122

■ GROOVE

This lets you add swing to the music or change the “feel” of the beat by making

subtle shifts in the timing (clock) of the Style. The Groove settings are applied to all

channels of the selected Style.

■ DYNAMICS

This changes the velocity/volume (or accent) of certain notes in the Style playback.

The Dynamics settings are applied to each channel or all channels of the selected

Style.

ORIGINAL BEAT Speciﬁes the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. In other

words, if “8 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to the 8th notes;

if “12 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets.

BEAT CONVERTER Actually changes the timing of the beats (speciﬁed in the ORIGINAL

BEAT parameter above) to the selected value. For example, when

ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “8 Beat” and BEAT CONVERTER is set to “12,”

all 8th notes in the section are shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The

“16A” and “16B” Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT

is set to “12 Beat” are variations on a basic 16th-note setting.

SWING Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of the back beats,

depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above. For example, if

the speciﬁed ORIGINAL BEAT value is “8 Beat,” the Swing parameter

will selectively delay the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th beats of each measure

to create a swing feel. The settings “A” through “E” produce different

degrees of swing, with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the most

pronounced.

FINE Selects a variety of Groove “templates” to be applied to the selected

section. The “PUSH” settings cause certain beats to be played early,

while “HEAVY” settings delay the timing of certain beats. The numbered

settings (2, 3, 4, 5) determine which beats are to be affected. All beats

up to the speciﬁed beat — but not including the ﬁrst beat — will be

played early or delayed (for example, the 2nd and 3rd beats, if “3” is

selected). In all cases, “A” types produce minimum effect, “B” types

produce medium effect, and “C” types produce maximum effect.

CHANNEL Selects the desired channel (part) to which Dynamics is to be applied.

ACCENT TYPE Determines the type of accent applied — in other words, which notes in

the part(s) are emphasized with the Dynamics settings.

STRENGTH Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be

applied. The higher the value, the stronger the effect.

EXPAND/COMP. Expands or compresses the range of velocity values. Values higher than

100% expand the dynamic range, while values lower than 100% com-

press it.

BOOST/CUT Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Values

above 100% boost the overall velocity, while values below 100%

reduce it.

Style Creator

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

123

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Editing Data for Each Channel (CHANNEL)

The explanation here applies when you select the CHANNEL tab in step 4 of

“Basic Operation for Editing Styles” (page 120).

1 Press the [A]/[B] button to select the edit menu (see below).

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]/[2

ππ

††

] (CHANNEL) buttons to select the channel to

be edited.

The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display.

3 Use the [4

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to edit the data.

For details on editable parameters, see below.

4 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the edits for each

display.

After the operation is completed, you can execute the edition and this but-

ton changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not

satisﬁed with the results of the edit. The Undo function only has one level;

only the previous operation can be undone.

5 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display to

save your data.

Save the data in the Style Selection display (page 67).

CAUTION

The edited Style will be lost if

you change to another Style

or you turn the power off

without executing the save

operation.

QUANTIZE Same as in the Song Creator (page 161), with the exception of the two

additional available parameters below.

Eighth notes with swing

Sixteenth notes with swing

VELOCITY

CHANGE

Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the speciﬁed channel, accord-

ing to the percentage speciﬁed here.

BAR COPY This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of

measures to another location within the speciﬁed channel. SOURCE

speciﬁes the ﬁrst (TOP) and last (LAST) measures in the region to be

copied. DEST speciﬁes the ﬁrst measure of the destination location, to

which the data is to be copied.

BAR CLEAR This function clears all data from the speciﬁed range of measures within

the selected channel.

REMOVE EVENT This function lets you remove speciﬁc events from the selected channel.

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Creator

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

124

Making Style File Format Settings (PARAMETER)

Special Parameter Settings Based on Style File

Format

The explanation here applies when you select the PARAMETER tab in step 4 of

“Basic Operation for Editing Styles” (page 120).

1 Press the [A]/[B] button to select the edit menu (page 125).

Editing of Style File Format data

is related only to note conver-

sion. Editing the rhythm chan-

nels has no effect.

The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of Yamaha’s auto

accompaniment (Style playback) know-how into a single

uniﬁed format. By using the Style Creator, you can take

advantage of the power of the SFF format and freely create

your own Styles.

The chart shown at left indicates the process by which the

Style is played back. (This does not apply to the rhythm

track.) These parameters can be set via the Style Creator

feature.

• Source Pattern

There are a variety of possibilities for Style playback

notes, depending on the particular root note and chord

type that are selected. The Style data is appropriately con-

verted depending on the chord changes you make during

your performance. This basic Style data that you create

with the Style Creator is referred to as the “Source Pat-

tern.”

• Note Transposition

This parameter group features two parameters that deter-

mine how the notes of the Source Pattern are to be con-

verted in response to chord changes.

• Other Settings

Using the parameters of this group, you can ﬁne-tune how

Style playback responds to the chords you play. For exam-

ple, the Note Limit parameter allows you to have the

Voices of the Style sound as realistic as possible by shift-

ing the pitch to an authentic range — ensuring that no

notes sound outside the natural range of the actual instru-

ment (e.g., very low notes of a piccolo sound).

Source Pattern

SOURCE ROOT

(Chord Root setting of a Source Pattern)

SOURCE CHORD

(Chord Type setting of a Source Pattern)

Note Transposition

NTR

(Note Transposition Rule applied to the

Chord Root change)

NTT

(Note Transposition Table applied to the

Chord Type change)

Chord change via the

chord section of the

keybaord.

Other Settings

HIGH KEY

(Upper limit of the octaves of the note

transposing caused by the Chord Root

change)

NOTE LIMIT (Note range in which the

note is sounded)

RTR

(Retrigger Rules that determine how

notes held through chord changes will be

handled)

Output

Style Creator

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

125

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]/[2

ππ

††

] (CHANNEL) buttons to select the channel to

be edited.

The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display.

3 Use the [3

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to edit the data.

For details on editable parameters, see below.

4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display to

save your data.

Save the data in the Style Selection display (page 67).

■ PLAY ROOT/CHORD

These settings determine the original key of the source pattern (i.e., the key used

when recording the pattern). The default setting of CM7 (with a Play Root of “C”

and a Chord Type of “M7”), is automatically selected whenever the preset data is

deleted prior to recording a new Style, regardless of the Source Root and Chord

included in the preset data. When you change Source Root/Chord from the default

CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also change,

depending on the newly selected chord type.

When the Play Root is C:

■ NTR (Note Transposition Rule)

This determines the relative position of the root note in the chord, when converted

from the Source Pattern in response to chord changes.

CAUTION

The edited Style will be lost if

you change to another Style

or you turn the power off

without executing the Save

operation.

Auditioning Your Style with a

Speciﬁc Chord

Normally in the Style Creator,

you can hear your original Style-

in-process with the Source Pat-

tern. However, there is a way to

hear it played by a speciﬁc chord

and root. To do this, set NTR to

“Root Fixed,” NTT to “Bypass,”

and NTT BASS to “OFF” then

change the newly displayed

“Play Root” and “Play Chord”

parameters to the desired set-

tings.

ROOT TRANS

(Root Transpose)

When the root note is transposed, the

pitch relationship between notes is

maintained. For example, the notes

C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become

F3, A3 and C4 when they are trans-

posed to F. Use this setting for chan-

nels that contain melody lines.

ROOT FIXED The note is kept as close as possible to

the previous note range. For example,

the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of

C become C3, F3 and A3 when they

are transposed to F. Use this setting for

channels that contain chord parts.

CR CR

CR CCR

CCR

RRCCC

CC RC

(9)(9)

CR CC

(11)

CR C CR

CmM

CC RC

CCC

CC RC C

CmM

(9)

CCR

Cdim

CR R RC

CCR

Cdim

CCC C

(9)

CRC

CRC CR

(#11)

CCC

C sus

CRC CR

CRC C CR

CCC C CR

(9)

CCC C RC

(9)

CRC

RCR

Caug

CRC C RC

CRC C CR

(#11)

CCC CR

add9

CRC CC

(13)

CCC

(b9)

1+8

1+5

CCC

RCC

(#9)

CRC

RCC

C aug

CRC CRR

CM aug

CCCR

RCC

(b13)

CR CC

Csus

CCR CR

1+2+5

C = Chord notes C, R = Recommended notes

When playing a

C major chord.

When playing an F

major chord.

When playing a C

major chord.

When playing an

F major chord.

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Creator

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

126

■ NTT (Note Transposition Table)

This sets the note transposition table for the source pattern.

■ NTT BASS ON/OFF

The channels for which this is set to ON will be played back by the bass root note,

when the on-bass chord is recognized by the instrument.

■ HIGH KEY

This sets the highest key (upper octave limit) of the note transposition for the chord

root change. Any notes calculated to be higher than the highest key are transposed

down to the next lowest octave. This setting is available only when the NTR param-

eter (page 125) is set to “Root Trans.”

BYPASS When NTR is set to ROOT FIXED, the transposition table used does not

do any note conversion. When NTR is set to ROOT TRANS, the table

used only converts the root note.

MELODY Suitable for melody line transposition. Use this for melody channels

such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2.

CHORD Suitable for chord transposition. Use this for the Chord 1 and Chord 2

channels, especially when they contain piano or guitar-like chordal

parts.

MELODIC MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this

table lowers the third interval in the scale by a semitone. When the

chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third interval is

raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for melody

channels of Sections which respond only to major/minor chords, such

as Intros and Endings.

MELODIC MINOR

5th

In addition to the Melodic Minor transposition above, augmented and

diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source Pattern.

HARMONIC

MINOR

When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this

table lowers the third and sixth intervals in the scale by a semitone.

When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor

third and ﬂatted sixth intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are

not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond

only to major/minor chords, such as Intros and Endings.

HARMONIC

MINOR 5th

In addition to the Harmonic Minor transposition above, augmented and

diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern.

NATURAL MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this

table lowers the third, sixth and seventh intervals in the scale by a

semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the

minor third, ﬂatted sixth and ﬂatted seventh intervals are raised by a

semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of

Sections which respond only to a Major/minor chord such as Intros and

Endings.

NATURAL MINOR

5th

In addition to the Natural Minor transposition above, augmented and

diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern.

DORIAN When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this

table lowers the third and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone.

When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor

third and ﬂatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes

are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond

only to a Major/minor chord such as Intros and Endings.

DORIAN 5th In addition to the Dorian transposition above, augmented and dimin-

ished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern.

C3-E3-G3

F3-A3-C4

F#M

F#2-A#2-C#3

C#M

C#3-F3-G#3

Example — When the highest key is F.

Root changes

Notes played

Style Creator

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

127

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

■ NOTE LIMIT

This sets the note range (highest and lowest notes) for voices recorded to the style

channels. By judicious setting of this range, you can ensure that the voices sound

as realistic as possible — in other words, that no notes outside the natural range

are sounded (e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo sounds). The actual notes that

sound are automatically shifted to the set range.

■ RTR (Retrigger Rule)

These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change

pitch in response to chord changes.

STOP The notes stop sounding.

PITCH SHIFT The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type

of the new chord.

PITCH SHIFT TO

ROOT

The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root

of the new chord.

RETRIGGER The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding

to the next chord.

RETRIGGER TO

ROOT

The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next

chord. However, the octave of the new note remains the same.

E3-G3-C4

High Limit

Low Limit

F3-A3-C4

C#M

F3-G#3-C#4

Example — When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4.

Root changes

Notes played

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

128

The Multi Pads

Multi Pad Creating (Multi Pad Cre-

ator)

This feature lets you create your original Multi Pad phrases, and also allows you to

edit existing Multi Pad phrases to create your own.

Multi Pad Realtime Recording

1 Select a Multi Pad Bank to be edited or created (page 130).

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU

3 Press the [C] button to call up the Multi Pad Creator display.

4 Press the TAB [

√

] button to select the RECORD tab.

5 Press any of the [A], [B], [F], and [G] buttons to select a Multi Pad to

be edited or created.

If you want to create the Multi Pad data from scratch, press the [C] button to

call up an empty bank.

6 Press the [H] (REC) button to enter the recording standby status for

the Multi Pad selected in step 5.

7 Start recording.

Recording begins automatically as soon as you play the keyboard.

You can also start recording by pressing the STYLE CONTROL [START/

STOP] button. This lets you record as much silence as you want before the

start of the Multi Pad phrase.

If Chord Match is set to on for the Multi Pad to be recorded, you should

record using the notes of the C major seventh scale (C, D, E, G, A and B).

8 Stop recording.

Press the [H] (STOP) button or the panel MULTI PAD [STOP] button or the

STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to stop recording when you've ﬁn-

ished playing the phrase.

9 Listen back to your newly recorded phrase, by pressing the appropri-

ate MULTI PAD button, [1]–[4]. To re-record the phrase, repeat steps

6–8.

Reference to Quick Guide pages

The Multi Pads .............................................................................. page 52

CRC CRC

C = Chord note

C, R = Recommended note

o ensure t

at your repeate

rhythmic phrases play back in a

perfect loop, be careful to stop

recording right on the very last

beat of the phrase, just before the

“one” of the next measure. If it is

difﬁcult to get a good loop, you

may want to use the Step Record

functions on the EDIT page.

Multi Pad Creating (Multi Pad Creator)

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

129

The Multi Pads

10 Turn Repeat of each pad On or Off by using the [1

ππ

††

] - [4

ππ

††

] but-

tons.

If the Repeat parameter is on for the selected pad, playback of the corre-

sponding pad will continue until the MULTI PAD [STOP] button is pressed.

If the Repeat parameter is off for the selected pad, playback will end auto-

matically as soon as the end of the phrase is reached.

When you press the Multi Pads of which the Repeat is turned on during Song

or Style playback, playback will start and repeat in sync with the beat.

11 Turn Chord Match of each pad On or Off by using the [5

ππ

††

]–

ππ

††

] buttons.

If the Chord Match parameter is on for the selected pad, the corresponding

pad is played back according to the chord speciﬁed in the chord section of

the keyboard generated by turning [ACMP] on, or speciﬁed in the LEFT

voice section of the keyboard generated by turning [LEFT] on (when turning

the [ACMP] off).

12 Press the [D] button, then enter a name for each Multi Pad by

(page 130).

13 Press the [I] button, then save the Multi Pad data as a Bank contain-

ing a set of four Pads to the USER drive or USB storage device

(page 64).

Multi Pad Step Recording (EDIT)

Step Recording can be executed in the EDIT page. After selecting a Multi Pad in

step 5 of the Multi Pad Realtime Recording on page 128, press the TAB [

√

][

]

buttons to select the EDIT tab. The EDIT page indicates the Event list that lets you

record notes with absolutely precise timing. This Step Recording procedure is

essentially the same as that for Song Recording (pages 148–157), with the excep-

tion of the points listed below:

•There is no menu for switching channels, since Multi Pads contain data for only a

single channel.

• In the Multi Pad Creator, only the channel events can be entered and the System

Exclusive messages can be edited. Chord and Lyrics events are not available. You

can switch between the two types of Event Lists by pressing the [F] button.

cate

lowing icon (hand on fretboard)

are created with special note

transpositions to produce the

natural chord voicing of the gui-

tar. Because of this, if the Chord

Match setting is set to off, the

Multi Pads may not sound appro-

priately.

Multi Pad Editing (Multi Pad Creator)

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

130

The Multi Pads

Multi Pad Editing (Multi Pad Creator)

1 Press the MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT] button to call up the Multi

Pad Bank selection display, then select a Bank to be edited on the

USER drive.

2 Press the [8

††

] button to call up the [MULTI PAD EDIT] display, then

select a Pad to be edited by pressing any of the [A], [B], [F], and [G]

buttons.

3 Edit each of the Multi Pads as desired.

• Naming

Press the [1

†

] button then change the name of each Multi Pad (page 70).

• Copying

Press the [3

†

] button, select the Multi Pad to be copied, select the desti-

nation location, then execute the Copy operation by pressing the [4

†

]

button (page 68).

• Deleting

Press the [5

†

] button then delete the unnecessary Multi Pad (page 69).

The number above the Pad name corresponds

to the MULTI PAD [1]–[4] buttons.

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

131

Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory

The Registration Memory function allows you to save (or “register”) virtually all

panel settings to a Registration Memory button, and then instantly recall your cus-

tom panel settings by pressing a single button. The registered settings for eight Reg-

istration Memory buttons should be saved as a single Bank (ﬁle).

Registering and Saving Custom

Panel Setups

Registering Custom Panel Setups

1 Set up the panel controls (such as Voice, Style, effects, and so on) as

desired.

Refer to the Data List for a list of parameters that can be registered with the

Registration Memory function. The Data List is available at the Yamaha

website. (See page 5.)

2 Press the REGISTRATION MEMORY [MEMORY] button. The display

for selecting the items to be registered appears.

Only the items selected here will be registered.

3 Press the [2

ππ

††

]–[7

ππ

††

] buttons to select items.

To cancel the operation, press the [I] (CANCEL) button.

4 Enter or remove the checkmark in the box of the item to determine

whether the item should be registered or not, by pressing the

ππ

††

] button.

5 Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons to register

your settings.

It is recommended that you select a button whose lamp is not lit in red or

green. Buttons that are lit in red or green, already contain the panel setup

data. Any panel setup previously registered to the selected REGISTRATION

MEMORY button (lamp lights in green or red) will be erased and replaced

by the new settings.

6 Register various panel setups to other buttons by repeating steps 1–5.

About the lamp status:

Off.............. no data registered

On (green)...data registered, but

not currently selected

On (red)......data registered, and

currently selected

Deleting an unneeded panel

setup

See page 133.

Deleting all eight current

panel setups

To delete all the eight current

panel setups, turn the [POWER]

button ON while holding the B5

key (right-most B key on the key-

board).

When recalling registration set-

ups, you can also select the

items to be recalled or not, even

if you selected all items when

registering (page 134).

Recalling the Registered Panel Setups

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

132

Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

Saving the Registered Panel Setups

You can save all the eight registered panel setups as a single Registration Memory

Bank ﬁle.

1 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [–] buttons simultaneously to call up

the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display.

2 Press the [6

††

] button to save the Bank ﬁle (page 67).

Recalling the Registered Panel Setups

1 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [–] buttons simultaneously to call up

the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display.

2 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a bank.

3 Press one of the green-lit numbered buttons ([1]–[8]) in the Registra-

tion Memory section.

Bank 1

Bank 2

Bank 3

Bank 4

1 2

out reca

lli

ng setups

rom a

USB storage device

When recalling the setups

including Song/Style ﬁle selec-

tion from a USB storage device,

make sure that the appropriate

USB storage device including the

registered Song/Style is con-

nected into the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal.

Recalling the Registered Panel Setups

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

133

Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

Deleting an Unneeded Panel Setup/Naming a

Panel Setup

The panel setups can be deleted or named individually as desired.

1 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [–] buttons simultaneously to call up

the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display.

2 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a bank to be edited.

3 Press the [8

††

] (EDIT) button to call up the REGISTRATION EDIT Dis-

play.

4 Edit the panel setups.

• Deleting a panel setup

Press the [5

†

] button to delete a panel setup (page 69).

• Renaming a panel setup

Press the [1

†

] button to rename a panel setup (page 70).

5 Press the [8

ππ

] (UP) button to return to the REGISTRATION BANK

Selection display.

Parameter Lock

You can “lock” speciﬁc parameters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.) to make

them selectable only via the panel control — in other words, instead of via

Registration Memory, One Touch Setting, Music Finder, Song or incoming

MIDI data, etc.

1 Call up the Parameter Lock display.

[FUNCTION]

→→

[J] UTILITY

→→

TAB [

√

][

]

→→

CONFIG 1

→→

[B] 3 PARAM-

ETER LOCK

2 Select the desired parameter by using the [1

ππ

††

]–[7

ππ

††

]buttons,

then lock it with the [8

ππ

] (OK) button.

he number above the

ﬁ

le name corresponds

o the REGISTRATION

EMORY [1]–[8] but-

ons.

Recalling the Registered Panel Setups

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

134

Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

Disabling Recall of Speciﬁc Items

(Freeze Function)

Registration Memory lets you recall all the panel setups you made with a single

button press. However, there may be times that you want certain items to remain

the same, even when switching Registration Memory setups. For example, you may

want to switch Voices or effect settings while keeping the same accompaniment

Style. This is where the Freeze function comes in handy. It lets you maintain the set-

tings of certain items and leave them unchanged, even when selecting other Regis-

tration Memory buttons.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET →

TAB [

√

][

] FREEZE

2 Press the [2

ππ

††

]–[7

ππ

††

] buttons to select items.

3 Enter checkmarks for the items to be “Frozen” (i.e., to remain

unchanged), by pressing the [8

ππ

††

] button.

4 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the operation display.

Press the [FREEZE] button on the panel to turn the Freeze function on.

Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in

Order — Registration Sequence

As convenient as the Registration Memory buttons are, there may be times during a

performance when you want to quickly switch between settings — without having

to take your hands from the keyboard. The convenient Registration Sequence func-

tion lets you call up the eight setups in any order you specify, by simply using the

TAB [

√

][

] buttons or the pedal as you play.

1 Select the desired Registration Memory bank to program a sequence

(page 132).

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET →

TAB [

√

][

] REGISTRATION SEQUENCE

3 If you intend to use a pedal to switch Registration Memory settings,

specify here how the pedal will be used — to advance or to reverse

through the sequence.

Use the [C] button to select the pedal for advancing through the sequence.

Use the [D] button to select the pedal for reversing through the sequence.

CAUTION

Settings in the REGISTRATION

FREEZE display are automati-

cally saved to the instrument

when you exit from this dis-

play. However, if you turn the

power off without exiting

from this display, the settings

will be lost.

Recalling the Registered Panel Setups

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

135

Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

4 Use the [E] button to determine how Registration Sequence behaves

when reaching the end of the sequence (SEQUENCE END).

STOP .....................Pressing the TAB [

] button or the “advance” pedal has

no effect. The sequence is “stopped.”

TOP .......................The sequence starts again at the beginning.

NEXT BANK...........The sequence automatically moves to the beginning of

the next Registration Memory Bank in the same folder.

5 Program the Sequence order.

The numbers shown at the lower part of the display correspond to the REG-

ISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons on the panel.

Program the Sequence order from left to right.

Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] button on the

panel, then press the [6

ππ

††

] (INSERT) button to input the number.

• Replacing the number

Press the [5

π†

] (REPLACE) button to replace the number at the cursor

position with the currently selected Registration Memory number.

• Deleting the number

Press the [7

π†

] (DELETE) button to delete the number at the cursor

position.

• Deleting all numbers

Press the [8

π†

] (CLEAR) button to delete all numbers in the sequence.

6 Press the [F] button to turn the Registration Sequence function on.

Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then the [EXIT] button to return to

the Main display and conﬁrm whether the Registration Memory num-

bers are called up according to the sequence programmed above.

• Use the TAB [

] button to call up the Registration Memory numbers in the

order of the sequence, or use the TAB [

√

] button to call them up in

reverse order. The TAB [

√

][

] buttons can only be used for Registration

Sequence when the Main display is called up.

• When pedal operation has been set in step 3, you can use a pedal to select

the Registration Memory numbers in order. The pedal can be used for Reg-

istration Sequence no matter which display is called up (except for the dis-

play in step 3).

Saving the Registration Sequence Settings

The settings for the Sequence order and how Registration Sequence behaves when

reaching the end of the sequence (SEQUENCE END) are included as part of the

Registration Memory Bank ﬁle. To store your newly programmed Registration

Sequence, save the current Registration Memory Bank ﬁle.

1 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [–] buttons simultaneously to call up

the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display.

2 Press the [6

††

] button to save the Bank ﬁle (page 67).

CAUTION

Settings in the REGISTRATION

SEQUENCE display are auto-

matically saved to the instru-

ment when you exit from this

display. However, if you turn

the power off without exiting

from this display, the settings

will be lost.

Returning to the ﬁrst

Sequence in one action

In the Main display, press the

TAB [

√

] and [

] buttons simul-

taneously. This cancels the cur-

rently selected Sequence

number (the box indicator at the

top right goes out). The ﬁrst

Sequence will be selected by

pressing one of the TAB [

√

][

]

buttons or by pressing the pedal.

The Registration Sequence is indicated at the top

right of the Main display, letting you conﬁrm the

currently selected number.

CAUTION

Keep in mind that all Registra-

tion Sequence data is lost

when changing Registration

Memory Banks, unless you’ve

saved it with the Registration

Memory Bank ﬁle.

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

136

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Compatible Song Types

The PSR-OR700 can play back the following Song types.

Preset Songs

Songs in the Song Selection PRESET display.

Your Own Recorded Songs

These are Songs which you’ve recorded (page 43, page 143) and saved to the

USER/USB display. (USB is available when you connect a USB storage device such

as a USB ﬂash memory/ﬂoppy disk drive to the instrument.)

Commercially Available Song Data

A variety of song data for the instrument can be downloaded from the Yamaha

website, and even more titles are available commercially as Disk Songs. Disk

Songs are available when you connect the optional ﬂoppy disk drive to the instru-

ment. The instrument is compatible with the Song disks (ﬂoppy disks) that bear the

following marks:

Reference to Quick Guide Pages

Practicing with the Preset Songs .................................................. page 36

Playing Back and Listening to Songs Before Practicing ............ page 36

Displaying Music Notation (Score) .......................................... page 39

Muting the Right- or Left-hand Part Viewing the Score ............. page 40

Practicing by Using the Repeat Playback Function .................. page 42

Recording Your Performance.................................................... page 43

Singing Along with Song playback (Karaoke) or Your

Own Performance.......................................................................... page 57

Singing with the Lyrics Display................................................ page 57

Convenient Functions for Karaoke........................................... page 58

Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your

Own Performance ................................................................... page 58

Before using a USB storage

device, be sure to read “Han-

dling the USB Storage Device

(USB Flash Memory/Floppy

Disk, etc)” on page 23.

Before using a ﬂoppy disk and

the disk slot, be sure to read

“Handling ﬂoppy disks” on

page 22.

Commercially available music

data is subject to protection by

mercially available data is strictly

prohibited, except for your own

personal use.

See page 176 for information on

the types of Song data that can

be played on the instrument.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Operations for Song Playback

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

137

Operations for Song Playback

This section explains detailed operations and functions related to Song playback

which are not covered in the “Quick Guide.”

■ Starting/Stopping a Song

Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start Song playback, and press

the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop. In addition, there are several other conve-

nient ways to start/stop a Song.

Starting Playback

Synchro Start

You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard.

While playback is stopped, while holding down the SONG [J] (STOP) button,

press the [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button.

To cancel the Synchro Start function, while holding down the SONG [J] (STOP)

button, press the [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button.

Tap function

This useful function lets you press the [TAP TEMPO] button to tap out the tempo

and automatically start the Song at that tapped speed. Simply tap (press/release) the

button (four times for a 4/4 time signature) while the instrument is in Synchro Start

standby mode, and the Song playback starts automatically at the tempo you

tapped.

Fade In

The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to produce smooth fade-ins when starting

the Song playback. To produce fade-ins, press the [FADE IN/OUT] button while

playback is stopped and then press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to

start playback.

Stopping Playback

Fade Out

The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to produce smooth fade-outs when stop-

ping the Song playback. Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button at the beginning of the

phrase you want to fade out.

Depending on the particular

Song data, the Style will also

play back at the same time.

Set the Fade In/Out time

The times of the fade-in and fade-out can be set independently. For details,

refer to page 105.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Operations for Song Playback

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

138

■ Top/Pause/Rewind/Fast Forward

Moving to the top position of the Song

Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button, regardless of whether the Song is stopped or

playing back.

Pausing the Song

Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button during Song playback. Press the

SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button again and the Song will resume from the

current position.

Moving back and forth (rewind and fast forward)

1 Press the SONG [G] (REW) or SONG [H] (FF) button to move back

and forth (rewind and fast forward).

It calls up a pop-up window showing the current measure number in the

Main display.

For Songs containing Phrase Marks, you can use the [G/H] (REW/FF)

buttons to navigate through the Phrase Marks in the Song. If you don’t want

to set the Song position by the phrase marks, press the [E] button and select

“BAR” in the window showing the Song position.

2 Press the [EXIT] button to close the pop-up window showing the cur-

rent measure number (or Phrase Mark number).

■ Repeat Playback/Chain Playback

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING

2 Set the parameters related to the Repeat Playback by using the [H]/[I]

buttons. The available parameters are shown below.

Phrase Mark:

Phrase Mark is a pre-pro-

grammed marker in certain Song

data, which speciﬁes a certain

location (set of measures) in the

Song.

REPEAT MODE OFF

Plays through the selected Song, then stops.

SINGLE

Plays through the selected Song repeatedly.

ALL

Continues playback through all the Songs in the folder

containing the current Song repeatedly.

RANDOM

Randomly and repeatedly plays back all Songs in the

folder containing the current Song.

PHRASE MARK REPEAT For Songs containing Phrase Marks, you can set Repeat

Playback to “ON” or “OFF.” When this is on, the part corre-

sponding to the speciﬁed Phrase Mark number is repeatedly

played back. The steps for specifying the Phrase Mark num-

ber are the same as in the steps 1–2 of the section “Moving

back and forth (rewind and fast forward)” (see above).

For Songs not containing

Phrase Marks

For Songs containing

Phrase Mark

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Operations for Song Playback

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

139

■ Queuing the Next Playback Song

While a Song is playing back, you can queue up the next Song for playback. This is

convenient for chaining it to the next Song smoothly during stage performance.

Select the Song you want play next in the Song Selection display, while a Song is

playing back.

The “NEXT” indication appears at the upper right of the corresponding Song name.

To cancel this setting, press the [8

†

] (Cancel) button.

■ Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with the

Song Playback

When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, channels 9–16 in the Song

data are replaced with style channels — allowing you to play the accompaniment

parts of the Song yourself. Try playing chords along with the Song playback as

shown in the instructions below.

1 Select a Song (page 36).

2 Select a Style (page 46).

3 Press the STYLE CONTROL [ACMP] button to turn on the Auto

Accompaniment function.

4 Press the STYLE CONTROL [SYNC START] button to enable standby

— letting you simultaneously start the accompaniment as soon as you

start playing.

5 Press the SONG [FF

/KK

] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback.

6 Play chords along with the Song.

The chord name is indicated in the Main display. To return to the Main dis-

play, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then press the [EXIT] button.

When the Song playback is stopped, the Style playback is also stopped at the same

time.

•Tempo for playing back a Song and a Style at the same time

When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, the tempo value set in

the Song is automatically used.

Parameter Lock

You can “lock” speciﬁc parame-

ters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.)

to make them selectable only via

the panel controls (page 133).

For songs without chord data,

the chord name will not be dis-

played in the Main display dur-

ing Song playback.

Playing Songs with the Quick Start function

With the default settings, the Quick Start function is turned on. On some

commercially available Song data, certain settings related to the Song

(such as voice selection, volume, etc.) are recorded to the ﬁrst measure,

before the actual note data. When Quick Start is set to “ON,” the instru-

ment reads all initial non-note data of the Song at the highest possible

speed, then automatically slows down to the appropriate tempo at the ﬁrst

note. This allows you to start playback as quickly as possible, with a mini-

mum pause for reading of data. When Quick Start is set to “ON,” a Song is

played back directly from the ﬁrst note (which may be in the middle of a

measure). If you want to play from the beginning of the measure that has

silence prior to the ﬁrst note, turn Quick Start “OFF.”

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING

2 Press the [7

††

] (QUICK START) buttons to turn the Quick Start

“OFF.”

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Adjusting the Volume Balance and Voice Combination, etc. (MIXING CONSOLE)

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

140

Adjusting the Volume Balance and

Voice Combination, etc. (MIXING

CONSOLE)

You can set the mixing-related parameters of a Song. Refer to the section “Adjust-

able items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE display” on page 85. Call up the

“SONG CH 1–8” or “SONG CH 9–16” display in step 3 of the Basic Procedure in

“Editing the Volume Balance and Voice Combination (MIXING CONSOLE)” on

page 84. Below are two operation examples.

Adjusting the Volume Balance of Each Channel

1 Select a Song (page 36).

2 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button to call up the MIXING CON-

SOLE display.

3 Select the [VOL/VOICE] tab by pressing the TAB [

√

][

] buttons.

4 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button repeatedly to call up the display

of “SONG CH 1–8” or “SONG CH 9–16.”

5 Press the [J] button to select the “VOLUME.”

6 Adjust the volume balance of each channel by using the [1

ππ

††

]–

ππ

††

] buttons.

7 You can save the volume settings to the Song in the Setup operation

of the SETUP (page 162).

Make sure to checkmark the “VOLUME” item in step 2 of the Setup proce-

dure.

Reading Song data automatically when inserting a USB

storage device

You can have the instrument automatically call up the ﬁrst Song (not con-

tained in a folder) on a USB storage device, as soon as the device is con-

nected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

] MEDIA

2 Press the [3

ππ

]/[4

ππ

] (SONG AUTO OPEN) button to select “ON.”

About the [SONG CH 1–8]/

[SONG CH 9–16] displays

A Song consists of 16 separate

channels. Separate settings can

be made for each of the 16 chan-

nels in the MIXING CONSOLE

display. Adjust the parameters in

the SONG CH 1-8 or SONG CH

9-16 display respectively. Usu-

ally, CH 1 is assigned to the [TR

1] button, CH 2 is assigned to

the [TR 2] button, and CH 3-16

are assigned to the [EXTRA TR]

button, respectively.

Press the [C]/[H] (VOICE) but-

tons in step 5 to select the Voice

which you want to change. Then,

press one of the [1

π†

] to

π†

] buttons to call up the

Voice selection display for the

channel.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Practicing Songs with the Guide Functions

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

141

Changing Voices

1–4 The operation steps are the same as in the “Adjusting the Volume

Balance of Each Channel” (see page 140).

5 Press the [H] button to select the “VOICE.”

6 Press one of the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to call up the Voice selec-

tion display for the channel.

7 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Voice.

8 You can save the changed Voice selection to the Song in the Setup

operation (page 162).

Make sure to checkmark the “VOICE” item in step 2 of the Setup procedure.

Practicing Songs with the Guide

Functions

The Guide functions provide convenient learning and practicing tools to help you

master the instrument. By pressing the [SCORE] button, you can have the notation

of the song displayed, showing the notes you should play and when you should

play them, for ease in learning.

Selecting the Guide Function Type

1 Call up the setting display:

[FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING

2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired Guide function type. The

following types are available.

3 Select a song, call up the Score display (by pressing the [SCORE] but-

ton), then play the keyboard.

Saving the Guide settings in

the SONG SETTING display

You can save the Guide settings

as a part of the Song data

(page 162). For Songs to which

Guide settings have been saved,

the Guide function will be auto-

matically turned on and the

related settings will be recalled

when the Song is selected.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Practicing Songs with the Guide Functions

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

142

For Keyboard Performance

Follow Lights

When this is selected, Song playback pauses, waiting for you to play the notes cor-

rectly. When you play the correct notes, Song playback continues. Follow Lights

was developed for the Yamaha Clavinova series. This function is used for practicing

purposes, with built-in lamps on the Clavinova keyboard indicating the notes to be

played. Even though the PSR-OR700 does not have these lamps, you can use the

same function by following the indications in the displayed notation with the Song

Score function.

Any Key

With this function, you can play the melody of a Song just by pressing a single key

(any key is OK) in time with the rhythm. Song playback pauses and waits for you to

play any key. Simply play a key on the keyboard in time with music and the Song

playback continues.

For Singing

Karao-key

This function lets you control the Song playback timing with just one ﬁnger, while

you sing along. Song playback pauses, waiting for you to sing. Simply play a key

on the keyboard (any key is OK) and the Song playback continues. (For this func-

tion, the notes of the keyboard do not sound.)

Turning playback channels of the Song on and off

A Song consists of 16 separate channels. You can independently turn each

channel of the selected Song playback on or off. Usually, CH 1 is assigned to

[TR 1] button, CH 2 is assigned to [TR 2] button, and CH 3–16 are assigned

to the [EXTRA TR] button.

1 Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the Song CHANNEL

ON/OFF display.

If the display shown below does not appear, press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF]

button again.

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to turn each channel on or off.

If you want to play back only one particular channel (muting all other chan-

nels), press and hold down one of the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons correspond-

ing to the desired channel. To cancel solo playback, press the same button

again.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

143

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

You can record your own performances and save them to the User tab display or a

USB storage device. Several different recording methods are available:

Quick Recording which lets you record performance conveniently and quickly,

Multi track Recording which lets you record several different parts to multiple

channels, and Step Recording which lets you enter notes one by one. And since the

recorded data is MIDI, you can easily edit your songs, too.

For details on MIDI, see page 174, “What is MIDI?”

Recording Methods

There are three methods as shown below.

You can also edit Songs after they’ve been recorded (page 158).

For example, you can edit speciﬁc notes one by one, or you can use the Punch In/

Out function to re-record a speciﬁc part.

Quick Recording

This lets you conveniently and quickly record your performance.

1 Press the SONG [REC] and SONG [JJ

] (STOP) buttons simulta-

neously.

A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording.

Interna

memory

(

User ta

displays) capacity

The internal memory capacity of

the instrument is about 560KB.

This capacity applies to all ﬁle

types, including Voice, Style,

Song, and Registration data ﬁles.

Quick Recording

➤ See below.

This convenient and simple recording method lets you quickly

record your performance — useful, for example, in recording

solo piano pieces. You can record to the [TR 1 (R)] or [TR 2 (L)]

button, and also to the [EXTRA TR (STYLE)] track, which can be

used for recording at the same time.

Multi track Recording

➤ page 145

This lets you record a whole Song including several different

instrument parts, to create the sound of a full band or orchestra.

Record the performance of each instrument part one by one

and create fully orchestrated compositions. You can also record

over already-recorded parts of an existing Song (Preset Song or

a Song on USB storage device) with your own performance.

Step Recording

➤ page 148

This method lets you compose your performance by “writing”

it down one event at a time. This is a non-realtime, manual

recording method – similar to writing music notation onto

paper. You can input notes, chords and other events one by

one (realtime performance is not needed).

ecor

tep

ecor

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

144

2 Make the desired panel settings for your keyboard performance.

Below are some example settings you may want to try.

• Recording the RIGHT 2 and/or LEFT parts

The [RIGHT 2] and/or [LEFT] keyboard parts should be turned on. Select

the voice for each keyboard part (RIGHT 2, LEFT) by calling up the Voice

selection display (page 79, page 80).

• Recording Styles

1 Select a Style (page 46).

2 Set the tempo for recording by pressing the TEMPO [–] [+] buttons, as

necessary.

• Using Registration Memory panel setups

Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1–8] buttons (page 131).

3 While holding the SONG [REC] button, press the SONG TRACK but-

tons to be recorded.

• Recording your performance

Press the SONG [TR 1] button for the right-hand part recording, and/or the

SONG [TR 2] button for the left-hand part recording.

• Recording Styles/Multi Pads

Press the SONG [EXTRA TR (STYLE)] button.

• Recording your performance and the Style/Multi Pad playback

simultaneously

Press the SONG [TR 1]/[TR 2] buttons and the SONG [EXTRA TR (STYLE)]

button.

4 Start recording.

There are several different ways you can start recording.

• Starting by playing the keyboard

If you’ve selected the SONG [TR 1]/[TR 2] buttons in step 3, play in the

right-hand section of the keyboard (page 78). If you’ve selected the SONG

[EXTRA TR (STYLES)] button in step 3, play in the left-hand (chord) section

of the keyboard (page 107). Recording begins automatically as soon as

you play a note on the keyboard.

• Starting by pressing the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button

If you start recording in this way, “empty” data is recorded until you play a

note on the keyboard. This is useful for starting a Song with a short one-or

two-beat pick-up or lead-in.

• Starting by pressing the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button.

In this case the rhythm parts (channels) of the Style begin playing back and

recording starts simultaneously.

The RIGHT 2 and/or LEFT parts

are recorded onto separate

tracks.

Using the metronome

You can record your perfor-

mance while playing back the

metronome (page 34). However,

the metronome sound is not

recorded.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

145

5 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop recording.

When recording is ﬁnished, a message prompting you to save the recorded

performance data appears. To close the message, press the [EXIT] button.

See step 7 for instructions on saving your recording.

6 Listen to your newly recorded performance. Press the SONG [F/

K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to play back the performance you just

recorded.

7 Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display

for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 67).

Multi Track Recording

A Song consists of 16 separate channels. With this method, you can record data to

each channel independently, one by one. Both Keyboard and Style parts can be

recorded.

1 Press the SONG [REC] and SONG [J]

(STOP) buttons simultaneously.

A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up

for recording.

Select Voices for recording the keyboard

parts (RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, and/or LEFT)

(page 30, page 79, page 80). Select a Style

and a Multi Pad Bank for recording also,

as necessary (page 46, page 52).

Pausing and restarting your

recording

To pause recording, press the

SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE)

button during recording. To

restart recording, follow the

operations shown below.

•For recording to [TR 1]/[TR 2],

press the SONG [F/K]

(PLAY/PAUSE) button.

•For recording to [EXTRA TR],

press the STYLE CONTROL

[SYNC START] button, then

play in the chord section of the

keyboard.

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 67).

About Channels

See page 147.

Recording the keyboard RIGHT 2

part to the channel 2

Press the PART SELECT [RIGHT 2]

button to call up the Voice selection

display, and select a Voice for the

RIGHT 2 part. Also be sure to turn the

PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 2] button on.

Example

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

146

2 While holding the SONG [REC] button,

press the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to

set the desired channels to “REC.”

Normally, the keyboard parts should be

recorded to channels 1–4, the Multi Pads

should be recorded to 5–8, and the Styles

should be recorded to channels 9–16. To

cancel the channel selection, press the SONG [REC] button again.

3 Use the [C]/[D] buttons to select the

desired part for the channel to be

recorded.

This determines which part — keyboard

or Style (Rhythm 1/2, Bass, etc.) or Multi

Pad — is recorded to each of the channels

selected in step 2. Default channel/part

assignments are shown in the section

“About Song channels” (page 147).

To close the Part selection display, press

the [EXIT] button.

4 Start recording.

The method for starting is the same as in step 4 of Quick Recording

(page 144).

5 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop recording.

When recording is ﬁnished, a message appears prompting you to save the

recorded performance appears. To close the message, press the [EXIT] but-

ton. For instructions on saving Song data, see step 8.

6 Listen to your newly recorded performance. Press the SONG [F/

K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to playback the performance you just

recorded.

Sett

ng a

e 5–16 c

an-

nels to “REC” simultaneously

While holding the SONG [REC]

button, press the SONG [EXTRA

TR] button.

When selecting the MIDI part

• Setting a single channel to

MIDI

All incoming data received via

any of the MIDI channels 1-16

is recorded. When using an

external MIDI keyboard or

controller to record, this lets

you record without having to

set the MIDI transmit channel

on the external device.

• Setting several channels to

MIDI

When using an external MIDI

keyboard or controller to

record, this records data only

over the set MIDI channel

— meaning the external

device must also be set to the

same channel.

Recording each channel with

the same tempo

Use the Metronome function

(page 34) to record each channel

with the same tempo. Keep in

mind that the metronome sound

is not recorded.

Pausing and restarting your

recording

See page 144.

While holding the SONG [REC] but-

ton, press the [2

] button to set the

channel 2 to “REC.”

Press the [D] button to select

the “RIGHT2.”

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

147

7 To record another channel, repeat steps 2 through 6.

8 Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display

for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 67).

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 67).

About Song channels

Default channel/part assignments are shown below.

About keyboard parts

There are three keyboard parts, RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 and LEFT. As the

default, the RIGHT 1 part is assigned to each of the channels 1–4. Nor-

mally, the keyboard parts should be recorded to the channels 1–4.

About Style parts

As the default, each of the Style parts is assigned to the channels 9–16,

respectively as shown above. Normally, the Style parts should be recorded

to the channels 9–16.

RHYTHM ......... This is the basic part of the Style, containing the drum and

percussion rhythm patterns. Usually one of the drum kits

is used.

BASS ................ The bass part uses various appropriate instrument sounds

to match the style.

CHORD ........... This is the rhythmic chord backing, commonly used with

piano or guitar Voices.

PAD ................. This part is used for sustained instruments such as strings,

organ, choir, etc.

PHRASE ........... This part is used for punchy brass stabs, arpeggiated

chords, and other extras that make the accompaniment

more interesting.

About Multi Pad parts

As the default, each of the Multi Pads is assigned to the channels 5–8,

respectively as shown above.

RIGHT1

M.Pad1

M.Pad2

M.Pad3

M.Pad4

RHYTHM1

RHYTHM2

BASS

CHORD1

CHORD2

PAD

PHRASE1

PHRASE2

Channels ChannelsDefault Parts Keyboard parts

Keyboard

Parts

Style parts

Multi

Pad

parts

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

148

Step Recording

This method lets you record regular music data such as melodies and chords.

Basic Operations for Step Recording

1 Press the SONG[REC] and SONG[J] (STOP) buttons simultaneously.

A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU

3 Press the [A] button to call up the Song Creator display for recording/

editing a Song.

4 Select the appropriate tab by using the TAB [

√

][

] buttons.

For recording melodies .............. Select the [1–16] tab.

For recording chords.................. Select the [CHORD] tab.

5 If you select the “1–16” tab in step 4, press the [F] button to select the

channel for recording.

6 Press the [G] button to call up the STEP RECORD display.

7 Start Step Recording.

For recording melodies .............. See page 149.

For recording chords.................. See page 156.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

149

Recording Melodies

This section explains how to step-record notes, using three music score examples.

The explanations here apply to step 7 of the section “Basic Operations for Step

Recording” on page 148.

Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display.

1 Press the [G] button to select “ .”

2 Press the [H] button to select “Tenuto.”

3 Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type.

4 Press the [6

ππ

††

] button to select the quarter-note length.

5 Play the keys C3, D3, E3, F3, G3, and A3 in order, according to the

notation example.

Since the music score displayed

on the instrument is generated

from the recorded MIDI data, it

may not appear exactly the same

as shown here.

About the items which can be

selected via the [G] [H] [I] but-

tons

See page 151.

Example 1

6 7

3–5

* The numbers shown in the notation correspond to the following opera-

tion step numbers.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

150

6 Press the [6

ππ

††

] button to enter a quarter-note rest.

To enter the rest, use the [4

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons. (Press the button once to

select the rest value, and once again to actually enter it.) A rest having spec-

iﬁed note length will be entered.

7 Play the C4 key.

8 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to move the cursor to the begin-

ning of the Song.

9 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to hear the newly

entered notes.

10 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display.

If you want, you can also edit already recorded Songs in the same manner

(page 158).

11 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for

saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 67).

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 67).

Move the cursor to the begin-

ning of the Song.

Press the SONG [J] (STOP)

button during recording.

Deleting data

Mistakenly entered notes can be deleted.

1 Use the [A]/[B] buttons in the STEP RECORD display (page 148) to

select the data you want to delete.

2 Press the [J] (DELETE) button to delete the selected data.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

151

About velocity

Velocity is determined by how

strongly you play the keyboard.

The more strongly you play the

keyboard, the higher the velocity

value and the louder the sound.

The velocity value can be speci-

ﬁed within a range from 1 to

127. The higher the velocity

value, the louder the sound

becomes.

About items which can be selected via the [G] [H] [I] buttons

in the Step Record display

[G] button ........... Determines the velocity (loudness) of the note to

be entered.

[H] button ........... Determines the gate time (note length) of the note to

be entered.

[I] button ............. Determines the note type to be entered. Pressing the

button alternately switches the note selectors (at the

bottom of the display) among three basic note values:

normal, dotted and triplet.

Kbd.Vel

fff

ppp

127

111

Items Velocity to be recorded

Actual velocity you play the keyboard with

Normal

Tenuto

Staccato

Staccatissimo

Manual

80%

99%

40%

20%

Items Gate time to be recorded

The gate time (note length) can be set to any

desired percentage by using the DATA

ENTRY dial.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

152

The explanations here apply to step 7 of the “Basic Operations for Step Recording”

on page 148.

In this example, keep in mind that one of the steps involves holding down a key on

the keyboard while executing the operation.

Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display.

1 Press the [G] button to select “ .”

2 Press the [H] button to select “Tenuto.”

3 Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type.

4 Press the [5

ππ

††

] button to select the half-note length.

5 While holding F3 on the keyboard, press the [7

ππ

††

] button.

Before you go on to step 6, release the F3 key and the [7

π†

] button.

Example 2

Since the music score displayed

on the instrument is generated

from the recorded MIDI data, it

may not appear exactly the same

as shown here.

2–5 10–13 14–16

6–8

* The numbers shown in the sheet correspond to the following operation

step numbers.

out t

tems w

can

selected via the [G] [H] [I] but-

tons

See page 151.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

153

6 After releasing the F3 key, press the [H] button to select “Staccato.”

7 Press the [7

ππ

††

] button to select the eighth-note length.

8 Play the keys E3, F3, and A3 in order, according to the notation exam-

ple.

9 Press the [G] button to select “ .”

10 Press the [H] button to select “Tenuto.”

11 Press the [I] button to select “dotted.”

12 Press the [5

ππ

††

] button to select the dotted half-note length.

13 Play the A3 key on the keyboard, as speciﬁed in the example.

14 Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type.

15 Press the [6

ππ

††

] button to select the quarter-note length.

16 Play the F3 key on the keyboard, as speciﬁed in the example.

17 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to move the cursor to the begin-

ning of the Song.

18 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to hear the newly

entered notes.

19 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display.

You can also edit the Songs you’ve recorded as necessary (page 158).

20 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for

saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 67).

17 18

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 67).

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

154

The explanations here apply to step 7 of the “Basic Operations for Step Recording”

on page 148.

In this example, keep in mind that one of the steps involves holding down a key on

the keyboard while executing the entire operations.

Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display.

1 Press the [H] button to select “Normal.”

2 Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type.

3 Press the [7

ππ

††

] button to select the eighth note.

4 While holding C3 key on the keyboard, press the [7

ππ

††

] button.

Do not release the C3 key yet. Keep holding it while executing the following

steps.

Example 3

Since the music score displayed

on the instrument is generated

from the recorded MIDI data, it

may not appear exactly the same

as shown here.

1–4 5 6 7

* The numbers shown in the sheet correspond to the following

operation step numbers.

out t

tems w

can

selected via the [G] [H] [I] but-

tons

See page 151.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

155

5 While holding the C3 and E3 keys on the keyboard, press the [7

ππ

††

]

button.

Do not release the C3 and E3 keys yet. Keep holding them while executing

the following steps.

6 While holding the C3, E3 and G3 keys on the keyboard, press the

ππ

††

] button.

Do not release the C3, E3 and G3 keys yet. Keep holding them while exe-

cuting the following steps.

7 While holding the C3, E3, G3 and C4 keys on the keyboard, press the

ππ

††

] button, and successively press the [5

ππ

††

] button.

After you press the [5

ππ

††

] button, release the keys.

8 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to move the cursor to the begin-

ning of the Song.

9 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to hear the newly

entered notes.

10 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display.

If you want, you can also edit already recorded Songs in the same manner

(page 158).

11 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for

saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 67).

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 67).

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

156

Recording Chords

You can record Chords and Sections (Intro, Main, Ending, and so on) one at a time

with precise timing. These instructions show how to record chord changes using

the Step Record function.

The explanations here apply to step 7 of the “Basic Operations for Step Recording”

on page 148.

1 Make sure the STYLE CONTROL [AUTO FILL IN] button is set to OFF,

then press the STYLE CONTROL [MAIN VARIATION A] button.

2 Press the [5

ππ

††

] button to select the half-note length.

3 Play the chords C, F and G in the chord section of the keyboard.

4 Press the STYLE CONTROL [BREAK] button.

CF GFG7 C

2,3 5,6 8,9

147

* The numbers shown in the notation correspond to the following operation step

numbers.

MAIN A

BREAK

MAIN B

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

157

5 Press the [6

ππ

††

] button to select the quarter-note length.

6 Play the chords F, and G7 in the chord section of the keyboard

7 Press the STYLE CONTROL [MAIN VARIATION B] button.

8 Press the [4

ππ

††

] button to select the whole-note length.

9 Play the chord C in the chord section of the keyboard.

10 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to move the cursor to the begin-

ning of the Song.

11 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to hear the newly

entered notes.

12 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display.

If you want, you can also edit already recorded Songs in the same manner

(page 158).

13 Press the [F] (EXPAND) button to convert the input chord change

data into the Song data.

14 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for

saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 67).

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 67).

Deleting data

Mistakenly entered notes can be

deleted (page 150).

Entering ﬁll-ins

Turn the STYLE CONTROL

[AUTO FILL IN] button to ON,

and simply press one of the

STYLE CONTROL [MAIN VARI-

ATION (A, B, C, D)] buttons.

(The appropriate ﬁll-in section

plays and then automatically

goes to the selected [MAIN

VARIATION (A, B, C, D)] pattern

playback.)

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

158

Editing a Recorded Song

You can edit the Songs you’ve recorded with any recording method — Quick

Recording, Multi Track Recording, or Step Recording.

Basic Editing Operation

1 Select a Song for editing.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU

3 Press the [A] button to call up the SONG CREATOR display to record

or edit Songs.

4 Select the appropriate tab by using the TAB [

√

][

] buttons and edit

the Song.

• Re-Recording a Speciﬁc Section

— Punch In/Out (REC MODE) .............................................. page 159

This lets you re-record a speciﬁc section of a Song.

• Editing Channel Events (CHANNEL) .................................... page 160

This lets you edit the channel events. For example, you can delete data or

transpose notes by channel.

• Editing Note or Chord Events (CHORD, 1–16) .................... page 163

This lets you change or delete the recorded notes or chords.

• Editing System Event (SYS/EX.) ........................................... page 165

This lets you change the tempo or the time signature.

• Editing Lyrics (LYRICS).......................................................... page 166

This lets you change the Song name or lyrics events.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

159

Re-Recording a Speciﬁc Section — Punch In/

Out (REC MODE)

When re-recording a speciﬁc section of an already-recorded Song, use the Punch

IN/OUT function. In this method, only the data between the Punch In point and

the Punch Out point is overwritten with the newly recorded data. Keep in mind

that the notes before and after the Punch In/Out points are not recorded over,

although you will hear them play back normally to guide you in the Punch In/Out

timing. You can specify the Punch In and Punch Out points as measure numbers

beforehand for automatic operation, or manually execute the Punch In/Out record-

ing by using a Foot Pedal or simply by playing the keyboard.

The explanations here apply to the REC MODE display in step 4 of the “Basic Edit-

ing Operation” on page 158.

1 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[6

ππ

††

] buttons to determine the settings for re-

recording (see below).

2 While holding the SONG [REC] button, press the desired track but-

ton.

3 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback.

Play the keyboard at the Punch In point and stop recording at the

Punch Out point.

4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for

saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 67).

■ PUNCH IN settings

■ PUNCH OUT settings

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 67).

NORMAL Overwrite recording starts when pressing the SONG [F/K]

(PLAY/PAUSE) button or when you play the keyboard in the

Synchro Standby mode.

FIRST KEY ON The Song plays back normally, then starts overwrite recording as

soon as you play the keyboard.

PUNCH IN AT The Song plays back normally up to the beginning of the indi-

cated Punch In measure, then starts overwrite recording at that

point. You can set the Punch In measure by pressing the [3

π†

]

button.

REPLACE ALL This deletes all data after the point at which recording is stopped.

PUNCH OUT The Song position at which recording is stopped is regarded as

the Punch Out point. This setting maintains all data after the

point at which recording is stopped.

PUNCH OUT AT Actual overwrite recording continues until the beginning of the

speciﬁed Punch Out measure (set with the corresponding display

button), at which point recording stops and normal playback

continues. This setting maintains all data after the point at which

recording is stopped. You can set the Punch Out measure by

pressing the [6

π†

] buttons.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

160

Examples of re-recording with various Punch In/Out settings

This instrument features several different ways you use the Punch In/Out function.

The illustrations below indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures

in an eight-measure phrase are re-recorded.

■ Pedal Punch In/Out settings

When this is set to ON, you can use the Foot Pedal 2 to control the punch-in and

punch-out points. While a Song is playing back, pressing (and holding) the Foot

Pedal 2 instantly enables Punch In recording, while releasing the pedal stops

recording (Punch Out).You can press and release the Foot Pedal 2 as often as you

want during playback, to punch in/out of overwrite recording. Note that the current

function assignment of the Foot Pedal 2 is cancelled when the Pedal Punch In/Out

function is set to ON.

Editing Channel Events (CHANNEL)

The explanations here apply to the CHANNEL tab display in the step 4 of the Basic

Editing Operation on page 158.

1 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the Edit menu (page 161).

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to edit the data.

For information on the available parameters, see page 161.

3 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the operation for the cur-

rent display.

After the operation (with the exception of the SETUP menu display) is com-

pleted, this button changes to “UNDO”, letting you restore the original data

if you are not satisﬁed with the Operation results. The Undo function only

has one level; only the immediate operation can be undone.

12345678

12345

12345678

12345

12345678

12345

12345678

1234567

PUNCH IN setting

PUNCH OUT setting

NORMAL

REPLACE ALL

NORMAL

PUNCH OUT

NORMAL

PUNCH OUT AT=006

FIRST KEY ON

REPLACE ALL

FIRST KEY ON

PUNCH OUT

FIRST KEY ON

PUNCH OUT AT=006

PUNCH IN AT=003

REPLACE ALL

PUNCH IN AT=003

PUNCH OUT

PUNCH IN AT=003

PUNCH OUT AT=006

Original data

Start overwrite recording

Play back (Original data)

Play the keyboard to

start overwrite recording

Play the keyboard to

start overwrite recording

Play the keyboard to

start overwrite recording

Start overwrite recording

Stop recording

Play back (Original data)

Stop recording

Stop overwrite recording/Play original data

Stop recording

Stop overwrite recording/Play original data

Stop recording

Stop overwrite recording/Play original data

*1 To avoid overwriting measures 1-2, start recording from measure 3

*2 To stop recording, press the [REC] button at the end of measure 5.

Previously recorded data

Newly recorded data

Deleted data

Pedal Punch In/Out operation

may be reversed depending on

the particular pedal you've con-

nected to the instrument. If nec-

essary, change the pedal polarity

to reverse the control (page 168).

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 67).

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

161

4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for

saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 67).

■ QUANTIZE menu

The Quantize function allows you to align

the timing of all the notes in a channel. For

example, if you record the musical phrase

shown at right, you may not play it with

absolute precision, and your performance

may have been slightly ahead of or behind

the precise timing. Quantize is a conve-

nient way of correcting for this.

■ Deleting the data of the speciﬁed channel (DELETE menu)

You can delete the data of the speciﬁed channel in the Song. Select the channel

whose data to be deleted by using the [1

π†

]–[8

π†

] buttons, then press the [D]

(EXECUTE) button to execute the operation.

About Quantize size (resolu-

tion)

The Quantize size or resolution

is the number of clocks per quar-

ter note.

CHANNEL Determines the channel in the Song to be quantized.

SIZE Selects the quantize size (resolution). For optimum results, you should set the

Quantize size to the shortest note value in the channel. For example, if eighth

notes are the shortest in the channel, you should use eighth note as the Quantize

size.

Settings

The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally conve-

nient, since they allow you to quantize two different note values at the same

time. For example, when the straight eighth notes and eighth notes triplet are

contained in the same channel, if you quantize by the straight eighth notes, all

notes in the channel are quantized to straight eighth notes — completely elimi-

nating any triplet feel. However, if you use the eighth note + eighth note triplet

setting, both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly.

STRENGTH Determines how strongly the notes will be quantized. A setting of 100% pro-

duces exact timing. If a value less than 100% is selected, notes will be moved

toward the speciﬁed quantization beats according to the speciﬁed percentage.

Applying less than 100% quantization lets you preserve some of the “human”

feel in the recording.

After eighth note quantization

quarter

note

eighth note sixteenth

note

thirty-second

note

sixteenth note

+ eighth note

triplet*

quarter

note triplet

eighth note

triplet

sixteenth

note triplet

eighth note

+ eighth

note triplet*

sixteenth

note + six-

teenth triplet*

Quarter-note length

Original data

Quantizing strength=100

Quantizing strength=50

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

162

■ Mixing (merging) the data of the speciﬁed two channels (MIX menu)

This function lets you mix the data of the two channels and place the results in a

different channel. It also lets you copy the data from one channel to another.

■ CHANNEL TRANSPOSE menu

This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down

by a maximum of two octaves in semitone increments.

To display the channels 9–16

Press the [F] button to toggle between the two channel displays — Channels 1–8,

and Channels 9–16.

Transposing to the same value for all channels simultaneously

While holding the [G] (ALL CH) button, press one of the [1

π†

]–[8

π†

] buttons.

SETUP menu

The current settings of the Mixing Console (page 84) displays and other panel settings

can be recorded to the top position of the Song as the Setup data. The Mixing Console

and panel settings recorded here are automatically recalled when the Song starts.

■ Setup recording procedure

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU → [A] SONG CREATOR → TAB

[

√

][

] CHANNEL → [B] SET UP

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[7

ππ

††

] buttons to determine the settings to be

automatically called up when the Song starts.

3 Checkmark the selected item by pressing the [8

ππ

] button.

4 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the SETUP recording oper-

ation.

Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving

your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 67).

SOURCE 1 Selects the channel (1–16) to be mixed. All MIDI events in the

selected channel are copied to the destination channel.

SOURCE 2 Selects the channel (1–16) to be mixed. Only note events in the

selected channel are copied to the destination channel. In addi-

tion to the values 1–16, there is a “COPY” setting that allows you

to copy the data from Source 1 to the destination channel. If

“COPY” is selected here, the data from Source 1 is copied to the

destination channel. (The original channel data is maintained.)

DESTINATION

Selects the channel into which the mix or copy results will be placed.

SONG Records the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing

Console.

KEYBOARD VOICE Records the panel settings including the Voice selection of the

keyboard parts (RIGHT1, 2, and LEFT) and their on/off status.

Panel settings recorded here are same as the ones memorized to

the One Touch Setting. This can be recorded at any point in a

Song (the other items in this chart can be recorded only to the

top position of the Song).

SCORE SETTING Records the settings in the Score display.

GUIDE SETTING Records the settings of the Guide functions including the Guide

ON/OFF setting.

LYRICS SETTING Records the settings in the Lyrics display.

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will be

lost if you select another Song

or turn the power to the instru-

ment off without executing the

Save operation (page 67).

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

163

Editing Note or Chord Events (CHORD, 1–16)

The explanations here apply to the CHORD and 1–16 tab displays in step 4 of the

Basic Editing Operation on page 158.

1 When the 1–16 tab display is elected, press the [F] button to select

the channel to be edited.

2 Move the cursor to the desired data.

To move the cursor up or down ..............................Use the [A]/[B] button.

To move the cursor to the top data..........................Press the [C] button.

To move the cursor by Measure/Beat/Clock units ....Use the [1

π†

]–

π†

] buttons.

3 Edit the data.

Editing the data line by line

Use the [6

π†

]–[8

] buttons to cut/copy/paste/insert/delete the

events.

Editing each parameter of the data

1 Use the [D]/[E] buttons to select the parameter to be edited.

2 Use the [4

π†

]/[5

π†

] buttons to edit the parameter value. The

DATA ENTRY dial can also be used. To actually enter an edited value,

simply move the cursor away from the parameter.

To restore the original value, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button before move

the cursor.

4 When the CHORD tab display is selected, press the [F] (EXPAND) but-

ton to convert the data into Song data.

5 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for

saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 67).

ect

ng mu

nes o

data

While holding the [J] (MULTI

SELECT) button, press the [A]/[B]

buttons.

Displaying speciﬁc types of

event (FILTER)

You can select the event types to

be displayed in the [CHORD]

and [1-16] tab displays. This is

convenient, for example, when

you wish to have only the note

events shown (page 165).

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 67).

Chord and Section data recorded

with Realtime Recording cannot

be indicated and edited on this

display.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

164

About Clock

A unit of note resolution. The

Quantize size is the number of

clocks per quarter note. On the

PSR-OR700, one clock is equal

to 1/1920th of a quarter note.

About the events shown in the display

12 3

001 : 1 : 1440

Example

Measure number (BAR)

Beat

Clock

1 Indicates the location (position) of the corresponding event. Same as the indication

at the lower left of the display.

2 Indicates the event types (see below).

3 Indicates the event values.

Event types shown on the 1–16 tab display

Event types shown on the CHORD tab display

Note The individual note of a Song. Includes the note number

which corresponds to the key which was played, plus a

velocity value based on how hard the key is played, and the

gate time value (the length of a note).

Ctrl (Control Change) Settings to control the Voice, such as volume, pan, ﬁlter and

effect depth (edited via the Mixing Console described on

page 84), etc.

Prog

(Program Change)

MIDI program change number for selecting a Voice.

P.Bnd (Pitch Bend) Data for changing the pitch of a Voice continuously.

A.T. (Aftertouch) This event is generated when pressure is applied to a key

after the note is played.

Style Style

Tempo tempo

Chord chord root, chord type, on bass chord

Sect Accompaniment Style Section (Intro, Main, Fill In, Break,

Ending)

OnOff On/off status for each part (channel) of the Accompaniment

Style

CH.Vol Volume for each part (channel) of the Accompaniment Style

S.Vol Overall volume of the Accompaniment Style

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

165

Displaying Speciﬁc Types of Events (FILTER)

In the edit displays various types of events are shown. It may sometimes be difﬁcult

to pinpoint the ones you want to edit. This is where the Filter function comes in

handy. It lets you determine which event types will be shown in the edit displays.

1 Press the [H] (FILTER) button in the edit displays.

2 Select the event type by using the [2

ππ

††

]–[5

ππ

††

] buttons.

3 Checkmark (show) or remove the checkmark for the selected item by

using the [6

ππ

††

]/[7

ππ

††

] buttons.

[H](ALL ON)...............Checkmarks for all event types.

[I] (NOTE/CHORD).....Selects only NOTE/CHORD data.

[J] (INVERT) ................Reverses the checkmark settings for all boxes. In

other words, this enters checkmarks to all boxes that

were previously unchecked and vice versa.

4 Press the [EXIT] button to execute the settings.

Pressing the [C]–[E] buttons calls up the respective Filter displays as shown below.

MAIN .........................Call up the Main Filter display.

CTRL CHG .................Call up the Control Change Filter display.

STYLE .........................Call up the Accompaniment Style Filter Display.

Editing System Exclusive Events (SYS/EX.)

The explanations here apply to the [SYS/EX] tab display in step 4 of the Basic Edit-

ing Operation on page 158.

From this display, you can edit recorded System Exclusive events, which do not

belong to a speciﬁc channel, such as tempo and beat (time signature). The opera-

tions here are basically the same as those in the section “Editing Note or Chord

Events” on page 163.

System Events

Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your

data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 67).

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 67).

ScBar (Score Start Bar) Determines the top measure of a Song.

Tempo Determines the tempo value.

Time (Time Signature) Determines the time signature.

Key (Key Signature) Determines the key signature, as well as the major/minor set-

ting, for the music score shown on the display.

XGPrm (XG Parameters) Allows you to make various detailed changes to the XG parame-

ters. Refer to the “MIDI Data Format” in the Data List for details.

The Data List is available at the Yamaha website. (See

page 5

SysEx (System Exclusive)

Displays the System Exclusive data in the Song. Keep in mind

that you cannot create new data or change the contents of the

data here; however, you can delete, cut, copy, and paste the data.

Meta (Meta Event) Displays the SMF meta events in the Song. Keep in mind that

you cannot create new data or change the contents of the data

here; however, you can delete, cut, copy, and paste the data.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance to MIDI

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

166

Editing Lyrics (LYRICS)

The explanations here apply to the LYRICS tab display in step 4 of the Basic Editing

Operation on page 158. From this display, you can edit the recorded Lyrics events.

The operations here are basically the same as in the section “Editing Note or Chord

Events” on page 163.

Lyrics Events

Inputting and Editing Lyrics

1 Use the [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

](DATA ENTRY) buttons to call up the lyrics

editing display.

Operations are the same as in the section “Entering Characters” (page 71).

2 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for

saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 67).

Name Allows you to enter the Song name.

Lyrics Allows you to enter lyrics.

Codes CR

Enters a line break in the lyrics text.

Unavailable on the instrument. On some MIDI devices, this

event may delete the currently displayed lyrics and display the

next set of lyrics.

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 67).

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

167

Using Your Instrument with

Other Devices

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

Connecting Audio Devices

Use audio cables and adaptor plugs having no (zero) resistance.

Using External Audio Devices for Play-

back (1 [OUTPUT] jacks)

You can connect these jacks to a stereo system to

amplify the instrument’s sound. Use audio cables for

connection as shown in the diagrams. These jacks are

located on the underside jacks panel of the instrument.

When these are connected, you can use the instrument’s

[MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume of the

sound output to the external device. Connect the instru-

ment’s OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks (standard phone

jacks) and the input jacks of a pair of powered speakers

using appropriate audio cables. Use only the [L/L+R]

jack for connection with a monaural device.

Playing External Audio Devices with the

Built-in Speakers (2 [AUX IN] jacks)

The stereo outputs from another instrument can be con-

nected to these jacks, allowing the sound of an external

instrument to be reproduced via the instrument’s speak-

ers. Connect the output jacks (LINE OUT etc.) of an

external synthesizer or the tone generator module and

the instrument’s AUX IN [L/L+R]/[R] jacks using appro-

priate audio cables.

• Use only the [L/L+R] jack for connection with a monaural device.

•The instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] setting affects the input

signal from the [AUX IN] jacks.

USB

TO DEVICE

TO HOST

MIDI FOOT PEDAL

OUT

3456

P. 172

P. 167

P. 171 P. 168

P. 167

P. 171

CAUTION

Before connecting the instrument to other electronic

components, turn off the power of all the components.

Also, before turning any components on or off, make sure

to set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, elec-

trical shock or damage to the components may occur.

CAUTION

• When the instrument’s sound is output to an external

device, ﬁrst turn on the power to the instrument, then

to the external device. Reverse this order when you turn

the power off.

• Do not route the output from the [OUTPUT] jacks to the

[AUX IN] jacks. If you make this connection, the signal

input at the [AUX IN] jacks is output from the [OUTPUT]

jacks. These connections could result in a feedback loop

that will make normal performance impossible, and

may even damage both pieces of equipment.

CAUTION

When the sound of an external device is output to the

instrument, ﬁrst turn on the power to the external device,

then to the instrument. Reverse this order when you turn

the power off.

Instrument

Powered speakers

Input jack

Phone plug

(standard)

Phone plug

(standard)

Audio cable

Instrument

Synthesizer

Tone generator

Phone plug

(standard)

Audio cable

Pin plug

LINE OUT

Using Your Instrument with

Other Devices

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

168

Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller

(3 [FOOT PEDAL 1/2] jacks)

Two FOOT PEDAL jacks can be used via the following

functions at the initial default setting (factory setting).

• FOOT PEDAL 1 jack

Plug an optional Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch into

this jack and use it to switch sustain on and off. The

footswitch functions like the damper pedal on a piano

— press for sustain, release for normal sound.

• FOOT PEDAL 2 jack

Plug an optional Yamaha FC7 foot controller into this

jack and use it to change the volume as you play the

instrument (expression function).

Assigning Speciﬁc Functions to Each

Foot Pedal

The functions assigned by default to the connected foot-

switch or foot controller can be changed — for exam-

ple, letting you use the footswitch to start/stop Style

playback, or use the foot controller to produce pitch

bends.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [

√

][

]

FOOT PEDAL

2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select one of the two

foot pedals to which the function is to be

assigned.

3 Use the [1

ππ

††

] button to select the functions to

be assigned to the pedal speciﬁed in step 2.

Details on the pedal functions are listed below.

4 Use the [2

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to set the

details of the selected functions.

The available parameters differ depending on the

function selected in step 3. Details on the parameters

are given on page 169.

5 Check that the desired function is controllable

with the pedal by actually pressing the pedal.

When you use the pedals to switch Registration Memory

settings (page 134), these settings are invalid.

CAUTION

Make sure to connect or disconnect the pedal only when

the power is off.

FOOT PEDAL

Foot Pedals

Footswitch FC4

(optional)

Footswitch FC5

(optional)

Foot Controller FC7

(optional)

Set the polarity of the pedal

Pedal on/off operation may differ depending on the partic-

ular pedal you’ve connected to the instrument. For exam-

ple, pressing down on one pedal may turn the selected

function on, while pressing a different make/brand of

pedal may turn the function off. If necessary, use this set-

ting to reverse the control. Press the [I] (PEDAL POLAR-

ITY) button to switch the polarity.

Connecting Audio Devices

Using Your Instrument with

Other Devices

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

169

Connecting Audio Devices

Details on the pedal functions are listed here. For functions indicated with “

“, use only the foot controller; proper

operation cannot be done with a footswitch.

Assignable Pedal Functions

VOLUME* Allows you to use a foot controller to control the volume.

SUSTAIN Allows you to use a pedal to control the sustain. When you press and hold the pedal,

all notes played on the keyboard have a longer sustain. Releasing the pedal immedi-

ately stops (damps) any sustained notes.

SOSTENUTO Allows you to use a pedal to control the Sostenuto effect. If you play a note or chord on

the keyboard and press the pedal while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as

long as the pedal is held. However, all subsequent notes will not sustain. This makes it

possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played staccato.

SOFT Allows you to use a pedal to control the Soft effect. Pressing this pedal reduces the vol-

ume and changes the timbre of the notes you play. This is effective only for certain

appropriate Voices.

GLIDE When the pedal is pressed, the pitch changes, and then returns to normal pitch when

the pedal is released.

PORTAMENTO The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while the pedal

is pressed. Portamento is produced when notes are played legato style (i.e., a note is

played while the preceding note is still held). Portamento Time can also be adjusted

from the Mixing Console (page 86). This function does not affect certain Natural Voices,

which would not sound appropriately with this function.

PITCH BEND* Allows you to bend the pitch of notes up or down by using the pedal.

MODULATION* Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. The effect becomes deeper

when pressing down the foot controller. You can turn this function on/off for each key-

board part on this display.

DSP VARIATION Switches Voice Effect DSP VARIATION on and off.

HARMONY/ECHO Switches the HARMONY/ECHO Voice Effect on and off.

SCORE PAGE+ While the song is stopped, you can turn to the next score page.

SCORE PAGE– While the song is stopped, you can turn to the previous score page.

LYRICS PAGE+ While the song is stopped, you can turn to the next lyrics page.

LYRICS PAGE– While the song is stopped, you can return to the last lyrics page.

SONG PLAY/PAUSE Same as the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button.

STYLE START/STOP Same as the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button.

TAP TEMPO Same as the [TAP TEMPO] button.

SYNCHRO START Same as the [SYNC START] button.

SYNCHRO STOP Same as the [SYNC STOP] button.

INTRO1–3 Same as the [INTRO I-III] buttons.

MAIN A–D Same as the [MAIN VARIATION A-D] buttons.

FILL DOWN Plays a ﬁll-in, which is automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the

immediate left.

FILL SELF Plays a ﬁll-in.

FILL BREAK Plays a break.

FILL UP Plays a ﬁll-in, which is automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the

immediate right.

ENDING1–3 Same as the [ENDING/rit. I-III] buttons.

FADE IN/OUT Same as the [FADE IN/OUT] button.

FINGERED/FING ON BASS The pedal alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes (page 103).

Using Your Instrument with

Other Devices

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

170

Connecting Audio Devices

The Sostenuto and Portamento functions will not affect the Organ Flute Voices, even if they have been assigned to the Foot Pedals.

Adjustable Parameters for Each Function

The parameters below correspond to buttons [2

π†

]–[8

π†

], and their availability depends on the selected control

type. For example, if SUSTAIN is selected as the type, the parameters “HALF PEDAL POINT,” “RIGHT 1,” “RIGHT 2”

and “LEFT” automatically appear in the display.

BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed, the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held even if the

chord is changed during Style playback. If the ﬁngering is set to “AI FULL KEYBOARD,”

the function does not work.

PERCUSSION The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the [4

π†

]–[8

π†

] buttons. You

can use the keyboard to select the desired percussion instrument.

RIGHT1 ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 1] button.

RIGHT2 ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 2] button.

LEFT ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button.

OTS+ Calls up the next One Touch Setting.

OTS– Calls up the previous One Touch Setting.

SONG, STYLE, M.PAD, LEFT, RIGHT1,

RIGHT2

These specify the part(s) that will be affected by the pedal.

UP/DOWN When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines whether the pitch change is

raised or lowered.

RANGE When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines the range of the pitch

change, in semitones. Linked to the Mixing Console → Pitch Bend Range (page 86) set-

ting.

ON SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal

is pressed.

OFF SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal

is released.

KIT When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all available drum kits are shown here,

letting you select the particular drum kit used for the pedal.

PERCUSSION When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all sounds of the selected drum kit (in KIT

above) are shown here. This determines the particular instrument sound assigned to the

pedal.

Using Your Instrument with

Other Devices

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

171

Connecting to a computer and USB device

Connecting External MIDI Devices

(4 [MIDI] terminals)

Use the built-in [MIDI] terminals and standard MIDI

cables to connect external MIDI devices.

For a general overview of MIDI and how you can effec-

tively use it, refer to the following sections:

• What is MIDI?..............................................page 174

• What You Can Do With MIDI.......................page 176

• MIDI Settings ...............................................page 177

Connecting to a computer

and USB device

Connecting a Computer (4 [MIDI] and

5 [USB TO HOST] terminals)

By connecting a computer to the [USB TO HOST] or

[MIDI] terminals, you can transfer data between the

instrument and the computer via MIDI, and take advan-

tage of sophisticated computer music programs. Keep in

mind that you also need to install an appropriate USB-

MIDI driver.

The instructions below explain how to connect and use

the terminals.

If you are using a computer that has a USB interface, we recom-

mend that you connect the computer and the instrument by USB,

rather than by MIDI.

Driver

A driver is software that provides a data-transfer interface between

the computer’s operating system and a connected hardware

device. You need to install a USB-MIDI driver to connect the com-

puter and the instrument. Refer to the separate Installation Guide

(page 4).

(This explanation is divided into two parts, covering the

two connections: connection to the [USB TO HOST]

terminal and connection to the [MIDI] terminal.)

• Connecting to the [USB TO HOST] terminal

When connecting the instrument to the computer via

USB, use a standard USB cable (having the USB logo)

to connect the [USB TO HOST] terminal on the

instrument to the USB terminal of the computer. Then,

install the USB-MIDI driver.

About the [USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE] terminals

There are two different types of USB terminals on the instrument:

[USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE]. Take care not to confuse

the two terminals and the corresponding cable connectors.

Be careful to connect the proper plug in the proper direction.

Explanations on the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal follow in the next

section.

•The instrument will begin transmission a short time after the

USB connection is made.

• When using a USB cable to connect the instrument to your

computer, make the connection directly without passing

through a USB hub.

•For information on setting up your sequence software, refer to

the owner’s manual of the relevant software.

MIDI IN Receives MIDI messages from an external

MIDI device.

MIDI OUT Transmits MIDI messages generated by the

instrument.

MIDI

OUT

USB

TO DEVICE

TO HOST

CAUTION

Precautions when using the [USB TO HOST] terminal

When connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST] termi-

nal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so

risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing data. If the

computer or the instrument freezes, turn the power to the

instrument off and restart the computer.

• Before connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST] ter-

minal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer

(such as suspended, sleep, standby), and quit any open appli-

cation software, also turns off the power to the instrument.

• Execute the following before turning the power to the instru-

ment off or unplugging the USB cable to/from the instrument/

computer.

- Quit any open application software on the computer.

- Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the

instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on

the keyboard or playing back a song.)

• While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you

should wait for six seconds or more between these

operations: When turning the power of the instrument

off then on again, or when alternately connecting/dis-

connecting the USB cable.

Instrument

USB cable

Using Your Instrument with

Other Devices

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

172

Connecting to a computer and USB device

• Connection by [MIDI] terminals

There are two ways to connect the instrument via

MIDI to a computer. If you have a MIDI interface built

into your computer, connect the MIDI OUT terminal

of the computer interface to the [MIDI IN] terminal of

the instrument, and connect the [MIDI OUT] terminal

of the instrument to the MIDI IN terminal of the inter-

face.

The second connection possibility involves a sepa-

rate, external MIDI interface connected to the com-

puter via a USB port or a serial port (modem or

printer terminal). Using standard MIDI cables, con-

nect the MIDI OUT terminal of the external interface

to the [MIDI IN] terminal of the instrument, and con-

nect the [MIDI OUT] terminal of the instrument to the

MIDI IN terminal of the interface.

Make sure to use the appropriate MIDI interface for your com-

puter.

Connecting to a USB Storage Device

(6 via the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal)

By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device

with a standard USB cable, you can save data you’ve

created to the connected device, as well as read data

from the connected device.

About the [USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE] terminals

There are two different types of USB terminals on the instrument:

[USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE]. Take care not to confuse

the two terminals and the corresponding cable connectors.

Be careful to connect the proper plug in the proper direction.

Explanations on the [USB TO HOST] terminal can be found in the

previous section.

Using USB Storage Devices

This type is used to connect the instrument to a USB

storage device, and allows you to save data you’ve cre-

ated to the connected device, as well as read data from

the connected device. The following description gener-

ally explains about how to connect and use them.

Before using a USB storage device, be sure to read

“Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Mem-

ory/Floppy Disk, etc)” on page 23.

1 Connect the USB storage device to the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal with a standard USB cable.

2 After that, exit once from the selection display

then return to the display (or press the Tab

switch buttons [

√

] and [

] simultaneously from

the selection display). The USB tabs (USB 1, USB

2, etc.) are automatically called up, allowing you

to save ﬁles and play back music data from the

devices.

Checking remaining memory on the USB storage device

You can check this in the display called up by the following oper-

ation:

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

] MEDIA

Select the device by using the [A]/[B] buttons in this display and

press [F] (PROPERTY).

Even with a computer connected to the [USB TO HOST] terminal

and a USB storage device connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] ter-

minal, you cannot access the USB storage device from the com-

puter via the instrument.

Instrument

MIDI cable

[MIDI IN]

terminal

[MIDI OUT]

terminal

Computer with MIDI

interface installed

[MIDI OUT]

terminal

[MIDI IN]

terminal

Instrument

MIDI cable

[MIDI IN]

terminal

[MIDI OUT]

terminal

MIDI interface

Computer

USB port or serial

port (modem or

printer terminal)

Formatting USB storage media

For details, see page 66.

CAUTION

The format operation overwrites any previously existing data.

Proceed with caution.

Using Your Instrument with

Other Devices

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

173

Connecting to a computer and USB device

Backing up your data to a computer

■ Backing up the instrument data to a computer

Once you’ve saved data to a USB storage device, you can

copy the data to the hard disk of your computer, then

archive and organize the ﬁles as desired. Simply recon-

nect the device as shown below.

Instrument

Computer

USB storage device

USB TO DEVICE terminal

Saves internal data to a USB storage device.

Disconnect the USB storage device from the instrument and

connect it to the computer

Backing up data to a computer and organizing ﬁles/folders

Copying ﬁles from a computer hard disk to a

USB storage device

Files contained on the hard disk of a computer can be

transferred to the instrument by ﬁrst copying them to the

storage media, then connecting the storage device to the

instrument.

Not only ﬁles created on the instrument itself but also

Standard MIDI ﬁles and Style File-formatted Style ﬁles cre-

ated on other devices can be copied to a USB storage

device from the hard disk of the computer. Once you’ve

copied the data, connect the device to the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal of the instrument, and play back the

data on the instrument.

Copying the ﬁles of the hard disk of the computer to the USB

storage device

Computer

USB storage device

Instrument

Computer

USB storage device

Reading ﬁles on the USB storage device from the instrument

[USB TO DEVICE] terminal

Disconnect the USB storage

device from the computer and

connect it to the instrument

Using Your Instrument with

Other Devices

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

174

What is MIDI?

Put simply, MIDI is a data transfer standard that allows

easy and comprehensive control among electronic/digi-

tal music instruments and other devices. To get a better

idea of what MIDI does, let’s ﬁrst consider acoustic

instruments, such as a grand piano and a classical gui-

tar. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer

inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the gui-

tar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds.

But how does a digital instrument go about playing a

note?

As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic

instrument the sampled note (previously recorded note)

stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit)

is played based on information received from the key-

board.

Now, let’s examine what happens when we playback a

recording. When you play back a music CD (for exam-

ple, a solo piano recording), you’re hearing the actual

sound (vibration in air) of the acoustic instrument. This

is called audio data, to distinguish it from MIDI data.

In the above example, the actual acoustic sounds of the

pianist’s performance are captured in the recording as

audio data, and this is recorded to CD. When you play

back that CD on your audio system, you can hear the

actual piano performance. The piano itself is not neces-

sary, since the recording contains the actual sounds of

the piano, and your speakers reproduce them.

In the case of digital instruments, the audio signals are sent

through output jacks (such as [AUX OUT]) on the instrument.

The “controller” and “tone generator” in the illustration

above are equivalent to the piano in our acoustic exam-

ple. Here, the player’s performance on the keyboard is

captured as MIDI song data (see illustration below). In

order to record the audio performance on an acoustic

piano, special recording equipment is needed. How-

ever, since the PSR-OR700 features a built-in sequencer

that lets you record performance data, this recording

equipment is unnecessary. Instead, your digital instru-

ment allows you to both record and play back the data.

However, we also need a sound source to produce the

audio, which eventually comes from your speakers. The

tone generator of the instrument ﬁlls this function. The

recorded performance is reproduced by the sequencer,

playing back the song data, using a tone generator

capable of accurately producing various instrument

sounds — including that of a piano. Looked at in

another way, the relation of the sequencer and the tone

generator is similar to that of the pianist and the piano

— one plays the other. Since digital instruments handle

playback data and the actual sounds independently, we

can hear our piano performance played by another

instrument, such as guitar or violin.

Even though it is a single musical instrument, the PSR-OR700 can

be thought of as containing several electronic components: a con-

troller, a tone generator, and a sequencer.

Acoustic guitar note

production

Digital instrument note pro-

duction

Pluck a string and the

body resonates the

sound.

Based on playing information

from the keyboard, a sampled

note stored in the tone generator

is played through the speakers.

Playing the key board

Internal amp Internal amp

Tone generator

(Electric circuit)

Recording Playback

Recording and playing back the performance of an

acoustic instrument (audio data)

Recording and play back the performance of a digital

instrument (MIDI data)

Controller (keyboard, etc.)

Recording Playback

USB storage

device

USB storage

device

Tone Generator

Sequencer

Tone generator

Sequencer

Keyboard performance (MIDI data)

Using Your Instrument with

Other Devices

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

175

What is MIDI?

Finally, we’ll take a look at the actual data that gets

recorded and that serves as the basis for playing the

sounds. For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter

note using the grand piano sound on the instrument’s

keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a

resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out infor-

mation from the keyboard such as “with what voice,”

“with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it

pressed” and “when was it released.” Then each piece

of information is changed into a number value and sent

to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis

for sound generation, the tone generator plays the

stored sampled note.

Example Keyboard Data

Panel operations on the instrument, such as playing the

keyboard and selecting voices, are processed and

stored as MIDI data. The auto accompaniment Styles

and Songs also consist of MIDI data.

MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument

Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical

instruments to communicate with each other, by send-

ing and receiving compatible Note, Control Change,

Program Change and various other types of MIDI data,

or messages.

The instrument can control a MIDI device by transmit-

ting note related data and various types of controller

data. The instrument can be controlled by incoming

MIDI messages which automatically determine the tone

generator mode, select MIDI channels, voices and

effects, change parameter values and of course play the

voices speciﬁed for the various parts.

MIDI data has the following advantages over audio data:

•The amount of data is much less.

•The data can be effectively and easily edited, even to the point

of changing voices and transforming the data.

MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Chan-

nel messages and System messages.

Channel Messages

The PSR-OR700 is an electronic instrument that can

handle 16 MIDI channels (or reception of 32 channels

for MIDI data reception when using the [USB] termi-

nal). This is usually expressed as “it can play 16 instru-

ments at the same time.” Channel messages transmit

information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change,

for each of the 16 channels.

The performance data of all Songs and Styles is handled as MIDI

data.

MIDI Channels

MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen

MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1–16, the perfor-

mance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be

simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable.

Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV

station transmits its broadcasts over a speciﬁc channel.

Your home TV set receives many different programs

simultaneously from several TV stations and you select

the appropriate channel to watch the desired program.

MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The trans-

mitting instrument sends MIDI data on a speciﬁc MIDI

channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI

cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving instru-

ment’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel) matches

the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will

sound according to the data sent by the transmitting

instrument.

The instrument’s keyboard and internal tone generator are also

connected by MIDI. → LOCAL CONTROL (page 180)

For example, several parts or channels can be transmit-

ted simultaneously, including the Style data (as shown

on the next page).

Voice number (with what voice) 01 (grand piano)

Note number (with which key) 60 (C3)

Note on (when was it pressed)

and

note off (when was it released)

Timing expressed

numerically

(quarter note)

Velocity

(strength at which it was played)

120 (strong)

Message Name Operation/Panel Setting

Note ON/OFF Messages which are generated when

the keyboard is played. Each mes-

sage includes a speciﬁc note num-

ber which corresponds to the key

which is pressed, plus a velocity

value based on how hard the key is

played.

Program Change For selecting Voices (with control

change bank select MSB/LSB set-

tings)

Control Change Volume, panpot (Mixing Console),

MODULATION Wheel operation

etc.

Pitch Bend PITCH BEND Wheel operation

NEWS

Weather report

NEWS

MIDI Transmit channel 2 MIDI Receive channel 2

MIDI

cable

Using Your Instrument with

Other Devices

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

176

What is MIDI?

Example: Recording a performance with the auto accompa-

niment (Style playback) sound of the instrument to an exter-

nal sequencer

As you can see, it is essential to determine which data is

to be sent over which MIDI channel when transmitting

MIDI data (page 180).

The instrument also allows you to determine how the

received data is played back (page 181).

System Messages

This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI

system. These include System Exclusive messages for

transferring data unique to each instrument manufac-

turer and Realtime messages for controlling the MIDI

device.

The messages transmitted/received by the PSR-OR700

are shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Imple-

mentation Chart in the Data List. The Data List is avail-

able at the Yamaha website. (See page 5.)

What You Can Do With MIDI

■ Record your performance data (1–16 channels) using

the auto accompaniment features on an external

sequencer (or computer with sequencer software).

After recording, edit the data with the sequencer,

then play it back on the instrument.

When you want to use the instrument as an XG-com-

patible multi-timbral tone generator, set the receive part

for MIDI channels 1-16 to “SONG” in MIDI/USB 1 in

MIDI Receive (page 181).

■ Controlling from an external MIDI keyboard

MIDI Data Compatibility

This section covers basic information on data compati-

bility: whether or not other MIDI devices can playback

the data recorded by PSR-OR700, and whether or not

the PSR-OR700 can playback commercially available

song data or song data created for other instruments or

on a computer. Depending on the MIDI device or data

characteristics, you may be able to play back the data

without any problem, or you may have to perform some

special operations before the data can be played back.

If you run into problems playing back data, please refer

to the information below.

Sequence Formats

Song data is recorded and stored in a variety of different

systems, referred to as “sequence formats.”

Playback is only possible when the sequence format of

the Song data matches that of the MIDI device. The

PSR-OR700 is compatible with the following formats.

● SMF (Standard MIDI ﬁle)

This is the most common sequence format. Standard

MIDI Files are generally available as one of two types:

Format 0 or Format 1. Many MIDI devices are compati-

ble with Format 0, and most commercially available

software is recorded as Format 0.

•The PSR-OR700 is compatible with both Format 0

and Format 1.

• Song data recorded on the PSR-OR700 is automati-

cally saved as SMF Format 0.

● ESEQ

This sequence format is compatible with many of

Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PSR-S900/S700

series instruments. This is a common format used with

various Yamaha software.

•The PSR-OR700 is compatible with ESEQ.

● XF

The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard

MIDI File) format with greater functionality and open-

ended expandability for the future. The PSR-OR700 is

capable of displaying lyrics when an XF ﬁle containing

lyric data is played. (SMF is the most common format

used for MIDI sequence ﬁles. The PSR-OR700 is com-

patible with SMF Formats 0 and 1, and records “song”

data using SMF Format 0.)

● Style File

The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of Yamaha’s

auto accompaniment know-how into a single uniﬁed

format.

Message Name Operation/Panel Setting

System Exclusive

Message

Effect type settings (Mixing Console),

etc.

Realtime Messages Clock setting,

Start/stop operation

MIDI cable

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

Channel 5

Channel 6

Channel 7

Channel 8

Channel 9

Channel 10

Channel 11

External sequencer

Tra ck 2

Tra ck 3

Tra ck 4

Tra ck 5

Tra ck 6

Tra ck 7

Tra ck 8

Tra ck 9

Tra ck 10

Tra ck 11

PSR-OR700 track (channel)

RIGHT 1

RIGHT 2

LEFT

STYLE instrument

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI OUT MIDI IN

Instrument

MIDI receive

MIDI transmit Computer or

Sequencer

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

Instrument

MIDI receive

Using Your Instrument with

Other Devices

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

177

MIDI Settings

Voice Allocation Format

With MIDI, Voices are assigned to speciﬁc numbers,

called “program numbers.” The numbering standard

(order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice

allocation format.”

Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice

allocation format of the song data matches that of the

compatible MIDI device used for playback. The PSR-

OR700 is compatible with the following formats.

Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above,

the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the

speciﬁcations of the devices and particular data recording meth-

ods.

● GM System Level 1

This is one of the most common voice allocation for-

mats.

Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System

Level 1, as is most commercially available software.

● GM System Level 2

“GM System Level 2” is a standard speciﬁcation that

enhances the original “GM System Level 1” and

improves Song data compatibility. It provides for

increased polyphony, greater voice selection, expanded

voice parameters, and integrated effect processing.

● XG

XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1

format, and was developed by Yamaha speciﬁcally to

provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater

expressive control over Voices and effects, and to

ensure compatibility of data well into the future.

Song data recorded on the PSR-S900/S700 using Voices

in the XG category is XG-compatible.

● DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection)

This voice allocation format is compatible with many of

Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PSR-OR700

series instruments.

● GS

GS was developed by the Roland Corporation.

In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major enhance-

ment of the GM speciﬁcally to provide more Voices and

Drum kits and their variations, as well as greater expres-

sive control over Voices and effects.

MIDI Settings

In this section, you can make MIDI-related settings for

the instrument. The PSR-OR700 gives you a set of ten

pre-programmed templates that let you instantly and

easily reconﬁgure the instrument to match your particu-

lar MIDI application or external device. Also, you can

edit the pre-programmed templates and save up to ten

of your original templates to the USER display. You can

then save all these original templates as a single ﬁle to

USB storage devices, in the MIDI SETUP selection dis-

play (called up by pressing [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY

→ TAB [

√

][

] SYSTEM RESET).

Basic Operation

1 Call up the operation (MIDI template selection)

display.

Function

→ [I] MIDI

2 To use the pre-programmed templates or to edit

them

Press the TAB [

√

] button to select the PRESET dis-

play. Press one of the [A]-[J] buttons to select a MIDI

template.

To use the templates already saved to the USER

display or to edit them

Press the TAB [

] button to select the USER display.

Press one of the [A]-[J] buttons to select a MIDI tem-

plate.

3 To edit a template, press the [8

††

] (EDIT) but-

ton to call up the MIDI display for editing.

The individual parameters settings are shown for the

selected template. Here you can edit each parame-

ter.

Using Your Instrument with

Other Devices

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

178

MIDI Settings

4 Use the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to call up the rele-

vant setting display.

5 When you’ve ﬁnished editing, press the [EXIT]

button to return to the MIDI template selection

display (PRESET or USER).

6 Select the USER tab display to save the data by

using the TAB [

√

][

] buttons (page 67).

SYSTEM display MIDI System Settings (page 180)

TRANSMIT display MIDI Transmission Settings

(page 180)

RECEIVE display MIDI Reception Settings (page 181)

BASS display Settings for the bass note of chord

for Style playback via MIDI recep-

tion data (page 182)

CHORD DETECT

display

Settings for the chord type for Style

playback via MIDI reception data

(

page 182)

Using Your Instrument with

Other Devices

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

179

MIDI Settings

Pre-Programmed MIDI Templates

Template name Description

All Parts Transmits all parts including the keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, 2, and LEFT), with the

exception of Song parts.

KBD & STYLE Basically the same as “All Parts” with the exception of how keyboard parts are man-

aged. The right-hand parts are handled as “UPPER” instead of RIGHT 1 and 2 and the

left-hand part is handled as “LOWER.”

Master KBD In this setting, the instrument functions as a “master” keyboard, playing and controlling

one or more connected tone generators or other devices (such as a computer/

sequencer).

Song All transmit channels are set to correspond to Song channels 1–16. This is used to play

Song data with an external tone generator and to record Song data to an external

sequencer.

Clock Ext Playback (Song or Style) synchronizes with an external MIDI clock instead of the instru-

ment’s internal clock. This template should be used when you wish to set the tempo on

the MIDI device connected to the instrument.

MIDI Accord 1 MIDI accordions allow you to transmit MIDI data and play connected tone generators

from the keyboard and bass/chord buttons of the accordion. This template lets you play

melodies from the keyboard and control Style playback on the instrument with the left-

hand buttons.

MIDI Accord 2 Basically the same as “MIDI Accord 1” above, with the exception that the chord/bass

notes you play with your left hand on the MIDI Accordion are recognized also as MIDI

note events.

MIDI Pedal 1 MIDI pedal units allow you play connected tone generators with your feet (especially

convenient for playing single note bass parts). This template lets you play/control the

chord root in Style playback with a MIDI pedal unit.

MIDI Pedal 2 This template lets you play the bass part for Style playback by using a MIDI pedal unit.

MIDI OFF No MIDI signals are sent or received.

Using Your Instrument with

Other Devices

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

180

MIDI Settings

MIDI System Settings

The explanations here apply to the SYSTEM display to

be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on

page 177.

■ LOCAL CONTROL

Turns the Local Control for each part on or off. When

Local Control is set to “ON,” the keyboard of the instru-

ment controls its own (local) internal tone generator,

allowing the internal voices to be played directly from

the keyboard. If you set Local to “OFF,” the keyboard

and controllers are internally disconnected from the

instrument’s tone generator section so that no sound is

output when you play the keyboard or use the control-

lers. For example, this allows you to use an external

MIDI sequencer to play the instrument’s internal voices,

and use the instrument keyboard to record notes to the

external sequencer and/or play an external tone genera-

tor.

■ Clock setting, etc.

● CLOCK

Determines whether the instrument is controlled by its

own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from

an external device. INTERNAL is the normal Clock set-

ting when the instrument is being used alone or as a

master keyboard to control external devices. If you are

using the instrument with an external sequencer, MIDI

computer, or other MIDI device, and you want to syn-

chronize it to that device, set this parameter to the

appropriate setting: MIDI, USB 1, or USB 2. In this case,

make sure that the external device is connected prop-

erly (e.g., to the instrument’s MIDI IN terminal), and that

it is properly transmitting a MIDI clock signal. When

this is set for control by an external device (MIDI, USB

1 or USB 2), the Tempo is indicated as “Ext.” in the

Main display.

● TRANSMIT CLOCK

Turns MIDI clock (F8) transmission on or off. When set

to OFF, no MIDI clock or Start/Stop data is transmitted

even if a Song or Style is played back.

● RECEIVE TRANSPOSE

Determines whether or not the instrument’s transpose

setting (page 58) is applied to the note events received

by the instrument via MIDI.

● START/STOP

Determines whether incoming FA (start) and FC (stop)

messages affect Song or Style playback.

■ MESSAGE SW

● SYS/EX.

The “Tx” setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI Sys-

tem Exclusive messages on or off. The “Rx” setting turns

MIDI reception and recognition of MIDI System Exclu-

sive messages generated by external equipment on or

off.

● CHORD SYS/EX.

The “Tx” setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord

exclusive data (chord detect. root and type) on or off.

The “Rx” setting turns MIDI reception and recognition

of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external

equipment on or off.

MIDI Transmit Settings

The explanations here apply to the TRANSMIT display

to be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on

page 177. This determines which parts will be sent as

MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will

be sent.

Operation

Select the part to be transmitted and the channel via

which the selected part will be transmitted. You can also

determine the types of data to be sent.

● With the exception of the next two parts, the

conﬁguration of the parts is the same as those

already explained elsewhere in this manual.

• UPPER

The keyboard part played on the right side of the key-

board from the Split Point for the Voices (RIGHT1 and/

or 2).

• LOWER

The keyboard part played on the left side of the keyboard

from the Split Point for the Voices. This is not affected by

the on/off status of the [ACMP] button.

SYSTEM display

TRANSMIT display

Using Your Instrument with

Other Devices

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

181

MIDI Settings

● Tx MONITOR

The dots corresponding to each channel (1-16) ﬂash

brieﬂy whenever any data is transmitted on the chan-

nel(s).

When different parts are assigned to the same transmit

channel

If the same transmit channel is assigned to several different parts,

the transmitted MIDI messages are merged to a single channel —

resulting in unexpected sounds and possible glitches in the con-

nected MIDI device.

About the protected Songs

Write-protected Songs cannot be transmitted even if the proper

Song channels 1–16 are set to be transmitted.

■ MIDI messages which can be transmitted or

received (recognized)

The following MIDI messages can be set on the TRANS-

MIT/RECEIVE display.

• Note (Note events).......................................page 164

• CC (CONTROL CHANGE) ..........................page 164

• PC (PROGRAM CHANGE)...........................page 164

• PB (Pitch Bend)............................................page 164

•AT (Aftertouch).............................................page 164

MIDI Receive Settings

The explanations here apply to the RECEIVE display to

be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on

page 177. This determines which parts will receive

MIDI data and over which MIDI channels the data will

be received.

Operation

Select the channel to be received and the part via which

the selected channel will be received. You can also

determine the types of data to be received.

● The PSR-OR700 can receive MIDI messages over

32 channels (16 channels x 2 ports) by USB con-

nection.

● With the exception of the next two parts, the

conﬁguration of the parts is the same as those

already explained elsewhere in this manual.

• KEYBOARD

The received note messages control the instrument’s

keyboard performance.

• EXTRA PART 1-5

There are ﬁve parts specially reserved for receiving

and playing MIDI data. Normally, these parts are not

used by the instrument itself. The PSR-OR700 can be

used as a 32-channel multi-timbral tone generator by

using these ﬁve parts in addition to the general parts.

● Rx MONITOR

The dots corresponding to each channel (1–16) ﬂash

brieﬂy whenever any data is received on the channel(s).

Parameter Lock

You can “lock” speciﬁc parameters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.) to

make them selectable only via the panel controls (page 133).

■ MIDI transmission/reception via the USB ter-

minal and MIDI terminals

The relationship between the [MIDI] terminals and the

[USB] terminal which can be used for transmitting/

receiving 32 channels (16 channels x 2 ports) of the

MIDI messages is as follows:

RECEIVE display

MIDI/USB1

01–16

USB2

01–16

USB2USB1

MIDI/USB 01–16

[MIDI IN] jack

MIDI reception MIDI transmission

[USB TO

HOST] jack

[MIDI OUT] jack

[USB TO

HOST] jack

Port

handling

Merge

Using Your Instrument with

Other Devices

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

182

MIDI Settings

Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback

via MIDI Receive

The explanations here apply to the BASS display to be

called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on

page 177.

These settings let you determine the bass note for Style

playback, based on the note messages received via

MIDI. The note on/off messages received at the chan-

nel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the bass note of the

chord of Style playback. The bass note will be detected

regardless of the [ACMP] or split point settings. When

several channels are simultaneously set to “ON,” the

bass note is detected from merged MIDI data received

over the channels.

Operation

Select the channel and set the “ON/OFF” for that chan-

nel. Use the All OFF item to set all channels to OFF.

Setting the Chord Type for Style Play-

back via MIDI Receive

The explanations here apply to the CHORD DETECT

display to be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Opera-

tion” on page 177.

These settings let you determine the chord type for Style

playback, based on the note messages received via

MIDI. The note on/off messages received at the chan-

nel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the notes for

detecting chords in Style playback. The chords to be

detected depend on the ﬁngering type. The chord type

will be detected regardless of the [ACMP] or split point

settings. When several channels are simultaneously set

to “ON,” the chord type is detected from merged MIDI

data received over the channels.

The operation procedure is basically the same as that of

the BASS display.

BASS display

CHORD DETECT display

Displaying the Voice Program Change Number

Determines whether or not the Voice bank and number

are shown in the Voice selection display. This is useful

when you want to check which bank select MSB/LSB val-

ues and program change number you need to specify

when selecting the Voice from an external MIDI device.

You can set this in the display called up by the following

operations: [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY →TAB [

√

][

]

CONFIG 2. Switch the DISPLAY VOICE NUMBER menu

ON and OFF.

•The numbers displayed here start from “1.” Accordingly the

actual MIDI program change numbers are one lower, since

that number system starts from “0.”

• For the GS Voices, this feature is not available (the program

change numbers are not shown).

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

183

Appendix

Troubleshooting

The instrument does not turn on.

• Securely insert the female plug into the socket on the

instrument, and the male plug into a proper AC outlet.

A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on

or off.

• Electrical current is being applied to the instrument. This

is normal.

Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers.

• Noise may be heard if a mobile phone is used near the

instrument or if the phone is ringing. Turn off the mobile

phone, or use it further away from the instrument.

The letters in the display cannot be read, because the

display is too bright (or dark).

• Use the [LCD CONTRAST] knob to adjust for optimum

visibility.

• Adjust the brightness of the display (page 20).

The overall volume is too low, or, no sound is heard.

•The master volume may be set too low. Set it to an

appropriate level with the [MASTER VOLUME] dial.

• All keyboard parts are set to off. Use the PART ON/OFF

[RIGHT 1]/[RIGHT 2]/[LEFT] button to turn it on.

•The volume of the individual parts may be set too low.

Raise the volume in the BALANCE display (page 41).

• Make sure the desired channel is set to ON (page 105).

• Headphones are connected, disabling the speaker out-

put. Unplug the headphones.

•The [FADE IN/OUT] button is on, muting the sound.

Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button to turn the function off.

• Make sure the Local Control function is set to ON

(page 180).

Not all simultaneously played notes sound.

•You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony

(page 187) of the instrument. When the maximum

polyphony is exceeded, the earliest played notes will

stop sounding, letting the latest played notes sound.

The keyboard volume is lower than the Song/Style

playback volume.

•The volume of the keyboard parts may be set too low.

Raise the volume in the BALANCE display (page 41).

Keys do not sound at the proper pitch.

• Make sure the Performance Assistant function is off on

the operation display (page 44).

Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch.

The Scale parameter has probably been set to some-

thing other than “Equal,” changing the tuning system of

the keyboard. Make sure “Equal” is selected as the

Scale in the Scale Tune display (page 99).

– There is a slight difference in sound quality among

different notes played on the keyboard.

– Some Voices have a looping sound.

– Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher

pitches, depending upon the voice.

•This is normal and is a result of the instrument’s sam-

pling system.

Some Voices will jump an octave in pitch when played

in the upper or lower registers.

•This is normal. Some voices have a pitch limit which,

when reached, causes this type of pitch shift.

The Main display does not appear even when turning

the power on.

•This may occur if a USB storage device has been

installed to the instrument. Installation of some USB stor-

age device may result a long interval between turning

the power on and appearance of the Main display. To

avoid this, turn the power on after disconnecting the

device.

Some characters of the ﬁle/folder name are garbled.

•The language settings have been changed. Set the appro-

priate language for the ﬁle/folder name (page 19).

An existing ﬁle is not shown.

•The ﬁle extension (.MID, etc.) may have been changed

or deleted. Manually rename the ﬁle, adding the appro-

priate extension, on a computer.

The data contained in the USB storage device is not

shown on the instrument itself.

• Data ﬁles with names of more than 50 characters cannot

be handled by the instrument. Rename the ﬁle, reducing

the number of characters to 50 or less.

How can I stop the demo?

• Press the [EXIT] button.

Overall

Files/Folders

Demo

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

184

Appendix

The Voice selected from the Voice Selection display

does not sound.

• Check whether or not the selected part is turned on

(page 78).

•To select the Voice for the right-hand key range, press the

PART SELECT [RIGHT 1] button. For the Voice to be lay-

ered in the right-hand range, press the PART SELECT

[RIGHT 2] button. To select the Voice for the left-hand

key range, press the PART SELECT [LEFT] button.

The sound seems strange or different than expected

when changing a rhythm Voice (drum kit, etc.) of the

Style or Song from the Mixer.

• When changing the rhythm/percussion Voices (drum

kits, etc.) of the Style and Song from the VOICE parame-

ter, the detailed settings related to the drum voice are

reset, and in some cases you may be unable to restore

the original sound. In the case of Song playback, you

can restore the original sound by returning to the begin-

ning of the Song and playing back from that point. In the

case of Style play, you can restore the original sound by

selecting the same Style again.

Tremolo/Trill cannot be applied to the Organ Flute

Voice.

•This is normal; Tremolo and Trill settings in the Har-

mony/Echo display are not effective for Organ Flute

Voices.

The Harmony function does not operate.

• Harmony cannot be used with the Full Keyboard or AI

Full Keyboard ﬁngering modes. Select an appropriate

ﬁngering mode (page 104).

When a Voice is changed, the previously selected

effect is changed.

• Each Voice has its own suitable preset settings, which are

automatically recalled when the corresponding Voice

Set parameters are turned on (page 98).

The Voice produces excessive noise.

• Certain Voices may produce noise, depending on the

Harmonic Content and/or Brightness settings in the FIL-

TER page of the Mixing Console display (page 86).

The sound is distorted or noisy.

•The volume may be turned up too high. Make sure all

relevant volume settings are appropriate.

•This may be caused by certain effects. Try canceling all

unnecessary effects, especially distortion-type effects

(page 88).

• Adjust the sound using the [8

π†

] (TOTAL GAIN ADJ.)

buttons from the display shown in step 6 of “Editing and

Saving the selected EQ” (page 91), if you are using the

Master EQ.

• Some ﬁlter resonance settings in the VOICE SET display

(page 94) can result in distorted sound. Adjust these set-

tings if necessary.

• Noise may occur depending on the settings made in the

Filter display of the Mixing Console. Adjust the Har-

monic Content or Brightness controls in the Filter display

(page 86).

The sound does not change when replacing Voices

with the Song Auto Revoice feature.

• Depending on the particular Song data, there are some

instances where Song Auto Revoice has no effect, even

when replacing Voices.

The sound of the Voice doesn’t change, even when

editing the Voice.

•Keep in mind that adjustments made to the parameters

may not make much change in the actual sound depend-

ing on the original settings of the Voice.

Voices other than those in the Preset display cannot

be selected for Step recording.

•This is normal.

Style playback does not start.

• Make sure to press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP]

button.

• MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is

set to “INTERNAL” (page 180).

Only the rhythm channel plays.

• Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned

on; press the [ACMP] button.

•You may be playing keys in the right hand range of the

keyboard. Make sure to play keys in the chord range of

the keyboard.

Styles cannot be selected.

• If the size of the Style data is large (about 120 KB or

greater), the Style cannot be selected because the data is

too large to be ready by the instrument.

The desired chord is not recognized or output by the

auto accompaniment.

•You may not be playing the correct keys for indicating

the chord. Refer to “Chord Types Recognized in the Fin-

gered Mode” of the Data List. The Data List is available

at the Yamaha website. (See page 5.)

•You may be playing the keys according to a different ﬁn-

gering mode, and not the one currently selected. Check

the accompaniment mode, and play the keys according

to the selected mode (page 104).

Synchro Stop cannot be turned on.

• Synchro Stop cannot be turned on when the ﬁngering

mode is set to “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard,” or

when the [ACMP] button is set to off. Make sure the ﬁn-

gering mode is set to something besides “Full Keyboard”

or “Al Full Keyboard” and set the [ACMP] button to on.

Auto accompaniment chords are recognized regard-

less of the split point or where chords are played on

the keyboard.

•This is normal if the ﬁngering mode is set to “Full Key-

board” or “AI Full Keyboard.” If either of these is

selected, chords are recognized over the entire range of

the keyboard, irrespective of the split point setting. If

desired, select a different ﬁngering mode (page 104).

Voice

Style

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

185

Appendix

When playing back one Style and selecting another,

the newly selected Style doesn’t play at the proper

Tempo.

•You can select whether the appropriate tempo will be

called up automatically or not by using the TEMPO

parameter in the STYLE CHANGE BEHAVIOR function.

Starting a Song while playing back a Style stops Style

playback.

This is because Song playback has priority. The two ways

shown below let you play back a Style and Song simulta-

neously.

• Set the Song to Synchro Start standby, then start the

Style.

• Start the Style playback after playing back a Song.

The level balance of the various Parts becomes wrong

or unexpected sounds are output when selecting a

Style or a Voice after selecting a Song.

•The level balance of the Parts can change and unex-

pected sounds can be produced because of the effects

applied to each Part.

The “Off” setting is not shown for the Play Type

parameter in the Assembly (Style Creator) feature.

•The selected section is set to record enable. Release the

recording assignment by pressing the appropriate [1

†

] button in the recording channel display (TAB [

√

]

button → BASIC tab → [F] REC CH).

The channels BASS-PHR2 cannot be edited in Channel

Edit.

•This is normal; BASS-PHR2 channels of the Preset Styles

cannot be edited.

The Song/Style registered to the Registration Mem-

ory cannot be called up.

• If the registered Song/Style is contained on USB storage

device and the USB storage device is not connected to

the instrument, the Song/Style cannot be called up. Con-

nect the appropriate USB storage device containing the

Song/Style data.

The order for calling up Registration Memory settings

is not shown on the Registration Sequence setting

display.

•The bank containing the Registration has not been

selected. Select the appropriate bank (page 132).

When using the Freeze function of the Registration

Memory, the On/Off setting of the Left Part does not

change even when changing the Registration Mem-

ory setting.

•The Left Part On/Off setting is included in the Style

group. Remove the checkmark from “STYLE” in the

Freeze setting display (page 134).

Even though a Registration Memory setting contain-

ing a User/USB voice is selected, the File Selection dis-

play shows a Preset Voice.

•This is normal; even with the Preset Voice shown, the

actual sounding Voice is the selected User/USB Voice.

When a User/USB Voice is saved to the User/USB drive,

the actual data is divided into two separate types: 1) the

source Preset Voice itself, and 2) the parameter settings

as set in the Voice Set. When you recall a Registration

Memory setting containing a User/USB Voice, the instru-

ment selects the Preset voice (on which the User/USB

Voice is based), then applies the relevant parameter set-

tings to it — so that your original User/USB Voice is

sounded.

Songs cannot be selected.

•This may be because the language settings have been

changed. Set the appropriate language for the Song ﬁle

name.

• If the size of the Song data is large (about 300 KB or

greater), the Song cannot be selected because the data is

too large to be read by the instrument.

Song playback does not start.

• “New Song” (a blank Song) has been selected. Make

sure to select an appropriate Song in the Song Selection

display (page 36).

• Make sure to press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE)

button.

•The Song has been stopped at the end of the Song data.

Return to the beginning of the Song by pressing the

SONG [J] (STOP) button.

• In the case a Song to which write-protect has been

applied (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the

Song name), the original ﬁle may not be in the same

folder. It cannot be played back unless the original ﬁle

(showing “Prot.2 Orig” at the upper left of the Song

name) is in the same folder.

• In case of a Song to which write-protect has been

applied (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the

Song name), the original ﬁle name may have been

changed. Rename the ﬁle with the original ﬁle name (so

that “Prot.2 Orig” is shown at the upper left of the Song

name).

• In case of a Song to which write-protect has been

applied (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the

Song name), the ﬁle icon may have been changed. Songs

to which write-protect has been applied cannot be

played back when the ﬁle icon of the original has been

changed.

• MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is

set to “INTERNAL” (page 180).

Song playback stops before the Song is ﬁnished.

•The Guide function is turned on. (In this case, playback

is “waiting” for the correct key to be played.) Press the

[GUIDE] button to turn off the guide function.

Registration memory

Song

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

186

Appendix

The Song last selected before turning off the power is

no longer available.

• If the Song last selected before turning off the power is

contained in a USB storage device, you’ll need to recon-

nect the same USB storage device to call up the Song

again.

The measure number is different from that of the

score in the Song Position display, shown by pressing

the [G]/[H] (REW/FF) buttons.

•This happens when playing back music data for which a

speciﬁc, ﬁxed tempo is set.

In the AB Repeat function, the B point cannot be set.

•The A point has not been set. Set the B point only after

setting the A point.

When playing back a Song, some channels do not

play.

• Playback of these channels may be set to “OFF.” Turn

playback on for those channels that are set to “OFF”

(page 142).

A Song to which write-protect has been applied

(“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the Song

name) cannot be moved to an external media such as

a SmartMedia card or ﬂoppy disk.

•A Song to which write-protect has been applied cannot

be moved to an external media such as SmartMedia/

ﬂoppy disk, etc. Use the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal to

move the song to a USB ﬂash memory device connected

to this instrument.

The melody still plays back, even when specifying

Track 1 as the part to be muted for one-handed prac-

tice.

•A part other than the melody part has been assigned to

Track 1. Reassign the channel containing the melody to

Track 1 (page 141).

When displaying the music score, long notes that

have been entered, such as whole notes and ties, are

not displayed correctly.

• Long notes, such as whole notes and ties, may not be

shown in the music score display exactly as they were

entered. Selecting “Tenuto” by pressing the [H] button

before inputting each note in the Step Record display

(page 149) may solve the problem.

The tempo, beat, measure and music notation is not

displayed correctly.

• Some Song data for the instrument has been recorded

with special “free tempo” settings. For such Song data,

the tempo, beat, measure and music notation will not be

displayed correctly.

The note name partially obscures the note in the dis-

play.

• When several notes occur close to each other, the note

name may obscure the note at left.

The music score of the right-hand/left-hand part is

not displayed.

•The appropriate channels have not been assigned to the

right-hand and left-hand parts. Set the Track 1 and Track

2 channels to “AUTO” (page 141).

The notation in the display is cut off, with the middle

of a measure starting on the next line.

• When all the notes of a measure cannot ﬁt on one line,

the remaining notes in the measure are carried over to

the next line.

Dotted notes are indicated as rests.

•This is normal; sometimes dotted notes are indicated as

rests.

Chords are not displayed.

• If the selected Song does not contain chord data, chords

are not displayed.

Lyrics are not displayed.

• If the selected Song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are

not displayed.

Some of the lyrics overlap each other.

•This happens for Songs containing many lyrics.

Performance assistant technology does not work

appropriately.

• Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop Song play-

back, then set the [ACMP] and PART ON/OFF [LEFT] to

off. Finally, restart the Song.

Guide

Score

Lyrics (Karaoke)

Performance assistant technology

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

187

Appendix

Speciﬁcations

PSR-OR700

Sound Source AWM Stereo Sampling

Keyboard 61 keys (C1–C6 with Initial Touch)

Display 320 x 240 dots QVGA B/W LCD

Music Score, Lyrics YES

Voice

Polyphony (max) 96

Voice Selection

360 voices + 480 XG voices

22 Drum/SFX Kits + GM2 + GS voices for GS Song playback

MegaVoice 10

Live! Voice 14

Cool! Voice 18

Sweet! Voice 11

Organ Flutes! Voice 10

Regular Voice 297

Voice Editing (Voice Set) YES

Effects

Effect Blocks Reverb/Chorus/DSP 6

Effect Types

Reverb/Chorus/DSP

Reverb: 34 Preset + 3 User

Chorus: 29 Preset + 3 User

DSP 1: 191 Preset + 3 User

DSP 2-4: 106 Preset + 10 User

Master EQ 5 Preset + 2 User

Part EQ 28 Parts

Accompaniment Style

Accompaniment Styles 314

Pro Styles 302

Session Styles 12

MegaVoice/Style YES

Fingering

Single Finger, Fingered, Fingered On Bass, Multi Finger,

AI Fingered, Full Keyboard, AI Full Keyboard

Style Creator YES

OTS (One Touch Setting) 4 for each Style

OTS Link YES

Music Finder

Preset YES

Edit YES

RAM Capacity 120 KB

Song

Preset Songs 5 samples

Guide Follow Lights, Any Key, Karao-Key

Performance assistant technology YES

Recording

Quick Recording, Multi Recording, Step Recording,

Song Editing

Record Channels 16

RAM Capacity 300 KB

Multi Pad Preset 4 Pads ✕ 80 Banks

Memory Device

USB Flash Memory YES

Floppy Disk (2HD, 2DD) External Adaptor (via USB TO DEVICE)

Hard Disk External Adaptor (via USB TO DEVICE)

Flash Memory (Internal) 560 KB

Memory Card (SmartMedia, etc.) External Adaptor (via USB TO DEVICE)

Tempo

Tempo Range 5 - 500, Tap Tempo

Metronome Yes

Sound Bell on/off

Registration Memory

Buttons 8

Regist. Sequence / Freeze YES

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

188

Appendix

* Speciﬁcations and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to

change or modify products or speciﬁcations at any time without prior notice. Since speciﬁcations, equipment or options

may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Others

Demo YES

Language for Display

5 Languages

(English, German, French, Spanish, Italian)

Direct Access YES

Transpose Keyboard/Song/Master

Scale Type 9

Computer Connection

USB to HOST YES

USB to DEVICE YES

Other Connectors

PHONES, MIDI (IN, OUT), FOOT PEDAL (1, 2),

AUX IN (R, L/L+R), OUTPUT (R, L/L+R), LAN

Pedal Functions

VOLUME, SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, SOFT, GLIDE,

PORTAMENTO, PITCHBEND, MODULATION,

DSP VARIATION, SONG PLAY/PAUSE,

STYLE START/STOP, etc.

Ampliﬁers/ Speakers

Ampliﬁers 12 W

Speakers (12 cm + 5 cm)

Power Consumption 35 W

Dimensions [W

H] 1003 mm

433 mm

148 mm (39 5/8"

17 1/8"

5 7/8")

Weight 11.5 kg (25 lbs., 5 5/8 oz)

Optional accessories

Headphones HPE-150/HPE-30

Footswitch FC4/FC5

Foot Controller FC7

Floppy Disk Drive UD-FD01

AC Power Adaptor PA-300 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha

Keyboard stand

L-6/L-7

(The exterior size of the PSR-OR700 is beyond the limits as

described in the L-6 Assembly Instructions. However, we have

determined through tests that the stand can be safely used for

the instrument.)

PSR-OR700

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

189

Appendix

Index

Numerics

1–16 .................................................................. 148, 158

A-B Repeat ...................................................................42

...............................................................................104

AI FINGERED

.............................................................104

AI FULL KEYBOARD

..................................................104

Any key

......................................................................142

ASSEMBLY

.................................................................119

Auto Accompaniment Feature

......................................46

AUTO REVOICE SETUP

...............................................87

BALANCE .....................................................................41

BASIC

.........................................................................115

BASS

..........................................................................182

BAYAT

.......................................................................100

Brightness

.....................................................................20

Chain Playback ..........................................................138

CHANNEL

......................................................... 123, 158

CHANNEL ON/OFF

...................................................105

Characters

....................................................................71

CHORD

............................................................ 148, 158

CHORD DETECT

.......................................................182

CHORD FINGERING

.................................................103

Chord Tutor function

....................................................50

COMMON

...................................................................93

CONFIG 1

.....................................................35, 48, 105

CONFIG 2

........................................................... 20, 182

Contrast

........................................................................19

CONTROLLER

..............................................................93

Cool!

............................................................................77

COPY

...........................................................................68

CUT

.............................................................................69

Data List .........................................................................5

DELETE

........................................................................69

Demo

...........................................................................24

Demo (Voice)

...............................................................32

[DEMO] button

............................................................12

[DIGITAL RECORDING] button

...................................12

Direct Access

...............................................................61

DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection)

...............................177

Drums

..........................................................................77

EDIT ...........................................................................118

Edit (Effect)

...................................................................89

Edit (EQ)

.......................................................................91

Edit (Lyrics)

.................................................................158

Edit (Music Finder)

.....................................................111

Edit (OTS)

.....................................................................51

Edit (Song)

..................................................................158

Edit (Style)

..................................................................120

Edit (Voice)

...................................................................92

EFFECT

.........................................................................86

Effect Return Level

........................................................89

Effect Type

................................................................... 88

EFFECT/EQ

...................................................................95

Entering characters

.......................................................71

EQ (Equalizer)

..............................................................86

EQUAL TEMPERAMENT

............................................ 100

ESEQ

..........................................................................176

EXIT

............................................................................. 65

Factory Reset ................................................................72

Factory-programmed Settings

.......................................72

FADE IN/OUT (Song)

................................................. 137

FADE IN/OUT (Style)

....................................................48

Fade In/Out time

........................................................137

FADE IN/OUT/HOLD TIME

........................................105

Fast forward

............................................................... 138

Favorite

......................................................................110

File

...............................................................................64

File Selection Display

............................................ 27, 66

File Selection Display Basic Operation

.........................65

File Selection Display Configuration

.............................64

File/Folder Operations

..................................................66

FILTER

................................................................. 86, 165

FINGERED

................................................................. 104

FINGERED ON BASS

................................................. 104

Flash Memory

.............................................................. 23

Folder

...........................................................................64

Follow lights

...............................................................142

FOOT PEDAL

.............................................................168

FOOTAGE

............................................................. 96, 97

Format

..........................................................................66

FREEZE

.......................................................................134

FULL KEYBOARD

...................................................... 104

Function display

........................................................... 28

GM System Level 1 .................................................... 177

GM System Level 2

.................................................... 177

GROOVE

...................................................................121

..............................................................................177

Guide

.................................................................. 40, 141

HARMONY ..................................................................95

HARMONY/ECHO

.......................................................82

Headphones

................................................................. 18

................................................................................81

ICON ...........................................................................70

Karaoke ........................................................................57

Karao-key

...................................................................142

Keyboard Parts

.............................................................78

KEYBOARD/PANEL

............................................... 33, 58

KIRNBERGER

.............................................................100

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

190

Appendix

Language ......................................................................19

LCD

.............................................................................12

Left

...............................................................................78

Left Hold

......................................................................50

Live!

.............................................................................77

Lyrics

.................................................................. 57, 166

Main Display ......................................................... 26, 62

MASTER TUNE

.............................................................81

[MASTER VOLUME] dial

..............................................17

MEAN-TONE

.............................................................100

MEDIA

........................................................66, 140, 172

MegaVoice

...................................................................77

MELODIC MINOR

.....................................................126

Messages

......................................................................60

Metronome

..................................................................34

MIDI

..........................................................................174

MIDI recording

.................................................... 43, 143

MIDI Settings

..............................................................177

MIDI Templates

..........................................................179

MIXING CONSOLE

......................................................84

Modulation Wheel

.......................................................34

MULTI FINGER

..........................................................104

Multi Pad Creator

.......................................................128

Multi Pads

....................................................................13

Multi track recording

..................................................143

Music Finder

................................................................55

Music Rest

....................................................................18

NAME ..........................................................................70

Notation

.......................................................................39

One Touch Setting .......................................................51

One-Handed Practice

...................................................40

Organ Flutes

.......................................................... 77, 96

OTS Link

......................................................................51

Owner Name

...............................................................21

PANEL PART ................................................................85

PARAMETER

..............................................................124

Part

..............................................................................78

PASTE

................................................................... 68, 69

Pause

.........................................................................138

Pedal polarity

.............................................................168

percussion sounds

........................................................32

performance assistant technology

.................................44

Phrase Mark

...............................................................138

Pitch

.............................................................................81

Pitch Bend Wheel

........................................................33

Portamento Time

..........................................................93

Practice Function

.......................................................141

PRESET

.........................................................................27

Pro

.............................................................................103

PROPERTY

.................................................................172

Prot. 1

..........................................................................68

Prot. 2 Edit

................................................................... 68

Prot. 2 Orig

..................................................................68

PURE MAJOR

.............................................................100

PURE MINOR

............................................................ 100

PYTHAGOREAN

........................................................100

QUANTIZE ................................................................ 123

Quick Recording

........................................................143

QUICK START

............................................................139

RANDOM ..................................................................138

RAST

..........................................................................100

Realtime Recording

....................................................114

REC MODE

................................................................158

RECEIVE

.....................................................................181

Record

......................................................................... 43

Record (Song)

.............................................................143

Record (Style)

.............................................................114

REGISTRATION MEMORY

.........................................131

REGISTRATION SEQUENCE

......................................134

REPEAT MODE

................................................... 37, 138

Repertoire

.................................................................... 56

Revoice

........................................................................87

Rewind

.......................................................................138

Right 1

......................................................................... 78

Right 2

......................................................................... 78

SAVE ............................................................................67

Save (Music Finder)

....................................................112

SCALE TUNE

................................................................99

Score

............................................................................39

Search (Music Finder Records)

................................... 108

Section Set

................................................................. 107

Session

.......................................................................103

Set the polarity of the pedal

........................................ 168

SFX

...............................................................................77

SINGLE FINGER

.........................................................104

SMF (Standard MIDI file)

............................................176

Song

...................................................................... 12, 36

SONG CH 1-8/9-16

..................................................... 85

Song channels

............................................................147

SOUND

.......................................................................94

Sound effects

................................................................ 32

[STANDBY/ON] switch

......................................... 12, 17

Step Recording

.................................................. 114, 143

Stop ACMP

.................................................................106

Style

...................................................................... 12, 46

Style Assembly

...........................................................114

Style Change Behavior

............................................... 107

Style Creator

...............................................................114

Style File Format (SFF)

................................................176

STYLE PART

........................................................ 85, 147

STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT

....................................106

Style Structure

............................................................114

Style Touch

................................................................106

Sweet!

..........................................................................77

Synchro Start (Song)

................................................... 137

Synchro Start (Style)

......................................................48

Synchro Stop

................................................................49

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

191

Appendix

Synchro Stop Window ................................................106

SYS/EX.

.......................................................................158

SYSTEM

......................................................................180

Tap function ...............................................................137

TAP TEMPO

.................................................................48

Tempo

..........................................................................34

Time Signature

.............................................................35

Top

............................................................................138

TOUCH

................................................................ 33, 53

TRANSMIT

.................................................................180

Transpose

.............................................................. 58, 81

TUNE

...........................................................................86

UP ................................................................................65

USB Storage Device

.....................................................23

[USB TO DEVICE] terminal

..........................................13

[USB TO HOST] terminal

.............................................13

USER

............................................................................27

Vibrato .........................................................................95

Voice

.................................................................... 30, 77

VOICE buttons

.............................................................13

Voice Program Change Number

.................................182

VOICE SET

...................................................................92

VOL/VOICE

..................................................................85

Volume balance

...........................................................41

VOLUME/ATTACK

.......................................................97

WERCKMEISTER ........................................................100

XF ..............................................................................176

.............................................................................177

Appendix

PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual

192

Panel Button Chart

The position of the button on the panel can be conﬁrmed by the Panel Controls (page 14).

Number

π†

]–[8

π†

]...................................................................... d

[A]–[J]............................................................................ ]

[ACMP] ......................................................................... T

[AUTO FILL IN] ............................................................. S

[BALANCE].................................................................... ^

[BREAK]......................................................................... W

[CHANNEL ON/OFF] .................................................... b

DATA ENTRY dial ......................................................... j

[DEMO]......................................................................... 9

[DIRECT ACCESS].......................................................... c

Drum Kit Icons .............................................................. ~

[DSP]............................................................................. {

ENDING/rit. [I]/[II]/[III] .................................................. X

[ENTER]......................................................................... k

[EXIT] ............................................................................ i

[EXTRA TR].................................................................... E

[FADE IN/OUT] ............................................................. Q

[FREEZE]........................................................................ p

[FUNCTION]................................................................. f

[GUIDE] ........................................................................ D

[HARMONY/ECHO]...................................................... w

INTRO [I]/[II]/[III]........................................................... U

[LCD CONTRAST]......................................................... \

[LYRICS] ........................................................................ B

MAIN VARIATION [A]/[B]/[C]/[D]................................. V

[MASTER VOLUME] ...................................................... 2

[MEMORY] (SCALE MEMORY) ...................................... 6

[MEMORY] (REGISTRATION MEMORY) ....................... q

[METRONOME] ............................................................ N

[MIXING CONSOLE]..................................................... a

[MODULATION] wheel ................................................ 4

[MONO] ....................................................................... z

MULTI PAD CONTROL [1]–[4] ..................................... t

MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT].................................. s

MULTI PAD CONTROL [STOP] .................................... u

[MUSIC FINDER]........................................................... l

ONE TOUCH SETTING [1]–[4] ..................................... v

[OTS LINK].................................................................... R

[PART SELCT], [PART ON/OFF]..................................... m

[PITCH BEND] wheel .................................................... 3

REGIST BANK [–]/[+]..................................................... o

REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8]................................. r

[REPEAT] ....................................................................... C

SCALE MEMORY buttons............................................... 7

SCALE SETTING buttons ................................................ 5

[SCALE TUNE]............................................................... h

[SCORE] ........................................................................ A

SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) ................................... J

SONG [G]/[H] (REW/FF) ......................................... K

SONG [J] (STOP) ..................................................... I

SONG [REC] ................................................................ H

SONG [SELECT] ............................................................ 0

[STANDBY/ON] ............................................................ 1

STYLE buttons................................................................ L

STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] .................................. [

[SUSTAIN]..................................................................... y

[SYNC START]............................................................... Z

[SYNC STOP] ................................................................ Y

TAB [

√

][

]................................................................... e

[TAP TEMPO] ................................................................ O

TEMPO [–]/[+] ............................................................... P

[TOUCH] ...................................................................... x

[TR 1] ............................................................................ G

[TR 2] ............................................................................ F

TRANSPOSE [–][+] ........................................................ M

UPPER OCTAVE [–][+] .................................................. }

[USB]............................................................................. g

[VARI.] .......................................................................... |

VOICE buttons............................................................... n

Limited Warranty

90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS

Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the cate-

gories listed below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is

applicable to all models included in the following series of products:

PSR SERIES OF PORTATONE ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS

If during the ﬁrst 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to

have a defect in material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for

parts or labor.

If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha

will, subject to the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous

expenses incurred are the consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products

and/or to use reconditioned units as warranty replacements.

THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE

PRODUCTS. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MER-

CHANT ABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND

SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages.

Therefore, these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you.

This warranty gives you speciﬁc legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state.

CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES

If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities:

1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the

product for assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below.

2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an

explanation of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting

service and/or parts under warranty.

3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely.

*Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the ﬁrst 90 days.

IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be

issued that has a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if

needed.

4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this

manual and to follow all safety precautions.

EXCLUSIONS

This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged

removed, or to failures and/or damages that may occur as a result of:

1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modiﬁcation or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity.

2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the

product, an authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha.

3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of

Columbia, and Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country.

Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below.

Model________________________ Serial #_____________________________ Sales Slip #_____________________________

Purchased from______________________________________________________ Date__________________________________

(Retailer)

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA

Electronic Service Division

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue

Buena Park, CA 90620

KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL!

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

(standby)

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instruc-

tions contained in this manual, meets FCC require-

ments. Modiﬁcations not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to acces-

sories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product

MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Fail-

ure to follow instructions could void your FCC authori-

zation to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to com-

ply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations,

Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with

these requirements provides a reasonable level of

assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices. This equipment generates/

uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used

according to the instructions found in the users manual,

may cause interference harmful to the operation of

other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regula-

tions does not guarantee that interference will not occur

in all installations. If this product is found to be the

source of interference, which can be determined by

turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate

the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon

lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfac-

tory results, please contact the local retailer authorized

to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate

the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corpo-

ration of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600

Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

OBSERVERA!

Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet)

så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även

om själva apparaten har stängts av.

ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er

IKKE afbrudt, sålæenge netledningen siddr i en

stikkontakt, som er t endt — også selvom der or

slukket på apparatets afbryder.

VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty

käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta.

This product contains a high intensity lamp that con-

tains a small amount of mercury. Disposal of this

material may be regulated due to environmental

considerations.

For disposal information in the United States, refer

to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site:

www.eiae.org

(mercury)* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park,

Calif. 90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Electronic Keyboard

Model Name : PSR-OR700

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is

suspected.

(FCC DoC)

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accor-

dance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus

may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the

terminals in your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the ter-

minal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal

of the three pin plug.

• This applies only to products distributed

by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

(2 wires)

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,

CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL

Tel: 011-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte

Madero Este-C1107CEK

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 011-4119-7000

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND

Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Switzerland in Zürich

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/

HUNGARY/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-602039025

POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce

ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland

Tel: 022-868-07-57

THE NETHERLANDS/

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Ice-

land

Tel: 525 5000

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia)

Ofﬁce 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii

Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia

Tel: 495 626 0660

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,

Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDIA

Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd.

5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex

Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India

Tel: 0124-466-5551

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,

Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 080-004-0022

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-78030900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

#03-11 A-Z Building

140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015

Tel: 747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

4, 6, 15 and 16

ﬂoor, Siam Motors Building,

891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,

Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2626

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Works LTD

P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,

New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-3273

EKB50

U.R.G., Digital Musical instruments Division

Printed in Indonesia

00?APZC?.?-01D0

WT89490

Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page

http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard/

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Transcripción de documentos

O W N E R ' S M A N U A L EN SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. NOTICE: Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. Model ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Purchase Date Serial No. Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-BP (bottom) PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • Use the specified adaptor (PA-301, PA-300 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. • Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. If you notice any abnormality • If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. Location • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not place objects in front of the instrument’s air vent, since this may prevent adequate ventilation of the internal components, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. (3)-10 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 3 Connections Saving data Saving and backing up your data • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. • The data of the types listed below are lost when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save the data to the USER tab display (page 27), or USB storage device (USB flash memory/floppy disk, etc). • Recorded/Edited Songs (page 43, 143, 158) • Created/Edited Styles (page 114) Maintenance • Edited Voices (page 92) • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. • Memorized One Touch Settings (page 51) • Edited MIDI settings (page 177) • Scale tune settings (page 99) Handling caution • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. Moreover, the above-mentioned data can be saved all at once. Refer to page 75. Data in the USER tab display (page 27) may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to a USB storage device (USB flash memory/floppy disk, etc). • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. When you change settings in a display page and then exit from that page, System Setup data (listed in the Parameter Chart of the Data List downloadable from the web) is automatically stored. However, this edited data is lost if you turn off the power without properly exiting from the relevant display. Refer to page 5 for how to obtain the Data List. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. (3)-10 4 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha PORTATONE! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the instrument. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. About this Owner’s Manual and Data List This manual consists of the following sections. Owner’s Manual Introduction (page 12).......................... Please read this section first. Quick Guide (page 24)......................... This section explains how to use the basic functions. Basic Operation (page 60).................... This section explains how to use the basic operations including displaybased controls. Reference (page 77) ............................. This section explains how to make detailed settings for the various functions. Appendix (page 183)............................ This section contains additional information such as Troubleshooting and Specifications. Data List The Data List contains various important preset content lists such as Voices, Styles, Effects, as well as MIDIrelated information. The Data List is available for downloading from the Yamaha Manual Library. Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • The example Operation Guide displays shown in this Manual are in English. • Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended. • Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original. This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. • The mandolin and pan flute, shown in the displays of the PSR-OR700, are on display at the Hamamatsu Museum of Musical Instruments. • The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd. • This product utilizes NF, an embedded Internet browser from ACCESS Co., Ltd. NF is used with the patented LZW, licensed from Unisys Co., Ltd. NF may not be separated from this product, nor may it be sold, lent or transferred in any way. Also, NF may not be reverse-engineered, reverse-compiled, reverse-assembled or copied. This software includes a module developed by the Independent JPEG Group. • All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 5 Accessories Guide to Yamaha Online Member Product User Registration Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Owner’s Manual Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide Music rest AC Power Adaptor * May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. The followings are the titles, credits and copyright notices for two (2) of the songs pre-installed in this instrument: Beauty And The Beast from Walt Disney's BEAUTY AND THE BEAST Lyrics by Howard Ashman Music by Alan Menken © 1991 Walt Disney Music Company and Wonderland Music Company, Inc. All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Hey Jude Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney Copyright © 1968 Sony/ATV Songs LLC Copyright Renewed All Rights Administered by Sony/ATV Music Publishing, 8 Music Square West, Nashville, TN 37203 International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved 6 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Table of Contents Introduction What can you do with the PORTATONE? ....... 12 Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your Own Performance ........................................ 58 Setting an Oriental Scale ................................ 59 Panel Controls ................................................. 14 Playing the Keyboard ...................................... 16 Power Supply ............................................... 16 Powering Up ................................................ 17 Basic Operation Setting Up ....................................................... 18 Music Rest ................................................... 18 Using Headphones ....................................... 18 Changing the Display Language .................. 19 Display Settings ........................................... 19 Selecting Message Language .......................... 60 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks .................................................... 22 Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) ............................................ 62 Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/Floppy Disk, etc) ............ 23 Quick Guide Playing the Demos .......................................... 24 Operations in Basic Displays ........................... 26 Operation of the Main Display ............................. 26 Operation of the File Selection Display ................. 27 Operation of the Function Display ........................ 28 Playing Voices ................................................. 30 The Messages Shown in the Display .............. 60 Instant Selection of the Displays — Direct Access .............................................. 61 Main Display ........................................................ 62 File Selection Display Configuration and Basic Operation ............................................................. 63 File/Folder Operations in the File Selection Display ................................................................. 66 Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings ... 72 Restoring the Factory-programmed System .......... 72 Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings Independently by Item ......................................... 72 Saving and Recalling Your Original Settings as a Single File ............................................................. 74 Data Backup .................................................... 75 Backup procedure ................................................ 75 Playing Preset Voices ............................................ 30 Practicing with the Preset Songs .................... 36 Playing Back and Listening to Songs Before Practicing ............................................................. 36 Displaying Music Notation (Score) ....................... 39 Muting the Right- or Left-hand Part Viewing the Score .................................................................... 40 Practicing with the Repeat Playback Function ....... 42 Recording Your Performance ................................ 43 Playing Backing Parts with the performance assistant Technology ....................................... 44 Playing Accompaniment with the Auto Accompaniment Feature (Style Playback) ...... 46 Playing “Mary Had a Little Lamb” with the Auto Accompaniment Feature ...................................... 46 The Multi Pads ................................................ 52 Reference Using, Creating and Editing Voices ..77 Voice Characteristics ....................................... 77 Playing Different Voices Simultaneously ........ 78 Keyboard Parts (Right 1, Right 2, Left) .................. 78 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously (Right 1 and 2 Parts) ............................................ 79 Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands (Right 1 and Left Parts) .............................. 80 Changing Pitch ................................................ 81 Transpose ............................................................. 81 Fine-tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument ...... 81 Selecting the Harmony/Echo type .................. 82 Playing the Multi Pads .......................................... 52 Using Chord Match .............................................. 53 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE) ........................................ 84 Voice Effects .................................................... 53 Basic Procedure .................................................... 84 Applying Harmony to Your Right-hand Melody (HARMONY/ECHO) .............................................. 54 Voice Creating — Voice Set ............................ 92 Calling Up Ideal Setups for Each Song (Music Finder) ................................................. 55 Calling up the panel settings to match the Style (Repertoire) .......................................................... 56 Singing Along with Song Playback (Karaoke) or Your Own Performance .............................. 57 Singing with the Lyrics Display ............................. 57 Convenient Functions for Karaoke ........................ 58 Basic Procedure .................................................... 92 Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices .......... 96 Using Oriental Scales — Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/ Scale Memory ................................. 99 Setting an Oriental Scale — Scale Setting ...... 99 Scale Tuning .................................................... 99 Memorizing the Scale Setting — Scale Memory ........................................... 101 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 7 Saving Your Scale Settings ........................... 101 Recalling the Scale Setting ........................... 102 Using Your Instrument with Other Devices ........................................ 167 Connecting Audio Devices ............................ 167 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles ........ 103 Style Playback-related Settings ..................... 106 Using External Audio Devices for Playback (1 [OUTPUT] jacks) ........................................... 167 Playing External Audio Devices with the Built-in Speakers (2 [AUX IN] jacks) ............................... 167 Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller (3 [FOOT PEDAL 1/2] jacks) .............................. 168 Assigning Specific Functions to Each Foot Pedal .. 168 Connecting External MIDI Devices (4 [MIDI] terminals) .......................................... 171 Split Point Settings ....................................... 107 Connecting to a computer and USB device ... 171 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance of the Style (MIXING CONSOLE) ............................ 108 Connecting a Computer (4 [MIDI] and 5 [USB TO HOST] terminals) ...... 171 Connecting to a USB Storage Device (6 via the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal) ................ 172 Style Characteristics ...................................... 103 Selecting a Chord Fingering Type ................ 103 Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a Style ............................................................... 104 Convenient Music Finder feature ................. 108 Searching the Records ........................................ 108 Creating a Set of Favorite Records ...................... 110 Editing Records .................................................. 111 Saving the Record .............................................. 112 Style Creator ................................................. 114 Style Structure .................................................... 114 Creating a Style .................................................. 114 Editing the Created Style .................................... 120 The Multi Pads ............................. 128 Multi Pad Creating (Multi Pad Creator) ....... 128 Multi Pad Realtime Recording ............................ 128 Multi Pad Step Recording (EDIT) ........................ 129 Multi Pad Editing (Multi Pad Creator) ......... 130 Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory ............... 131 Registering and Saving Custom Panel Setups ............................................................ 131 Recalling the Registered Panel Setups ......... 132 Deleting an Unneeded Panel Setup/Naming a Panel Setup ........................................................ 133 Disabling Recall of Specific Items (Freeze Function) ............................................... 134 Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order — Registration Sequence ................................... 134 Using, Creating and Editing Songs ............................................ 136 Compatible Song Types ................................ 136 Operations for Song Playback ...................... 137 Adjusting the Volume Balance and Voice Combination, etc. (MIXING CONSOLE) ....... 140 Practicing Songs with the Guide Functions .. 141 Selecting the Guide Function Type ..................... 141 Recording Your Performance to MIDI .......... 143 Recording Methods ............................................ 143 Editing a Recorded Song .................................... 158 8 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual What is MIDI? ................................................ 174 MIDI Settings ................................................ 177 Basic Operation .................................................. 177 Pre-Programmed MIDI Templates ....................... 179 MIDI System Settings ......................................... 180 MIDI Transmit Settings ....................................... 180 MIDI Receive Settings ......................................... 181 Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback via MIDI Receive ............................................................... 182 Setting the Chord Type for Style Playback via MIDI Receive ............................................................... 182 Appendix Troubleshooting ............................................ 183 Specifications ................................................ 187 Index .............................................................. 189 Panel Button Chart ........................................ 192 Introduction Using Your Instrument with Other Devices Quick Guide Basic Operation Reference Using, Creating and Editing Voices Using Oriental Scales Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles The Multi Pads Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups Using, Creating and Editing Songs Using Your Instrument with Other Devices Appendix PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 9 Application Index Starting up before turning the power on • Setting up the music rest.......................................................................................................................................... page 18 • Connecting headphones.......................................................................................................................................... page 18 • Turning the power on/off ......................................................................................................................................... page 17 Listening to the PSR-OR700 • Playing the Demos .................................................................................................................................................. page 24 • Playing songs........................................................................................................................................................... page 36 – Playing a Preset Song ........................................................................................................................................... page 36 – Turning parts (channels) of the Song on/off......................................................................................................... page 142 – Adjusting the balance between the Song and keyboard...................................................................................... page 140 • Playing Styles ........................................................................................................................................................ page 103 – Playing Preset Styles............................................................................................................................................. page 46 – Turning parts (channels) of the Style on/off ......................................................................................................... page 105 – Adjusting the balance between the Style and keyboard...................................................................................... page 108 • Playing the Multi Pads ............................................................................................................................................. page 52 Playing the Keyboard • • • • • • • • Selecting a Voice (RIGHT1) and playing the keyboard ............................................................................................. page 78 Playing two or three Voices simultaneously ............................................................................................................. page 79 Playing different Voices with the left and right hands ............................................................................................... page 80 Playing the drum/percussion Voices......................................................................................................................... page 77 MegaVoices............................................................................................................................................................. page 77 Setting the touch sensitivity of the keyboard ............................................................................................................ page 33 Turning Initial Touch on or off for each keyboard part (RIGHT1, 2, LEFT)................................................................. page 53 Setting the Modulation wheel for each keyboard part (RIGHT 1, 2, LEFT)................................................................ page 34 Practicing the keyboard performance • Using the Metronome.............................................................................................................................................. page 34 • Displaying and playing along with the music notation of the song during playback................................................. page 39 Selecting the programs of the PSR-OR700 • • • • • • • • • • • • Voices ..................................................................................................................................................................... page 77 Styles..................................................................................................................................................................... page 103 Multi Pad banks..................................................................................................................................................... page 128 Songs .................................................................................................................................................................... page 136 Music Finder records ...................................................................................................................................... pages 55, 108 Registration Memory bank..................................................................................................................................... page 134 Registration Memory number ................................................................................................................................ page 134 One Touch Setting numbers..................................................................................................................................... page 51 Harmony/Echo types ............................................................................................................................................... page 82 MIDI templates...................................................................................................................................................... page 179 Effect types .............................................................................................................................................................. page 88 Master EQ types ...................................................................................................................................................... page 90 Using the LCD display • Understanding and using the Main display .............................................................................................................. page 26 • Viewing the Song Lyrics on the LCD display ............................................................................................................ page 57 • Viewing the Song Score on the LCD display ............................................................................................................ page 39 Playing Style chords with your left hand and melodies with your right • • • • 10 Learning how to play specific chord types ..............................................................Chord Tutor .............................. page 50 Learning how to play (indicate) chords for Style playback.......................................Chord Fingering........................ page 50 Applying automatic harmony or echo to your right-hand melodies.........................Harmony/Echo ......................... page 82 Automatically changing the chords of the Multi Pads with your left-hand play........Chord Match ............................ page 53 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Instantly selecting custom panel settings • Calling up ideal panel setups..................................................................................Music Finder ................... pages 55, 108 • Changing setups to match the Style ........................................................................One Touch Setting .................... page 51 • Saving and recalling custom panel setups...............................................................Registration Memory .............. page 131 Creating Voices, Styles, Songs, and more • • • • • • • • • Creating your original Voices..................................................................................Voice Set .................................. page 92 Creating your original Organ Flutes Voices .............................................................Voice Set .................................. page 96 Creating your original Styles ...................................................................................Style Creator........................... page 114 Creating your original Songs.................................................................................................................................... page 43 – MIDI recording of your keyboard performance ........................................................................................... pages 43, 143 – Inputting notes one by one..................................................................................Song Creator .......................... page 149 – Inputting and editing ..........................................................................................Song Creator .......................... page 158 Creating your original Multi Pads............................................................................Multi Pad Creator ................... page 128 Creating a Registration Memory bank .................................................................................................................... page 134 Creating new Music Finder records ....................................................................................................................... page 110 Creating new Effect types ........................................................................................................................................ page 88 Creating custom Master EQ settings......................................................................................................................... page 90 Using Oriental Scales • • • • • Setting an Oriental Scale — Scale Setting ................................................................................................................ page 99 Adjusting the Scale Tuning — Scale Tuning.............................................................................................................. page 99 Memorizing the Scale Setting — Scale Memory ................................................................................................... page 101 Saving Your Scale Settings...................................................................................................................................... page 101 Recalling the Scale Setting..................................................................................................................................... page 102 Controlling and adjusting the pitch • • • • • • Adjusting the overall pitch of the PSR-OR700.........................................................Master Tune .............................. page 81 Adjusting the octave of the keyboard....................................................................................................................... page 86 Transposing notes (Master Transpose, Keyboard Transpose, Song Transpose) ............................................................ page 58 Setting [TRANSPOSE] button to independently control separate parts ..................................................................... page 86 Using the PITCH BEND wheel ................................................................................................................................ page 33 Using the MODULATION wheel............................................................................................................................. page 34 Live performance tips and techniques • • • • Assigning specific panel operations/functions for foot control................................................................................ page 168 Calling up Registration Memory numbers in custom-set order ................................Registration Sequence ............ page 134 Using a foot pedal to change Registration Memory numbers ................................................................................. page 168 Using the Fade In/Out ..................................................................................................................................... pages 48, 49 Group performance tips and techniques • Independently transposing the Song and keyboard pitch to match your singing range ............................................. page 58 • Tuning the overall sound of the PSR-OR700 to match other instruments.................................................................. page 81 • Synchronizing the PSR-OR700 to other MIDI instruments ..................................................................................... page 180 Other Tips • Registering your name to the PSR-OR700................................................................................................................ page 21 • Importing custom icons for Voice/Style/Song indications in the Selection display .................................................... page 70 • Displaying the bank select and program numbers in the Voice Selection display ................................................... page 182 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 11 Introduction What can you do with the PORTATONE? LCD DEMO SONG Explore the Demos (page 24) Playback previously recorded songs (page 36, 57, 137) These not only showcase the stunning voices and styles of the instrument, they introduce you to the various functions and features — and give you hands-on experience using the PSR-OR700! Enjoy a wide variety of preset songs as well as songs on commercially available disks. The large LCD (together with the various panel buttons) provides comprehensive and easy-to-understand control of the instrument’s operations. The lyrics, music scores can also be displayed in the LCD. STYLE Back up your performance with Auto Accompaniment (page 46, 103) SCALE SETTING/SCALE MEMORY Using oriental scales (page 99) The Scale Setting feature lets you easily lower the pitches of specific notes by 50 cents to create your own oriental scales. Up to six scale settings can be stored for instant recall (Scale Memory), whenever you need them. 12 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Playing a chord with your left hand automatically plays the auto accompaniment backing. Select an accompaniment style — such as pop, jazz, Latin, etc. — and let the PORTATONE be your backing band! DIGITAL RECORDING Record your performances (page 43, 143) With the powerful and easy-to-use song recording features, you can record your own keyboard performances, and create your own complete, fully orchestrated compositions — which you can then save to the USER drive or a USB storage device for future recall. And since the recorded data is MIDI, you can easily edit your songs, too. Introduction VOICE Enjoy a huge variety of realistic voices (page 30, 77) MUSIC FINDER Call up the perfect accompaniment style (page 55, 108) The PSR-OR700 features a wealth of exceptionally authentic and dynamic voices — including piano, strings, woodwinds, and more! The instrument also has MegaVoices. MegaVoices feature different performance sounds of the same instrument in different velocity ranges — designed specifically for recorded MIDI data. If you know what song you want to play, but you don’t know which style or voice would be right for it, let the Music Finder help you. Just select the song title, and the instrument automatically calls up the most appropriate style and voice. Organ Flutes Craft your own organ voices (page 96) This special function not only gives you a full set of rich and luscious organ sounds, it also lets you create your own original organ voices, just as on a traditional organ, by increasing and decreasing the flute footages, and adding percussive sounds. SCALE TUNE USB TO DEVICE terminal Create your own scales (page 99) USB TO HOST terminal Make music with a computer — quickly and easily (page 171) Connect the instrument to the USB storage device (page 172) You can select a desired scale template including oriental scales and create your own scales by fine tuning the scale notes. Multi Pads Add spice to your performance with special dynamic phrases (page 52, 128) By simply pressing one of the Multi Pads, you can play short rhythmic or melodic phrases. You can also create your original Multi Pad phrases by recording them directly from the keyboard. LAN Dive in and take advantage of the wide world of computer music software. Connections and setup are exceptionally easy, and you can play back your computer recorded parts with different instrument sounds — all from a single instrument! Connecting the USB storage device (such as USB flash memory and hard disk drive) to this terminal lets you save various types of data created on the instrument. TO DEVICE USB TO HOST MIDI IN FOOT PEDAL OUT 1 2 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 13 Panel Controls Introduction TO DEVICE USB TO HOST IN 71 See page 167 38 10 13 14 11 15 12 16 17 39 21 18 19 20 40 9 1 5 22 41 23 42 24 2 25 43 44 26 27 28 30 6 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 55 56 57 58 7 3 4 8 STANDBY/ON 1 [STANDBY/ON] switch .................................................... P. 17 VOLUME 2 [MASTER VOLUME] dial.................................................. P. 17 WHEEL 3 [PITCH BEND] wheel ...................................................... P. 33 I [J] (STOP) button ......................................................... P. 37 J [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button ....................................... P. 36 K [G]/[H] (REW/FF) buttons......................................... P. 138 STYLE L STYLE buttons .................................................................. P. 46 4 [MODULATION] wheel................................................... P. 34 TRANSPOSE M [–] [+] buttons .................................................................. P. 58 SCALE SETTING 5 [SCALE SETTING] buttons ................................................ P. 59 METORONOME N [METRONOME] button .................................................... P. 34 SCALE MEMORY 6 [MEMORY] button .......................................................... P. 59 TAP TEMPO O [TAP TEMPO] button ........................................................ P. 48 7 [SCALE MEMORY] buttons............................................... P. 59 PHONES 8 [PHONES] ....................................................................... P. 18 DEMO 9 [DEMO] button................................................................ P. 24 SONG 0 [SELECT] button ............................................................... P. 36 14 TEMPO P [–] [+] buttons .................................................................. P. 34 FADE IN/OUT Q [FADE IN/OUT] button..................................................... P. 48 STYLE CONTROL R [OTS LINK] button ........................................................... P. 51 S [AUTO FILL IN] button..................................................... P. 49 A [SCORE] button ............................................................... P. 39 T [ACMP] button ................................................................. P. 47 B [LYRICS] button............................................................... .P. 57 U INTRO [I]/[II]/[III] buttons................................................. P. 48 C [REPEAT] button............................................................... P. 42 V MAIN VARIATION [A]/[B]/[C]/[D] buttons........................ P. 49 D [GUIDE] button ............................................................... P. 40 W [BREAK] button ................................................................ P. 49 E [EXTRA TR] button ......................................................... P. 143 X ENDING/rit. [I]/[II]/[III] buttons ........................................ P. 49 F [TR 2] button ................................................................... P. 42 Y [SYNC STOP] button ........................................................ P. 49 G [TR 1] button ................................................................... P. 40 Z [SYNC START] button....................................................... P. 48 H [REC] button .................................................................... P. 43 [ [START/STOP] button ....................................................... P. 48 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual MIDI FOOT PEDAL OUT 1 2 Introduction 45 39 46 47 50 52 53 54 48 51 49 69 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 70 \ [LCD CONTRAST] knob .................................................. P. 19 ] [A]–[J] buttons.................................................................. P. 26 MULTI PAD CONTROL s [SELECT] button ............................................................. P. 130 ^ [BALANCE] button........................................................... P. 41 t [1]–[4] buttons ............................................................... P. 130 a [MIXING CONSOLE] button ............................................ P. 84 u [STOP] button ................................................................ P. 128 b [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button ................................. P. 105, 142 c [DIRECT ACCESS] button ................................................. P. 61 ONE TOUCH SETTING v [1]–[4] buttons ................................................................. P. 51 d [1π†]–[8π†] buttons ................................................ P. 26 e TAB [√][®] buttons......................................................... P. 27 f [FUNCTION] button ........................................................ P. 28 g [USB] button.................................................................... P. 65 h [SCALE TUNE] button ...................................................... P. 99 i [EXIT] button.................................................................... P. 27 j DATA ENTRY dial ............................................................ P. 65 k [ENTER] button ................................................................ P. 65 MUSIC FINDER l [MUSIC FINDER] button .................................................. P. 55 PART m [PART SELECT], [PART ON/OFF] buttons ......................... P. 78 VOICE n VOICE buttons ................................................................. P. 30 REGISTRATION MEMORY o REGIST BANK [–]/[+] buttons......................................... P. 132 p [FREEZE] button ............................................................. P. 134 VOICE CONTROL w [HARMONY/ECHO] button ....................................... P. 53, 82 x [TOUCH] button .............................................................. P. 53 y [SUSTAIN] button............................................................. P. 53 z [MONO] button ............................................................... P. 53 { [DSP] button .................................................................... P. 53 | [VARI.] button .................................................................. P. 53 UPPER OCTAVE } UPPER OCTAVE [–]/[+] buttons........................................ P. 62 ~ Drum Kit icons....................................... Data List (See page 5) REAR PANEL å DC IN (terminal) .............................................................. P. 16 • For quick reference, also see the alphabetically sorted “Panel Button Chart” on page 192. • For information on the jacks and connectors located on the rear panel, see page 167. q [MEMORY] button ......................................................... P. 131 r [1]–[8] buttons ............................................................... P. 131 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 15 Playing the Keyboard Power Supply Introduction 1 WARNING • Use the specified adaptor (PA-301/PA-300 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. • The use of an incompatible adaptor may cause irreparable damage to the PSROR700, and may even pose a serious shock hazard! ALWAYS UNPLUG THE AC ADAPTOR FROM THE AC POWER OUTLET WHEN THE PSR-OR700 IS NOT IN USE. 2 3 Make sure that the instrument’s STANDBY/ON switch is set to STANDBY (off). Connect one end of the AC cable to the power adaptor. Connect the power adaptor’s DC plug to the instrument’s DC IN terminal on the rear panel. CAUTION Never interrupt the power supply (e.g. unplug the AC adaptor) during any PSR-OR700 record operation! Doing so can result in a loss of data. CAUTION Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at a minimum level. When not using the PSR-OR700 for an extended period of time, be sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. DC IN To electrical outlet 4 16 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Connect the other end (normal AC plug) to the nearest electrical outlet. Powering Up n 1 Press the [STANDBY/ON] switch. The Main display appears in the display. CAUTION Introduction Before you switch your PSR-OR700 on or off, first turn down the volume of any connected audio equipment. In order to avoid possible damage to the speakers or other connected electronic equipment, always switch on the power of the PSR-OR700 before switching on the power of the amplified speakers or mixer and amplifier. Likewise, always switch off the power of the PSR-OR700 after switching off the power of the amplified speakers or mixer and amplifier. When you’re ready to turn off the power, press the [STANDBY/ON] switch again. 2 Setting the volume Use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to adjust the volume to an appropriate level. Air Vents CAUTION This instrument has special air vents in the top panel (see below) and rear panel. Do not place objects where they might block the air vent, since this may prevent adequate ventilation of the internal components, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. Air Vents SCALE TUNE PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 17 Setting Up Music Rest Introduction The PSR-OR700 is supplied with a music rest that can be attached to the instrument by inserting it into the slot at the rear of the control panel. Using Headphones CAUTION Do not listen with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time. Doing so may cause hearing loss. 18 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Connect a pair of headphones to the [PHONES] jack. The internal stereo speaker system is automatically shut off when a pair of head phones is plugged into the [PHONES] jack. Changing the Display Language This determines the language used in the display for messages, file names, and character input. 2 Introduction 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[√][®] OWNER Press the [4π†]/[5π†] button to select a language. Display Settings Adjusting the Contrast of the Display You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [LCD CONTRAST] knob located to the left of the display. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 19 Adjusting the Brightness of the Display Adjust the brightness of the display. Introduction 1 2 20 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[√][®] CONFIG 2 Press the [2π†] button to adjust the brightness of the display. Entering the Owner Name in the Opening Display 1 2 Introduction You can have your name appear in the opening display (the display that appears when the power is turned on). Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[√][®] OWNER Press the [I] (OWNER NAME) button and call up the Owner Name display. Refer to page 71 for character-entry details. Displaying the version number To check the version number of this instrument, press the [7π†]/ [8π†] (VERSION) buttons in the display in step 1 above. Press the [EXIT] or [8π†] button to return to the original display. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 21 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks Introduction An optional floppy disk drive UD-FD01 can be connected to this instrument. It lets you save original data you’ve created on the instrument to floppy disk, and allows you to load data from floppy disk to the instrument. Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below. Floppy Disk Compatibility CAUTION Do not remove the floppy disk or turn off the instrument itself while the disk is being accessed. Doing so may result not only in loss of data on the disk but also damage to the floppy disk drive. • Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data-read and -write errors. • 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used. Formatting a Floppy Disk • If you find that you are unable to use new, blank disks or old disks that have been used with other devices, you may need to format them. For details on how to format a disk, see page 66. Keep in mind that all data on the disk will be lost after formatting. Make sure to check beforehand whether or not the disk contains important data. n Floppy disks formatted on this device may or may not be usable as is on other devices. Inserting/Removing Floppy Disks Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive: • Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out. n Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy disks. Removing a Floppy Disk • After checking that the instrument is not accessing* the floppy disk (checking that the use lamp on the floppy disk drive is off), firmly press the eject button at the upper right of the disk slot all the way in. When the floppy disk is ejected, pull it out of the drive. If the floppy disk cannot be removed because it is stuck, do not try to force it, but instead try pressing the eject button again, or try re-inserting the disk and attempt to eject it again. * Access of the disk indicates an active operation, such as recording, playback, or deletion of data. If a floppy disk is inserted while the power is on, the disk is automatically accessed, since the instrument checks whether the disk has data. Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head • Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument employs a precision magnetic read/write head which, after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually cause read and write errors. • To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-available dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper headcleaning disks. About Floppy Disks Handle floppy disks with care, and follow these precautions: • Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy disks in their protective cases when they are not in use. • Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liquids. • Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the floppy disk inside. • Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the disk, rendering it unreadable. • Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing. • Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location. To Protect Your Data (Write-protect Tab): • To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disk's write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open). When saving data, make sure that the disk's write-protect tab is set to the “overwrite” position (tab closed). Write-protect tab open (protect position) 22 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/Floppy Disk, etc) This instrument features a built-in [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device with a standard USB cable, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device. Be sure to handle USB storage device with care. Follow the important precautions below. age device, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB storage device. Compatible USB storage devices • Up to two USB storage devices, such as a floppy disk drive, hard disk drive, CD-ROM drive, flash memory reader/writer, etc., can be connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. (If necessary, use a USB hub. The number of USB storage devices that can be used with musical instruments simultaneously even when a USB hub is used is a maximum of two.) This instrument can recognize up to four drives in one USB storage device. Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. • The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB storage devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB storage devices that you purchase. Before purchasing USB storage devices, please consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized Yamaha distributor (see list at end of the Owner’s Manual) for advice, or visit the following web page: http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard/ n Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data. Formatting USB storage media • When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation. • When connecting a USB storage device to the [USB TO DEVICE], make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction. Before removing the media from the device, make sure that the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save, Copy and Delete operations). Introduction n For more information about the handling of USB stor- Using USB Storage Devices CAUTION Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the cable too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as in the Save, Copy and Delete operations), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. • If you are connecting two or three devices at the same time (such as two USB storage devices and a LAN adaptor), you should use a USB hub device. The USB hub must be self-powered (with its own power source) and the power must be on. Only one USB hub can be used. If an error message appears while using the USB hub, disconnect the hub from the instrument, then turn on the power of the instrument and re-connect the USB hub. • Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard, you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is that of USB 1.1. To protect your data (write-protect): To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each storage device or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device, make sure to disable write-protect. CAUTION The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain important data. Proceed with caution, especially when connecting multiple USB storage medias. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 23 Quick Guide Playing the Demos Quick Guide The Demos are more than just songs — they also provide helpful, easy-to-understand introductions to the features, functions and operations of the instrument. In a way, the Demos are an interactive “mini-manual” — complete with sound demonstrations and text showing what it can do for you. 1 2 Select the desired Language. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J]UTILITY → TAB[√][®] OWNER 2 Press the [4π†]/[5π†] buttons to select the desired language. Press the [DEMO] button to start the Demos. Demos will play back continuously until stopped. 3 Press the [EXIT] button to stop the Demo playback. When the Demo stops, the display returns to the MAIN display. 24 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Showing Specific Demo Topics 1 π†]/[8π π†] buttons in the Demo display to call up the specific Demo Press the [7π menu. To return back to the previous display, press the [J] (Play Overview Demo) button. Quick Guide 2 Press one of the [A]–[H] buttons to show a specific Demo. When the Demo has more than one screen. Press [1π†]–[8π†] buttons corresponding to the screen number. 3 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Demos. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 25 Operations in Basic Displays To start with, you should know a little about the basic displays that appear in the Quick Guide. There are three basic displays: Main display ➤ See below. File selection display ➤ page 27 Function display ➤ page 28 Quick Guide Operation of the Main Display The Main display shows the basic settings and important information for the instrument (It is the same display that appears when the instrument is turned on.).You can also call up display pages related to the displayed function from the Main display. n About information in the Main display See page 62. 1 [A]–[J] buttons The [A]–[J] buttons correspond to the settings indicated next to the buttons. For example, press the [F] button, and the Voice (RIGHT 1) selection display will appear in the display. 1 1 π†]–[8π π†] buttons 2 [1π The [1π†]–[8π†] buttons correspond to the parameters which are indicated above the buttons. For example, pressing the [1π] button will increase the Song (page 36) volume. 3 [DIRECT ACCESS] and [EXIT] buttons Here’s a convenient way to return to the Main display from any other display: Simply press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then the [EXIT] button. 26 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 3 2 3 Operation of the File Selection Display In the File Selection display, you can select the Voice (page 30)/Song (page 36)/Style (page 46), etc. In the example here, we’ll call up and use the Song Selection display. 2 Quick Guide 1 3, 5 3, 5 4 1 Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display. 2 Press the TAB [√][®] buttons to select the desired drive (PRESET/USER/USB). About PRESET/USER/USB PRESET .............. Internal memory to which the preprogrammed data are installed as preset data. USER ................. Internal memory that allows both reading and writing of data. USB ................... USB storage device, such as USB flash memory/floppy disk drive, etc., which is connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. n Hereafter in this manual, any USB storage device such as USB flash memory/floppy disk drive, etc. will be referred to as “USB storage device.” 3 Select a folder (if necessary). Several Songs may be together in a folder. In this case, the folder(s) will appear in the display (see the illustration at right). Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a folder. Press the [8π] (UP) button to call up the next highest level folder. 4 Select a page (if the display has several pages). When the drive contains more than ten Songs, the display is divided up into several pages. The page indications are shown at the bottom of the display. Press one of the [1π]–[7π] buttons to select a page. n The number of pages shown varies depending on the selection display of the Voices/Songs/Styles. Press the button corresponding to “P1, P2 ...” in the display. 5 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Song. You can also select a Song by using the DATA ENTRY dial, then press the [ENTER] button to execute. 6 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 27 Operation of the Function Display In the Function display, you can make detailed settings. In the example here, we’ll call up and use the keyboard touch sensitivity setting display. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. Quick Guide Categories of detailed settings are shown. 2 Press the [D] button to select the category CONTROLLER. When the selected category is further divided into sub-categories, the tab(s) will be shown in the display. 3 Press the TAB [√][®] buttons to select the KEYBOARD/PANEL tab. When the setting is further divided into additional settings, a list will be shown in the display. 28 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 4 Press the [A] button to select the “1 INITIAL TOUCH.” 4 Quick Guide 5 5 Press the [1π†]/[2π†] button to select touch sensitivity for the keyboard. For details on the touch sensitivity settings, see page 33. Throughout this manual, arrows are used in the instructions, indicating in shorthand the process of calling up certain displays and functions. For example, the instructions above can be indicated in shorthand as: [FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [√][®] KEYBOARD/PANEL → [A] 1 INITIAL TOUCH. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 29 Playing Voices The instrument features a wide variety of exceptionally realistic Voices, including piano, guitar, strings, wind instruments and more. VOICE buttons (page 30) Quick Guide [METRONOME] button (page 34) Playing Preset Voices The preset Voices are categorized and contained in appropriate folders. Voice buttons on the panel correspond to the categories of the preset Voices. For example, press the [PIANO] button to display various piano Voices. n About the various Voices Refer to the Voice List in the Data List available at the Yamaha website. (See page 5.) 1 Press the PART SELECT [RIGHT1] button to call up the Voice selection display. The Voice selected here is for the RIGHT 1 part. For the Voice part, see page 78. Make sure that the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT1] button is also turned on. If it is turned off, the right-hand part will not sound. Determining how the Voice selection display is opened (when one of the VOICE category selection buttons is pressed). You can select how the Voice selection display is opened (when one of the VOICE category selection buttons is pressed). 1 2 30 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√][®] CONFIG 2 Select the [B] (2 VOICE CATEGORY BUTTON OPTIONS) button, and use the [1π†]/[2π†] buttons to change how the Voice selection display is opened. • OPEN&SELECT: Opens the Voice selection display with the top (first) voice of the voice category automatically selected (when one of the VOICE category selection buttons is pressed). With the default settings, the OPEN&SELECT function is turned on. • OPEN ONLY: Opens the Voice selection display with the currently selected voice (when one of the VOICE category selection buttons is pressed). PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 2 3 Press one of the VOICE buttons to select a Voice category and call up the Voice selection display. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Voice. Quick Guide n • The Voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Preset Voice name. For details on the characteristics, see page 77. • You can instantly jump back to the original display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A]–[J] buttons. 4 Play the keyboard. Recalling your favorite Voices easily The instrument has a huge amount of high-quality Voices, covering an exceptionally broad range of instrument sounds — making it perfect for virtually every musical application. However, the sheer number of Voices may seem overwhelming at first. To easily recall your favorite Voice, there are two methods: ● Save your favorite Voice to the USER display in the Voice Selection display and recall it by using the VOICE [USER] button 1 Copy your favorite Voices from the Preset drive to the User drive. Refer to page 68 for details on the copy operation. 2 Press the Voice [USER] button to call up the Voice Selection display and press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Voice. ● Register your favorite Voice to Registration Memory and recall it with the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons Refer to page 131 for details on Registration Memory operations. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 31 Playing the Voice Demos To listen to the various Voices and hear how they sound especially in context, listen to the demo songs for each Voice. 1 Quick Guide 2 In the Voice Selection display (page 31 step 3), press the [8†] (DEMO) button to start the Demo for the selected Voice. To stop the Demo, press the [8†] (DEMO) button again. Selecting percussion sounds When one of the Drum Kit Voices in the [PERCUSSION & DRUM KIT] group is selected, you can play various drums and percussion instrument sounds on the keyboard. Details are given in the Drum List provided in the Data List (page 5). To check which “Standard Kit 1” percussion sounds are assigned to each key, look at the Drum Kit icons printed below the keys (page 15). Selecting sound effects You can play individual sound effects, such as bird chirps and ocean sounds from the keyboard. The sound effects are categorized as “GM&XG”/“GM2.” 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Press the PART SELECT [RIGHT 1] button to call up the Voice selection display. Press the [8π] (UP) button to call up the Voice categories. Press the [2π] button to display page 2. Press the [E]/[F] button to select “GM&XG”/“GM2.” Press the [2π] button to display page 2. Press the [F] button to select “SoundEffect.” Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired sound effect. Play the keyboard. Selecting GM/XG/GM2 Voices n For details on the Voice allocation format, see page 177. You can select the GM/XG/GM2 Voices directly via the panel operation. Perform steps 1–4 described in the “Selecting sound effects” above, select the desired category, then select the desired voice. Playing different Voices simultaneously The instrument can play different Voices simultaneously (page 78). • Layering two different Voices This is useful for creating rich and thick sounds. • Setting separate Voices for the left and right sections of the keyboard You can play different Voices with the left and right hands. For example, you can set up the keyboard to play the bass Voice with your left hand and the piano Voice with your right hand. 32 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Setting the touch sensitivity of the keyboard You can adjust the touch response of the instrument (how the sound responds to the way you play the keys). The touch sensitivity type becomes the common setting for all Voices. Call up the operation display: [FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [√][®] KEYBOARD/ PANEL → [A] 1 INITIAL TOUCH 2 Press the [1π†]/[2π†] buttons to specify the touch response. HARD 2 ..... Requires strong playing to produce high volume. Best for players with a heavy touch. HARD 1 ..... Requires moderately strong playing for high volume. NORMAL... Standard touch response. SOFT 1....... Produces high volume with moderate playing strength. SOFT 2....... Produces relatively high volume even with light playing strength. Best for players with a light touch. Quick Guide 1 n • This setting does not change the weight of the keyboard. • When you do not want to apply touch sensitivity, set Touch to OFF for the corresponding parts by pressing the [5†]–[7†] buttons. When Touch is set to OFF, you can specify the fixed volume level by pressing the [4π†] button. • The touch sensitivity settings may have no effect with certain voices. Using the Pitch Bend Wheel Use the PITCH BEND wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from you) or down (roll the wheel toward you) while playing the keyboard. The Pitch Bend is applied to all the keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, 2 and LEFT). The PITCH BEND wheel is self-centering and will automatically return to normal pitch when released. PITCH BEND MODULATION n • If the Pitch Bend range is set to more than 1200 cents (1 octave) via MIDI, the pitch of some voices may not be raised or lowered completely. • The effects caused by using the PITCH BEND Wheel will not be applied to the LEFT part when the Chord Fingering type is set to the one other than “FULL KEYBOARD” or “AI FULL KEYBOARD” with the [ACMP] and PART ON/OFF [LEFT] turned on. The maximum pitch bend range can be changed via the following instructions. 1 Call up the display for setting the Pitch Bend Range. [MIXING CONSOLE] → TAB [√][®] → TUNE → [H] PITCH BEND RANGE 2 Set each of the Pitch Bend Range of the keyboard part by using the [5π†]/[6π†]/[7π†] button. [5π†] button..........Sets the Pitch Bend Range of the LEFT part. [6π†] button..........Sets the Pitch Bend Range of the RIGHT1 part. [7π†] button..........Sets the Pitch Bend Range of the RIGHT2 part. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 33 Using the Modulation Wheel The Modulation function applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. This is applied to all the keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, 2 and LEFT). Moving the MODULATION wheel down (towards MIN) decreases the depth of the effect, while moving it up (towards MAX) increases it. PITCH BEND MODULATION Quick Guide n • To avoid accidently applying modulation, make sure the MODULATION Wheel is set at MIN before you start playing. • The effects caused by using the MODULATION wheel will not be applied to the LEFT part when the Chord Fingering type is set to the one other than “FULL KEYBOARD” or “AI FULL KEYBOARD” with the [ACMP] and PART ON/OFF [LEFT] turned on. You can set whether the effects caused by the MODULATION Wheel will be applied or not to each of the keyboard part. 1 Call up the display. [FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [√][®] → KEYBOARD/PANEL → [A]/[B] 2 MODULATION WHEEL 2 Set whether the effects caused by the MODULATION Wheel will be applied or not to each of the keyboard part by using the [5π†]/[6π†]/[7π†] button. [5π†] button..........Sets whether the effects caused by the MODULATION Wheel will be applied or not to the LEFT part. [6π†] button..........Sets whether the effects caused by the MODULATION Wheel will be applied or not to the RIGHT1 part. [7π†] button..........Sets whether the effects caused by the MODULATION Wheel will be applied or not to the RIGHT2 part. Using the Metronome The metronome provides a click sound, giving you an accurate tempo guide when you practice, or letting you hear and check how a specific tempo sounds. 1 Press the METRONOME button to start the metronome. 2 To stop the metronome, press the METRONOME button again. Adjusting the Tempo or Setting the Time Signature of the Metronome Sound ■ Adjusting the Metronome Tempo 1 34 Press the TEMPO [–]/[+] button to call up the pop-up tempo setting display. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 2 Press the TEMPO [–]/[+] buttons to set the tempo. Pressing and holding either button lets you continuously increase or decrease the value. You can also use the DATA ENTRY dial to adjust the value. To reset the tempo, press the TEMPO [–]/[+] buttons simultaneously. n About the Tempo display The number in the display indicates how many quarter-note beats there are in one minute. The range is between 5 and 500. The higher the value, the faster the tempo. 3 Press the [EXIT] button to close the Tempo display. Set the Popup Display Time Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√][®] CONFIG 2 2 Select the [B] (2 POPUP DISPLAY TIME) button, and use the [7π†]/[8π†] buttons to set the time. Quick Guide 1 ■ Determine the Metronome Time Signature and Other Settings 1 Call up the operation display: [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√][®] CONFIG 1 → [B] 2 METORONOME 2 Set the parameters by pressing the [2π†]–[7π†] buttons. VOLUME Determines the level of the metronome sound. SOUND Determines which sound is used for the metronome. Bell Off............... Conventional metronome sound, with no bell. Bell On............... Conventional metronome sound, with bell. TIME SIGNATURE Determines the time signature of the metronome sound. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 35 Quick Guide Practicing with the Preset Songs n Song In this manual, the word “Song” refers to performance data. Playing Back and Listening to Songs Before Practicing The instrument includes several preset Songs. This section covers basic information on playing back the preset Songs. 1 Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song selection display. 2 Press the [A] button to select the Sample Song category. 2 3 3 Press one of the [A]–[E] buttons to select the desired Song. You can also select the file by using the DATA ENTRY dial, then press the [ENTER] button to execute. n You can instantly jump back to the original display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A]–[E] buttons. 4 36 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 5 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop playback. Playing Songs saved to USER (page 67) 1 2 Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song selection display. 3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Song. Quick Guide Press the TAB [√][®] buttons to select the USER tab. Playing Songs saved to a USB storage device (page 67) CAUTION Before using a USB storage device, be sure to read “Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/Floppy Disk, etc)” on page 23. 1 2 3 Connect the USB storage device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. 4 Use the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Song. Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song selection display. Press the TAB [√][®] buttons to select the USB tab (“USB1”/“USB2”), corresponding to the USB storage device you inserted in Step 1. The indication “USB1”/“USB2” will be displayed depending on the number of the connected devices. n You can also select a specified file in the USB storage device by pressing the [USB] button. [USB] → [A] SONG → [A]–[J] Playing Songs in sequence You can play all Songs in a folder continuously. 1 2 Select a Song in the desired folder. 3 4 Press the [H] (REPEAT MODE) button to select “ALL.” 5 6 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop continuous playback. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback. All Songs in the folder play back continuously, in order. To turn off the Song sequence playback, press the [H] button to select “OFF” in the display in step 2. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 37 Boost the volume of the part to be practiced On the instrument, a single Song can contain separate data for up to sixteen MIDI channels. Specify the channel for practicing and increase the playback volume for the channel. 1 Select a Song. The method for selecting a Song is the same as “Playing Back and Listening to Songs Before Practicing” (page 36 step 1–3). 2 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE display. Quick Guide 3 2, 4 3 4 Press the TAB [√][®] buttons to select the VOL/VOICE tab. 5 6 Press the [E]/[J] button to select “VOLUME.” Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button until “MIXING CONSOLE (SONG CH1-8)” is shown at the top of the display. To raise the level of the desired channel(s), press the appropriate buttons [1π†]–[8π†]. If the desired channel is not shown in the MIXING CONSOLE (SONG CH1-8) display, press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE (SONG CH9-16) display. If you don’t know which channel’s volume to raise: • Look at the illustrations of the instruments indicated below “VOICE.” • Look at the channel indicators, which light as the Song plays back. Watching these as you listen can show you which channel you wish to boost. 38 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Displaying Music Notation (Score) You can view the music notation of the selected Song. We suggest that you read through the music notation before starting to practice. n • The instrument can display the music notation of commercially-available music data or your recorded Songs. • The displayed notation is generated by the instrument based on the Song data. As a result, it may not be exactly the same as commercially available sheet music of the same song — especially when displaying notation of complicated passages or many short notes. • The notation functions cannot be used to create Song data by inputting notes. For information on creating Song data, see page 143. Select a Song (page 36). 2 Press the [SCORE] button to display the music notation. Quick Guide 1 n Look through the entire score before playing back the Song Press the TAB [√][®] buttons to select subsequent pages. You can also use the footswitch to select subsequent pages (page 169). 3 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback. The “ball” bounces along through the score, indicating the current position. 4 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop playback. Changing the Notation Display You can change the notation display as desired to suit your personal preferences. 1 Press the [SCORE] button to display the music notation. n The music notation at right is for instructional purposes only, and the song depicted is not one of the preset Songs on your instrument. 2 Change the following settings as desired. ● Changing the size of the music notation Press the [7π†] button to change the size of the music notation. ● Displaying only right-hand part/left-hand part notation Press the [1π†]/[2π†] button to disable display of the left-hand part/right-hand part. ● Customizing the notation display • Display the note name at the left of the note 1 2 3 4 Press the [5π†] (NOTE) button to display the note name. Press the [8π†] (SET UP) button to call up the detailed setting display. Press the [6†] (NOTE NAME) button to select “Fixed Do.” Press the [8π] (OK) button to apply the setting. ● Increase the number of measures in the display You can increase the number of measures that will be displayed by decreasing the other items to be displayed (part, lyrics, chords, etc.). Use the [1π†]–[4π†] buttons to turn off the items you want not to be displayed. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 39 Set the detailed parameters of the view type as desired. 1 Press the [8π†] (SET UP) button to call up the detailed setting display. 2 Press the [1π†]–[6π†] buttons to set the view type. Quick Guide Determines which MIDI channel in the Song data is used for the left-hand/right-hand part. This setting returns to AUTO when a different Song is selected. AUTO The MIDI channels in the Song data for the right- and left-hand parts are assigned automatically — setting the parts to the same channel as the channel which is specified in the [FUNCTION] → LEFT CH/RIGHT CH [B] SONG SETTING. 1–16 Assigns the specified MIDI channel (1–16) to each of the left- and right-hand parts. OFF (LEFT CH only) No channel assignment: This disables display of the left-hand key range. KEY SIGNATURE This lets you enter key signature changes in the middle of a song, at the stopped position. This menu is useful when the selected Song contains no key signature settings for displaying notation. QUANTIZE This gives you control over the note resolution in the notation, letting you shift or correct the timing of all displayed notes so that they line up to a particular note value. Make sure to select the smallest note value used in the song. NOTE NAME Selects the type of the note name indicated at the left of the note in the notation from among the following three types. The settings here are available when the NOTE parameter in “Display the note name at the left of the note” step 1 is set to ON. A, B, C Note names are indicated as letters (C, D, E, F, G, A, B). FIXED DO Note names are indicated in solfeggio and differ depending on the selected language. The language is specified in LANGUAGE of the OWNER display (page 19). MOVABLE DO Note names are indicated in solfeggio according to the scale intervals, and as such are relative to the key. The root note is indicated as Do. For example, in the key of G major the root note of “So” would be indicated as “Do.” As with “Fixed Do,” the indication differs depending on the selected language. 3 Press the [8π] (OK) button to apply the setting. n Save the notation view settings The notation view settings can be saved as part of a Song (page 162). Muting the Right- or Left-hand Part Viewing the Score The Guide function indicates the notes you should play, when you should play them, and how long you should hold them down. You can also practice at your own pace — since the accompaniment waits for you to play the notes correctly. Here, mute the right- or left-hand part and try practicing the part. Practicing the Right-hand Part (TRACK 1) 1 Select a Song (page 36), then press the [SCORE] button to call up the Score display. 2 Turn the [GUIDE] button on. 2 3 4 40 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 3 Press the SONG [TR 1] button to mute the right-hand part. The indicator of the [TR 1] button goes out. You can now play that part by yourself. 4 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback. Practice the muted part viewing the Score display. n Adjusting the tempo Refer to page 34. 5 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop playback. 6 Turn the [GUIDE] button off. Quick Guide Quickly changing tempo during a performance (Tap function) The tempo can also be changed during Song playback by tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button twice at the desired tempo. Adjusting the volume balance between the Song and the keyboard This lets you adjust the volume balance between Song playback and the sound you play on the keyboard. 1 2 Press the [BALANCE] button to call up the volume balance display. 3 Press the [EXIT] button to close the volume balance display. To adjust the Song volume, press the [1π†] button. To adjust the keyboard (RIGHT 1) volume, press the [6π†] button. 1 3 2 2 n About keyboard parts (Right 1, Right 2, Left) See page 78. Other guide functions The initial setting “Follow Lights” was used in the instructions “Muting the Right- or Left-hand Part Viewing the Score” on page 40. There are additional functions in the Guide feature, as described below. To select a guide function, see page 141. For keyboard performance • Any Key This lets you practice the timing of playing the keys. For Karaoke • Karao-Key This function lets you control the Song playback timing with just one finger, while you sing along. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 41 Practicing the Left-hand Part (TRACK 2) Viewing the Score 1,2 3 Follow the same steps as in “Practice the right-hand part (TR 1)” on page 40. Press the [TR 2] button to mute the left-hand part. The indicator of the [TR 2 (L)] button goes out. You can now play that part by yourself. Quick Guide 4 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback and practice the muted part. 5 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop playback. 6 Turn the [GUIDE] button off. Practicing with the Repeat Playback Function The Song Repeat functions can be used to repeatedly play back a Song or a specific range of measures in a Song. This is useful for repeated practicing of difficult-to-play phrases. Playing Back a Song Repeatedly 1 Select a Song (page 36). 2 Press the [REPEAT] button to turn on Repeat playback. 3 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback. The Song will be played back repeatedly until you press the SONG [J] (STOP) button. 4 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop playback. 5 Press the [REPEAT] button to turn off Repeat playback. Specifying a Range of Measures and Playing them Back Repeatedly (A-B Repeat) 1 Select a Song (page 36). 2 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback. 3 Specify the repeat range. Press the [REPEAT] button at the starting point (A) of the range to be repeated. Press the [REPEAT] button again at the ending point (B). After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the range from Point A to Point B is played back repeatedly. n Instantly returning to Point A Regardless of whether the Song is playing back or is stopped, pressing the [J] (STOP) button returns to Point A. 42 4 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop playback. 5 Press the [REPEAT] button to turn off Repeat playback. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Other Methods for Specifying the A–B Repeat Range ● Specifying the repeat range while Songs are stopped 1 2 3 4 Press the [H] (Fast Forward) button to advance to the Point A location. Press the [REPEAT] button to specify Point A. Press the [H] (Fast Forward) button to advance to the Point B location. Press the [REPEAT] button again to specify Point B. ● Specifying the repeat range between Point A and the end of the Song Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between Point A and the end of the Song. Quick Guide Recording Your Performance Record your performance by using the Quick Recording feature. This is an effective practice tool, allowing you to easily compare your own performance to the original song you are practicing. You can also use it to practice duet pieces by yourself, if you have your teacher or partner record his or her part beforehand. 1 Press the [REC] and [J] (STOP) buttons simultaneously. A blank Song for recording is automatically set. 2 Select a Voice (page 30). The selected Voice will be recorded. 3 Press the [REC] button. 4 Start recording. Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard. 5 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop recording. A message prompting you to save the recorded performance appears. To close the message, press the [EXIT] button. 6 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to play back the recorded performance. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 43 7 1 2 Quick Guide 3 4 5 Save the recorded performance. Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song selection display. Press the TAB [√][®] buttons to select the appropriate tab (USER, USB, etc.) to which you want to save the data. Select USER to save the data to internal memory, or select USB to save the data to a USB storage device. Press the [6†] (SAVE) button to call up the file naming display. Enter the file name (page 71). Press the [8π] (OK) button to save the file. To cancel the Save operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. CAUTION The recorded song will be lost if you change to another Song or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation. When the following message appears: “Song” changed. Save?/“Song” speichern?/ “Song” modifié. Sauv.?/“Song” cambiado. ¿Guardar?/Salvare “Song”? The recorded data has not yet been saved. To save the data, press the [G] (YES) button to open the Song selection display and save the data (see above). To cancel the operation, press the [H] (NO) button. Playing Songs saved to USER or a USB storage device. Refer to page 37. Playing Backing Parts with the performance assistant Technology This feature makes it exceptionally easy to play the backing parts along with Song playback. n Before using performance assistant technology To use the performance assistant technology, the Song must contain chord data. If the Song contains this data, the current chord name will be displayed in the Main display during Song playback, letting you easily check whether the Song contains chord data or not. 1 Select a Song (page 36). In these example instructions, use the Songs in the “SampleSongs” folder. 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING 44 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Press the [8π†] button to turn the [P.A.T.] (Performance Assistant) on. 4 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback. 5 Play the keyboard. Quick Guide 3 The instrument automatically matches your performance on the keyboard to the Song playback and chords, no matter what keys you play. It even changes the sound according to the way you play. Try playing in the three different ways below. ● Playing the left and right hand together ● Playing the left and right hand together ● Playing the left hand and right hand (method 1). (method 2). alternately. Play three notes at the same time with your right hand. Play several notes one after the other with different fingers of your right hand. Play three notes at the same time with your right hand. 6 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop playback. 7 Press the [8π†] button to turn the [P.A.T.] (Performance Assistant) off. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 45 Playing Accompaniment with the Auto Accompaniment Feature (Style Playback) Quick Guide The Auto Accompaniment features let you produce automatic accompaniment playback simply by playing “chords” with your left hand. This lets you automatically recreate the sound of a full band or orchestra — even if you’re playing by yourself. The Auto Accompaniment sound is made up of the rhythm patterns of the Styles. The Styles of the instrument cover a wide range of different musical genres including pop, jazz, and many others. Playing “Mary Had a Little Lamb” with the Auto Accompaniment Feature MARY HAD A LITTLE LAMB Traditional Style: Straight 8 Pop C 3 2 1 C 2 1 C 3 2 1 2 46 C 2 1 3 4 G 3 C 2 1 1 1 G 3 3 1 2 4 Press the STYLE CONTROL “POP & ROCK” button. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 5 Ending C 1 1 Enabling tempo display above Style name You can select whether the tempo is displayed above the Style name or not. 1 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√][®] CONFIG 2 Select the [B] (2 DISPLAY STYLE TEMPO) button, and use the [5π†]/[6π†] buttons to switch the tempo display on/off. 2 Quick Guide • ON: Tempo is displayed above the Style name. With the default settings, the Display Style Tempo function is on. • OFF: Tempo is not displayed above the Style name. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Style “Straight 8 Pop.” n • The Style type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Preset Style name. For details on the characteristics, see page 103. • When the [7π] (REPERTOIRE) button is pressed after selecting a Style, you can call up the custom panel settings (for voices and tempos, etc.) designed to best match the selected Style. For details on Repertoire, see page 56. To return to the previous display, press the [EXIT] button. • You can instantly jump back to the original display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A]–[J] buttons. 3 Press the [ACMP] button to turn on Auto Accompaniment. Use the left-hand section (lower part) of the keyboard to play the chords for sounding the Auto Accompaniment. 3 4 5 4 5 6 Press the [SYNC START] button to set Auto Accompaniment to standby — letting you simultaneously start the accompaniment as soon as you start playing. As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Auto Accompaniment starts. Try playing chords with your left hand and play a melody with your right hand. n Chord Fingerings There are seven different fingering methods you can use to specify chords (page 103). PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 47 6 Automatically play an appropriate ending by pressing any of the [ENDING/rit.] buttons, at the point in the score (page 46) indicated by “Ending.” When Ending playback is finished, the Style automatically stops. Quick Guide n • About the various Styles Refer to the Style List in the Data List available at the Yamaha website. (See page 5.) • Quickly changing the Style tempo during a performance (Tap function) The tempo can also be changed during playback by tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button twice at the desired tempo. • Specifying the split point (the border between the right- and left-hand range) See page 107. • Turns touch response on/off for the Style playback (Style Touch) See page 106. Adjusting the volume balance between the Style and the keyboard This lets you adjust the volume balance between Style playback and the sound you play on the keyboard. 1 2 Press the [BALANCE] button to call up the volume balance display. 3 Press the [EXIT] button to close the volume balance display. To adjust the Style volume, press the [2π†] button. To adjust the keyboard (RIGHT 1) volume, press the [6π†] button. Pattern Variation While you play, you can automatically add specially created intros and endings, as well as variations in the rhythm/ chord patterns, for more dynamic, professional-sounding performances. There are several different auto accompaniment pattern variations for each situation: starting your performance, during your performance, and ending your performance. Try out the variations and combine them freely. To Start Playing ● Start/Stop Styles start playing back as soon as the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button is pressed. ● Intro This is used for the beginning of the song. Each preset Style features three different intros. When the intro finished playing, accompaniment shifts to the Main section (see “Main” in the “During Style playback”). Press one of the INTRO [I]–[III] buttons before starting Style playback and press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to start Style playback. ● Synchro Start This lets you start playback as soon as you play the keyboard. Press the [SYNC START] button when Style playback is stopped and play a chord in the chord section of the keyboard to start Style playback. ● Fade In The Fade In produces smooth fade-ins when starting the Style. Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button when Style playback is stopped and press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to start Style playback. ● Tap Tap out the tempo and automatically start the Style at that tapped speed. Simply tap (press/release) the [TAP TEMPO] button (four times for a 4/4 time signature), and the Style playback starts automatically at the tempo you tapped. n The particular drum sound and the velocity (loudness) of the sound when the Tap function is used can be selected in the following display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY →TAB [√][®] CONFIG 1 → [B] 4 TAP 48 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual During Style Playback ● Main This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays an accompaniment pattern of several measures, and repeats indefinitely. Each preset Style features four different patterns. Press one of the MAIN [A]–[D] buttons during Style playback. Quick Guide ● Fill In The fill-in sections let you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your performance sound even more professional. Turn on the [AUTO FILL IN] button before starting Style playback or during playback. Then, simply press one of the MAIN VARIATION (A, B, C, D) buttons as you play, and the selected fill-in section plays automatically (AUTO FILL), spicing up the auto accompaniment. When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly into the selected main section (A, B, C, D). Even when [AUTO FILL IN] button is turned off, pressing the same button of the currently playing section automatically plays a fill-in before returning to the same main section. ● Break This lets you add dynamic breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your performance sound even more professional. Press the [BREAK] button during Style playback. To Finish Playing ● Start/stop Styles stop as soon as the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button is pressed. ● Ending This is used for the ending of the Song. Each preset Style features three different endings. When the ending is finished, the Style stops automatically. Press one of the ENDING/rit. [I]–[III] buttons during Style playback. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the same ENDING/rit. button again while the ending is playing back. n If you press the ENDING/rit. [I] button in the middle of your performance, a fill-in automatically plays before the ENDING/rit. [I]. ● Fade Out The Fade Out produces smooth fade-outs when stopping the Style. Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button during Style playback. n For details on setting the fade-in and fade-out time, see page 105. Others ● Synchro Stop When Synchro Stop is on, you can stop and start the Style anytime you want by simply releasing or playing the keys (in the chord section of the keyboard). This is a great way to add dramatic breaks and accents to your performance. Press the [SYNC STOP] button before starting the Style playback. n • Enable Synchro Stop by pressing/releasing keys (Synchro Stop Window) See page 106. • Fixing the section pattern to either Intro or Main (Section Set) For example, you can set this function to Intro to conveniently have an Intro play automatically whenever you select a Style (page 107). PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 49 About the section button (INTRO/MAIN/ENDING, etc.) lamps • Green The section is not selected. • Red The section is currently selected. • Off The section contains no data and cannot be played. Quick Guide Holding the LEFT part Voice (Left Hold) This function causes the LEFT part Voice to be held even when the keys are released. Non-decaying voices such as strings are held continuously, while decay-type voices such as piano decay more slowly (as if the sustain pedal has been pressed). 1 2 Press the PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button to turn the left-hand part on. Press the [LEFT HOLD] button to turn the Left Hold function on. 2 1 Learning How to Play (Indicate) Chords for Style Playback Learning the Notes to Play for Certain Chords If know the name of a chord but don’t know how to play it, you can have the instrument show you the notes to play (Chord Tutor function). 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING → TAB[√][®] CHORD FINGERING 2 Press the [6π†] button to select the root note. 2 3 3 Press the [7π†]/[8π†] button to select the chord type. The notes you need to play to make the selected chord are shown in the display. n The notes that are displayed correspond to Fingered, no matter which fingering type is selected (page 104). 50 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Appropriate Panel Settings for the Selected Style — One Touch Setting One Touch Setting is a powerful and convenient feature that automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings (Voices or effects, etc.) for the currently selected Style, with the touch of a single button. If you’ve already decided which Style you wish to use, you can have One Touch Setting automatically select the appropriate Voice for you. Select a Style (page 46). 2 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1]–[4] buttons. Quick Guide 1 Not only does this instantly call up all the settings (Voices, effects, etc.) that match the current Style — it also automatically turns on ACMP and SYNC START, so that you can immediately start playing the Style. 3 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the selected Style starts. n Parameter Lock You can “lock” specific parameters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.) to make them selectable only via the panel controls (page 133). Helpful hints for using One Touch Setting ● Automatically changing One Touch Settings with the Main sections (OTS Link) The convenient OTS (One Touch Setting) Link function lets you automatically have One Touch Settings change when you select a different Main section (A–D).To use the OTS Link function, press the [OTS LINK] button. ● Memorizing the panel settings to the OTS You can also create your own One Touch Setting setups. 1 Set up the panel controls (such as Voice, Style, effects, and so on) as desired. 2 3 Press the [MEMORY] button. 4 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1]–[4] buttons. As it is possible to save the panel settings with another file (step 4), register it in a favorite number from 1 to 4. A message appears in the display prompting you to save the panel settings. 2 3 Press the [F] (YES) button to call up the Style selection display and save the panel settings as a Style file (page 67). CAUTION The panel settings memorized to each OTS button will be lost if you change the Style or turn the power off without executing the Save operation. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 51 The Multi Pads The Multi Pads can be used to play a number of short pre-recorded rhythmic and melodic sequences that can be used to add impact and variety to your keyboard performances. Multi Pads are grouped in Banks or four each. The PSR-OR700 features a variety of Multi Pad Banks in a variety of different musical genres. Quick Guide Playing the Multi Pads 1 Press the MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT] button to call up the Multi Pad Bank selection display, then select the desired Bank. Select pages using the [1π]–[7π] buttons that correspond to “P1, P2...” in the display, then use the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired bank. 2 Press any of the MULTI PAD CONTROL [1]–[4] buttons to play the Multi Pad phrase. The corresponding phrase (in this case, for Pad 1) starts playing back in its entirety as soon as the pad is pressed. To stop it, press and release the [STOP] button. Simply tap any of the Multi Pads at any time to play back the corresponding phrase at the currently set tempo. You can even play two, three, or four Multi Pads at the same time. Pressing the pad during its playback will stop playing and begin playing from the top again. ● About the color of the Multi Pads • Green: Indicates that the corresponding pad contains data (phrase). • Red: Indicates that the corresponding pad is playing back. ● Multi Pad data There are two types of Multi Pad data. Some types will play back once and stop when they reach to the end. Others will play back repeatedly until you press the [STOP] button. ● Stopping playback of the Multi Pads • To stop all pads, press and release the [STOP] button. • To stop specific pads, simultaneously hold down the [STOP] button and press the pad or pads you wish to stop. 52 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Using Chord Match Many of the Multi Pad phrases are melodic or chordal and you can have these phrases automatically change chords as you do with your left hand. While a style is playing back and [ACMP] is on, simply play a chord with your left hand and press any of the Multi Pads — Chord Match changes the pitch to match the chords you play. You can also use this with the style stopped (with the Stop Accompaniment function). Keep in mind that some Multi Pads are not affected by Chord Match. + Chord section In this example, the phrase for Pad 1 will be transposed into F major before playing back. Try out other various chord types while playing the Multi Pads. Quick Guide Voice Effects The PSR-OR700 features a sophisticated multi-processor effect system which can add extraordinary depth and expression to your sound. This effect system can be turned on or off by using the following buttons. These three effect systems are applied to the currently selected keyboard part (RIGHT 1, 2, or LEFT). • HARMONY/ECHO The Harmony/Echo types are applied to the right-hand Voices. Refer to “Applying Harmony to Your Righthand Melody” on page 54. • TOUCH This button turns the touch response of the keyboard on or off. When OFF, the same volume is produced no matter how strongly or softly you play the keyboard. • SUSTAIN When this Sustain function is on, all notes played on the keyboard (RIGHT 1/2 parts only) have a longer sustain. You can also set the sustain depth (page 95). • MONO When this button is on, the part’s Voice is played monophonically (only one note at a time). Using the MONO mode lets you play single, lead sounds (such as brass instruments) more realistically. It also lets you expressively control the Portamento effect (depending on the selected Voice) by playing legato. When this button is off, the part’s Voice played polyphonically. n Portamento Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next. The portamento time (the pitch transition time) can be set via the MIXING CONSOLE display (page 86). • DSP/DSP VARI. With the digital effects built into the instrument, you can add ambience and depth to your music in a variety of ways — such as adding reverb that makes you sound like you are playing in a concert hall. • The DSP switch is used to turn the DSP (Digital Signal Processor) effect on or off for the currently selected keyboard part. • The DSP VARI. (Variation) switch is used to change between variations of the DSP effect. You could use this while you play, for example, to change the rotating speed (slow/fast) of the rotary speaker effect. n DSP Stands for Digital Signal Processor (or Processing). DSP changes and enhances the audio signal in the digital realm to produce a wide range of effects. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 53 Applying Harmony to Your Right-hand Melody (HARMONY/ECHO) Among the Voice Effects, Harmony is one of the most impressive. It automatically adds harmony parts to the notes you play with your right hand — immediately giving you a more full and professional sound. For details on the Harmony/ Echo types, see page 82. An optional foot pedal can also be used to turn the effect on and off (page 168). 1 Quick Guide 2 3 Turn the [Harmony/Echo] button on. Turn on both the [ACMP] button and [SYNC START] button (page 47) and make sure that the RIGHT 1 part is on (page 30). Play a chord with your left hand to start the style (page 47) and play some notes in the right-hand range of the keyboard. Split Point In this example, harmony notes in the scale of C major (the chord played in the left hand) are automatically added to the notes played in the Chord section right-hand range of the keyboard. Chord section You can also use the Harmony effect with the style stopped (with the Stop Accompaniment function; page 106). Simply hold down a chord with your left hand and play a melody with your right. Since the Harmony effect is added by detecting chords, if you play a melody with your right hand before playing any chord, no Harmony effect is added to the notes. Try out Harmony/Echo with some of the voices below... Many of the voices have been automatically set to play certain Harmony/Echo types that match the particular voice. Try out some of the voices below — playing chords with your left hand and melodies with your right — and listen to the various Harmony and Echo effects. Category Voice Name Harmony/Echo Type Piano Live! GrandPiano Standard Trio Accordion & Harmonica TuttiAccordion Country Trio Live! Strings Block ChamberStrings 4-way Open Harp Strum Cool! PowerLead RockDuet Cool! ElectricGtr CountryDuet Vibraphone Trill Timpani Tremolo Strings Guitar & Bass Perc. & Drum Kit 54 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Calling Up Ideal Setups for Each Song (Music Finder) If you want to play in a certain genre of music but don’t know which Style and Voice settings would be appropriate, the convenient Music Finder function can help you out. Simply select the desired music genre from among the Music F inder “Records,” and the instrument automatically makes all appropriate panel settings to let y ou play in that music style. A new record can be created by editing the currently selected one (page 111). Quick Guide n The data (records) of the Music Finder are not the same as Song data and cannot be played back. 1 Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER display. 2 1 3 2 Press the TAB [√][®] buttons to select the ALL tab. The ALL tab contains the preset records. 3 Select the desired record by using the following four search categories. To select a record, press the [2π†]/[3π†] buttons n • You can also select the desired record by using the DATA ENTRY dial, then press the [ENTER] button to execute. • Searching the records The Music Finder is also equipped with a convenient search function that lets you enter a song title or keyword — and instantly call up all the records that match your search criteria (page 108). • MUSIC ...............Contains the song title or music genre that describes each record, letting you easily find the desired music style. n Skipping up or down through the song alphabetically When sorting records by song title, use the [1π†] button to skip up or down through the songs alphabetically. Simultaneously press the [π†] buttons to move the cursor to the first record. • STYLE.................This is the preset Style assigned to the record. n Skipping up or down through the Style alphabetically When sorting records by Style name, use the [4π†]/[5π†] button to skip up or down through the Styles alphabetically. Simultaneously press the [π†] buttons to move the cursor to the first record. • BEAT ..................This is the time signature registered to each record. • TEMPO .............. This is the assigned tempo setting for the record. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 55 4 Play the keyboard. Notice that the panel settings have been automatically changed to match the music genre of the selected record. Quick Guide n • Tempo Lock Tempo Lock function lets you avoid changing the Tempo during Style playback when selecting another record. To turn on the Tempo Lock function, press the [I] (TEMPO LOCK) button in the Music Finder display. • Parameter Lock You can “lock” specific parameters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.) to make them selectable only via the panel controls (page 133). Calling up the panel settings to match the Style (Repertoire) The convenient Repertoire function automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings (voice number, etc.) for the currently selected Style. 1 Select the desired Style for which you want to call up the panel settings from the “PRESET”/“USER” tab on Style selection display. n The Repertoire function is valid for Styles in the “PRESET”/“USER” tab. The Repertoire function cannot be used for Styles saved to a USB storage device. To use the Repertoire function, save the desired Style in “USER” tab. 2 Press the [7π] (REPERTOIRE) button. The panel settings that match the Style under selection is searched according to the record group of the Music Finder. The list of the search results is shown on the “SEARCH 2” display of the Music Finder. CAUTION When the result of searching the record in the “SEARCH 2” display has already been shown, the searched result is lost. 3 Press the [2π†]–[3π†] buttons to select the desired panel settings. Sorting the records Press the [F] (SORT BY) button to sort the records. • MUSIC .................. The record is sorted by song title. • STYLE.................... The record is sorted by Style name. • BEAT ..................... The record is sorted by beat. • TEMPO ................. The record is sorted by tempo. Changing the order of the records Press the [G] (SORT ORDER) button to change the order of the records (ascending or descending). 56 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Singing Along with Song Playback (Karaoke) or Your Own Performance If the selected song has lyric data, you can have the lyrics shown in the display by playing back the song. Sing the song while viewing the lyrics on the display. Quick Guide Singing with the Lyrics Display Try singing while playing back a Song containing lyric data 1 Select a Song (page 36). 2 Press the [LYRICS] button to display the lyrics. 3 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback. Sing while following along with the lyrics on the display. The color of the lyrics changes as the Song plays. 4 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop playback. n • When the lyrics are unreadable You may need to change the Lyrics Language setting to “International” in the Song Setting display ([FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING), if the lyrics shown are garbled or unreadable. This setting can be memorized as part of the Song data (page 162). • Changing the lyrics You can change the lyrics as desired (page 166). PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 57 Convenient Functions for Karaoke Adjusting the tempo ➤ page 34 Transpose ➤ See below. Transpose Quick Guide You can use this to adjust the key of the Song if it is too high or low. • Transposing the Song key up................ Press the TRANSPOSE [+] button. • Transposing the Song key down ........... Press the TRANSPOSE [–] button. • Resetting the transposition ................... Press the TRANSPOSE [+][–] buttons simultaneously. n Selecting an effect type You can select the effect type in the Mixing Console (page 88). Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your Own Performance Changing the Key (Transpose) You can match both the Song and your keyboard performance to a certain key. For example, the Song data is in F, but you feel most comfortable singing in D, and you are accustomed to playing the keyboard part in C. To match up the keys, set the Master Transpose to “0,” the Keyboard Transpose to “2,” and the Song Transpose to “-3.” This brings the keyboard part up and the song data down to your desired singing key. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [√][®] KEYBOARD/PANEL → [B] TRANSPOSE ASSIGN 2 Press the [4π†]/[5π†] button to select the desired transpose type. The following types are available. Select the one most suited to your purpose. ● KEYBOARD Transpose pitch of the keyboard played Voices and Style playback (controlled by what you play in the chord section of the keyboard). ● SONG Transposes the pitch of Song playback. ● MASTER Transpose the overall pitch of the instrument. 3 Press the TRANSPOSE [–]/[+] button to transpose. You can set the value in semitone steps. To reset the transpose value, press the [+][–] buttons simultaneously. 58 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 4 Press the [EXIT] button to close the TRANSPOSE display. Quick Guide Setting an Oriental Scale The Scale Setting feature lets you easily lower the pitches of specific notes by 50 cents to create your own oriental scales. Up to six scale settings can be stored for instant recall (Scale Memory), whenever you need them. n For details on scale tuning, see page 99. Scale related buttons 1 2 The [SCALE SETTING] buttons simulate an one-octave keyboard (C through B). Press the button corresponding to the key whose pitch you want to lower (the button lights). Press again to return to normal pitch. The scale settings you set are memorized by the Scale Memory function. While holding the [MEMORY] button, press one of the SCALE MEMORY buttons. You can recall the memorized setting by pressing the appropriate button at any time. n • To maintain the memorized scale settings even after the power is turned off, make sure to save the settings as a file (page 101). • In the SCALE TUNE display, you can select a desired scale template including oriental scales and create your own scales by fine tuning the scale notes (page 99). PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 59 Basic Operation Selecting Message Language You can select the desired language of the display messages. 1 2 3 Use [4π†]/[5π†] (LANGUAGE) buttons to select the language. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display. Basic Operation The language selected here is also used for various “Messages” shown during operations. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√][®] OWNER 2 3 The Messages Shown in the Display A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. When the message appears, simply press the appropriate button. In this example, press the [F] (YES) button to start formatting the USB storage device (USB flash memory, floppy disk, etc.). 60 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Instant Selection of the Displays — Direct Access Instant Selection of the Displays — Direct Access With the convenient Direct Access function, you can instantly call up the desired display — with just a single additional button press. 1 2 Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button. A message appears in the display prompting you to press the appropriate button. Basic Operation Press the button corresponding to the desired setting display to instantly call up that display. Refer to the Data List for a list of the displays that can be called up with the Direct Access function. The Data List is available at the Yamaha website. (See page 5.) Example of calling up the Guide function display Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then press the [GUIDE] button. 1 2 Returning to the Main display Here’s a convenient way to return to the Main display from any other display: Simply press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then the [EXIT] button. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 61 Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) There are two basic display types – Main and Selection. Here are explanations of each display segment and its basic operation. Main Display The Main display shows the current basic settings of the instrument such as the currently selected Voice and Style, allowing you to see them at a single glance. The Main display is the one you’ll usually see when you play the keyboard. Basic Operation Returning to the Main display Here’s a convenient way to return to the Main display from any other display: Simply press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then the [EXIT] button. 6 7 8 9 1 2 ) 3 4 5 ! @ # 1 Song name and related information Displays the currently selected Song name, time signature and tempo. If the Song contains the chord data, the current chord name will be displayed in the “CHORD” segment (see 4 below). Pressing the [A] button calls up the Song Selection display (page 36). 2 BAR/BEAT/Tempo Displays either the current position and tempo of the Song or the current bar and beat number of Style playback. 3 Style name and related information Displays the currently selected Style name, time signature and tempo. Pressing the [C] button calls up the Style Selection display (page 46). 4 Current chord name If the [ACMP] button is set to On, the chord specified in the chord section of the keyboard will be displayed. 5 Scale Tune Bank name Displays the currently selected Scale Tune Memory. 6 Transpose Displays the amount of transposition in semitone units (page 58). 7 Octave The [UPPER OCTAVE] buttons allow the pitch of the keyboard to be shifted down or up in octave steps. This shows the amount that the octave value is shifted. 8 Split Point Split Points are specific positions (notes) on the keyboard that divide the keyboard into separate sections. There are two kinds of Split Points: “S”, which separates the chord section from the rest of the keyboard, and “L”, which divides the left-hand and right-hand sections. 9 Registration Sequence Appears when the Registration Sequence is active (page 134). 62 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) ) Voice name • RIGHT 1 (indicated at the right edge of the display): Voice name currently selected for the RIGHT 1 part (page 78). • RIGHT 2 (indicated at the right edge of the display): Voice name currently selected for the RIGHT 2 part (page 78). • LEFT (indicated at the right edge of the display): Voice name currently selected for the LEFT part (page 78). When the Left Hold function is ON, an “H” indication appears (page 50). Pressing one of the [F], [G] and [H] buttons calls up the Voice Selection display for each part (page 31). ! Multi Pad Bank name Indicates the names of the selected Multi Pad Banks (page 128). Pressing the [I] button calls up the Multi Pad Bank Selection display (page 129). Basic Operation @ Registration Memory Bank name Displays the currently selected Registration Memory Bank name. Pressing the [J] button calls up the Registration Memory Bank Selection display (page 132). When the Freeze function is ON, an “F” indication appears (page 134). # Volume Balance Displays the volume balance among the parts. Adjust the volume balance among the parts by using the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons. File Selection Display Configuration and Basic Operation The File Selection display appears when you press one of the buttons shown below. From here you can select Voices, Styles, and other data. VOICE category selection buttons SONG SELECT button STYLE category selection buttons MULTI PAD SELECT button REGIST. BANK buttons PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 63 Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) File Selection Display Configuration • Location (drive) of data Preset User Location where pre-programmed Location where recorded or edited data is saved. (preset) data is stored. USB Location where data on USB storage device (USB flash memory, floppy disk, etc.) is saved. Basic Operation Hereafter in this manual, any USB storage device such as USB flash memory, floppy disk drive, etc. will be referred to as “USB storage device.” • Data files and folders The data, both pre-programmed and your own original, are saved as “files.” You can drop files into a folder. Folder Folder Icon 64 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual File Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) File Selection Display Basic Operation 1 Selecting a file saved to the USB storage device. You can also select a specified file in the USB storage device by pressing the [USB] button. [USB] → [A] SONG/[B] STYLE/ [F] VOICE/[G] MULTI PAD → [A]–[J] 3 3 3 Basic Operation 2 4 1 2 3 4 Select the tab containing the desired file by using the TAB [√][®] buttons. Select the page containing the desired file by using the [1π]–[7π] buttons. Select the file. There are two ways to do so. • Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons. • Select the file by using the DATA ENTRY dial, then press the [ENTER] button to execute. The number of pages shown varies depending on the selection display of the Voices/Songs/ Styles. Press the corresponding button to “P1, P2 ...” in the display. When other pages follow, the “NEXT” button appears, and for the previous page, the “PREV” button appears. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display. Closing the current folder and calling up the next highest level folder To close the current folder and call up the next highest level folder, press the [8π] (UP) button. Example of the PRESET Voice Selection display The PRESET Voice files are categorized and contained in appropriate folders. This display shows the Voice files in a folder. The next highest level — in this case, folder — is shown. Each folder shown in this display contains appropriately categorized Voices. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 65 Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) File/Folder Operations in the File Selection Display • Saving Files ............................................................................................. page 67 • Copying Files/Folders (Copy & Paste)....................................................... page 68 • Moving Files (Cut & Paste)....................................................................... page 69 • Deleting Files/Folders .............................................................................. page 69 • Renaming Files/Folders............................................................................ page 70 • Selecting Custom Icons for Files (shown at the left of file name) .............. page 70 • Creating a New Folder ............................................................................ page 71 • Entering characters.................................................................................. page 71 Basic Operation Formatting USB storage media When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format the device/media. If so, execute the format operation. CAUTION The format operation deletes any previously existing data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain important data. Proceed with caution, especially when connecting multiple USB storage medias. The indications USB 1, USB 2, etc. will be displayed depending on the number of the connected devices. 1 Insert a USB storage device for formatting into the [USB TO DEVICE]. 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√][®] MEDIA 3 Press the [A]/[B] buttons to select the USB device to be formatted from the device list. 4 Press the [H] button to format the device/media. 3 4 66 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) Saving Files This operation lets you save your original data (such as Songs and Voices you’ve created) to a file. 1 After you’ve created a Song or Voice in the relevant SONG CREATOR or VOICE SET display, press the [SAVE] display button. The File Selection display for the corresponding data appears. Keep in mind that the Save operation is executed from the File Selection display. Internal memory (User tab displays) capacity The internal memory capacity of the instrument is about 560KB. This capacity applies to all file types, including Voice, Style, Song, and Registration data files. Basic Operation 2 3 4 5 Select the appropriate tab (USER, USB, etc.) to which you want to save the data by using the TAB [√][®] buttons. Press the [6†] (SAVE) button to call up the file naming display. Enter the file name (page 71). Press the [8π] (OK) button to save the file. If you want to cancel the Save operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. The saved file will be automatically located at the appropriate position among the files in alphabetical order. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 67 Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) Basic Operation Restrictions for protected Songs Commercially available song data may be copy protected to prevent illegal copying or accidental erasure. They are marked by the indications at the upper left side of the file names. The indications and relevant restrictions are detailed below. Prot. 1 Indicates Preset Songs saved to the User tab display, Disk Orchestra Collection (DOC) Songs, and Disklavier Piano Soft Songs. These cannot be copied/moved/saved to USB storage device. Prot. 2 Orig Indicates Yamaha-protection-formatted Songs. These cannot be copied. These can be moved/saved only to the USER tab display and USB storage device. Prot. 2 Edit Indicates edited “Prot. 2 Orig” Songs. Make sure to save these to the same folder containing the corresponding “Prot. 2 Orig” Song. These cannot be copied. These can be moved/saved only to the USER tab display and USB storage device. Note for “Prot. 2 Orig” and “Prot. 2 Edit” Song file operation Make sure to save the “Prot. 2 Edit” Song to the same folder containing its original “Prot. 2 Orig” Song. Otherwise the “Prot. 2 Edit” Song cannot be played back. Also, if you move a “Prot. 2 Edit” Song, be sure to move its original “Prot. 2 Orig” Song to the same location (folder) at the same time. Copying Files/Folders (Copy & Paste) This operation lets you copy a file/folder and paste it to another location (folder). 1 2 3 Call up the display containing the file/folder you want to copy. Press the [3†] (COPY) button to copy the file/folder. The pop-up window for the Copy operation appears at the bottom of the display. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired file/ folder. To cancel the selection, press the same [A]–[J] button again. ■ Selecting all files/folders Press the [6†] (ALL) button to select all files/folders indicated on the current display including the other pages. To cancel the selection, press the [6†] (ALL OFF) button again. 4 5 6 68 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Press the [7†] (OK) button to confirm the file/folder selection. To cancel the Copy operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. Select the destination tab (USER, USB) to paste the file/folder, by using the TAB [√][®] buttons. Press the [4†] (PASTE) button to paste the file/folder. The folder/file copied and pasted appears on the display at the appropriate position among the files in alphabetical order. Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) Moving Files (Cut & Paste) This operation lets you cut a file and paste it to another location (folder). 1 2 3 Call up the display containing the file you want to move. Press the [2†] (CUT) button to cut the file. The pop-up window for the Cut operation appears at the bottom of the display. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired file. To cancel the selection, press the same [A]–[J] button again. 4 5 6 Basic Operation ■ Selecting all files Press the [6†] (ALL) button to select all files indicated on the current display including the other pages. To cancel the selection, press the [6†] (ALL OFF) button again. Press the [7†] (OK) button to confirm the file selection. To cancel the Cut operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. Select the destination tab (USER, USB) to which the file is to be pasted, by using the TAB [√][®] buttons. Press the [4†] (PASTE) button to paste the file. The file moved and pasted appears on the display at the appropriate position among the files in alphabetical order. Deleting Files/Folders This operation lets you delete a file/folder. 1 2 3 Call up the display containing the file/folder you want to delete. Press the [5†] (DELETE) button. The pop-up window for the Delete operation appears at the bottom of the display. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired file/ folder. To cancel the selection, press the same [A]–[J] button again. ■ Selecting all files/folders Press the [6†] (ALL) button to select all files/folders indicated on the current display including the other pages. To cancel the selection, press the [6†] (ALL OFF) button again. 4 5 Press the [7†] (OK) button to confirm the file/folder selection. To cancel the Delete operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. Follow the on-display instructions. YES ........................Delete the file/folder YES ALL .................Delete all selected files/folders NO ........................Leave the file/folder as is without deleting CANCEL ................Cancel the Delete operation Deleting all data in a USB storage device at once Formatting a USB storage device completely erases all data on the USB storage device (page 66). PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 69 Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) Renaming Files/Folders This operation lets you rename files/folders. 1 2 Basic Operation 3 4 5 6 Call up the display containing the file/folder you want to rename. Press the [1†] (NAME) button. The pop-up window for the Rename operation appears at the bottom of the display. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired file/ folder. Press the [7†] (OK) button to confirm the file/folder selection. To cancel the Rename operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. Input the name (characters) of the selected file or folder (page 71). The renamed folder/file appears on the display at the appropriate position among the files in alphabetical order. Press the [8π] (OK) button to actually enter the new name. Selecting Custom Icons for Files (Shown at the Left of File Name) You can select custom icons for files (shown at the left of file name). 1–4 5 6 7 8 70 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Operations are the same as the above “Renaming Files/Folders” section. Press the [1†] (ICON) button to call up the ICON display. Select the icon by using the [A]–[J] buttons or [3π†]–[5π†] buttons. The ICON display includes several pages. Press the TAB [√][®] buttons to select different pages. To cancel the operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. Press the [8π] (OK) button to apply the selected icon. Press the [8π] (OK) button to actually enter the new name. Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) Creating a New Folder This operation lets you create new folders. Folders can be created, named and organized as desired, making it easier to find and select your original data. 1 2 A new folder cannot be made in the PRESET tab. Press the [7†] (FOLDER) button to call up the naming display for a new folder. Folder directories for the USER tab display In the USER tab display, folder directories can contain up to four levels. The maximum total number of files and folders which can be stored is 363, but this may differ depending on the length of the file names. The maximum number of files/folders which can be stored in a folder in the USER tab is 250. Input the name of the new folder (see below). Basic Operation 3 Call up the page of the File Selection display for which you wish to create a new folder. Entering Characters The instructions that follow show you how to enter characters in naming your files/ folders and when inputting the Keyword for Music Finder function/website. The method is much the same as inputting names and numbers to a conventional mobile phone. Entering characters should be done in the display shown below. 1 Change the type of character by pressing the [1π] button. • The following different types of characters are available: CASE......................Alphabet (capital letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size) case .......................Alphabet (lowercase letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size) 2 3 Depending on the display for character entry you are working in, some types of characters cannot be entered. Use the DATA ENTRY dial to move the cursor to the desired position. Press the [2π†]–[6π†] and [7π] buttons, corresponding to the character you wish to enter. Entering letters, numerals and symbols can be done by moving the cursor or pressing one of the character entry buttons. Alternately, you can wait for a short time and the characters will be entered automatically. For details on entering characters, refer to the following section, step 4. The following half-size marks cannot be entered for a file/ folder name. \/:*?"<>| Several different characters are assigned to each button, and the characters change each time you press the button. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 71 Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings Basic Operation 4 Press the [8π] (OK) button to actually enter the new name and return to the previous display. • Deleting characters Move the cursor to the character you wish to delete by using the DATA ENTRY dial, and press the [7†] (DELETE) button. To delete all characters on the line at once, press and hold the [7†] (DELETE) button. • Entering marks 1 After actually entering a character by moving the cursor, press the [6†] button to call up the mark list. 2 Use the DATA ENTRY dial to move the cursor to the desired mark, then press the [8π] (OK) button. • Entering numbers First, select one of the following: “ABC” “CASE” (half-size capital alphabet) and “case” (half-size lowercase alphabet). Then, press and hold down the appropriate button, [2π†]–[5π†], [6π] and [7π] button, for a while, or press it repeatedly until the desired number is selected. • Inserting a Character 1 Move the cursor to the desired position. Use the same operation as in “Deleting Characters” above. 2 Press the [2π†]–[6π†], or [7π] buttons to enter numbers and symbols. 3 Press the [8π] (OK) button to enter characters. • Entering a Space 1 Move the cursor to the desired position. Use the same operation as in “Deleting Characters” above. 2 Press [6†] button to call up the mark list. 3 Make sure the cursor is at the beginning space (blank) of the mark list, and press the [8π] (OK) button. Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings Restoring the Factory-programmed System While holding the C6 key (right-most key on the keyboard), turn the [POWER] button ON. This operation has the same result as and is a shortcut for the System Setup restore operation explained in step 2 of the following section. Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings Independently by Item CAUTION This operation deletes all your original data for the respective item (MIDI SETUP, USER EFFECT, MUSIC FINDER, and FILES&FOLDERS). 72 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√][®] SYSTEM RESET Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings 2 Select items by pressing the [1π†]–[3π†] buttons. Restores the System Setup parameters to the original factory settings. Refer to the Data List for details about which parameters belong to the System Setup. The Data List is available at the Yamaha website. (See page 5.) MIDI SETUP Restores the MIDI settings including the MIDI templates on the User tab display to the original factory status. USER EFFECT Restores the User Effect settings including the user effect types and user master EQ types created via the Mixing Console display to the original factory settings. MUSIC FINDER Restores the Music Finder data (all records) to the original factory settings. FILES&FOLDERS Deletes all files and folders stored in the User tab display. REGIST Temporarily deletes the current Registration Memory settings of the selected Bank. The same can be done also by turning the [POWER] button ON while holding the B5 key (right-most B key on the keyboard). Basic Operation SYSTEM SETUP 4 2 3 4 3 Checkmark the box of the item to be reset to the factory programmed settings by pressing the [4π] button. Press the [D] button to execute the Factory Reset operation for all checkmarked items. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 73 Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings Saving and Recalling Your Original Settings as a Single File For the items below, you can save your Original Settings as a Single File for future recall. 1 2 Basic Operation 3 Press one of the [F]–[I] buttons to call up the relevant display for saving your data. Parameters set on the various displays such as the [FUNCTION] → UTILITY are handled as a single System Setup file. Refer to the Data List for details on which parameters belong to the System Setup. The Data List is available at the Yamaha website. (See page 5.) MIDI SETUP The MIDI settings including the MIDI templates on the User tab display are handled as a single file. USER EFFECT The User Effect settings including the user effect types and user master EQ types created via the Mixing Console displays are managed as a single file. MUSIC FINDER All the preset and created records of the Music Finder are handled as a single file. 5 6 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√][®] SYSTEM RESET SYSTEM SETUP 4 74 Make all desired settings on the instrument. Select one of the tabs (other than the PRESET) by pressing the TAB [√][®] buttons. Note that the file in the PRESET tab display is the file of factory-programmed settings. If you select it, the factory-programmed settings for the respective item will be restored. (This is the same results as on page 72 “Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings Independently by Item.”) Save your file (page 67). To recall your file, select the tab and page to which you’ve saved the file (same tab and page as specified in step 4), and press the corresponding [A]–[J] button. Data Backup Data Backup For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you copy or save your important data to a USB storage device. This provides a convenient backup if the internal memory is damaged. 3 4 Data that can be saved Select the USER tab by using the TAB [√][®] buttons. Press the [3†] (COPY) button to copy the file/folder. The pop-up window for the Copy operation appears at the bottom of the display. 1 Song*, Style, Multi Pad, Registration Memory Bank, Scale Memory Bank and Voice. 2 Music Finder Record, Effect**, MIDI Template and System File **Effect data includes the following: - Edited or saved data in the Mixing Console “EFFECT/EQ.” 3 All data listed in 1 and 2 above The backup procedure is different for the data types in 1, 2, and 3 above. 6 7 8 Backup procedure 2 Insert/connect the backup USB storage device (destination). Call up the display containing the desired file to be copied. Song: Press the SONG [SELECT] button. Style: Press one of the STYLE buttons. Multi Pad: Press the MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT] button. Press the [7†] (OK) button to confirm the file/folder selection. To cancel the Copy operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. Select the destination USB tab to which the file/folder is to be copied, by using the TAB [√][®] buttons. Press the [4†] (PASTE) button to paste the file/folder. If a message appears indicating data cannot be copied Protected Songs (“Prot. 1/Prot.2” is indicated at the upper left side of the file names) are included in the copied files. These protected Songs cannot be copied. However, Songs with a “Prot.2” indication can be moved (cutand-paste operation) to a USB flash memory. 1 Song, Style, Multi Pad, Registration Memory Bank, Scale Memory Bank and Voice Data 1 Press the [6†] (ALL) button to select all files/folders indicated on the current display and all other pages. To cancel the selection, press the [6†] (ALL OFF) button again. Basic Operation * Protected Songs (those with a “Prot.1/Prot.2” indication at the upper left of the file name) cannot be saved. However, Songs with a “Prot.2” indication can be moved (cut-and-paste operation) to a USB flash memory. 5 2 Music Finder Record, Effect, MIDI Template and System Data 1 2 Registration Memory Bank: Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [–] buttons simultaneously. 3 Scale Memory Bank: Call up the Main display and press the [E] button. 4 Voice: Press one of the VOICE buttons. 5 Insert/connect the backup USB storage device (destination). Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√][®] SYSTEM RESET Press one of the [F]–[I] buttons to call up the relevant display for saving your data. Select the appropriate USB tab to which you want to save the data by using the TAB [√][®] buttons. Save your data (page 67). PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 75 Data Backup 3 All data listed in 1 and 2 1 2 3 Insert/connect the backup USB storage device (destination). Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√][®] OWNER Press the [D] (BACKUP) button to save the data to the USB storage device. To restore the data, press the [E] (RESTORE) button in step 3 above. Basic Operation n • It takes a few minutes to complete the backup/restore operation. • Backup data which has not been created on the PSROR700 cannot be restored. CAUTION Move the Protected Songs which are saved to the USER display before restoring. If the songs are not moved, the operation deletes the data. 76 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Using, Creating and Editing Voices Reference Reference to Quick Guide pages Playing Voices ................................................................................ page 30 Playing Preset Voices ............................................................... page 30 Using the Pitch Bend Wheel.................................................... page 33 Using the Modulation Wheel ................................................. page 34 Using the Metronome ............................................................ page 34 Reference Voice Effects .................................................................................. page 53 Voice Characteristics The Voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Preset Voice name. MegaVoice Live! These acoustic instrument sounds were sampled in stereo, to produce a truly authentic, rich sound — full of atmosphere and ambience. Cool! These Voices capture the dynamic textures and subtle nuances of electric instruments — thanks to a huge amount of memory and some very sophisticated programming. Sweet! These acoustic instrument sounds also benefit from Yamaha’s sophisticated technology — and feature a sound so finely detailed and natural, you’ll swear you’re playing the real thing! Drums Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. SFX Various special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. Organ Flutes! This authentic organ Voice lets you use the Voice Set to adjust the various footages and craft your own original organ sounds. See page 96 for details. Using, Creating and Editing Voices The MegaVoices are not intended to be played from the keyboard. They are primarily designed for use with recorded MIDI sequence data (such as songs and styles). Some of the guitar and bass Voices in particular have been created as MegaVoices. What makes MegaVoices special is their use of velocity switching. Normal Voices use velocity switching, too — to make the sound quality and/or level of a Voice according to how strongly or softly you play it. This makes the instrument’s Voices sound authentic and natural. However, with MegaVoices, each velocity range (the measure of your playing strength) has a completely different sound. For example, a Mega guitar Voice includes the sounds of various performance techniques. In conventional instruments, different Voices having those sounds would be called up via MIDI and played in combination to achieve the desired effect. However, now with MegaVoices, a convincing guitar part can be played with just a single Voice, using specific velocity values to play the desired sounds. Because of the complex nature of these Voices and the precise velocities need to play the sounds, they’re not intended for playing from the keyboard. They are, however, very useful and convenient when creating MIDI data — especially when you want to avoid using several different Voices just for a single instrument part. MegaVoices Compatibility MegaVoices are not compatible with other models. Any song/style data you’ve created on the PSROR700 using the MegaVoices will not sound properly when played back on other instruments. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 77 Playing Different Voices Simultaneously Playing Different Voices Simultaneously The PSR-OR700 keyboard features various functions and performance conveniences that are simply unavailable on an acoustic instrument. It allows you to play several different Voices together in a layer, or play one Voice with your left hand while you play a different Voice (or even two layered Voices!) with your right. Keyboard Parts (Right 1, Right 2, Left) Voices can be assigned independently to each keyboard part: Right 1, Right 2, and Left. You can combine these parts by using the PART ON/OFF buttons to create a rich, ensemble sound. Keyboard Part Combinations Using, Creating and Editing Voices Adjusting the volume balance among parts Adjust the volume balance among the parts in the BALANCE display (page 41). ■ Playing a single Voice (Right 1 part) You can play a single Voice over the entire keyboard range. This is used for normal performance — for example, with the piano Voice. Right 1 part ■ Playing two Voices simultaneously (Right 1 and 2 parts) You can simulate a melody duet or combine two similar Voices to create a thicker sound. Right 2 part Right 1 part Refer to page 79 for Voice selection operations for the Right 2 part. Specifying the split point (the border between the rightand left-hand range) See page 107. ■ Playing different Voices with the left and right Hands (Right 1 and Left parts) You can play different Voices with the left and right hands. For example, try playing the bass Voice with your left hand and the piano Voice with your right. Left part Right 1 part Refer to page 80 for Voice selection operations for the Left part. ■ Playing three different Voices with the left and right Hands (Right 1, 2 and Left parts) You can combine these three parts to create a rich, ensemble sound. Left part 78 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Right 2 part Right 1 part Playing Different Voices Simultaneously Playing Two Voices Simultaneously (Right 1 and 2 Parts) You can play two Voices simultaneously with the Right 1 and 2 parts. 1 2 3 For the selected part, the name of the currently selected Voice is highlighted (reverse display) in the Main display. Press the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 2] button to turn it on. Press one of the VOICE buttons to call up the Voice selection display for the Right 2 part. Quickly selecting Voices for Right 1 and 2 parts You can quickly select the Right 1 and 2 part Voices, just from the Voice buttons. Press and hold one Voice button, then press another. The Voice of the first pressed button is automatically set for the Right 1 part, while the Voice of the second pressed button is set for the Right 2 part. Using, Creating and Editing Voices 4 Make sure the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 1] button is turned on. Press the TAB [√] button to select the PRESET display. 4 5 5 6 7 5 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Voice. Play the keyboard. Press the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 2] button again to turn it off. Switching the Right 2 part on/off with a pedal You can use a pedal to switch the Right 2 part on/off (when the Right 2 part is appropriately assigned; page 168). This is useful for turning the Right 2 part on and off while you play. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 79 Playing Different Voices Simultaneously Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands (Right 1 and Left Parts) You can play different Voices with the Left and Right Hands (Right 1 and Left parts). For the selected part, the name of the currently selected Voice is highlighted (reverse display) in the Main display. 1 2 Using, Creating and Editing Voices 3 4 Make sure the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 1] button is turned on. Press the PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button to turn it on. Press one of the VOICE buttons to call up the Voice selection display for the Left part. Press the TAB [√] button to select the PRESET display. 4 5 Switching the Left part on/off with a pedal You can use a pedal to switch the Left part on/off (when the Left part is appropriately assigned; page 168). This is useful for turning the Left part on and off while you play. Specifying the split point (the border between the rightand left-hand range) See page 107. 80 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 5 6 7 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Voice. Play the keyboard. Press the PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button again to turn it off. 5 Changing Pitch Changing Pitch Transpose Transpose the pitch of the keyboard up or down (in semitones). • Transposing during performance You can easily set the desired transposition of the overall sound of the instrument by pressing the TRANSPOSE [–]/[+] buttons. • Transposing before performance Change the transpose settings in the MIXING CONSOLE display. You can set the transposition for the keyboard pitch (KBD), song playback (SONG), or overall sound of the instrument (MASTER), respectively. Using, Creating and Editing Voices 1 Call up the operation display. [MIXING CONSOLE] → TAB [√][®] TUNE 2 Use the [1π†]–[3π†] buttons to set the transposition. Fine-tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument You can fine-tune the pitch of the entire instrument — useful when you play the PSR-OR700 along with other instruments or CD music. 1 2 Please note that the Tune function does not affect the Drum Kit or SFX Kit Voices. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [A] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE → TAB [√][®] MASTER TUNE Use the [4π†]/[5π†] buttons to set the tuning. Press the 4 or 5’s [π] and [†] buttons simultaneously to reset the value to the factory setting of 440.0 Hz. Hz (Hertz): This unit of measurement refers to the frequency of a sound and represents the number of times a sound wave vibrates in a second. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 81 Selecting the Harmony/Echo type Selecting the Harmony/Echo type You can select the desired Harmony/Echo effect from a variety of types. 1 2 3 4 Turn the [Harmony/Echo] button on. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [H] HARMONY/ECHO Use the [1π†]–[3π†] buttons to select the Harmony/Echo type. Use the [4π†]–[8π†] buttons to select various Harmony/Echo settings (page 83). The available settings differ depending on the Harmony/Echo type. Harmony/Echo Types Using, Creating and Editing Voices The Harmony/Echo types are divided into the following groups, depending on the particular effect applied. Harmony Types These types apply the harmony effect to notes played in the right-hand section of the keyboard according to the chord specified in the left-hand section of the keyboard. (Note that the “1+5” and “Octave” settings are not affected by the chord.) Multi Assign Type This type applies a special effect to chords played in the righthand section of the keyboard. Canceling the chord sound for the harmony effect This cancels the sound of the chord played in the chord range of the keyboard — letting you hear only the Harmony effect. Set [ACMP] to On, set [SYNC START] to Off, and select “Off” for the Stop Accompaniment parameter. 82 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Echo Types These types apply echo effects to notes played in the right-hand section of the keyboard in time with the currently set tempo. ● Harmony Types When one of the Harmony Types is selected, the Harmony effect is applied to notes played in the right-hand section of the keyboard according to the type Selecting the Harmony/Echo type selected above and the chord specified in the chord section of the keyboard shown below. Split point Split point Chord section for Style playback and Harmony effect Split Point (for Style) Split Point (for keyboard Voice) Right 1 Right 2 Voices Right 1 Right 2 Voices Using, Creating and Editing Voices Chord section Left Voice for Style playback and Harmony effect Left Voice and chord section for Harmony effect ● Multi Assign Type Multi Assign effect automatically assigns notes played simultaneously in the right-hand section of the keyboard to separate parts (Voices). Both of the keyboard part [RIGHT 1] and [RIGHT 2] should be turned on when using the Multi Assign effect. The Right 1 and Right 2 Voices are alternately assigned to the notes in the order you play. ● Echo Types When one of the Echo Types is selected, the corresponding effect (echo, tremolo, trill) is applied to the note played in the right-hand section of the keyboard in time with the currently set tempo, regardless of the [ACMP] and the LEFT part on/off status. Keep in mind that Trill works when you hold down two notes on the keyboard simultaneously (last two notes if more than two notes are held), and it plays those notes alternately. Harmony/Echo Settings VOLUME This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign.” It determines the level of the harmony/echo notes generated by the Harmony/Echo effect. SPEED This parameter is only available when Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type above. It determines the speed of the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill effects. ASSIGN This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign.” This lets you determine the keyboard part via which the harmony/echo notes will be sounded. CHORD NOTE ONLY This parameter is available when one of the Harmony Types is selected. When this is set to “ON,” the Harmony effect is applied only to the note (played in the right-hand section of the keyboard) that belongs to a chord played in the chord section of the keyboard. TOUCH LIMIT This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign.” It determines the lowest velocity value at which the harmony note will sound. This allows you to selectively apply the harmony by your playing strength, letting you create harmony accents in the melody. The harmony effect is applied when you play the key strongly (above the set value). PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 83 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE) Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE) The Mixing Console gives you intuitive control over aspects of the keyboard parts and Song/Style channels, including volume balance and the timbre of the sounds. It lets you adjust the levels and stereo position (pan) of each Voice to set the optimum balance and stereo image, and lets you set how the effects are applied. Basic Procedure 1 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE display. Using, Creating and Editing Voices 2 1, 3 4 4 5 2 About Parts See below. Instantly setting all parts to the same value Once you’ve selected a parameter in step 4, you can instantly set the same value to all other parts. To do this, simultaneously hold down one of the [A]–[J] buttons, and use the [1]–[8] buttons or the DATA ENTRY dial. 84 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 3 4 5 Use the TAB [√][®] buttons to call up the relevant setting display. For information on the available parameters, see the section “Adjustable items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE displays” on page 85. Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button repeatedly to call up the MIXING CONSOLE display for the relevant parts. The MIXING CONSOLE displays actually consist of several different part displays. The part name is indicated at the top of the display. The various MIXING CONSOLE displays alternate among the following: PANEL PART display → STYLE PART display → SONG CH 1-8 display → SONG CH 9-16 display Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired parameter. Use the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to set the value. Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE) 6 Save your MIXING CONSOLE settings. • Saving the PANEL PART display settings Register them to Registration Memory (page 131). • Saving the STYLE PART display settings Save them as Style data. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU 2 Press the [B] button to call up the STYLE CREATOR display. 3 Press the [EXIT] button to close the RECORD display. 4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display for saving your data, then save it (page 67). • Saving the SONG CH 1-8/9-16 display settings First register the edited settings as part of the Song data (SET UP), then save the Song. See the SONG CREATOR → CHANNEL display → SETUP item explanation on page 162. Using, Creating and Editing Voices About Parts PANEL PART In the PANEL PART display of the MIXING CONSOLE, you can independently adjust the level balance among the Keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 and LEFT), SONG, STYLE, and MULTI PAD. The part components are the same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel [BALANCE] button. STYLE PART A Style consists of eight separate channels. Here you can adjust the level balance among these eight channels or parts. These part components are the same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the STYLE display. SONG CH 1-8/9-16 A Song consists of sixteen separate channels. Here you can adjust the level balance among these sixteen channels or parts. These part components are the same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the SONG display. Adjustable Items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE Displays The following explanations cover the available items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE displays. VOL/VOICE SONG AUTO REVOICE See page 87. VOICE Allows you to re-select the Voices for each part. When the Style channels are called up, neither Organ Flutes Voices nor User Voices can be selected. When the Song channels are called up, User Voices cannot be selected. PANPOT Determines the stereo position of the selected part (channel). VOLUME Determines the level of each part or channel, giving you fine control over the balance of all the parts. • The RHY2 channel in the STYLE PART display can only be assigned to Drumkit Voices and SFX kit Voices. • When playing GM song data, channel 10 (in the SONG CH 9-16) can only be used for a Drum Kit Voice. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 85 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE) FILTER HARMONIC CONTENT Allows you to adjust the resonance effect (page 94) for each part. BRIGHTNESS Determines the brightness of the sound for each part by adjusting the cutoff frequency (page 94). Using, Creating and Editing Voices TUNE PORTAMENTO TIME Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next. The Portamento Time determines the pitch transition time. Higher values result in a longer pitch change time. Setting this to “0” results in no effect. This parameter is available when the selected keyboard part is set to Mono (page 93). PITCH BEND RANGE Determines the range of the PITCH BEND in semitones for each keyboard part (when a pedal is assigned to this function). OCTAVE Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves for each keyboard part. TUNING Determines the pitch of each keyboard part. TRANSPOSE Allows you to set the transposition for the keyboard pitch (KEYBOARD), Song playback (SONG), or overall sound of the instrument (MASTER), respectively. EFFECT TYPE Select the desired effect type (page 88). After editing various parameters for the selected effect type, you can save it as an original effect. REVERB Adjusts the amount of the Reverb sound for each part or channel. CHORUS Adjusts the amount of the Chorus sound for each part or channel. DSP Adjusts the amount of the DSP sound for each part or channel. EQ (Equalizer) 86 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual TYPE Select the desired EQ type to suit the type of music and the performance environment (page 90). This affects the overall sound of the instrument. EDIT For editing the EQ (page 91). EQ HIGH Determines the center frequency of the high EQ band that is attenuated/boosted for each part. EQ LOW Determines the center frequency of the low EQ band that is attenuated/boosted for each part. Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE) Song Auto Revoice This feature lets you use the high-quality sounds of the instrument to full advantage with XG-compatible song data. When you play back any commercially available XG song data or that created on other instruments, you can use Auto Revoice to automatically assign the specially created Voices of the PSR-OR700 (Live!, Cool!, etc.) instead of the conventional XG Voices of the same type. 1–3 4 5 Same operation as in the “Basic Procedure” on page 84. In step 2, select the VOL/VOICE tab. Press the [G] (SETUP) button to call up the AUTO REVOICE SETUP display. Use the [1π†]–[3π†] buttons to select the Voice to be replaced. Using, Creating and Editing Voices 5 6 BASIC REVOICE: ALL NO REVOICE: 8 7 Use the [4π†]–[6π†] buttons to select the Voice for replacing the XG selected in step 5. Several different Revoice settings are available by using the [F]/[I]/[J] buttons, for conveniently calling up the recommended Revoice settings in one action. ALL REVOICE: 7 6 Replaces all of the replaceable XG Voices with the high-quality Voices of the PSR-OR700. Replaces only the recommended Voices that are suitable for playing back the song. All Voices are returned to the original XG Voices. Press the [8π] (OK) button to apply your Revoice settings. To cancel the Revoice operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. In the VOL/VOICE tab display, press the [F] button to set SONG AUTO REVOICE to ON. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 87 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE) Effect Type ■ Selecting an Effect type Using, Creating and Editing Voices 1–3 Same operation as in the “Basic Procedure” on page 84. In step 2, select the EFFECT tab. 4 Press the [F] (TYPE) button to call up the Effect Type selection display. 5 Use the [1π†]/[2π†] buttons to select the effect BLOCK. DSP: Stands for Digital Signal Processor (or Processing). DSP changes and enhances the audio signal in the digital realm to produce a wide range of effects. 5 8 Effect-applicable parts Effect characteristics REVERB All parts Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in a concert hall or jazz club. CHORUS All parts Produces a rich “fat” sound as if several parts are being played simultaneously. DSP1 STYLE PART In addition to the Reverb and Chorus types, SONG CHANNNEL 1–16 the instrument has special DSP effects, that include additional effects usually used for a specific part, such as distortion and tremolo. DSP2 DSP3 DSP4 RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT, Any unused DSP blocks are automatically SONG CHANNEL 1-16 assigned to the appropriate parts (channels) as needed. 7 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 7 Effect Block 6 88 6 Use the [3π†]/[4π†] buttons to select the part to which you want to apply the effect. Use the [5π†]/[6π†] buttons to select the effect CATEGORY. Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE) 8 Use the [7π†]/[8π†] buttons to select the effect TYPE. If you want to edit the effect parameters, go on to the next operation. ■ Editing and Saving the effect 9 If you have selected one of the DSP 2-4 effect blocks in step 5: You can edit its standard parameters as well as its variation parameter. To select the standard type of parameters, press the [B] button. To select its variation parameter, press the [E] button. Re-selecting the Effect block, category and type Use the [1π†]–[3π†] buttons. The re-selected effect configuration is displayed at the upper left side box in the display. 10 13 10 11 11 12 13 Using, Creating and Editing Voices 10 Press the [F] (PARAMETER) button to call up the display for editing the effect parameters. 12 Select one of the parameters you want to edit by using the [4π†]/ [5π†] buttons. Available parameters differ depending on the selected Effect type. Adjust the value for the selected parameter by using the [6π†]/ [7π†] buttons. If you have selected the REVERB, CHORUS or DSP1 effect block in step 5: Adjust the Effect Return Level by pressing [8π†] button. Effect Return Level: Determines the level or amount of effect applied. This is set for all parts or channels. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the display for saving your original effect. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 89 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE) 14 Use the [3π†]–[6π†] buttons to select the destination for saving the effect. The maximum number for effects that can be saved differs depending on the effect block. Using, Creating and Editing Voices 15 14 15 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save the effect (page 67). When recalling the saved effect, use the same procedure as in step 8. EQ (Equalizer) Equalizer (also called “EQ”) is a sound processor that divides the frequency spectrum into multiple bands that can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall frequency response. Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound from speakers to match the special character of the room. For example, you can cut some of the low range frequencies when playing in large spaces where the sound is too “boomy,” or boost the high frequencies in rooms and close spaces where the sound is relatively “dead” and free of echoes. The instrument possesses a high-grade fiveband digital EQ. With this function, a final effect — tone control can be added to the output of your instrument. You can select one of the five preset EQ settings in the EQ display. You can even create your own custom EQ settings by adjusting the frequency bands, and save the settings to one of two User Master EQ types. Bandwidth (also called “Shape” or “Q”) Gain 0 Freq (Frequency) 5 bands → LOW LOW MID MID HIG MID HIGH EQ1 EQ2 EQ3 EQ4 EQ5 ■ Select a Preset EQ type 1–3 4 90 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Same operation as in the “Basic Procedure” on page 84. In step 2, select the EQ tab. Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a preset EQ type to suit your performance (music style or environment). Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE) If you want to edit the EQ parameters, go on to the next operation. ■ Editing and Saving the selected EQ Press the [F] (EDIT) button to call up the MASTER EQ EDIT display. 6 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a preset EQ type. Using, Creating and Editing Voices 5 6 9 8 7 8 7 Use the [3π†]–[7π†] buttons to boost or cut each of the five bands. Use the [8π†] button to boost or cut all the five bands at the same time. Adjust the Q (bandwidth) and the FREQ (center frequency) of the band selected in step 7. • Bandwidth (also called “Shape” or “Q”) Use the [1π†]button. The higher the value of Q, the narrower the band width. • FREQ (center frequency) Use the [2π†]button. The available FREQ range is different for each band. 9 Press the [H] or [I] (STORE 1 or 2) button to save the edited EQ type (page 67). Up to two types of EQ can be created and saved. When recalling the saved EQ type, use the same procedure as in step 6. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 91 Voice Creating — Voice Set Editing the ORGAN FLUTES Voices The editing method is different for the ORGAN FLUTES Voices compared to other Voices. For instructions on editing the ORGAN FLUTES Voices, see page 96. Voice Creating — Voice Set The PSR-OR700 has a Voice Set feature that allows you to create your own Voices by editing some parameters of the existing Voices. Once you’ve created a Voice, you can save it as a User Voice to the USER/(USB) for future recall. The editing method is different for the ORGAN FLUTES Voices and for other Voices. Basic Procedure 1 Press the [6π] (VOICE SET) button to call up the VOICE SET display. Using, Creating and Editing Voices 2 Select the desired Voice (other than an Organ Flutes Voice) (page 31). 3 Use the TAB [√][®] buttons to call up the relevant setting display. For information on the available parameters, see the “Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays” on page 93. 3 4 6 7 5 CAUTION If you select another Voice without saving the settings, the settings will be lost. If you wish to store the settings here, make sure to save the settings as a User Voice before selecting another Voice or turning the power off. 92 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 4 5 6 As necessary, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the item (parameter) to be edited. Use the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to edit the Voice. Press the [D] (COMPARE) button to compare the sound of the edited Voice with the unedited Voice. Voice Creating — Voice Set 7 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save your edited Voice (page 67). Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays The following covers in detail the editable parameters that are set in the displays explained in step 3 of the “Basic Procedure” on page 92. The Voice Set parameters are organized into five different displays. The parameters in each display are described separately, below. These are also treated as part of the Voice Set parameters (page 98), which are automatically called up when the Voice is selected. The available parameters differ depending on the Voice. COMMON Adjusts the volume of the current edited Voice. TOUCH SENSE Adjusts the touch sensitivity (velocity sensitivity), or how greatly the volume responds to your playing strength. DEPTH Determines the velocity sensitivity, or how much the level of the voice changes in response to your playing strength (velocity). OFFSET Determines the amount by which received velocities are adjusted for the actual velocity effect. PART OCTAVE Shifts the octave range of the edited Voice up or down in octaves. When the edited Voice is used as any of the RIGHT 1-2 parts, the R1/R2 parameter is available; when the edited Voice is used as the LEFT part, the LEFT parameter is available. MONO/POLY Determines whether the edited Voice is played monophonically or polyphonically. This setting can also be made from the VOICE CONTROL “MONO” button on the panel (page 53). PORTAMENTO TIME Sets the portamento time when the edited Voice is set to “MONO” above. n Portamento Time: The Portamento Time determines the pitch transition time. Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next. CONTROLLER MODULATION The MODULATION wheel can be used to modulate the parameters below as well as the pitch (vibrato). Here, you can set the degree to which the pedal modulates each of the following parameters. FILTER AMPLITUDE LFO PMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the Filter Cutoff Frequency. For details about the filter, see page 94. Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the amplitude (volume). Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the pitch, or the vibrato effect. LFO FMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the Filter modulation, or the wah effect. LFO AMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the amplitude, or the tremolo effect. Changes to velocity curve according to Touch sensitivity TOUCH SENSE DEPTH Changes to velocity curve according to VelDepth (with Offset set to 64) Using, Creating and Editing Voices VOLUME Actual Velocity for tone generator Depth=127 Depth=64 (twice) (normal) 127 Depth=32 (half) 64 Depth=0 0 64 127 Received Velocity (Actual KeyOn speed) TOUCH SENSE OFFSET Changes to velocity curve according to VelOffset (with Depth set to 64) Actual Velocity for tone generator Offset=96 (+64) Offset=127 (+127) 127 Offset=64 (normal) 64 0 Depends on offset Offset=32 (-64) Depends on 64 offset 127 Received Velocity (Actual KeyOn speed) Offset=0 (-127) PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 93 Voice Creating — Voice Set SOUND ● FILTER Filter is a processor that changes the timbre or tone of a sound by either blocking or passing a specific frequency range. The parameters below determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a certain frequency range. In addition to making the sound either brighter or mellower, Filter can be used to produce electronic, synthesizer-like effects. BRIGHTNESS Determines the cutoff frequency or effective frequency range of the filter (see diagram). Higher values result in a brighter sound. Volume Cutoff frequency These frequencies are “passed” by the filter. Using, Creating and Editing Voices HARMONIC CONTENT Frequency (pitch) Cutoff range Determines the emphasis given to the cutoff frequency (resonance), set in BRIGHTNESS above (see diagram). Higher values result in a more pronounced effect. Volume Resonance Frequency (pitch) ● EG The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the sound changes in time. This lets you reproduce many sound characteristics of natural acoustic instruments — such as the quick attack and decay of percussion sounds, or the long release of a sustained piano tone. ATTACK Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum level after the key is played. The lower the value, the quicker the attack. DECAY Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain level (a slightly lower level than maximum). The lower the value, the quicker the decay. RELEASE Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is released. The lower the value, the quicker the decay. Level Sustain level ATTACK Key on 94 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual DECAY RELEASE Key off Time Voice Creating — Voice Set ● VIBRATO SPEED Pitch DEPTH DELAY Vibrato: A quavering, vibrating sound effect that is produced by regularly modulating the pitch of the Voice. Time DEPTH Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect. Higher settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato. SPEED Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect. DELAY Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start of the Vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the delay of the Vibrato onset. EFFECT/EQ 1. REVERB DEPTH/CHORUS DEPTH/DSP DEPTH Adjusts the reverb (page 88) depth. CHORUS DEPTH Adjusts the chorus (page 88) depth. DSP DEPTH Adjusts the DSP (page 88) depth. If you want to re-select the DSP type, you can do so in the DSP menu explained below. DSP ON/OFF Determines whether the DSP is on or off. This setting can also be made from the VOICE CONTROL “DSP” button on the panel (page 53). PANEL SUSTAIN Determines the sustain level applied to the edited voice when the VOICE CONTROL [SUSTAIN] button on the panel is turned on (page 53). Using, Creating and Editing Voices REVERB DEPTH 2. DSP DSP TYPE Selects the DSP effect category and type. Select a type after selecting a category. VARIATION Two variations are provided for each DSP type. Here, you can edit the VARIATION on/off status and variationparameter value setting. ON/OFF The factory-programmed assignments are set to variation-off for all Voices (standard variation of DSP is assigned). If you select VARIATION ON here, a variation of the DSP effect is assigned to the Voice. The variation parameter value can be adjusted in the VALUE menu explained below. This setting can also be made from the VOICE CONTROL “DSP VARI.” button on the panel (page 53). This button is effective only when the [DSP] button is on. PARAMETER Displays the variation parameter. VALUE Adjusts the value of the DSP variation parameter. 3. EQ EQ LOW/HIGH These determine the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ bands. HARMONY Harmony sets the Right 1 and 2 parts together. Press the PART SELECT [RIGHT 1] button before you set it. This has the same settings as the display of “Selecting the Harmony/Echo type” on page 82 in step 2. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 95 Voice Creating — Voice Set Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices The PSR-OR700 features a variety of lush, dynamic organ Voices that you can call up with the [ORGAN FLUTES] button. It also gives you the tools to create your own original organ sounds by using the Voice Set function. Just as on a traditional organ, you can create your own sounds by adjusting the levels of the flute footages. Basic Procedure 1 2 Select the desired Organ Flutes Voice to be edited (page 31). Using, Creating and Editing Voices In the ORGAN FLUTES Voice Selection display, press the [6π] (FOOTAGE) button to call up the VOICE SET [ORGAN FLUTES] display. 3 Use the TAB [√][®] buttons to call up the relevant setting display. For information on the available parameters, see the “Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET [ORGAN FLUTES] displays” on page 97. (When selecting the EFFECT/EQ tab display.) 3 4 5 5 6 5 4 96 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual If you select the EFFECT/EQ tab display, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the parameter to be edited. Voice Creating — Voice Set 5 6 Use the [A]–[D], [F]–[H] and [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to edit the Voice. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save your edited ORGAN FLUTES Voice (page 67). Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET [ORGAN FLUTES] displays The following covers in detail the editable parameters that are set in the displays explained in step 3 of the “Basic Procedure.” The Organ Flutes parameters are organized into three different pages. The parameters in each page are described separately, below. These are also treated as part of the Voice Set parameters (page 98), which are automatically called up when the Voice is selected. CAUTION If you select another Voice without saving the settings, the settings will be lost. If you wish to store the settings here, make sure to save the settings as a User Voice before selecting another Voice or turning the power off. FOOTAGE, VOLUME/ATTACK (common parameters) Specifies the type of organ tone generation to be simulated: Sine or Vintage. ROTARY SP SPEED Alternately switches between the slow and fast rotary speaker speeds when a rotary speaker effect is selected for the Organ Flutes (see “EFFECT/EQ” DSP TYPE parameter on page 95), and the Voice Effect DSP (page 95) is turned on (this parameter has the same effect as the Voice Effect VARIATION ON/OFF parameter). VIBRATO ON/OFF Alternately turns the vibrato effect for the Organ Flutes Voice ON or OFF. VIBRATO DEPTH Sets the Vibrato depth to one of three levels: 1 (low), 2 (mid), or 3 (high). Using, Creating and Editing Voices ORGAN TYPE FOOTAGE 16' ← → 5 1/3' Which footage (16' or 5 1/3') is operated with the [1π†] button can be switched by pressing the [D] button. 16'–1' Determines the basic sound of the organ flutes. The longer the pipe, the lower the pitch of the sound. Hence, the 16' setting determines the lowest pitched component of the Voice, while the 1' setting determines the highest pitched component. The higher the value of the setting, the greater the volume of the corresponding footage. Mixing various volumes of the footages lets you create your own distinctive organ sounds. Footage: The term “footage” is a reference to the sound generation of traditional pipe organs, in which the sound is produced by pipes of different lengths (in feet). PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 97 Voice Creating — Voice Set Using, Creating and Editing Voices VOLUME/ATTACK VOL Adjusts the overall volume of the Organ Flutes. The longer the graphic bar, the greater the volume. RESP Affects both the attack and release (page 94) portion of the sound, increasing or decreasing the response time of the initial swell and release, based on the FOOTAGE controls. The higher the value, the slower the swell and release. VIBRATO SPEED Determines the speed of the vibrato effect controlled by the Vibrato On/Off and Vibrato Depth on the previous page. MODE The MODE control selects between two modes: FIRST and EACH. In the FIRST mode, attack is applied only to the first notes played and held simultaneously; while the first notes are held, any subsequently played notes have no attack applied. In the EACH mode, attack is applied equally to all notes. 4', 2 2/3', 2' These determine the attack sound volume of the ORGAN FLUTE Voice. The 4', 2-2/3' and 2' controls increase or reduce the volume of attack sound at the corresponding footages. The longer the graphic bar, the greater the attack sound volume. LENG Affects the attack portion of the sound producing a longer or shorter decay immediately after the initial attack. The longer the graphic bar, the longer the decay. EFFECT/EQ Same parameters as in the VOICE SET “EFFECT/EQ” tab display explained on page 95. Disabling automatic selection of Voice Sets (effects, etc.) Each Voice is linked to its related parameter settings that are indicated in the VOICE SET displays, including effects and EQ. Usually these settings are automatically called up when a Voice is selected. However, you can also disable this feature by the operation in the relevant display as explained below. For example, if you want to change the Voice yet keep the same Harmony effect, set the HARMONY/ECHO parameter to OFF (in the display explained below). You can set these independently by keyboard part and parameter group. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [E] REGIST.SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET → TAB [√][®] VOICE SET 2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a keyboard part. 3 Use the [4π†]–[7π†] buttons to enable/disable automatic calling up of the settings (ON or OFF) independently for each parameter group. Refer to the Data List for a list of parameters contained in each parameter group. The Data List is available at the Yamaha website. (See page 5.) 98 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Using Oriental Scales — Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/Scale Memory The Oriental Scales feature lets you simply and easily raise or lower the pitches of specific notes and create your own scales. You can change the scale settings at any time–even when you are playing. Up to six scale settings can be stored for instant recall, whenever you need them. Setting an Oriental Scale — Scale Setting Using Oriental Scales The [SCALE SETTING] buttons simulate an one-octave keyboard (C through B). You can easily change the scale setting at any time by pressing one of the [SCALE SETTING] buttons, located at the left side of the panel. Pressing each button turns the Scale Setting feature for the specific note on and off. The Scale Setting feature affects all the notes having the same note name in all octaves. When set to on (the selected button itself is lit), you can play the keyboard in the selected oriental scale. The scale setting for each note is -50 cents. You can also adjust the scale tuning in 1-cent units in the SCALE TUNE display. The [SCALE SETTING] buttons will light or go out according to the song playback data. The Scale Setting function has no effect on the Drum Kit/SFX Kit voices. Scale Tuning You can select various scales for playing in custom tunings for specific historical periods or music genres. 1 2 3 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [A] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE → TAB [√][®] SCALE TUNE You also can call up the SCALE TUNE display by pressing the [SCALE TUNE] button. Select the desired part for which you want to set the scale by using the [6π†]/[7π†] buttons. Checkmark the box by pressing the [8π] button. Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired scale. The tuning of each note for the currently selected scale is indicated in the keyboard illustration at the upper right of the display. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 99 Scale Tuning 4 Change the following settings as necessary. • Tuning the individual notes of the keyboard (TUNE) 1 2 Cent: In musical terms a “cent” is 1/ 100th of a semitone. (100 cents equal one semitone.) Using Oriental Scales Instantly recalling the desired scale Register the desired scale to the Registration Memory. Be sure to checkmark the SCALE item when registering (page 131). Press the [3π†] button to select the note for tuning. Use the [4π†]/[5π†] buttons to set the tuning in cents. • Determines the base note for each scale. Press the [2π†] button to select the base note. When the base note is changed, the pitch of the keyboard is transposed, yet maintains the original pitch relationship between the notes. Preset Scale Types EQUAL TEMPERAMENT The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with each half-step evenly spaced in pitch. This is the most commonly used tuning in music today. BAYAT/ RAST Use these tunings when playing Arabic music. PURE MAJOR PURE MINOR These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale, especially for triad chords (root, third, fifth). You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies – such as choirs and a cappella singing. PYTHAGOREAN This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a series of perfect fifths, which are collapsed into a single octave. The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unstable, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads. MEAN-TONE This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale, by making the major third interval more “in tune.” It was especially popular from the 16th century to the 18th century. Handel, among others, used this scale. WERCKMEISTER KIRNBERGER This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger systems, which were themselves improvements on the mean-tone and Pythagorean scales. The main feature of this scale is that each key has its own unique character. The scale was used extensively during the time of Bach and Beethoven, and even now it is often used when performing period music on the harpsichord. Tuning values for Preset Scales (base note: C) (in cents) C C# D Eb E F F# G Ab A Bb B EQUAL TEMPERAMENT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bayat 0 0 -50.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -50.0 0 0 Rast 0 0 0 0 -50.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -50.0 PURE MAJOR 0 -29.7 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 -9.4 2.3 -27.3 -15.6 18.0 -11.7 PURE MINOR 0 33.6 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 31.3 2.3 14.1 -15.6 18.0 -11.7 PYTHAGOREAN 0 14.1 3.9 -6.3 7.8 -2.3 11.7 2.3 15.6 6.3 -3.9 10.2 MEAN-TONE 0 -24.2 -7.0 10.2 -14.1 3.1 -20.3 -3.1 -27.3 -10.2 7.0 -17.2 WERCKMEISTER 0 -10.2 -7.8 -6.3 -10.2 -2.3 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8 KIRNBERGER 0 -10.2 -7.0 -6.3 -14.1 -2.3 -10.2 -3.1 -7.8 -10.2 -3.9 -11.7 * In the display, the rounded off value is shown. 100 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Memorizing the Scale Setting — Scale Memory Memorizing the Scale Setting — Scale Memory The scale settings you set (using the [SCALE SETTING] buttons or in the SCALE TUNE display) are memorized by the Scale Memory function. Up to six scale settings can be stored for instant recall, whenever you need them. 1 2 Set up the scale settings as desired using the [SCALE SETTING] buttons or in the SCALE TUNE display. While holding the [MEMORY] button, press one of the SCALE MEMORY [1]–[6] buttons. The corresponding SCALE MEMORY button will light. Any data that was previously in the selected location is erased and replaced by the new settings. The memorized scale settings here will be lost when the power is turned off, unless you perform the Save operation (see next section). About the lamp status: Off ...... no data registered,or not currently selected On ...... data registered, and currently selected The scale settings memorized to the SCALE MEMORY [1]–[6] buttons are saved as a single file. Using Oriental Scales Saving Your Scale Settings Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and [EXIT] button to call up the MAIN display. BANK 04 BANK 03 BANK 02 BANK 01 All settings memorized to the buttons [1]–[6] are referred to as a “bank.” The banks can be saved to “USER” or “USB” as Scale Tune Bank files. 1 Press the [E] button to call up the SCALE TUNE BANK Selection Display. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 101 Recalling the Scale Setting 2 Save the settings you’ve made to the SCALE MEMORY buttons as a single Scale Tune Bank file (page 67). The SCALE TUNE EDIT display appears. For details on this display, see below. Using Oriental Scales SCALE TUNE EDIT display The contents of the current Scale Tune Bank are listed in the SCALE TUNE EDIT screen. The names of the stored Scale Settings are shown in the display. From this screen, you can select, name, or delete each of the Scale Settings. Select...........Press the [A]–[C] / [F]–[H] buttons. The SCALE TUNE EDIT display is linked to the SCALE MEMORY [1]–[6] buttons. When you select the Scale Settings in the display, the corresponding SCALE MEMORY button lights. Name ..........This operation is the same as that in “Renaming Files/Folders” (page 70) in “Basic Operation.” Delete..........This operation is the same as that in “Deleting Files/Folders” (page 69) in “Basic Operation.” n The result of the Name/Delete operation will be lost when the power is turned off unless you return to the SCALE TUNE BANK display by pressing the [8] (π) button and save the data (page 67). Recalling the Scale Setting To recall the memorized scale settings, select the desired bank in the SCALE TUNE BANK display (page 99). Press the appropriate SCALE MEMORY [1]–[6] button to which you memorized the setting. The corresponding SCALE MEMORY button will light. The Scale Memory function can be turned off by pressing the SCALE MEMORY button which is currently lit, so that the light goes out. The default Equal Temperament Scale settings (pitch settings for all notes are “0” will be restored. n If you press a SCALE MEMORY button to which nothing is memorized, the current scale settings remain and nothing changes. 102 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles Reference to Quick Guide pages Playing “Mary Had a Little Lamb” with the Auto Accompaniment Feature ..................................................................... page 46 Pattern Variation ...................................................................... page 48 Learning How to Play (Indicate) Chords for Style Playback ...... page 50 Appropriate Panel Settings for the Selected Style (One Touch Setting) ................................................................. page 51 Style Characteristics The Style type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Preset Style name. Pro These Styles provide professional and exciting arrangements combined with perfect playability. The resulting accompaniment exactly follows the chords of the player. As a result, your chord changes and colorful harmonies are instantly transformed into lifelike musical accompaniment. Session These Styles provide even greater realism and authentic backing by mixing in original chord types and changes, as well as special riffs with chord changes, with the Main sections. These have been programmed to add “spice” and a professional touch to your performances of certain songs and in certain genres. Keep in mind, however, that the Styles may not necessarily be appropriate — or even harmonically correct — for all songs and for all chord playing. In some cases for example, playing a simple major triad for a country song may result in a “jazzy” seventh chord, or playing an on-bass chord may result in inappropriate or unexpected accompaniment. Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles Selecting a Chord Fingering Type Style playback can be controlled by the chords you play in the chord section of the keyboard. There are seven types of fingerings. 1 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING → TAB [√][®] CHORD FINGERING Press the [1π†]–[3π†] buttons to select a fingering. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 103 Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a Style Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles SINGLE FINGER AI: Artificial Intelligence Makes it simple to produce orchestrated accompaniment using major, seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys on the Chord section of the keyboard. This type is available only for Style playback. The abbreviated chord fingerings described at right are used: C For a major chord, press the root key only. Cm For a minor chord, simultaneously press the root key and a black key to its left. C7 For a seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key and a white key to its left. Cm 7 For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key and both a white and black key to its left. MULTI FINGER Automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord fingerings, so you can use either type of fingering without having to switch fingering types. FINGERED Lets you finger your own chords on the Chord section of the keyboard, while the instrument supplies appropriately orchestrated rhythm, bass, and chord accompaniment in the selected Style. The Fingered type recognizes the various chord types which are listed on the Data List available at the Yamaha website (page 5) and can be looked up using the Chord Tutor function (page 50). FINGERED ON BASS Accepts the same fingerings as the Fingered, but the lowest note played in the Chord section of the keyboard is used as the bass note, allowing you to play “on bass” chords (in the Fingered mode the root of the chord is always used as the bass note). FULL KEYBOARD Detects chords in the entire key range. Chords are detected in a way similar to Fingered, even if you split the notes between your left and right hands — for example, playing a bass note with your left hand and a chord with your right, or by playing a chord with your left hand and a melody note with your right. AI FINGERED Basically the same as Fingered, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). AI FULL KEYBOARD When this advanced fingering type is engaged, the instrument will automatically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything, anywhere on the keyboard using both hands. You don’t have to worry about specifying the Style chords. Although the AI Full Keyboard type is designed to work with many songs, some arrangements may not be suitable for use with this feature. This type is similar to Full Keyboard, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). 9th, 11th and 13th chords cannot be played. This type is available only for Style playback. Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a Style Rhythm is one of the most important parts of a Style. Try to play the melody along with just the rhythm. You can sound different rhythms for each Style. Keep in mind, however, that not all Styles contain rhythm channels. Starting the rhythm with Sync Start You can also start the rhythm simply by playing the keyboard, if Sync Start is enabled (turn on the [SYNC START] button). 104 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 1 2 3 Select a Style (page 46). Press the [ACMP] to turn Auto Accompaniment off. Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to play back the rhythm channels. Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a Style 4 Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to stop the rhythm. Turning channels of the Style on/off A Style contains eight channels: RHY1 (Rhythm 1) – PHR2 (Phrase 2). You can add variations and change the feeling of a Style by selectively turning channels on/off as the Style plays. 1 Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the CHANNEL ON/ OFF display. When the STYLE tab is not selected, press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button again. 2 Press the [1†]–[8†] buttons to turn the channels on or off. To listen to only one instrument by itself, hold down the appropriate button for the channel to set the channel to SOLO. To cancel SOLO, simply press the appropriate channel button again. Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles Playing the chords in free tempo (without Style playback) You can have the accompaniment chords sound without playing back the Style, by setting [ACMP] to on (see page 106, Stop Accompaniment), and [SYNC START] to off. For example, if MULTI FINGER is selected (page 104), you can perform with your own pace while sounding the chord by pressing the chord section of the keyboard with your one finger. Setting the fade in/out time You can set the time of the fade in and fade out (pages 48, 49). 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[√][®] CONFIG 1 → [A] FADE IN/ OUT/HOLD TIME 2 Set the parameters by using the [3π†]–[5π†] buttons. FADE IN TIME Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade in, or go from minimum to maximum. FADE OUT TIME Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade out, or go from maximum to minimum. FADE OUT HOLD TIME Determines the time the volume is held at 0 following the fade out. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 105 Style Playback-related Settings Style Playback-related Settings The PSR-OR700 has a variety of Style playback functions which can be accessed in the display below. 1 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING → TAB[√][®] STYLE SETTING Use the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons for each setting. Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles • Stop Accompaniment When [ACMP] is turned on and [SYNC START] is off, you can play chords in the chord section of the keyboard with the Style stopped, and still hear the accompaniment chord. In this condition — called “Stop Accompaniment” — any valid chord fingerings are recognized and the chord root/type are shown in the display. Here, you can determine whether the chord played in the chord section will sound or not in the Stop Accompaniment status. Data that is recorded when recording a Song Please note that both the Voice that is sounded and the chord data will be recorded when set to “STYLE,” and only the chord data will be recorded when set to “OFF” or “FIXED.” OFF...............................The chord played in the chord section will not sound. STYLE ...........................The chord played in the chord section will sound via the Voices of the selected Style. FIXED ...........................The chord played in the chord section will sound via the specified Voice, regardless of the selected Style. • Synchro Stop Window This determines how long you can hold a chord before the Synchro Stop function is automatically cancelled. When the [SYNC STOP] button is turned on and this is set to a value other than “OFF,” this automatically cancels the Synchro Stop function if you hold a chord for longer than the time set here. This conveniently resets Style playback control to normal, letting you release the keys and still have the Style play. In other words, if you release the keys sooner than the time set here, the Synchro Stop function works. • Style Touch Turns touch response for the Style playback on/off. When this is set to “ON,” the Style volume changes in response to your playing strength in the chord section of the keyboard. 106 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Split Point Settings • Style Change Behavior There are three types as shown below. Section Set Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting different Styles (when Style playback is stopped). When set to “OFF” and Style playback is stopped, the active section is maintained even if the different Style is selected. When any of the MAIN A-D sections is not included in the Style data, the nearest section is automatically selected. For example, when MAIN D is not contained in the selected Style, MAIN C will be called up. Tempo This determines whether the tempo changes or not when you change Styles during Style playback. HOLD ..........................The tempo setting of the previous Style is maintained. RESET...........................The tempo changes to that of the initial default tempo for the selected Style. Part On/Off This determines whether the Style Channel On/Off status changes or not when you change Styles during Style playback. HOLD .......................... The Style Channel On/Off status of the previous Style is maintained. RESET...........................All Style Channels are set to On. Split Point Settings 1 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles These are the settings (there are two Split Points) that separate the different sections of the keyboard: the Chord section, the LEFT part section and the RIGHT 1 and 2 section. The two Split Point settings (below) are specified as note names. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING → TAB [√][®] SPLIT POINT 2 2 Use the [F]–[H] buttons to set the Split Point. • Split Point (S)— separates the Chord section for Style playback from the section(s) for playing Voices (RIGHT 1, 2 and LEFT) • Split Point (L)— separates the two sections for playing Voices, LEFT and RIGHT 1- 2. These two settings can be set to the same note (as in the default) or two different notes as desired. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 107 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance of the Style (MIXING CONSOLE) Setting the Split Point (S) and the Split Point (L) to the same note Split Point (S+L) Chord section + Voice LEFT Voice RIGHT 1and 2 Press the [F] (S+L) button and rotate the DATA ENTRY dial. Setting the Split Point (S) and the Split Point (L) to different notes Specifying the Split Point by note name Press the [1π†]–[4π†] buttons. You can specify the Split Point of the Voice and chord section of the keyboard by using STYLE in the display, and you can specify the Split Point of the left and right Voices by using LEFT. Split Point (S) Chord section Split Point (L) Voice LEFT Voice RIGHT 1and 2 Press the [H] (S) button or the [G] (L) button and rotate the DATA ENTRY dial. Split Point (L) cannot be set lower than Split Point (S), and Split Point (S) cannot be set higher than Split Point (L). Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance of the Style (MIXING CONSOLE) Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles You can set various mixing-related parameters of the Style. (See “Adjustable items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE displays” on page 85.) Call up the “STYLE PART” display in step 3 of the Basic Procedure in “Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)” on page 84, and follow the instructions. Convenient Music Finder feature Music Finder (page 55) is a convenient feature that calls up pre-programmed panel settings (for Voices, Styles, etc.) that match the song or type of music you want to play. The records of the Music Finder can be searched and edited. Searching the Records You can search the records by specifying a song name or keyword, using the Search function of the Music Finder. You can also save your favorite records in the FAVORITE display. 1 2 108 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER display. Press the TAB [√][®] buttons to select the ALL tab. The ALL tab display contains all the preset Records. Convenient Music Finder feature 3 Press the [6π] (SEARCH 1) button to call up the Search display. 4 Enter the search criteria. Clear the search criteria To clear the entered Music/Keyword/Style, press the [F]/[G]/[H] (CLEAR) button. Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles • Search by song title or music genre (MUSIC) or keyword 1 Press the [A] (MUSIC)/[B](KEYWORD) button to call up the character entry display. 2 Enter the song title or music genre, or the keyword (page 71). • Search by Style name Entering several different keywords You can search several different keywords simultaneously by inserting a separator (comma) between each. 1 Press the [C] (STYLE) button to call up the Style selection display. 2 Use the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Style. 3 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the search display. • Adding other Search Criteria You can specify other search criteria in addition to the song name/keyword/Style name. BEAT ............................Select the beat (time signature) you want to use in your performance by pressing the [D] button. All beat settings are included in the search if you select ANY. SEARCH AREA .............Select the pages to be included in the search by pressing the [E] button. (These correspond to the tabs at the top of the Music Finder display.) TEMPO.........................Set the range of the tempo you want to use in your performance by using the [1π†]/[2π†] (TEMPO) buttons. GENRE .........................Select the desired music genre by using the [5π†]/ [6π†] (GENRE) buttons. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 109 Convenient Music Finder feature 5 Press the [8π] (START SEARCH) button to start the search. The Search 1 display appears, showing the results of the search. To cancel searching, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. Searching other music genres When you want to search other music genres, press the [6†] (SEARCH 2) button in the Music Finder display. The search result is displayed in the SEARCH 2 display. Calling up the panel settings to match the style (REPERTOIRE) When searching by style name, the same search result is obtained even if the search is done by using the Repertoire function. See page 56 for details. Creating a Set of Favorite Records As convenient as the Search function is in plumbing the depths of the Music Finder records, you may want to create a “folder” of favorite records — so you can quickly call up those Styles and settings you use most often in your performance. Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 1 2 3 Select the desired record from the Music Finder display. Press the [H] (ADD TO FAVORITE) button to add the selected record to the FAVORITE display. Call up the FAVORITE display by using the TAB [√][®] buttons, and check to see if the record has been added. Deleting Records from the FAVORITE Display 1 2 110 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Select the record you want to delete from the FAVORITE display. Press the [H] (DELETE FROM FAVORITE) button. Convenient Music Finder feature Editing Records You can create a new record by editing the currently selected record. The newly created records are automatically saved in the internal memory. 1 2 3 Select the desired record to be edited in the Music Finder display. Press the [8π†] (RECORD EDIT) button to call up the Edit display. CAUTION You can also change a preset record to create a new one. If you want to keep the original preset, make sure to change the name and register the edited record as a new record (see step 5, page 111). Edit the record as desired. • Editing the song name/keyword/Style name Input each item in the same way as done in the Search display (page 109). • Changing the Tempo Press the [1π†] (TEMPO) button. • Editing the Genre Select the desired genre by using the [5π†]/[6π†] (GENRE) buttons. When creating a new genre, press the [7π†] (GENRE NAME) button and input the genre name. (page 71) • Deleting the Currently Selected Record Press the [I] (DELETE RECORD) button. Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles • Memorizing the Section (Intro/Main/Ending) Use the [2π†]/[4π†] buttons to select the section that will automatically be called up set when the record is selected. This is useful, for example, when you want to have a selected Style automatically be set up to start with an Intro section. Keep in mind that the Beat setting made here is only for the Music Finder search function; this does not affect the actual Beat setting of the Style itself. • Canceling and Quitting the Edit functions Press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. 4 5 To enter the edited record to the FAVORITE display, press the [E] (FAVORITE) button to turn on the FAVORITE. Enter the edits you’ve made to the record as described below. • Creating a new record Press the [J] (NEW RECORD) button. The record is added to the ALL display. If you’ve entered the record to the FAVORITE display in step 4 above, the record is added to both the ALL display and the FAVORITE display. The maximum number of records is 1200, including internal records. • Overwriting an existing record Press the [8π] (OK) button. If you set the record as a Favorite in step 4 above, the record is added to the FAVORITE display. When you edit the record in the FAVORITE display, the record is overwritten. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 111 Convenient Music Finder feature Saving the Record The Music Finder feature handles all the Records including the presets and additionally created records as a single file. Keep in mind that individual records (panel setups) cannot be handled as separate files. 1 2 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 3 112 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Call up the Save display. [MUSIC FINDER] → TAB [√][®] ALL → [7π†] (FILES) Press the TAB [√][®] buttons to select the location for saving (USER/ USB). Press the [6†] button to save the file (page 67). All records are saved together as a single file. Convenient Music Finder feature Calling up Music Finder Records Saved to USER/USB To call up the Music Finder records you’ve saved to USER/USB, follow the instructions below. 1 Call up the [MUSIC FINDER] display. [MUSIC FINDER] → TAB [√][®] ALL 2 Press the [7π†] (FILES) button to open the File selection display of the Music Finder. 3 Use the TAB [√][®] buttons to select USER/USB. 4 Press the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Music Finder file. When the file is selected, a message is displayed according to the content of the file. Press the desired button. • REPLACE All Music Finder records currently in the instrument are deleted and replaced with the records of the selected file. • APPEND The records called up are added to the records currently in the instrument. Execute the operation to call up the Music Finder file. Select “CANCEL” to abort this operation. CAUTION Selecting “REPLACE” automatically deletes all your original records from internal memory. Make sure that all important data has been archived to another location beforehand. Restoring the Music Finder Data You can restore the instrument’s Music Finder to its original factory settings (page 72). Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 2 3 4 4 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 113 Style Creator Style Creator You can create your own styles — recording them by yourself or by combining the internal Style data. The created Styles can be edited. Style Structure Styles are made up of fifteen different sections and each section has eight separate channels. With the Style Creator feature, you can create a Style by separately recording the channels, or by importing pattern data from other existing Styles. Style Four different Fill-ins are available. Section Channel Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles Creating a Style You can use one of the three different methods described below to create a Style. The created Styles can also be edited (page 120). ■ Realtime Recording ➤ See page 115 This method lets you record the Style by simply playing the instrument. You can select an internal Style that most closely matches your image of the Style you want to create and then re-record parts of the Style as desired, or you can create a new Style from scratch. ■ Step Recording ➤ See page 118 This method is like writing music notation on paper, since it allows you to enter each note or individually, and specify its length. This allows you to create a Style without having to play the parts on the instrument, since you can enter each event manually. ■ Style Assembly ➤ See page 119 This convenient feature lets you create composite Styles by combining various patterns from the internal preset Styles. For example, if you want to create your own original 8-beat Style, you could take rhythm patterns from the “70’s 8Beat” Style, use the bass pattern from “60’s Rock1” Style and import the chord patterns from the “Cool8Beat” Style — combining the various elements to create one Style. Cool8Beat 70’s 8Beat 60’s Rock1 Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 114 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Style Creator Realtime Recording (BASIC) Create a single Style by recording the individual channels one-by-one, using realtime recording. Realtime Recording Characteristics • Loop Recording Style playback repeats the rhythm patterns of several measures in a “loop,” and Style recording is also done using loops. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure main section, the two measures are repeatedly recorded. Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition (loop), letting you record while hearing previously recorded material. • Overdub Recording This method records new material to a channel already containing recorded data, without deleting the original data. In Style recording, the recorded data is not deleted, except when using functions such as Rhythm Clear (page 117) and Delete (page 116). For example, if you start recording with a two-measure MAIN section, the two measures are repeated many times. Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition, letting you overdub new material to the loop while hearing previously recorded material. When creating a Style based on an existing internal Style, overdub recording is applied only to the rhythm channels. For all other channels (except rhythm), delete the original data before recording. When using realtime recording based on the internal Styles: 1 2 3 4 5 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles Overdub recording possible. Overdub recording not possible. Delete the data before recording. Select the desired Style to serve as the basis for recording/editing (page 46). When creating a new Style from scratch, press the [C] (NEW STYLE) button from the display shown in step 5 below. When recording channels BASSPHR2 based on an internal Style, delete the original data before recording. Overdub recording is not possible on channels BASSPHR2. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU Press the [B] button to call up the Style Creator display. Use the TAB [√][®] buttons, then select the BASIC tab to call up the RECORD display. Call up the display for selecting sections, etc. by pressing the [EXIT] button. When the RECORD display (channel indication) at the lower part of the STYLE CREATOR display disappears, you can press the [F] (REC CH) button to re-display it. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 115 Style Creator Specifying sections from the panel buttons You can specify the sections to be recorded by using the Section buttons ([INTRO]/[MAIN]/[ENDING], etc.) on the panel. Pressing one of the Section buttons calls up the SECTION display. Change the sections by using the [6π†]/[7π†] buttons and execute the selection by pressing the [8π] button. 6 Use the [3π†]/[4π†] buttons to select the section (page 114) to be recorded. 7-2 The INTRO 4/ENDING 4 sections cannot be specified with the panel controls. 6 7 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles Muting specific channels during recording Turn off the desired channels by pressing the [1†]–[8†] buttons. 8 7-1 Use the [5π†]/[6π†] buttons to determine the length (number of measures) of the selected section. Actually enter the specified length for the selected section by pressing the [D] (EXECUTE) button. Specify the channel to be recorded by simultaneously holding down the [F] (REC CH) button and pressing the appropriate numbered button, [1†]–[8†]. To cancel the selection, press the appropriate numbered button [1†]–[8†] again. 8 10 9 8 Recordable Voices • RHY1 channel: Any except Organ Flute Voices are recordable. • RHY2 channel: Only drum/SFX kits are recordable. • BASS-PHR2 channels: Any except Organ Flute Voices and Drum/SFX kits are recordable. (Preset Organ Flute Voices can be selected only on the LCD display.) 116 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 9 10 Call up the Voice Selection display by using the [1π]–[8π] buttons and select the desired Voice for the corresponding recording channels. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display. To delete a channel, simultaneously hold down the [J] (DELETE) button and press the appropriate numbered button, [1π]–[8π]. You can cancel the deletion by pressing the same numbered button again, before releasing your finger from the [J] button. Style Creator 11 12 13 14 15 Start recording by pressing the Style Control [START/STOP] button. Playback of the specified section starts. Since the accompaniment pattern plays back repeatedly in a loop, you can record individual sounds one by one, listening to the previous sounds as they play. For information on recording to channels other than the rhythm channels (RHY1, 2), refer to the section “Rules when recording non-rhythm channels” (see below). Deleting the recorded rhythm channel (RHY 1, 2) To delete a specific instrument sound, simultaneously hold down the [E] (RHY CLEAR) button (from the display where the recorded channels are shown) and press the appropriate key. To continue recording with another channel, simultaneously hold down the [F] (REC CH) button and press the appropriate [1†]–[8†] button to specify the channel, then play the keyboard. Stop recording by pressing the Style Control [START/STOP] button. Call up the display for selecting sections, etc. by pressing the [EXIT] button. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display to save your data. Save the data in the Style Selection display (page 67). CAUTION The recorded Style will be lost if you change to another Style or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation (page 67). Rules when recording non-rhythm channels • Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording the BASS and PHRASE channels (i.e., C, D, E, G, A, and B). • Use only the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD channels (i.e., C, E, G, and B). C R C C R C Using the data recorded here, the auto accompaniment (Style playback) is appropriately converted depending on the chord changes you make during your performance. The chord which forms the basis for this note conversion is called the Source Chord, and is set by default to CM7 (as in the example illustration above). You can change the Source Chord (its root and type) from the PARAMETER display on page 124. Keep in mind that when you change the Source Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also change. For details on chord notes and recommended notes, see page 125. Any desired chord or chord progression can be used for the INTRO and ENDING sections. Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles C = Chord notes C, R = Recommended notes Changing the Source Chord If you want to record the pattern with a Source Chord other than CM7, set the PLAY ROOT and PLAY CHORD parameters on the PARAMETER page (page 124) before recording. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 117 Style Creator Step Recording (EDIT) Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles The explanation here applies when selecting the EDIT tab in step 4 of “Realtime Recording” (page 115). In the EDIT display, you can record notes with absolutely precise timing. This Step Recording procedure is essentially the same as that for Song Recording (page 148), with the exception of the points listed below: • In the Song Creator, the End Mark position can be changed freely; in the Style Creator, it cannot be changed. This is because the length of the Style is automatically fixed, depending on the selected section. For example, if you create a Style based on a section of four measures length, the End Mark position is automatically set to the end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed in the Step Recording display. • Recording channels can be changed in the Song Creator 1-16 tab display; however, they cannot be changed in the Style Creator. Select the recording channel in the BASIC tab display. • In the Style Creator, the channel data can be entered and System Exclusive data can be edited (delete, copy, or move). You can switch between the two by pressing the [F] button. However, Chord, Lyrics, and System Exclusive data cannot be entered. 118 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Style Creator Style Assembly (ASSEMBLY) Style Assembly allows you to create a single Style by mixing the various patterns (channels) from existing internal Styles. 1 2 Select the basic Style, then call up the display for Style Assembly. The operation steps are the same as steps 1–4 in “Realtime recording” (page 115). In step 4, select the ASSEMBLY tab. Select the desired section (Intro, Main, Ending, etc.) for your new Style. Call up the SECTION display by pressing one of the Section buttons ([INTRO]/[MAIN]/[ENDING], etc.) on the panel. Change the section as desired by using the [6π†]/[7π†] buttons and execute the operation by pressing the [8π] (OK) button. 2-1 Indicates the channels that make up the section. 3 3 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 6 Section display 4 3 4 5 5 2-2 Select the channel for which you wish to replace the pattern by using the [A]–[D] and [F]–[I] buttons. Call up the Style Selection display by pressing the same button again. Select the Style containing the pattern you want to replace in the Style Selection display. To return to the previous screen, press the [EXIT] button after selecting the Style. Select the desired section of the newly imported Style (chosen in step 3 above) by using the [2π†]/[3π†] (SECTION) buttons. You cannot select the SECTION INTRO 4/ENDING 4 directly via the panel operation. Select the desired channel for the section (chosen in step 4 above) by using the [4π†]/[5π†] (CHANNEL) buttons. Repeat steps 3–5 above to replace the patterns of other channels. 6 Press the [J] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display, and save your data from the display (page 67). CAUTION The recorded Style will be lost if you change to another Style or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation (page 67). PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 119 Style Creator Playing the Style During Style Assembly While you are assembling a Style, you can play back the Style and select the method of playback. Use the [6π†]/[7π†] (PLAY TYPE) buttons in the Style Assembly display to select the playback method. • SOLO Mutes all but the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display. Any channels set to ON in the RECORD display on the BASIC page are played back simultaneously. • ON Plays back the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display. Any channels set to something other than OFF in the RECORD display on the BASIC page are played back simultaneously. • OFF Mutes the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display. Editing the Created Style You can edit the Style you’ve created by using Realtime recording, Step recording and/or Style Assembly. Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles Basic Operation for Editing Styles Selecting a file saved to the USB storage device. You can also select a specified file in the USB storage device by pressing the [USB] button. [USB] → [B] STYLE → [A]–[J] 1 2 3 4 Select a Style to be edited. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU Call up the Style Creator/Edit display by pressing the [B] button. Press the TAB[√][®] buttons to select a tab. • Changing the Rhythmic Feel (GROOVE) ➤ See page 121 These versatile features give you a wide variety of tools for changing the rhythmic feel of your created Style. • Editing Data for each Channel (CHANNEL) ➤ See page 123 The editing features let you delete data as desired and apply quantize settings for each channel in the Style data. • Making Style File Format Settings (PARAMETER) ➤ See page 124 For playback of your created Style, you can decide how notes will be converted and sounded for the accompaniment when changing chords in the chord section of the keyboard. 5 120 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Edit the selected Style. Style Creator Changing the Rhythmic Feel (GROOVE) The explanation here applies when you select the GROOVE tab in step 4 of “Basic Operation for Editing Styles” (page 120). 1 Press the [A]/[B] button to select the edit menu (page 122). 1 3 4 2 2 4 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the edits for each display. After the operation is completed, you can execute the edition and this button changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisfied with the Groove or Dynamics results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display to save your data. Save the data in the Style Selection display (page 67). Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 3 Use the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to edit the data. For details on editable parameters, see page 122. CAUTION The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation (page 67). PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 121 Style Creator ■ GROOVE This lets you add swing to the music or change the “feel” of the beat by making subtle shifts in the timing (clock) of the Style. The Groove settings are applied to all channels of the selected Style. ORIGINAL BEAT Specifies the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. In other words, if “8 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to the 8th notes; if “12 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets. BEAT CONVERTER Actually changes the timing of the beats (specified in the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above) to the selected value. For example, when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “8 Beat” and BEAT CONVERTER is set to “12,” all 8th notes in the section are shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The “16A” and “16B” Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “12 Beat” are variations on a basic 16th-note setting. SWING Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of the back beats, depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above. For example, if the specified ORIGINAL BEAT value is “8 Beat,” the Swing parameter will selectively delay the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing feel. The settings “A” through “E” produce different degrees of swing, with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the most pronounced. FINE Selects a variety of Groove “templates” to be applied to the selected section. The “PUSH” settings cause certain beats to be played early, while “HEAVY” settings delay the timing of certain beats. The numbered settings (2, 3, 4, 5) determine which beats are to be affected. All beats up to the specified beat — but not including the first beat — will be played early or delayed (for example, the 2nd and 3rd beats, if “3” is selected). In all cases, “A” types produce minimum effect, “B” types produce medium effect, and “C” types produce maximum effect. Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles ■ DYNAMICS This changes the velocity/volume (or accent) of certain notes in the Style playback. The Dynamics settings are applied to each channel or all channels of the selected Style. 122 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual CHANNEL Selects the desired channel (part) to which Dynamics is to be applied. ACCENT TYPE Determines the type of accent applied — in other words, which notes in the part(s) are emphasized with the Dynamics settings. STRENGTH Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be applied. The higher the value, the stronger the effect. EXPAND/COMP. Expands or compresses the range of velocity values. Values higher than 100% expand the dynamic range, while values lower than 100% compress it. BOOST/CUT Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Values above 100% boost the overall velocity, while values below 100% reduce it. Style Creator Editing Data for Each Channel (CHANNEL) The explanation here applies when you select the CHANNEL tab in step 4 of “Basic Operation for Editing Styles” (page 120). 1 Press the [A]/[B] button to select the edit menu (see below). 1 4 5 2 2 4 5 Use the [1π†]/[2π†] (CHANNEL) buttons to select the channel to be edited. The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display. Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 3 3 Use the [4π†]–[8π†] buttons to edit the data. For details on editable parameters, see below. Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the edits for each display. After the operation is completed, you can execute the edition and this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisfied with the results of the edit. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display to save your data. Save the data in the Style Selection display (page 67). QUANTIZE Same as in the Song Creator (page 161), with the exception of the two additional available parameters below. C Eighth notes with swing C Sixteenth notes with swing VELOCITY CHANGE Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the specified channel, according to the percentage specified here. BAR COPY This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within the specified channel. SOURCE specifies the first (TOP) and last (LAST) measures in the region to be copied. DEST specifies the first measure of the destination location, to which the data is to be copied. BAR CLEAR This function clears all data from the specified range of measures within the selected channel. REMOVE EVENT This function lets you remove specific events from the selected channel. CAUTION The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or you turn the power off without executing the save operation. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 123 Style Creator Making Style File Format Settings (PARAMETER) Special Parameter Settings Based on Style File Format Editing of Style File Format data is related only to note conversion. Editing the rhythm channels has no effect. Source Pattern SOURCE ROOT (Chord Root setting of a Source Pattern) SOURCE CHORD (Chord Type setting of a Source Pattern) Chord change via the chord section of the keybaord. Note Transposition NTR (Note Transposition Rule applied to the Chord Root change) NTT (Note Transposition Table applied to the Chord Type change) Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles Other Settings HIGH KEY (Upper limit of the octaves of the note transposing caused by the Chord Root change) NOTE LIMIT (Note range in which the note is sounded) RTR (Retrigger Rules that determine how notes held through chord changes will be handled) The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment (Style playback) know-how into a single unified format. By using the Style Creator, you can take advantage of the power of the SFF format and freely create your own Styles. The chart shown at left indicates the process by which the Style is played back. (This does not apply to the rhythm track.) These parameters can be set via the Style Creator feature. • Source Pattern There are a variety of possibilities for Style playback notes, depending on the particular root note and chord type that are selected. The Style data is appropriately converted depending on the chord changes you make during your performance. This basic Style data that you create with the Style Creator is referred to as the “Source Pattern.” • Note Transposition This parameter group features two parameters that determine how the notes of the Source Pattern are to be converted in response to chord changes. • Other Settings Using the parameters of this group, you can fine-tune how Style playback responds to the chords you play. For example, the Note Limit parameter allows you to have the Voices of the Style sound as realistic as possible by shifting the pitch to an authentic range — ensuring that no notes sound outside the natural range of the actual instrument (e.g., very low notes of a piccolo sound). Output The explanation here applies when you select the PARAMETER tab in step 4 of “Basic Operation for Editing Styles” (page 120). 1 Press the [A]/[B] button to select the edit menu (page 125). 1 4 2 124 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 3 Style Creator 2 Use the [1π†]/[2π†] (CHANNEL) buttons to select the channel to be edited. The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display. 3 Use the [3π†]–[8π†] buttons to edit the data. For details on editable parameters, see below. 4 CAUTION The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display to save your data. Save the data in the Style Selection display (page 67). ■ PLAY ROOT/CHORD These settings determine the original key of the source pattern (i.e., the key used when recording the pattern). The default setting of CM7 (with a Play Root of “C” and a Chord Type of “M7”), is automatically selected whenever the preset data is deleted prior to recording a new Style, regardless of the Source Root and Chord included in the preset data. When you change Source Root/Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also change, depending on the newly selected chord type. Auditioning Your Style with a Specific Chord Normally in the Style Creator, you can hear your original Stylein-process with the Source Pattern. However, there is a way to hear it played by a specific chord and root. To do this, set NTR to “Root Fixed,” NTT to “Bypass,” and NTT BASS to “OFF” then change the newly displayed “Play Root” and “Play Chord” parameters to the desired settings. When the Play Root is C: CM 6 CM CM 7 (#11) CM 7 CM 7 (9) CM add9 C 6 (9) C C R C C R C R C C C C C C 7 b5 C C R C C C C C C C C 1+8 C R C C C R C C C 1+5 C C R C C C C C R C C 7 sus4 C C C C C 7 (#9) R C C C C 7 (b13) C C C C R C C R C C C C R R C C C Cm 7 (9) C C C 7 (b9) C C R C C7 C R C C R C C R C R C R C 7 (13) C R C C C Cm (9) C C C C R C C C R C C C 1+2+5 Csus 4 R C C C R C R C C R Cdim 7 C C C R C C 7 aug CM 7 aug C C C R C Cdim C 7 (#11) C 7 (9) C C R C R C C C C Cm 7 b5 C C R C C R C C R C C CmM 7 (9) C C R C R C Cm 7 C R R C CmM 7 C C R C Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles C R Cm 7 (11) C R C Cm 6 C R C R C R C C R C C R Cm Caug C R C C = Chord notes C C C C R C C C C R C R C, R = Recommended notes ■ NTR (Note Transposition Rule) This determines the relative position of the root note in the chord, when converted from the Source Pattern in response to chord changes. ROOT TRANS (Root Transpose) ROOT FIXED When the root note is transposed, the pitch relationship between notes is maintained. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become F3, A3 and C4 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain melody lines. The note is kept as close as possible to the previous note range. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become C3, F3 and A3 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain chord parts. When playing a C major chord. When playing a C major chord. When playing an F major chord. When playing an F major chord. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 125 Style Creator Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles ■ NTT (Note Transposition Table) This sets the note transposition table for the source pattern. BYPASS When NTR is set to ROOT FIXED, the transposition table used does not do any note conversion. When NTR is set to ROOT TRANS, the table used only converts the root note. MELODY Suitable for melody line transposition. Use this for melody channels such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2. CHORD Suitable for chord transposition. Use this for the Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels, especially when they contain piano or guitar-like chordal parts. MELODIC MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third interval in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third interval is raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for melody channels of Sections which respond only to major/minor chords, such as Intros and Endings. MELODIC MINOR 5th In addition to the Melodic Minor transposition above, augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source Pattern. HARMONIC MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third and sixth intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted sixth intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to major/minor chords, such as Intros and Endings. HARMONIC MINOR 5th In addition to the Harmonic Minor transposition above, augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern. NATURAL MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third, sixth and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third, flatted sixth and flatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to a Major/minor chord such as Intros and Endings. NATURAL MINOR 5th In addition to the Natural Minor transposition above, augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern. DORIAN When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to a Major/minor chord such as Intros and Endings. DORIAN 5th In addition to the Dorian transposition above, augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern. ■ NTT BASS ON/OFF The channels for which this is set to ON will be played back by the bass root note, when the on-bass chord is recognized by the instrument. ■ HIGH KEY This sets the highest key (upper octave limit) of the note transposition for the chord root change. Any notes calculated to be higher than the highest key are transposed down to the next lowest octave. This setting is available only when the NTR parameter (page 125) is set to “Root Trans.” Example — When the highest key is F. 126 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Root changes CM C#M FM F#M Notes played C3-E3-G3 C#3-F3-G#3 F3-A3-C4 F#2-A#2-C#3 Style Creator ■ NOTE LIMIT This sets the note range (highest and lowest notes) for voices recorded to the style channels. By judicious setting of this range, you can ensure that the voices sound as realistic as possible — in other words, that no notes outside the natural range are sounded (e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo sounds). The actual notes that sound are automatically shifted to the set range. Example — When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4. Root changes CM C#M FM Notes played E3-G3-C4 F3-G#3-C#4 F3-A3-C4 High Limit Low Limit ■ RTR (Retrigger Rule) These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change pitch in response to chord changes. STOP The notes stop sounding. PITCH SHIFT The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type of the new chord. PITCH SHIFT TO ROOT The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root of the new chord. RETRIGGER The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding to the next chord. RETRIGGER TO ROOT The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next chord. However, the octave of the new note remains the same. Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 127 The Multi Pads Reference to Quick Guide pages The Multi Pads .............................................................................. page 52 Multi Pad Creating (Multi Pad Creator) This feature lets you create your original Multi Pad phrases, and also allows you to edit existing Multi Pad phrases to create your own. Multi Pad Realtime Recording 1 2 The Multi Pads 3 4 5 6 7 Select a Multi Pad Bank to be edited or created (page 130). Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU Press the [C] button to call up the Multi Pad Creator display. Press the TAB [√] button to select the RECORD tab. Press any of the [A], [B], [F], and [G] buttons to select a Multi Pad to be edited or created. If you want to create the Multi Pad data from scratch, press the [C] button to call up an empty bank. Press the [H] (REC) button to enter the recording standby status for the Multi Pad selected in step 5. Start recording. Recording begins automatically as soon as you play the keyboard. You can also start recording by pressing the STYLE CONTROL [START/ STOP] button. This lets you record as much silence as you want before the start of the Multi Pad phrase. If Chord Match is set to on for the Multi Pad to be recorded, you should record using the notes of the C major seventh scale (C, D, E, G, A and B). C R C To ensure that your repeated rhythmic phrases play back in a perfect loop, be careful to stop recording right on the very last beat of the phrase, just before the “one” of the next measure. If it is difficult to get a good loop, you may want to use the Step Record functions on the EDIT page. 128 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 8 9 C R C C = Chord note C, R = Recommended note Stop recording. Press the [H] (STOP) button or the panel MULTI PAD [STOP] button or the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to stop recording when you've finished playing the phrase. Listen back to your newly recorded phrase, by pressing the appropriate MULTI PAD button, [1]–[4]. To re-record the phrase, repeat steps 6–8. Multi Pad Creating (Multi Pad Creator) 10 11 12 13 Turn Repeat of each pad On or Off by using the [1π†] - [4π†] buttons. If the Repeat parameter is on for the selected pad, playback of the corresponding pad will continue until the MULTI PAD [STOP] button is pressed. If the Repeat parameter is off for the selected pad, playback will end automatically as soon as the end of the phrase is reached. When you press the Multi Pads of which the Repeat is turned on during Song or Style playback, playback will start and repeat in sync with the beat. Turn Chord Match of each pad On or Off by using the [5π†]– [8π†] buttons. If the Chord Match parameter is on for the selected pad, the corresponding pad is played back according to the chord specified in the chord section of the keyboard generated by turning [ACMP] on, or specified in the LEFT voice section of the keyboard generated by turning [LEFT] on (when turning the [ACMP] off). Multi Pads indicated with the following icon (hand on fretboard) are created with special note transpositions to produce the natural chord voicing of the guitar. Because of this, if the Chord Match setting is set to off, the Multi Pads may not sound appropriately. Press the [D] button, then enter a name for each Multi Pad by (page 130). Press the [I] button, then save the Multi Pad data as a Bank containing a set of four Pads to the USER drive or USB storage device (page 64). Multi Pad Step Recording (EDIT) The Multi Pads Step Recording can be executed in the EDIT page. After selecting a Multi Pad in step 5 of the Multi Pad Realtime Recording on page 128, press the TAB [√][®] buttons to select the EDIT tab. The EDIT page indicates the Event list that lets you record notes with absolutely precise timing. This Step Recording procedure is essentially the same as that for Song Recording (pages 148–157), with the exception of the points listed below: • There is no menu for switching channels, since Multi Pads contain data for only a single channel. • In the Multi Pad Creator, only the channel events can be entered and the System Exclusive messages can be edited. Chord and Lyrics events are not available. You can switch between the two types of Event Lists by pressing the [F] button. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 129 Multi Pad Editing (Multi Pad Creator) Multi Pad Editing (Multi Pad Creator) 1 2 Press the MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT] button to call up the Multi Pad Bank selection display, then select a Bank to be edited on the USER drive. Press the [8†] button to call up the [MULTI PAD EDIT] display, then select a Pad to be edited by pressing any of the [A], [B], [F], and [G] buttons. The Multi Pads The number above the Pad name corresponds to the MULTI PAD [1]–[4] buttons. 3 Edit each of the Multi Pads as desired. • Naming Press the [1†] button then change the name of each Multi Pad (page 70). • Copying Press the [3†] button, select the Multi Pad to be copied, select the destination location, then execute the Copy operation by pressing the [4†] button (page 68). • Deleting Press the [5†] button then delete the unnecessary Multi Pad (page 69). 130 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory The Registration Memory function allows you to save (or “register”) virtually all panel settings to a Registration Memory button, and then instantly recall your custom panel settings by pressing a single button. The registered settings for eight Registration Memory buttons should be saved as a single Bank (file). Registering and Saving Custom Panel Setups Registering Custom Panel Setups 1 2 Set up the panel controls (such as Voice, Style, effects, and so on) as desired. Refer to the Data List for a list of parameters that can be registered with the Registration Memory function. The Data List is available at the Yamaha website. (See page 5.) Press the REGISTRATION MEMORY [MEMORY] button. The display for selecting the items to be registered appears. Only the items selected here will be registered. 5 2 3 4 5 6 Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups 3 4 Press the [2π†]–[7π†] buttons to select items. To cancel the operation, press the [I] (CANCEL) button. Enter or remove the checkmark in the box of the item to determine whether the item should be registered or not, by pressing the [8π†] button. Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons to register your settings. It is recommended that you select a button whose lamp is not lit in red or green. Buttons that are lit in red or green, already contain the panel setup data. Any panel setup previously registered to the selected REGISTRATION MEMORY button (lamp lights in green or red) will be erased and replaced by the new settings. Register various panel setups to other buttons by repeating steps 1–5. When recalling registration setups, you can also select the items to be recalled or not, even if you selected all items when registering (page 134). About the lamp status: Off.............. no data registered On (green)...data registered, but not currently selected On (red)......data registered, and currently selected Deleting an unneeded panel setup See page 133. Deleting all eight current panel setups To delete all the eight current panel setups, turn the [POWER] button ON while holding the B5 key (right-most B key on the keyboard). PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 131 Recalling the Registered Panel Setups Saving the Registered Panel Setups You can save all the eight registered panel setups as a single Registration Memory Bank file. Bank 4 Bank 3 Bank 2 Bank 1 1 2 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [–] buttons simultaneously to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display. Press the [6†] button to save the Bank file (page 67). 1 2 Recalling the Registered Panel Setups Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups About recalling setups from a USB storage device When recalling the setups including Song/Style file selection from a USB storage device, make sure that the appropriate USB storage device including the registered Song/Style is connected into the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. 1 2 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [–] buttons simultaneously to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a bank. 2 3 3 132 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Press one of the green-lit numbered buttons ([1]–[8]) in the Registration Memory section. Recalling the Registered Panel Setups Parameter Lock You can “lock” specific parameters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.) to make them selectable only via the panel control — in other words, instead of via Registration Memory, One Touch Setting, Music Finder, Song or incoming MIDI data, etc. 1 Call up the Parameter Lock display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√][®] → CONFIG 1 → [B] 3 PARAMETER LOCK 2 Select the desired parameter by using the [1π†]–[7π†]buttons, then lock it with the [8π] (OK) button. Deleting an Unneeded Panel Setup/Naming a Panel Setup The panel setups can be deleted or named individually as desired. 1 2 3 4 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [–] buttons simultaneously to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a bank to be edited. Press the [8†] (EDIT) button to call up the REGISTRATION EDIT Display. Edit the panel setups. • Deleting a panel setup Press the [5†] button to delete a panel setup (page 69). • Renaming a panel setup Press the [1†] button to rename a panel setup (page 70). 5 Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups The number above the file name corresponds to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons. Press the [8π] (UP) button to return to the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 133 Recalling the Registered Panel Setups Disabling Recall of Specific Items (Freeze Function) Registration Memory lets you recall all the panel setups you made with a single button press. However, there may be times that you want certain items to remain the same, even when switching Registration Memory setups. For example, you may want to switch Voices or effect settings while keeping the same accompaniment Style. This is where the Freeze function comes in handy. It lets you maintain the settings of certain items and leave them unchanged, even when selecting other Registration Memory buttons. CAUTION Settings in the REGISTRATION FREEZE display are automatically saved to the instrument when you exit from this display. However, if you turn the power off without exiting from this display, the settings will be lost. 1 2 3 4 5 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET → TAB [√][®] FREEZE Press the [2π†]–[7π†] buttons to select items. Enter checkmarks for the items to be “Frozen” (i.e., to remain unchanged), by pressing the [8π†] button. Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the operation display. Press the [FREEZE] button on the panel to turn the Freeze function on. Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order — Registration Sequence As convenient as the Registration Memory buttons are, there may be times during a performance when you want to quickly switch between settings — without having to take your hands from the keyboard. The convenient Registration Sequence function lets you call up the eight setups in any order you specify, by simply using the TAB [√][®] buttons or the pedal as you play. Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups 1 2 3 134 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Select the desired Registration Memory bank to program a sequence (page 132). Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET → TAB [√][®] REGISTRATION SEQUENCE If you intend to use a pedal to switch Registration Memory settings, specify here how the pedal will be used — to advance or to reverse through the sequence. Use the [C] button to select the pedal for advancing through the sequence. Use the [D] button to select the pedal for reversing through the sequence. Recalling the Registered Panel Setups 4 5 Use the [E] button to determine how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the sequence (SEQUENCE END). STOP .....................Pressing the TAB [®] button or the “advance” pedal has no effect. The sequence is “stopped.” TOP .......................The sequence starts again at the beginning. NEXT BANK...........The sequence automatically moves to the beginning of the next Registration Memory Bank in the same folder. Program the Sequence order. The numbers shown at the lower part of the display correspond to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons on the panel. Program the Sequence order from left to right. Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] button on the panel, then press the [6π†] (INSERT) button to input the number. • Replacing the number Press the [5π†] (REPLACE) button to replace the number at the cursor position with the currently selected Registration Memory number. • Deleting the number Press the [7π†] (DELETE) button to delete the number at the cursor position. • Deleting all numbers Press the [8π†] (CLEAR) button to delete all numbers in the sequence. 6 7 Press the [F] button to turn the Registration Sequence function on. CAUTION Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then the [EXIT] button to return to the Main display and confirm whether the Registration Memory numbers are called up according to the sequence programmed above. • Use the TAB [®] button to call up the Registration Memory numbers in the order of the sequence, or use the TAB [√] button to call them up in reverse order. The TAB [√][®] buttons can only be used for Registration Sequence when the Main display is called up. • When pedal operation has been set in step 3, you can use a pedal to select the Registration Memory numbers in order. The pedal can be used for Registration Sequence no matter which display is called up (except for the display in step 3). Returning to the first Sequence in one action In the Main display, press the TAB [√] and [®] buttons simultaneously. This cancels the currently selected Sequence number (the box indicator at the top right goes out). The first Sequence will be selected by pressing one of the TAB [√][®] buttons or by pressing the pedal. Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups The Registration Sequence is indicated at the top right of the Main display, letting you confirm the currently selected number. Settings in the REGISTRATION SEQUENCE display are automatically saved to the instrument when you exit from this display. However, if you turn the power off without exiting from this display, the settings will be lost. Saving the Registration Sequence Settings The settings for the Sequence order and how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the sequence (SEQUENCE END) are included as part of the Registration Memory Bank file. To store your newly programmed Registration Sequence, save the current Registration Memory Bank file. 1 2 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [–] buttons simultaneously to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display. Press the [6†] button to save the Bank file (page 67). CAUTION Keep in mind that all Registration Sequence data is lost when changing Registration Memory Banks, unless you’ve saved it with the Registration Memory Bank file. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 135 Using, Creating and Editing Songs Reference to Quick Guide Pages Practicing with the Preset Songs .................................................. page 36 Playing Back and Listening to Songs Before Practicing ............ page 36 Displaying Music Notation (Score) .......................................... page 39 Muting the Right- or Left-hand Part Viewing the Score ............. page 40 Practicing by Using the Repeat Playback Function .................. page 42 Recording Your Performance.................................................... page 43 Singing Along with Song playback (Karaoke) or Your Own Performance.......................................................................... page 57 Singing with the Lyrics Display ................................................ page 57 Convenient Functions for Karaoke ........................................... page 58 Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your Own Performance ................................................................... page 58 Compatible Song Types The PSR-OR700 can play back the following Song types. Preset Songs Songs in the Song Selection PRESET display. Before using a USB storage device, be sure to read “Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/Floppy Disk, etc)” on page 23. Before using a floppy disk and the disk slot, be sure to read “Handling floppy disks” on page 22. Commercially available music data is subject to protection by copyright laws. Copying commercially available data is strictly prohibited, except for your own personal use. Using, Creating and Editing Songs See page 176 for information on the types of Song data that can be played on the instrument. 136 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Your Own Recorded Songs These are Songs which you’ve recorded (page 43, page 143) and saved to the USER/USB display. (USB is available when you connect a USB storage device such as a USB flash memory/floppy disk drive to the instrument.) Commercially Available Song Data A variety of song data for the instrument can be downloaded from the Yamaha website, and even more titles are available commercially as Disk Songs. Disk Songs are available when you connect the optional floppy disk drive to the instrument. The instrument is compatible with the Song disks (floppy disks) that bear the following marks: Operations for Song Playback Operations for Song Playback This section explains detailed operations and functions related to Song playback which are not covered in the “Quick Guide.” ■ Starting/Stopping a Song Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start Song playback, and press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop. In addition, there are several other convenient ways to start/stop a Song. Depending on the particular Song data, the Style will also play back at the same time. Starting Playback Synchro Start You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. While playback is stopped, while holding down the SONG [J] (STOP) button, press the [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button. To cancel the Synchro Start function, while holding down the SONG [J] (STOP) button, press the [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button. Tap function This useful function lets you press the [TAP TEMPO] button to tap out the tempo and automatically start the Song at that tapped speed. Simply tap (press/release) the button (four times for a 4/4 time signature) while the instrument is in Synchro Start standby mode, and the Song playback starts automatically at the tempo you tapped. Fade In The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to produce smooth fade-ins when starting the Song playback. To produce fade-ins, press the [FADE IN/OUT] button while playback is stopped and then press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback. Stopping Playback Fade Out The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to produce smooth fade-outs when stopping the Song playback. Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button at the beginning of the phrase you want to fade out. Using, Creating and Editing Songs Set the Fade In/Out time The times of the fade-in and fade-out can be set independently. For details, refer to page 105. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 137 Operations for Song Playback ■ Top/Pause/Rewind/Fast Forward Moving to the top position of the Song Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button, regardless of whether the Song is stopped or playing back. Pausing the Song Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button during Song playback. Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button again and the Song will resume from the current position. Phrase Mark: Phrase Mark is a pre-programmed marker in certain Song data, which specifies a certain location (set of measures) in the Song. Moving back and forth (rewind and fast forward) 1 Press the SONG [G] (REW) or SONG [H] (FF) button to move back and forth (rewind and fast forward). It calls up a pop-up window showing the current measure number in the Main display. For Songs containing Phrase Marks, you can use the [G/H] (REW/FF) buttons to navigate through the Phrase Marks in the Song. If you don’t want to set the Song position by the phrase marks, press the [E] button and select “BAR” in the window showing the Song position. For Songs not containing Phrase Marks For Songs containing Phrase Mark 2 Press the [EXIT] button to close the pop-up window showing the current measure number (or Phrase Mark number). ■ Repeat Playback/Chain Playback 1 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING Set the parameters related to the Repeat Playback by using the [H]/[I] buttons. The available parameters are shown below. Using, Creating and Editing Songs REPEAT MODE OFF Plays through the selected Song, then stops. SINGLE Plays through the selected Song repeatedly. ALL Continues playback through all the Songs in the folder containing the current Song repeatedly. RANDOM Randomly and repeatedly plays back all Songs in the folder containing the current Song. PHRASE MARK REPEAT For Songs containing Phrase Marks, you can set Repeat Playback to “ON” or “OFF.” When this is on, the part corresponding to the specified Phrase Mark number is repeatedly played back. The steps for specifying the Phrase Mark number are the same as in the steps 1–2 of the section “Moving back and forth (rewind and fast forward)” (see above). 138 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Operations for Song Playback ■ Queuing the Next Playback Song While a Song is playing back, you can queue up the next Song for playback. This is convenient for chaining it to the next Song smoothly during stage performance. Select the Song you want play next in the Song Selection display, while a Song is playing back. The “NEXT” indication appears at the upper right of the corresponding Song name. To cancel this setting, press the [8†] (Cancel) button. Parameter Lock You can “lock” specific parameters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.) to make them selectable only via the panel controls (page 133). ■ Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with the Song Playback When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, channels 9–16 in the Song data are replaced with style channels — allowing you to play the accompaniment parts of the Song yourself. Try playing chords along with the Song playback as shown in the instructions below. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Select a Song (page 36). Select a Style (page 46). Press the STYLE CONTROL [ACMP] button to turn on the Auto Accompaniment function. Press the STYLE CONTROL [SYNC START] button to enable standby — letting you simultaneously start the accompaniment as soon as you start playing. F/K K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback. Press the SONG [F Play chords along with the Song. The chord name is indicated in the Main display. To return to the Main display, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then press the [EXIT] button. When the Song playback is stopped, the Style playback is also stopped at the same time. • Tempo for playing back a Song and a Style at the same time When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, the tempo value set in the Song is automatically used. For songs without chord data, the chord name will not be displayed in the Main display during Song playback. Using, Creating and Editing Songs Playing Songs with the Quick Start function With the default settings, the Quick Start function is turned on. On some commercially available Song data, certain settings related to the Song (such as voice selection, volume, etc.) are recorded to the first measure, before the actual note data. When Quick Start is set to “ON,” the instrument reads all initial non-note data of the Song at the highest possible speed, then automatically slows down to the appropriate tempo at the first note. This allows you to start playback as quickly as possible, with a minimum pause for reading of data. When Quick Start is set to “ON,” a Song is played back directly from the first note (which may be in the middle of a measure). If you want to play from the beginning of the measure that has silence prior to the first note, turn Quick Start “OFF.” 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING 2 Press the [7†] (QUICK START) buttons to turn the Quick Start “OFF.” PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 139 Adjusting the Volume Balance and Voice Combination, etc. (MIXING CONSOLE) Reading Song data automatically when inserting a USB storage device You can have the instrument automatically call up the first Song (not contained in a folder) on a USB storage device, as soon as the device is connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√][®] MEDIA 2 Press the [3π]/[4π] (SONG AUTO OPEN) button to select “ON.” Adjusting the Volume Balance and Voice Combination, etc. (MIXING CONSOLE) About the [SONG CH 1–8]/ [SONG CH 9–16] displays A Song consists of 16 separate channels. Separate settings can be made for each of the 16 channels in the MIXING CONSOLE display. Adjust the parameters in the SONG CH 1-8 or SONG CH 9-16 display respectively. Usually, CH 1 is assigned to the [TR 1] button, CH 2 is assigned to the [TR 2] button, and CH 3-16 are assigned to the [EXTRA TR] button, respectively. You can set the mixing-related parameters of a Song. Refer to the section “Adjustable items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE display” on page 85. Call up the “SONG CH 1–8” or “SONG CH 9–16” display in step 3 of the Basic Procedure in “Editing the Volume Balance and Voice Combination (MIXING CONSOLE)” on page 84. Below are two operation examples. Adjusting the Volume Balance of Each Channel 1 2 3 4 Using, Creating and Editing Songs Press the [C]/[H] (VOICE) buttons in step 5 to select the Voice which you want to change. Then, press one of the [1π†] to [8π†] buttons to call up the Voice selection display for the channel. 140 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 5 6 7 Select a Song (page 36). Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE display. Select the [VOL/VOICE] tab by pressing the TAB [√][®] buttons. Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button repeatedly to call up the display of “SONG CH 1–8” or “SONG CH 9–16.” Press the [J] button to select the “VOLUME.” Adjust the volume balance of each channel by using the [1π†]– [8π†] buttons. You can save the volume settings to the Song in the Setup operation of the SETUP (page 162). Make sure to checkmark the “VOLUME” item in step 2 of the Setup procedure. Practicing Songs with the Guide Functions Changing Voices 1–4 5 6 7 8 The operation steps are the same as in the “Adjusting the Volume Balance of Each Channel” (see page 140). Press the [H] button to select the “VOICE.” Press one of the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to call up the Voice selection display for the channel. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Voice. You can save the changed Voice selection to the Song in the Setup operation (page 162). Make sure to checkmark the “VOICE” item in step 2 of the Setup procedure. Practicing Songs with the Guide Functions The Guide functions provide convenient learning and practicing tools to help you master the instrument. By pressing the [SCORE] button, you can have the notation of the song displayed, showing the notes you should play and when you should play them, for ease in learning. Saving the Guide settings in the SONG SETTING display You can save the Guide settings as a part of the Song data (page 162). For Songs to which Guide settings have been saved, the Guide function will be automatically turned on and the related settings will be recalled when the Song is selected. Selecting the Guide Function Type 1 2 Call up the setting display: [FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired Guide function type. The following types are available. 2 Using, Creating and Editing Songs 1 3 Select a song, call up the Score display (by pressing the [SCORE] button), then play the keyboard. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 141 Practicing Songs with the Guide Functions For Keyboard Performance Follow Lights When this is selected, Song playback pauses, waiting for you to play the notes correctly. When you play the correct notes, Song playback continues. Follow Lights was developed for the Yamaha Clavinova series. This function is used for practicing purposes, with built-in lamps on the Clavinova keyboard indicating the notes to be played. Even though the PSR-OR700 does not have these lamps, you can use the same function by following the indications in the displayed notation with the Song Score function. Any Key With this function, you can play the melody of a Song just by pressing a single key (any key is OK) in time with the rhythm. Song playback pauses and waits for you to play any key. Simply play a key on the keyboard in time with music and the Song playback continues. For Singing Karao-key This function lets you control the Song playback timing with just one finger, while you sing along. Song playback pauses, waiting for you to sing. Simply play a key on the keyboard (any key is OK) and the Song playback continues. (For this function, the notes of the keyboard do not sound.) Turning playback channels of the Song on and off A Song consists of 16 separate channels. You can independently turn each channel of the selected Song playback on or off. Usually, CH 1 is assigned to [TR 1] button, CH 2 is assigned to [TR 2] button, and CH 3–16 are assigned to the [EXTRA TR] button. 1 Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the Song CHANNEL ON/OFF display. If the display shown below does not appear, press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button again. Using, Creating and Editing Songs 2 Use the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to turn each channel on or off. If you want to play back only one particular channel (muting all other channels), press and hold down one of the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons corresponding to the desired channel. To cancel solo playback, press the same button again. 142 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Recording Your Performance to MIDI Recording Your Performance to MIDI You can record your own performances and save them to the User tab display or a USB storage device. Several different recording methods are available: Quick Recording which lets you record performance conveniently and quickly, Multi track Recording which lets you record several different parts to multiple channels, and Step Recording which lets you enter notes one by one. And since the recorded data is MIDI, you can easily edit your songs, too. For details on MIDI, see page 174, “What is MIDI?” Internal memory (User tab displays) capacity The internal memory capacity of the instrument is about 560KB. This capacity applies to all file types, including Voice, Style, Song, and Registration data files. Recording Methods Step Recording Realtime Recording There are three methods as shown below. Quick Recording ➤ See below. This convenient and simple recording method lets you quickly record your performance — useful, for example, in recording solo piano pieces. You can record to the [TR 1 (R)] or [TR 2 (L)] button, and also to the [EXTRA TR (STYLE)] track, which can be used for recording at the same time. Multi track Recording ➤ page 145 This lets you record a whole Song including several different instrument parts, to create the sound of a full band or orchestra. Record the performance of each instrument part one by one and create fully orchestrated compositions. You can also record over already-recorded parts of an existing Song (Preset Song or a Song on USB storage device) with your own performance. Step Recording ➤ page 148 This method lets you compose your performance by “writing” it down one event at a time. This is a non-realtime, manual recording method – similar to writing music notation onto paper. You can input notes, chords and other events one by one (realtime performance is not needed). You can also edit Songs after they’ve been recorded (page 158). For example, you can edit specific notes one by one, or you can use the Punch In/ Out function to re-record a specific part. Quick Recording This lets you conveniently and quickly record your performance. 1 Using, Creating and Editing Songs J] (STOP) buttons simultaPress the SONG [REC] and SONG [J neously. A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 143 Recording Your Performance to MIDI 2 Make the desired panel settings for your keyboard performance. Below are some example settings you may want to try. • Recording the RIGHT 2 and/or LEFT parts The [RIGHT 2] and/or [LEFT] keyboard parts should be turned on. Select the voice for each keyboard part (RIGHT 2, LEFT) by calling up the Voice selection display (page 79, page 80). The RIGHT 2 and/or LEFT parts are recorded onto separate tracks. • Recording Styles 1 Select a Style (page 46). 2 Set the tempo for recording by pressing the TEMPO [–] [+] buttons, as necessary. • Using Registration Memory panel setups Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1–8] buttons (page 131). 3 While holding the SONG [REC] button, press the SONG TRACK buttons to be recorded. • Recording your performance Press the SONG [TR 1] button for the right-hand part recording, and/or the SONG [TR 2] button for the left-hand part recording. • Recording Styles/Multi Pads Press the SONG [EXTRA TR (STYLE)] button. • Recording your performance and the Style/Multi Pad playback simultaneously Press the SONG [TR 1]/[TR 2] buttons and the SONG [EXTRA TR (STYLE)] button. 4 Using the metronome You can record your performance while playing back the metronome (page 34). However, the metronome sound is not recorded. Start recording. There are several different ways you can start recording. • Starting by playing the keyboard If you’ve selected the SONG [TR 1]/[TR 2] buttons in step 3, play in the right-hand section of the keyboard (page 78). If you’ve selected the SONG [EXTRA TR (STYLES)] button in step 3, play in the left-hand (chord) section of the keyboard (page 107). Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard. Using, Creating and Editing Songs • Starting by pressing the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button If you start recording in this way, “empty” data is recorded until you play a note on the keyboard. This is useful for starting a Song with a short one-or two-beat pick-up or lead-in. • Starting by pressing the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button. In this case the rhythm parts (channels) of the Style begin playing back and recording starts simultaneously. 144 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Recording Your Performance to MIDI 5 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop recording. When recording is finished, a message prompting you to save the recorded performance data appears. To close the message, press the [EXIT] button. See step 7 for instructions on saving your recording. 6 Listen to your newly recorded performance. Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to play back the performance you just recorded. Pausing and restarting your recording To pause recording, press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button during recording. To restart recording, follow the operations shown below. • For recording to [TR 1]/[TR 2], press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button. • For recording to [EXTRA TR], press the STYLE CONTROL [SYNC START] button, then play in the chord section of the keyboard. CAUTION 7 Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 67). Multi Track Recording A Song consists of 16 separate channels. With this method, you can record data to each channel independently, one by one. Both Keyboard and Style parts can be recorded. 1 Press the SONG [REC] and SONG [J] (STOP) buttons simultaneously. A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording. Select Voices for recording the keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, and/or LEFT) (page 30, page 79, page 80). Select a Style and a Multi Pad Bank for recording also, as necessary (page 46, page 52). The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 67). About Channels See page 147. Example Recording the keyboard RIGHT 2 part to the channel 2 Press the PART SELECT [RIGHT 2] button to call up the Voice selection display, and select a Voice for the RIGHT 2 part. Also be sure to turn the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 2] button on. Using, Creating and Editing Songs PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 145 Recording Your Performance to MIDI Setting all of the 5–16 channels to “REC” simultaneously While holding the SONG [REC] button, press the SONG [EXTRA TR] button. 2 While holding the SONG [REC] button, While holding the SONG [REC] button, press the [2π] button to set the press the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to channel 2 to “REC.” set the desired channels to “REC.” Normally, the keyboard parts should be recorded to channels 1–4, the Multi Pads should be recorded to 5–8, and the Styles should be recorded to channels 9–16. To cancel the channel selection, press the SONG [REC] button again. 3 + When selecting the MIDI part • Setting a single channel to MIDI All incoming data received via any of the MIDI channels 1-16 is recorded. When using an external MIDI keyboard or controller to record, this lets you record without having to set the MIDI transmit channel on the external device. • Setting several channels to MIDI When using an external MIDI keyboard or controller to record, this records data only over the set MIDI channel — meaning the external device must also be set to the same channel. Using, Creating and Editing Songs Recording each channel with the same tempo Use the Metronome function (page 34) to record each channel with the same tempo. Keep in mind that the metronome sound is not recorded. 2 3 4 5 Pausing and restarting your recording See page 144. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Press the [D] button to select the “RIGHT2.” Start recording. The method for starting is the same as in step 4 of Quick Recording (page 144). Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop recording. When recording is finished, a message appears prompting you to save the recorded performance appears. To close the message, press the [EXIT] button. For instructions on saving Song data, see step 8. 6 146 Use the [C]/[D] buttons to select the desired part for the channel to be recorded. This determines which part — keyboard or Style (Rhythm 1/2, Bass, etc.) or Multi Pad — is recorded to each of the channels selected in step 2. Default channel/part assignments are shown in the section “About Song channels” (page 147). To close the Part selection display, press the [EXIT] button. Listen to your newly recorded performance. Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to playback the performance you just recorded. Recording Your Performance to MIDI 7 8 To record another channel, repeat steps 2 through 6. Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 67). About Song channels Default channel/part assignments are shown below. Channels 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Keyboard parts RHYTHM1 RHYTHM2 BASS CHORD1 CHORD2 PAD PHRASE1 PHRASE2 Style parts Multi Pad parts RIGHT1 RIGHT1 RIGHT1 RIGHT1 M.Pad1 M.Pad2 M.Pad3 M.Pad4 Channels Keyboard Parts 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Default Parts CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 67). About keyboard parts There are three keyboard parts, RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 and LEFT. As the default, the RIGHT 1 part is assigned to each of the channels 1–4. Normally, the keyboard parts should be recorded to the channels 1–4. About Style parts As the default, each of the Style parts is assigned to the channels 9–16, respectively as shown above. Normally, the Style parts should be recorded to the channels 9–16. RHYTHM ......... This is the basic part of the Style, containing the drum and percussion rhythm patterns. Usually one of the drum kits is used. BASS ................ The bass part uses various appropriate instrument sounds to match the style. CHORD ........... This is the rhythmic chord backing, commonly used with piano or guitar Voices. PAD ................. This part is used for sustained instruments such as strings, organ, choir, etc. PHRASE ........... This part is used for punchy brass stabs, arpeggiated chords, and other extras that make the accompaniment more interesting. About Multi Pad parts As the default, each of the Multi Pads is assigned to the channels 5–8, respectively as shown above. Using, Creating and Editing Songs PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 147 Recording Your Performance to MIDI Step Recording This method lets you record regular music data such as melodies and chords. Basic Operations for Step Recording 1 2 3 4 Press the SONG[REC] and SONG[J] (STOP) buttons simultaneously. A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU Press the [A] button to call up the Song Creator display for recording/ editing a Song. Select the appropriate tab by using the TAB [√][®] buttons. For recording melodies .............. Select the [1–16] tab. For recording chords .................. Select the [CHORD] tab. 4 Using, Creating and Editing Songs 5 6 5 6 7 148 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual If you select the “1–16” tab in step 4, press the [F] button to select the channel for recording. Press the [G] button to call up the STEP RECORD display. Start Step Recording. For recording melodies .............. See page 149. For recording chords .................. See page 156. Recording Your Performance to MIDI Recording Melodies This section explains how to step-record notes, using three music score examples. Example 1 The explanations here apply to step 7 of the section “Basic Operations for Step Recording” on page 148. 3–5 1 Since the music score displayed on the instrument is generated from the recorded MIDI data, it may not appear exactly the same as shown here. 6 7 2 * The numbers shown in the notation correspond to the following operation step numbers. Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display. 1 Press the [G] button to select “ .” 1 2 3 4 Press the [H] button to select “Tenuto.” Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type. Press the [6π†] button to select the quarter-note length. About the items which can be selected via the [G] [H] [I] buttons See page 151. Using, Creating and Editing Songs 2 3 4 5 Play the keys C3, D3, E3, F3, G3, and A3 in order, according to the notation example. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 149 Recording Your Performance to MIDI 6 Press the [6π†] button to enter a quarter-note rest. To enter the rest, use the [4π†]–[8π†] buttons. (Press the button once to select the rest value, and once again to actually enter it.) A rest having specified note length will be entered. 7 Play the C4 key. 8 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the Song. 8 9 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to hear the newly entered notes. 10 CAUTION Using, Creating and Editing Songs The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 67). Move the cursor to the beginning of the Song. Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button during recording. 150 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 9 11 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display. If you want, you can also edit already recorded Songs in the same manner (page 158). Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 67). Deleting data Mistakenly entered notes can be deleted. 1 Use the [A]/[B] buttons in the STEP RECORD display (page 148) to select the data you want to delete. 2 Press the [J] (DELETE) button to delete the selected data. Recording Your Performance to MIDI About items which can be selected via the [G] [H] [I] buttons in the Step Record display [G] button ........... Determines the velocity (loudness) of the note to be entered. Items Kbd.Vel fff ff f mf mp p pp ppp Velocity to be recorded Actual velocity you play the keyboard with 127 111 95 79 63 47 31 15 About velocity Velocity is determined by how strongly you play the keyboard. The more strongly you play the keyboard, the higher the velocity value and the louder the sound. The velocity value can be specified within a range from 1 to 127. The higher the velocity value, the louder the sound becomes. [H] button ........... Determines the gate time (note length) of the note to be entered. Items Gate time to be recorded Normal 80% Tenuto 99% Staccato 40% Staccatissimo 20% Manual The gate time (note length) can be set to any desired percentage by using the DATA ENTRY dial. [I] button ............. Determines the note type to be entered. Pressing the button alternately switches the note selectors (at the bottom of the display) among three basic note values: normal, dotted and triplet. Using, Creating and Editing Songs PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 151 Recording Your Performance to MIDI Example 2 The explanations here apply to step 7 of the “Basic Operations for Step Recording” on page 148. 2–5 Since the music score displayed on the instrument is generated from the recorded MIDI data, it may not appear exactly the same as shown here. 6–8 10–13 14–16 9 1 * The numbers shown in the sheet correspond to the following operation step numbers. In this example, keep in mind that one of the steps involves holding down a key on the keyboard while executing the operation. Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display. About the items which can be selected via the [G] [H] [I] buttons See page 151. 1 Press the [G] button to select “ .” 1 2 3 4 Using, Creating and Editing Songs 2 3 4 5 152 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Press the [H] button to select “Tenuto.” Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type. Press the [5π†] button to select the half-note length. While holding F3 on the keyboard, press the [7π†] button. Before you go on to step 6, release the F3 key and the [7π†] button. Recording Your Performance to MIDI 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 After releasing the F3 key, press the [H] button to select “Staccato.” Press the [7π†] button to select the eighth-note length. Play the keys E3, F3, and A3 in order, according to the notation example. Press the [G] button to select “ Press the [H] button to select “Tenuto.” Press the [I] button to select “dotted.” Press the [5π†] button to select the dotted half-note length. Play the A3 key on the keyboard, as specified in the example. Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type. Press the [6π†] button to select the quarter-note length. Play the F3 key on the keyboard, as specified in the example. Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the Song. 17 18 19 18 Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to hear the newly entered notes. Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display. You can also edit the Songs you’ve recorded as necessary (page 158). Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 67). CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 67). PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Using, Creating and Editing Songs 20 .” 153 Recording Your Performance to MIDI Example 3 The explanations here apply to step 7 of the “Basic Operations for Step Recording” on page 148. Since the music score displayed on the instrument is generated from the recorded MIDI data, it may not appear exactly the same as shown here. 1–4 5 6 7 * The numbers shown in the sheet correspond to the following operation step numbers. In this example, keep in mind that one of the steps involves holding down a key on the keyboard while executing the entire operations. Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display. About the items which can be selected via the [G] [H] [I] buttons See page 151. 1 Press the [H] button to select “Normal.” 1 2 3 Using, Creating and Editing Songs 2 3 4 154 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type. Press the [7π†] button to select the eighth note. While holding C3 key on the keyboard, press the [7π†] button. Do not release the C3 key yet. Keep holding it while executing the following steps. Recording Your Performance to MIDI 5 6 7 9 10 11 While holding the C3, E3 and G3 keys on the keyboard, press the [7π†] button. Do not release the C3, E3 and G3 keys yet. Keep holding them while executing the following steps. While holding the C3, E3, G3 and C4 keys on the keyboard, press the [7π†] button, and successively press the [5π†] button. After you press the [5π†] button, release the keys. Using, Creating and Editing Songs 8 While holding the C3 and E3 keys on the keyboard, press the [7π†] button. Do not release the C3 and E3 keys yet. Keep holding them while executing the following steps. Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the Song. Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to hear the newly entered notes. Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display. If you want, you can also edit already recorded Songs in the same manner (page 158). CAUTION Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 67). The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 67). PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 155 Recording Your Performance to MIDI Recording Chords You can record Chords and Sections (Intro, Main, Ending, and so on) one at a time with precise timing. These instructions show how to record chord changes using the Step Record function. The explanations here apply to step 7 of the “Basic Operations for Step Recording” on page 148. 1 4 7 MAIN A BREAK MAIN B C F G F 2, 3 G7 5, 6 C 8,9 * The numbers shown in the notation correspond to the following operation step numbers. 1 Make sure the STYLE CONTROL [AUTO FILL IN] button is set to OFF, then press the STYLE CONTROL [MAIN VARIATION A] button. 3 C 1 F G 2 Using, Creating and Editing Songs 2 3 4 Press the [5π†] button to select the half-note length. Play the chords C, F and G in the chord section of the keyboard. Press the STYLE CONTROL [BREAK] button. 6 G7 4 5 156 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual F Recording Your Performance to MIDI 5 6 7 Press the [6π†] button to select the quarter-note length. Play the chords F, and G7 in the chord section of the keyboard Press the STYLE CONTROL [MAIN VARIATION B] button. 7 9 C 8 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Press the [4π†] button to select the whole-note length. Play the chord C in the chord section of the keyboard. CAUTION Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the Song. Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to hear the newly entered notes. Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display. If you want, you can also edit already recorded Songs in the same manner (page 158). Press the [F] (EXPAND) button to convert the input chord change data into the Song data. Deleting data Mistakenly entered notes can be deleted (page 150). Entering fill-ins Turn the STYLE CONTROL [AUTO FILL IN] button to ON, and simply press one of the STYLE CONTROL [MAIN VARIATION (A, B, C, D)] buttons. (The appropriate fill-in section plays and then automatically goes to the selected [MAIN VARIATION (A, B, C, D)] pattern playback.) PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Using, Creating and Editing Songs Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 67). The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 67). 157 Recording Your Performance to MIDI Editing a Recorded Song You can edit the Songs you’ve recorded with any recording method — Quick Recording, Multi Track Recording, or Step Recording. Basic Editing Operation 1 2 3 Using, Creating and Editing Songs 4 Select a Song for editing. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU Press the [A] button to call up the SONG CREATOR display to record or edit Songs. Select the appropriate tab by using the TAB [√][®] buttons and edit the Song. • Re-Recording a Specific Section — Punch In/Out (REC MODE) .............................................. page 159 This lets you re-record a specific section of a Song. • Editing Channel Events (CHANNEL) .................................... page 160 This lets you edit the channel events. For example, you can delete data or transpose notes by channel. • Editing Note or Chord Events (CHORD, 1–16) .................... page 163 This lets you change or delete the recorded notes or chords. • Editing System Event (SYS/EX.) ........................................... page 165 This lets you change the tempo or the time signature. • Editing Lyrics (LYRICS).......................................................... page 166 This lets you change the Song name or lyrics events. 158 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Recording Your Performance to MIDI Re-Recording a Specific Section — Punch In/ Out (REC MODE) When re-recording a specific section of an already-recorded Song, use the Punch IN/OUT function. In this method, only the data between the Punch In point and the Punch Out point is overwritten with the newly recorded data. Keep in mind that the notes before and after the Punch In/Out points are not recorded over, although you will hear them play back normally to guide you in the Punch In/Out timing. You can specify the Punch In and Punch Out points as measure numbers beforehand for automatic operation, or manually execute the Punch In/Out recording by using a Foot Pedal or simply by playing the keyboard. The explanations here apply to the REC MODE display in step 4 of the “Basic Editing Operation” on page 158. 1 2 3 4 Use the [1π†]–[6π†] buttons to determine the settings for rerecording (see below). While holding the SONG [REC] button, press the desired track button. Press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback. Play the keyboard at the Punch In point and stop recording at the Punch Out point. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 67). ■ PUNCH IN settings Overwrite recording starts when pressing the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button or when you play the keyboard in the Synchro Standby mode. FIRST KEY ON The Song plays back normally, then starts overwrite recording as soon as you play the keyboard. PUNCH IN AT The Song plays back normally up to the beginning of the indicated Punch In measure, then starts overwrite recording at that point. You can set the Punch In measure by pressing the [3π†] button. Using, Creating and Editing Songs NORMAL CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 67). ■ PUNCH OUT settings REPLACE ALL This deletes all data after the point at which recording is stopped. PUNCH OUT The Song position at which recording is stopped is regarded as the Punch Out point. This setting maintains all data after the point at which recording is stopped. PUNCH OUT AT Actual overwrite recording continues until the beginning of the specified Punch Out measure (set with the corresponding display button), at which point recording stops and normal playback continues. This setting maintains all data after the point at which recording is stopped. You can set the Punch Out measure by pressing the [6π†] buttons. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 159 Recording Your Performance to MIDI Examples of re-recording with various Punch In/Out settings This instrument features several different ways you use the Punch In/Out function. The illustrations below indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures in an eight-measure phrase are re-recorded. PUNCH IN setting PUNCH OUT setting Original data 1 2 Start overwrite recording NORMAL REPLACE ALL 1 3 4 5 *1 2 Stop recording 3 4 1 NORMAL PUNCH OUT AT=006 2 1 2 FIRST KEY ON REPLACE ALL 1 2 Play back (Original data) FIRST KEY ON PUNCH OUT 1 FIRST KEY ON PUNCH OUT AT=006 2 Play back (Original data) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Stop overwrite recording/Play original data 3 4 5 Play the keyboard to start overwrite recording 3 4 4 4 8 7 8 Stop recording *2 5 6 Stop overwrite recording/Play original data Play the keyboard to start overwrite recording 3 7 5 Play the keyboard to start overwrite recording 3 6 Stop recording *2 5 6 7 8 7 8 Stop recording *2 Play back (Original data) PUNCH IN AT=003 REPLACE ALL 8 Stop recording *2 Start overwrite recording *1 Play back (Original data) 7 *2 5 Start overwrite recording *1 NORMAL PUNCH OUT 6 Start overwrite recording 1 2 3 4 5 Stop recording *2 Play back (Original data) PUNCH IN AT=003 PUNCH OUT Start overwrite recording 1 PUNCH IN AT=003 PUNCH OUT AT=006 2 3 4 5 6 Stop overwrite recording/Play original data Play back (Original data) Start overwrite recording 1 2 3 4 5 6 *1 To avoid overwriting measures 1-2, start recording from measure 3 *2 To stop recording, press the [REC] button at the end of measure 5. 7 8 Previously recorded data Newly recorded data Deleted data Pedal Punch In/Out operation may be reversed depending on the particular pedal you've connected to the instrument. If necessary, change the pedal polarity to reverse the control (page 168). ■ Pedal Punch In/Out settings When this is set to ON, you can use the Foot Pedal 2 to control the punch-in and punch-out points. While a Song is playing back, pressing (and holding) the Foot Pedal 2 instantly enables Punch In recording, while releasing the pedal stops recording (Punch Out).You can press and release the Foot Pedal 2 as often as you want during playback, to punch in/out of overwrite recording. Note that the current function assignment of the Foot Pedal 2 is cancelled when the Pedal Punch In/Out function is set to ON. Using, Creating and Editing Songs Editing Channel Events (CHANNEL) The explanations here apply to the CHANNEL tab display in the step 4 of the Basic Editing Operation on page 158. 1 2 CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 67). 160 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 3 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the Edit menu (page 161). Use the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to edit the data. For information on the available parameters, see page 161. Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the operation for the current display. After the operation (with the exception of the SETUP menu display) is completed, this button changes to “UNDO”, letting you restore the original data if you are not satisfied with the Operation results. The Undo function only has one level; only the immediate operation can be undone. Recording Your Performance to MIDI 4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 67). ■ QUANTIZE menu The Quantize function allows you to align the timing of all the notes in a channel. For example, if you record the musical phrase shown at right, you may not play it with absolute precision, and your performance may have been slightly ahead of or behind the precise timing. Quantize is a convenient way of correcting for this. CHANNEL Determines the channel in the Song to be quantized. SIZE Selects the quantize size (resolution). For optimum results, you should set the Quantize size to the shortest note value in the channel. For example, if eighth notes are the shortest in the channel, you should use eighth note as the Quantize size. About Quantize size (resolution) The Quantize size or resolution is the number of clocks per quarter note. After eighth note quantization Settings quarter note eighth note sixteenth note thirty-second note sixteenth note + eighth note triplet* quarter note triplet eighth note triplet sixteenth note triplet eighth note + eighth note triplet* sixteenth note + sixteenth triplet* The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally convenient, since they allow you to quantize two different note values at the same time. For example, when the straight eighth notes and eighth notes triplet are contained in the same channel, if you quantize by the straight eighth notes, all notes in the channel are quantized to straight eighth notes — completely eliminating any triplet feel. However, if you use the eighth note + eighth note triplet setting, both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly. STRENGTH Using, Creating and Editing Songs Determines how strongly the notes will be quantized. A setting of 100% produces exact timing. If a value less than 100% is selected, notes will be moved toward the specified quantization beats according to the specified percentage. Applying less than 100% quantization lets you preserve some of the “human” feel in the recording. Quarter-note length Original data Quantizing strength=100 Quantizing strength=50 ■ Deleting the data of the specified channel (DELETE menu) You can delete the data of the specified channel in the Song. Select the channel whose data to be deleted by using the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons, then press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the operation. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 161 Recording Your Performance to MIDI ■ Mixing (merging) the data of the specified two channels (MIX menu) This function lets you mix the data of the two channels and place the results in a different channel. It also lets you copy the data from one channel to another. SOURCE 1 Selects the channel (1–16) to be mixed. All MIDI events in the selected channel are copied to the destination channel. SOURCE 2 Selects the channel (1–16) to be mixed. Only note events in the selected channel are copied to the destination channel. In addition to the values 1–16, there is a “COPY” setting that allows you to copy the data from Source 1 to the destination channel. If “COPY” is selected here, the data from Source 1 is copied to the destination channel. (The original channel data is maintained.) DESTINATION Selects the channel into which the mix or copy results will be placed. ■ CHANNEL TRANSPOSE menu This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down by a maximum of two octaves in semitone increments. To display the channels 9–16 Press the [F] button to toggle between the two channel displays — Channels 1–8, and Channels 9–16. Transposing to the same value for all channels simultaneously While holding the [G] (ALL CH) button, press one of the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons. SETUP menu The current settings of the Mixing Console (page 84) displays and other panel settings can be recorded to the top position of the Song as the Setup data. The Mixing Console and panel settings recorded here are automatically recalled when the Song starts. ■ Setup recording procedure Using, Creating and Editing Songs 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU → [A] SONG CREATOR → TAB [√][®] CHANNEL → [B] SET UP 2 Use the [1π†]–[7π†] buttons to determine the settings to be automatically called up when the Song starts. SONG Records the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing Console. KEYBOARD VOICE Records the panel settings including the Voice selection of the keyboard parts (RIGHT1, 2, and LEFT) and their on/off status. Panel settings recorded here are same as the ones memorized to the One Touch Setting. This can be recorded at any point in a Song (the other items in this chart can be recorded only to the top position of the Song). SCORE SETTING Records the settings in the Score display. GUIDE SETTING Records the settings of the Guide functions including the Guide ON/OFF setting. LYRICS SETTING Records the settings in the Lyrics display. 3 Checkmark the selected item by pressing the [8π] button. 4 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the SETUP recording operation. CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 67). 162 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 5 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 67). Recording Your Performance to MIDI Editing Note or Chord Events (CHORD, 1–16) The explanations here apply to the CHORD and 1–16 tab displays in step 4 of the Basic Editing Operation on page 158. 1 2 3 When the 1–16 tab display is elected, press the [F] button to select the channel to be edited. Move the cursor to the desired data. To move the cursor up or down ..............................Use the [A]/[B] button. To move the cursor to the top data ..........................Press the [C] button. To move the cursor by Measure/Beat/Clock units ....Use the [1π†]– [3π†] buttons. Edit the data. Editing the data line by line Use the [6π†]–[8π] buttons to cut/copy/paste/insert/delete the events. Editing each parameter of the data 1 Use the [D]/[E] buttons to select the parameter to be edited. 2 Use the [4π†]/[5π†] buttons to edit the parameter value. The DATA ENTRY dial can also be used. To actually enter an edited value, simply move the cursor away from the parameter. To restore the original value, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button before move the cursor. 4 5 When the CHORD tab display is selected, press the [F] (EXPAND) button to convert the data into Song data. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 67). Selecting multiple lines of data While holding the [J] (MULTI SELECT) button, press the [A]/[B] buttons. Displaying specific types of event (FILTER) You can select the event types to be displayed in the [CHORD] and [1-16] tab displays. This is convenient, for example, when you wish to have only the note events shown (page 165). CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 67). Chord and Section data recorded with Realtime Recording cannot be indicated and edited on this display. Using, Creating and Editing Songs PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 163 Recording Your Performance to MIDI About Clock A unit of note resolution. The Quantize size is the number of clocks per quarter note. On the PSR-OR700, one clock is equal to 1/1920th of a quarter note. About the events shown in the display 1 2 Example 3 001 : 1 : 1440 Beat Clock Measure number (BAR) 1 Indicates the location (position) of the corresponding event. Same as the indication at the lower left of the display. 2 Indicates the event types (see below). 3 Indicates the event values. Using, Creating and Editing Songs Event types shown on the 1–16 tab display Note The individual note of a Song. Includes the note number which corresponds to the key which was played, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played, and the gate time value (the length of a note). Ctrl (Control Change) Settings to control the Voice, such as volume, pan, filter and effect depth (edited via the Mixing Console described on page 84), etc. Prog (Program Change) MIDI program change number for selecting a Voice. P.Bnd (Pitch Bend) Data for changing the pitch of a Voice continuously. A.T. (Aftertouch) This event is generated when pressure is applied to a key after the note is played. Event types shown on the CHORD tab display 164 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Style Style Tempo tempo Chord chord root, chord type, on bass chord Sect Accompaniment Style Section (Intro, Main, Fill In, Break, Ending) OnOff On/off status for each part (channel) of the Accompaniment Style CH.Vol Volume for each part (channel) of the Accompaniment Style S.Vol Overall volume of the Accompaniment Style Recording Your Performance to MIDI Displaying Specific Types of Events (FILTER) In the edit displays various types of events are shown. It may sometimes be difficult to pinpoint the ones you want to edit. This is where the Filter function comes in handy. It lets you determine which event types will be shown in the edit displays. 1 2 3 4 Press the [H] (FILTER) button in the edit displays. Select the event type by using the [2π†]–[5π†] buttons. Checkmark (show) or remove the checkmark for the selected item by using the [6π†]/[7π†] buttons. [H](ALL ON) ...............Checkmarks for all event types. [I] (NOTE/CHORD).....Selects only NOTE/CHORD data. [J] (INVERT) ................Reverses the checkmark settings for all boxes. In other words, this enters checkmarks to all boxes that were previously unchecked and vice versa. Press the [EXIT] button to execute the settings. Pressing the [C]–[E] buttons calls up the respective Filter displays as shown below. MAIN .........................Call up the Main Filter display. CTRL CHG .................Call up the Control Change Filter display. STYLE .........................Call up the Accompaniment Style Filter Display. Editing System Exclusive Events (SYS/EX.) The explanations here apply to the [SYS/EX] tab display in step 4 of the Basic Editing Operation on page 158. From this display, you can edit recorded System Exclusive events, which do not belong to a specific channel, such as tempo and beat (time signature). The operations here are basically the same as those in the section “Editing Note or Chord Events” on page 163. System Events Determines the top measure of a Song. Tempo Determines the tempo value. Time (Time Signature) Determines the time signature. Key (Key Signature) Determines the key signature, as well as the major/minor setting, for the music score shown on the display. XGPrm (XG Parameters) Allows you to make various detailed changes to the XG parameters. Refer to the “MIDI Data Format” in the Data List for details. The Data List is available at the Yamaha website. (See page 5.) SysEx (System Exclusive) Displays the System Exclusive data in the Song. Keep in mind that you cannot create new data or change the contents of the data here; however, you can delete, cut, copy, and paste the data. Meta (Meta Event) Displays the SMF meta events in the Song. Keep in mind that you cannot create new data or change the contents of the data here; however, you can delete, cut, copy, and paste the data. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 67). Using, Creating and Editing Songs ScBar (Score Start Bar) CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 67). PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 165 Recording Your Performance to MIDI Editing Lyrics (LYRICS) The explanations here apply to the LYRICS tab display in step 4 of the Basic Editing Operation on page 158. From this display, you can edit the recorded Lyrics events. The operations here are basically the same as in the section “Editing Note or Chord Events” on page 163. Lyrics Events Name Allows you to enter the Song name. Lyrics Allows you to enter lyrics. Codes CR Enters a line break in the lyrics text. LF Unavailable on the instrument. On some MIDI devices, this event may delete the currently displayed lyrics and display the next set of lyrics. Inputting and Editing Lyrics CAUTION Using, Creating and Editing Songs The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 67). 166 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 1 Use the [4π†]/[5π†](DATA ENTRY) buttons to call up the lyrics editing display. Operations are the same as in the section “Entering Characters” (page 71). 2 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 67). Using Your Instrument with Other Devices P. 172 P. 171 P. 171 6 5 4 TO DEVICE 1 P. 167 2 USB TO HOST P. 168 3 MIDI IN FOOT PEDAL 1 OUT 2 P. 167 CAUTION Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power of all the components. Also, before turning any components on or off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may occur. When these are connected, you can use the instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume of the sound output to the external device. Connect the instrument’s OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks (standard phone jacks) and the input jacks of a pair of powered speakers using appropriate audio cables. Use only the [L/L+R] jack for connection with a monaural device. Instrument Powered speakers Connecting Audio Devices n Use audio cables and adaptor plugs having no (zero) resistance. Input jack Phone plug (standard) Using External Audio Devices for Playback (1 [OUTPUT] jacks) You can connect these jacks to a stereo system to amplify the instrument’s sound. Use audio cables for connection as shown in the diagrams. These jacks are located on the underside jacks panel of the instrument. CAUTION • When the instrument’s sound is output to an external device, first turn on the power to the instrument, then to the external device. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. • Do not route the output from the [OUTPUT] jacks to the [AUX IN] jacks. If you make this connection, the signal input at the [AUX IN] jacks is output from the [OUTPUT] jacks. These connections could result in a feedback loop that will make normal performance impossible, and may even damage both pieces of equipment. Phone plug (standard) Audio cable Playing External Audio Devices with the Built-in Speakers (2 [AUX IN] jacks) The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected to these jacks, allowing the sound of an external instrument to be reproduced via the instrument’s speakers. Connect the output jacks (LINE OUT etc.) of an external synthesizer or the tone generator module and the instrument’s AUX IN [L/L+R]/[R] jacks using appropriate audio cables. Instrument Synthesizer Tone generator LINE OUT Phone plug (standard) Using Your Instrument with Other Devices Pin plug Audio cable CAUTION When the sound of an external device is output to the instrument, first turn on the power to the external device, then to the instrument. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. n • Use only the [L/L+R] jack for connection with a monaural device. • The instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] setting affects the input signal from the [AUX IN] jacks. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 167 Connecting Audio Devices Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller (3 [FOOT PEDAL 1/2] jacks) Assigning Specific Functions to Each Foot Pedal Two FOOT PEDAL jacks can be used via the following functions at the initial default setting (factory setting). • FOOT PEDAL 1 jack Plug an optional Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch into this jack and use it to switch sustain on and off. The footswitch functions like the damper pedal on a piano — press for sustain, release for normal sound. • FOOT PEDAL 2 jack Plug an optional Yamaha FC7 foot controller into this jack and use it to change the volume as you play the instrument (expression function). FOOT PEDAL 1 2 The functions assigned by default to the connected footswitch or foot controller can be changed — for example, letting you use the footswitch to start/stop Style playback, or use the foot controller to produce pitch bends. 1 Foot Pedals 2 Footswitch FC4 (optional) Footswitch FC5 (optional) Foot Controller FC7 (optional) CAUTION Make sure to connect or disconnect the pedal only when the power is off. 3 4 5 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [√][®] FOOT PEDAL Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select one of the two foot pedals to which the function is to be assigned. π†] button to select the functions to Use the [1π be assigned to the pedal specified in step 2. Details on the pedal functions are listed below. π†]–[8π π†] buttons to set the Use the [2π details of the selected functions. The available parameters differ depending on the function selected in step 3. Details on the parameters are given on page 169. Check that the desired function is controllable with the pedal by actually pressing the pedal. n When you use the pedals to switch Registration Memory settings (page 134), these settings are invalid. Set the polarity of the pedal Using Your Instrument with Other Devices Pedal on/off operation may differ depending on the particular pedal you’ve connected to the instrument. For example, pressing down on one pedal may turn the selected function on, while pressing a different make/brand of pedal may turn the function off. If necessary, use this setting to reverse the control. Press the [I] (PEDAL POLARITY) button to switch the polarity. 168 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Connecting Audio Devices Details on the pedal functions are listed here. For functions indicated with “ “, use only the foot controller; proper * operation cannot be done with a footswitch. Assignable Pedal Functions Allows you to use a foot controller to control the volume. SUSTAIN Allows you to use a pedal to control the sustain. When you press and hold the pedal, all notes played on the keyboard have a longer sustain. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes. SOSTENUTO Allows you to use a pedal to control the Sostenuto effect. If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the pedal while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as the pedal is held. However, all subsequent notes will not sustain. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played staccato. SOFT Allows you to use a pedal to control the Soft effect. Pressing this pedal reduces the volume and changes the timbre of the notes you play. This is effective only for certain appropriate Voices. GLIDE When the pedal is pressed, the pitch changes, and then returns to normal pitch when the pedal is released. PORTAMENTO The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while the pedal is pressed. Portamento is produced when notes are played legato style (i.e., a note is played while the preceding note is still held). Portamento Time can also be adjusted from the Mixing Console (page 86). This function does not affect certain Natural Voices, which would not sound appropriately with this function. PITCH BEND* Allows you to bend the pitch of notes up or down by using the pedal. MODULATION* Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. The effect becomes deeper when pressing down the foot controller. You can turn this function on/off for each keyboard part on this display. DSP VARIATION Switches Voice Effect DSP VARIATION on and off. HARMONY/ECHO Switches the HARMONY/ECHO Voice Effect on and off. SCORE PAGE+ While the song is stopped, you can turn to the next score page. SCORE PAGE– While the song is stopped, you can turn to the previous score page. LYRICS PAGE+ While the song is stopped, you can turn to the next lyrics page. LYRICS PAGE– While the song is stopped, you can return to the last lyrics page. SONG PLAY/PAUSE Same as the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button. STYLE START/STOP Same as the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button. TAP TEMPO Same as the [TAP TEMPO] button. SYNCHRO START Same as the [SYNC START] button. SYNCHRO STOP Same as the [SYNC STOP] button. INTRO1–3 Same as the [INTRO I-III] buttons. MAIN A–D Same as the [MAIN VARIATION A-D] buttons. FILL DOWN Plays a fill-in, which is automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate left. FILL SELF Plays a fill-in. FILL BREAK Plays a break. FILL UP Plays a fill-in, which is automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate right. ENDING1–3 Same as the [ENDING/rit. I-III] buttons. FADE IN/OUT Same as the [FADE IN/OUT] button. FINGERED/FING ON BASS The pedal alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes (page 103). PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Using Your Instrument with Other Devices VOLUME* 169 Connecting Audio Devices BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed, the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held even if the chord is changed during Style playback. If the fingering is set to “AI FULL KEYBOARD,” the function does not work. PERCUSSION The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the [4π†]–[8π†] buttons. You can use the keyboard to select the desired percussion instrument. RIGHT1 ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 1] button. RIGHT2 ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 2] button. LEFT ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button. OTS+ Calls up the next One Touch Setting. OTS– Calls up the previous One Touch Setting. n The Sostenuto and Portamento functions will not affect the Organ Flute Voices, even if they have been assigned to the Foot Pedals. Adjustable Parameters for Each Function The parameters below correspond to buttons [2π†]–[8π†], and their availability depends on the selected control type. For example, if SUSTAIN is selected as the type, the parameters “HALF PEDAL POINT,” “RIGHT 1,” “RIGHT 2” and “LEFT” automatically appear in the display. These specify the part(s) that will be affected by the pedal. UP/DOWN When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines whether the pitch change is raised or lowered. RANGE When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines the range of the pitch change, in semitones. Linked to the Mixing Console → Pitch Bend Range (page 86) setting. ON SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is pressed. OFF SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is released. KIT When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all available drum kits are shown here, letting you select the particular drum kit used for the pedal. PERCUSSION When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all sounds of the selected drum kit (in KIT above) are shown here. This determines the particular instrument sound assigned to the pedal. Using Your Instrument with Other Devices SONG, STYLE, M.PAD, LEFT, RIGHT1, RIGHT2 170 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Connecting to a computer and USB device Connecting External MIDI Devices (4 [MIDI] terminals) Use the built-in [MIDI] terminals and standard MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices. MIDI IN OUT MIDI IN Receives MIDI messages from an external MIDI device. MIDI OUT Transmits MIDI messages generated by the instrument. For a general overview of MIDI and how you can effectively use it, refer to the following sections: • What is MIDI?..............................................page 174 • What You Can Do With MIDI.......................page 176 • MIDI Settings ...............................................page 177 (This explanation is divided into two parts, covering the two connections: connection to the [USB TO HOST] terminal and connection to the [MIDI] terminal.) • Connecting to the [USB TO HOST] terminal When connecting the instrument to the computer via USB, use a standard USB cable (having the USB logo) to connect the [USB TO HOST] terminal on the instrument to the USB terminal of the computer. Then, install the USB-MIDI driver. USB cable Instrument n About the [USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE] terminals There are two different types of USB terminals on the instrument: [USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE]. Take care not to confuse the two terminals and the corresponding cable connectors. Be careful to connect the proper plug in the proper direction. Explanations on the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal follow in the next section. CAUTION Connecting to a computer and USB device TO DEVICE 6 USB TO HOST 5 Connecting a Computer (4 [MIDI] and 5 [USB TO HOST] terminals) By connecting a computer to the [USB TO HOST] or [MIDI] terminals, you can transfer data between the instrument and the computer via MIDI, and take advantage of sophisticated computer music programs. Keep in mind that you also need to install an appropriate USBMIDI driver. The instructions below explain how to connect and use the terminals. n If you are using a computer that has a USB interface, we recommend that you connect the computer and the instrument by USB, rather than by MIDI. Driver A driver is software that provides a data-transfer interface between the computer’s operating system and a connected hardware device. You need to install a USB-MIDI driver to connect the computer and the instrument. Refer to the separate Installation Guide (page 4). n • The instrument will begin transmission a short time after the USB connection is made. • When using a USB cable to connect the instrument to your computer, make the connection directly without passing through a USB hub. • For information on setting up your sequence software, refer to the owner’s manual of the relevant software. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Using Your Instrument with Other Devices n Precautions when using the [USB TO HOST] terminal When connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, turn the power to the instrument off and restart the computer. • Before connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby), and quit any open application software, also turns off the power to the instrument. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument off or unplugging the USB cable to/from the instrument/ computer. - Quit any open application software on the computer. - Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a song.) • While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: When turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. 171 Connecting to a computer and USB device • Connection by [MIDI] terminals There are two ways to connect the instrument via MIDI to a computer. If you have a MIDI interface built into your computer, connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the computer interface to the [MIDI IN] terminal of the instrument, and connect the [MIDI OUT] terminal of the instrument to the MIDI IN terminal of the interface. MIDI cable [MIDI IN] [MIDI OUT] terminal terminal Computer with MIDI interface installed The second connection possibility involves a separate, external MIDI interface connected to the computer via a USB port or a serial port (modem or printer terminal). Using standard MIDI cables, connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the external interface to the [MIDI IN] terminal of the instrument, and connect the [MIDI OUT] terminal of the instrument to the MIDI IN terminal of the interface. MIDI cable [MIDI IN] terminal USB port or serial port (modem or printer terminal) MIDI interface 2 Connect the USB storage device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal with a standard USB cable. After that, exit once from the selection display then return to the display (or press the Tab switch buttons [√] and [®] simultaneously from the selection display). The USB tabs (USB 1, USB 2, etc.) are automatically called up, allowing you to save files and play back music data from the devices. n Checking remaining memory on the USB storage device You can check this in the display called up by the following operation: [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√][®] MEDIA Select the device by using the [A]/[B] buttons in this display and press [F] (PROPERTY). n [MIDI OUT] terminal Instrument This type is used to connect the instrument to a USB storage device, and allows you to save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device. The following description generally explains about how to connect and use them. Before using a USB storage device, be sure to read “Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/Floppy Disk, etc)” on page 23. 1 [MIDI OUT] [MIDI IN] terminal terminal Instrument Using USB Storage Devices Computer n Make sure to use the appropriate MIDI interface for your computer. Even with a computer connected to the [USB TO HOST] terminal and a USB storage device connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, you cannot access the USB storage device from the computer via the instrument. Formatting USB storage media For details, see page 66. CAUTION Connecting to a USB Storage Device (6 via the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal) By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device with a standard USB cable, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device. n Using Your Instrument with Other Devices About the [USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE] terminals There are two different types of USB terminals on the instrument: [USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE]. Take care not to confuse the two terminals and the corresponding cable connectors. Be careful to connect the proper plug in the proper direction. Explanations on the [USB TO HOST] terminal can be found in the previous section. 172 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Proceed with caution. Connecting to a computer and USB device Backing up your data to a computer ■ Backing up the instrument data to a computer Once you’ve saved data to a USB storage device, you can copy the data to the hard disk of your computer, then archive and organize the files as desired. Simply reconnect the device as shown below. Saves internal data to a USB storage device. Computer USB storage device USB TO DEVICE terminal Copying files from a computer hard disk to a USB storage device Files contained on the hard disk of a computer can be transferred to the instrument by first copying them to the storage media, then connecting the storage device to the instrument. Not only files created on the instrument itself but also Standard MIDI files and Style File-formatted Style files created on other devices can be copied to a USB storage device from the hard disk of the computer. Once you’ve copied the data, connect the device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal of the instrument, and play back the data on the instrument. Copying the files of the hard disk of the computer to the USB storage device Instrument USB storage device Computer Disconnect the USB storage device from the instrument and connect it to the computer Backing up data to a computer and organizing files/folders Instrument Disconnect the USB storage device from the computer and connect it to the instrument USB storage device Computer Reading files on the USB storage device from the instrument Instrument Computer USB storage device [USB TO DEVICE] terminal Instrument Using Your Instrument with Other Devices PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 173 What is MIDI? What is MIDI? Put simply, MIDI is a data transfer standard that allows easy and comprehensive control among electronic/digital music instruments and other devices. To get a better idea of what MIDI does, let’s first consider acoustic instruments, such as a grand piano and a classical guitar. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note? Recording and play back the performance of a digital instrument (MIDI data) Recording Playback USB storage device USB storage device Controller (keyboard, etc.) Tone Generator Sequencer Acoustic guitar note production Digital instrument note production n Internal amp L Tone generator (Electric circuit) Internal amp R Playing the key board Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound. Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampled note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers. As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampled note (previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on information received from the keyboard. In the case of digital instruments, the audio signals are sent through output jacks (such as [AUX OUT]) on the instrument. The “controller” and “tone generator” in the illustration above are equivalent to the piano in our acoustic example. Here, the player’s performance on the keyboard is captured as MIDI song data (see illustration below). In order to record the audio performance on an acoustic piano, special recording equipment is needed. However, since the PSR-OR700 features a built-in sequencer that lets you record performance data, this recording equipment is unnecessary. Instead, your digital instrument allows you to both record and play back the data. Tone generator Now, let’s examine what happens when we playback a recording. When you play back a music CD (for example, a solo piano recording), you’re hearing the actual sound (vibration in air) of the acoustic instrument. This is called audio data, to distinguish it from MIDI data. Recording and playing back the performance of an acoustic instrument (audio data) Recording Playback Using Your Instrument with Other Devices In the above example, the actual acoustic sounds of the pianist’s performance are captured in the recording as audio data, and this is recorded to CD. When you play back that CD on your audio system, you can hear the actual piano performance. The piano itself is not necessary, since the recording contains the actual sounds of the piano, and your speakers reproduce them. 174 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Sequencer Keyboard performance (MIDI data) However, we also need a sound source to produce the audio, which eventually comes from your speakers. The tone generator of the instrument fills this function. The recorded performance is reproduced by the sequencer, playing back the song data, using a tone generator capable of accurately producing various instrument sounds — including that of a piano. Looked at in another way, the relation of the sequencer and the tone generator is similar to that of the pianist and the piano — one plays the other. Since digital instruments handle playback data and the actual sounds independently, we can hear our piano performance played by another instrument, such as guitar or violin. n Even though it is a single musical instrument, the PSR-OR700 can be thought of as containing several electronic components: a controller, a tone generator, and a sequencer. What is MIDI? Finally, we’ll take a look at the actual data that gets recorded and that serves as the basis for playing the sounds. For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the instrument’s keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed” and “when was it released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis for sound generation, the tone generator plays the stored sampled note. Example Keyboard Data Voice number (with what voice) 01 (grand piano) Note number (with which key) 60 (C3) Note on (when was it pressed) and note off (when was it released) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note) Velocity (strength at which it was played) 120 (strong) Panel operations on the instrument, such as playing the keyboard and selecting voices, are processed and stored as MIDI data. The auto accompaniment Styles and Songs also consist of MIDI data. MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages. The instrument can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and various types of controller data. The instrument can be controlled by incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine the tone generator mode, select MIDI channels, voices and effects, change parameter values and of course play the voices specified for the various parts. n MIDI data has the following advantages over audio data: • The amount of data is much less. • The data can be effectively and easily edited, even to the point of changing voices and transforming the data. Message Name Operation/Panel Setting Note ON/OFF Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played. Program Change For selecting Voices (with control change bank select MSB/LSB settings) Control Change Volume, panpot (Mixing Console), MODULATION Wheel operation etc. Pitch Bend PITCH BEND Wheel operation n The performance data of all Songs and Styles is handled as MIDI data. MIDI Channels MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1–16, the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable. Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts over a specific channel. Your home TV set receives many different programs simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired program. Weather report NEWS 1 2 NEWS 2 MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a specific MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will sound according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument. MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System messages. MIDI cable Using Your Instrument with Other Devices MIDI Transmit channel 2 MIDI Receive channel 2 Channel Messages The PSR-OR700 is an electronic instrument that can handle 16 MIDI channels (or reception of 32 channels for MIDI data reception when using the [USB] terminal). This is usually expressed as “it can play 16 instruments at the same time.” Channel messages transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the 16 channels. n The instrument’s keyboard and internal tone generator are also connected by MIDI. → LOCAL CONTROL (page 180) For example, several parts or channels can be transmitted simultaneously, including the Style data (as shown on the next page). PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 175 What is MIDI? Example: Recording a performance with the auto accompaniment (Style playback) sound of the instrument to an external sequencer ■ Controlling from an external MIDI keyboard MIDI receive MIDI IN MIDI OUT Instrument MIDI cable PSR-OR700 track (channel) External sequencer RIGHT 1 RIGHT 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Track 2 LEFT STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track 6 STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9 Channel 10 Channel 11 Track 7 Track 8 Track 9 Track 10 Track 11 As you can see, it is essential to determine which data is to be sent over which MIDI channel when transmitting MIDI data (page 180). The instrument also allows you to determine how the received data is played back (page 181). MIDI Data Compatibility This section covers basic information on data compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data recorded by PSR-OR700, and whether or not the PSR-OR700 can playback commercially available song data or song data created for other instruments or on a computer. Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to play back the data without any problem, or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back. If you run into problems playing back data, please refer to the information below. Sequence Formats System Messages This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. These include System Exclusive messages for transferring data unique to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime messages for controlling the MIDI device. Message Name Operation/Panel Setting System Exclusive Message Effect type settings (Mixing Console), etc. Realtime Messages Clock setting, Start/stop operation The messages transmitted/received by the PSR-OR700 are shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart in the Data List. The Data List is available at the Yamaha website. (See page 5.) What You Can Do With MIDI Using Your Instrument with Other Devices ■ Record your performance data (1–16 channels) using the auto accompaniment features on an external sequencer (or computer with sequencer software). After recording, edit the data with the sequencer, then play it back on the instrument. MIDI receive MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI IN Instrument MIDI transmit Computer or Sequencer When you want to use the instrument as an XG-compatible multi-timbral tone generator, set the receive part for MIDI channels 1-16 to “SONG” in MIDI/USB 1 in MIDI Receive (page 181). 176 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Song data is recorded and stored in a variety of different systems, referred to as “sequence formats.” Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the Song data matches that of the MIDI device. The PSR-OR700 is compatible with the following formats. ● SMF (Standard MIDI file) This is the most common sequence format. Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two types: Format 0 or Format 1. Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format 0, and most commercially available software is recorded as Format 0. • The PSR-OR700 is compatible with both Format 0 and Format 1. • Song data recorded on the PSR-OR700 is automatically saved as SMF Format 0. ● ESEQ This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PSR-S900/S700 series instruments. This is a common format used with various Yamaha software. • The PSR-OR700 is compatible with ESEQ. ● XF The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) format with greater functionality and openended expandability for the future. The PSR-OR700 is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played. (SMF is the most common format used for MIDI sequence files. The PSR-OR700 is compatible with SMF Formats 0 and 1, and records “song” data using SMF Format 0.) ● Style File The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single unified format. MIDI Settings Voice Allocation Format With MIDI, Voices are assigned to specific numbers, called “program numbers.” The numbering standard (order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice allocation format.” Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allocation format of the song data matches that of the compatible MIDI device used for playback. The PSROR700 is compatible with the following formats. n Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above, the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the specifications of the devices and particular data recording methods. ● GM System Level 1 This is one of the most common voice allocation formats. Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level 1, as is most commercially available software. MIDI Settings In this section, you can make MIDI-related settings for the instrument. The PSR-OR700 gives you a set of ten pre-programmed templates that let you instantly and easily reconfigure the instrument to match your particular MIDI application or external device. Also, you can edit the pre-programmed templates and save up to ten of your original templates to the USER display. You can then save all these original templates as a single file to USB storage devices, in the MIDI SETUP selection display (called up by pressing [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√][®] SYSTEM RESET). Basic Operation 1 Call up the operation (MIDI template selection) display. Function → [I] MIDI ● GM System Level 2 “GM System Level 2” is a standard specification that enhances the original “GM System Level 1” and improves Song data compatibility. It provides for increased polyphony, greater voice selection, expanded voice parameters, and integrated effect processing. ● XG XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. Song data recorded on the PSR-S900/S700 using Voices in the XG category is XG-compatible. 2 ● DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) This voice allocation format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PSR-OR700 series instruments. ● GS GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major enhancement of the GM specifically to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects. 3 To use the pre-programmed templates or to edit them Press the TAB [√] button to select the PRESET display. Press one of the [A]-[J] buttons to select a MIDI template. To use the templates already saved to the USER display or to edit them Press the TAB [®] button to select the USER display. Press one of the [A]-[J] buttons to select a MIDI template. †] (EDIT) butTo edit a template, press the [8† ton to call up the MIDI display for editing. The individual parameters settings are shown for the selected template. Here you can edit each parameter. Using Your Instrument with Other Devices PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 177 MIDI Settings 4 Use the TAB [√][®] buttons to call up the relevant setting display. SYSTEM display MIDI System Settings (page 180) TRANSMIT display MIDI Transmission Settings (page 180) RECEIVE display MIDI Reception Settings (page 181) BASS display Settings for the bass note of chord for Style playback via MIDI reception data (page 182) CHORD DETECT display Settings for the chord type for Style playback via MIDI reception data (page 182) 5 Select the USER tab display to save the data by using the TAB [√][®] buttons (page 67). Using Your Instrument with Other Devices 6 When you’ve finished editing, press the [EXIT] button to return to the MIDI template selection display (PRESET or USER). 178 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual MIDI Settings Pre-Programmed MIDI Templates Template name Description All Parts Transmits all parts including the keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, 2, and LEFT), with the exception of Song parts. KBD & STYLE Basically the same as “All Parts” with the exception of how keyboard parts are managed. The right-hand parts are handled as “UPPER” instead of RIGHT 1 and 2 and the left-hand part is handled as “LOWER.” Master KBD In this setting, the instrument functions as a “master” keyboard, playing and controlling one or more connected tone generators or other devices (such as a computer/ sequencer). Song All transmit channels are set to correspond to Song channels 1–16. This is used to play Song data with an external tone generator and to record Song data to an external sequencer. Clock Ext Playback (Song or Style) synchronizes with an external MIDI clock instead of the instrument’s internal clock. This template should be used when you wish to set the tempo on the MIDI device connected to the instrument. MIDI Accord 1 MIDI accordions allow you to transmit MIDI data and play connected tone generators from the keyboard and bass/chord buttons of the accordion. This template lets you play melodies from the keyboard and control Style playback on the instrument with the lefthand buttons. MIDI Accord 2 Basically the same as “MIDI Accord 1” above, with the exception that the chord/bass notes you play with your left hand on the MIDI Accordion are recognized also as MIDI note events. MIDI Pedal 1 MIDI pedal units allow you play connected tone generators with your feet (especially convenient for playing single note bass parts). This template lets you play/control the chord root in Style playback with a MIDI pedal unit. MIDI Pedal 2 This template lets you play the bass part for Style playback by using a MIDI pedal unit. MIDI OFF No MIDI signals are sent or received. Using Your Instrument with Other Devices PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 179 MIDI Settings SYSTEM display MIDI System Settings The explanations here apply to the SYSTEM display to be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on page 177. ● RECEIVE TRANSPOSE Determines whether or not the instrument’s transpose setting (page 58) is applied to the note events received by the instrument via MIDI. ● START/STOP Determines whether incoming FA (start) and FC (stop) messages affect Song or Style playback. ■ MESSAGE SW ● SYS/EX. The “Tx” setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI System Exclusive messages on or off. The “Rx” setting turns MIDI reception and recognition of MIDI System Exclusive messages generated by external equipment on or off. ■ LOCAL CONTROL Turns the Local Control for each part on or off. When Local Control is set to “ON,” the keyboard of the instrument controls its own (local) internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. If you set Local to “OFF,” the keyboard and controllers are internally disconnected from the instrument’s tone generator section so that no sound is output when you play the keyboard or use the controllers. For example, this allows you to use an external MIDI sequencer to play the instrument’s internal voices, and use the instrument keyboard to record notes to the external sequencer and/or play an external tone generator. ● CHORD SYS/EX. The “Tx” setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord exclusive data (chord detect. root and type) on or off. The “Rx” setting turns MIDI reception and recognition of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external equipment on or off. TRANSMIT display MIDI Transmit Settings The explanations here apply to the TRANSMIT display to be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on page 177. This determines which parts will be sent as MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be sent. ■ Clock setting, etc. Using Your Instrument with Other Devices ● CLOCK Determines whether the instrument is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from an external device. INTERNAL is the normal Clock setting when the instrument is being used alone or as a master keyboard to control external devices. If you are using the instrument with an external sequencer, MIDI computer, or other MIDI device, and you want to synchronize it to that device, set this parameter to the appropriate setting: MIDI, USB 1, or USB 2. In this case, make sure that the external device is connected properly (e.g., to the instrument’s MIDI IN terminal), and that it is properly transmitting a MIDI clock signal. When this is set for control by an external device (MIDI, USB 1 or USB 2), the Tempo is indicated as “Ext.” in the Main display. ● TRANSMIT CLOCK Turns MIDI clock (F8) transmission on or off. When set to OFF, no MIDI clock or Start/Stop data is transmitted even if a Song or Style is played back. 180 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Operation Select the part to be transmitted and the channel via which the selected part will be transmitted. You can also determine the types of data to be sent. ● With the exception of the next two parts, the configuration of the parts is the same as those already explained elsewhere in this manual. • UPPER The keyboard part played on the right side of the keyboard from the Split Point for the Voices (RIGHT1 and/ or 2). • LOWER The keyboard part played on the left side of the keyboard from the Split Point for the Voices. This is not affected by the on/off status of the [ACMP] button. MIDI Settings ● Tx MONITOR The dots corresponding to each channel (1-16) flash briefly whenever any data is transmitted on the channel(s). n When different parts are assigned to the same transmit channel If the same transmit channel is assigned to several different parts, the transmitted MIDI messages are merged to a single channel — resulting in unexpected sounds and possible glitches in the connected MIDI device. n About the protected Songs Write-protected Songs cannot be transmitted even if the proper Song channels 1–16 are set to be transmitted. ■ MIDI messages which can be transmitted or received (recognized) The following MIDI messages can be set on the TRANSMIT/RECEIVE display. • Note (Note events).......................................page 164 • CC (CONTROL CHANGE) ..........................page 164 • PC (PROGRAM CHANGE)...........................page 164 • PB (Pitch Bend)............................................page 164 • AT (Aftertouch).............................................page 164 • KEYBOARD The received note messages control the instrument’s keyboard performance. • EXTRA PART 1-5 There are five parts specially reserved for receiving and playing MIDI data. Normally, these parts are not used by the instrument itself. The PSR-OR700 can be used as a 32-channel multi-timbral tone generator by using these five parts in addition to the general parts. ● Rx MONITOR The dots corresponding to each channel (1–16) flash briefly whenever any data is received on the channel(s). n Parameter Lock You can “lock” specific parameters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.) to make them selectable only via the panel controls (page 133). ■ MIDI transmission/reception via the USB terminal and MIDI terminals The relationship between the [MIDI] terminals and the [USB] terminal which can be used for transmitting/ receiving 32 channels (16 channels x 2 ports) of the MIDI messages is as follows: MIDI reception RECEIVE display MIDI transmission [USB TO HOST] jack [MIDI IN] jack [USB TO [MIDI OUT] jack HOST] jack MIDI Receive Settings Port handling USB1 Merge MIDI/USB1 01–16 USB2 Merge USB2 01–16 MIDI/USB 01–16 The explanations here apply to the RECEIVE display to be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on page 177. This determines which parts will receive MIDI data and over which MIDI channels the data will be received. Operation Using Your Instrument with Other Devices Select the channel to be received and the part via which the selected channel will be received. You can also determine the types of data to be received. ● The PSR-OR700 can receive MIDI messages over 32 channels (16 channels x 2 ports) by USB connection. ● With the exception of the next two parts, the configuration of the parts is the same as those already explained elsewhere in this manual. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 181 MIDI Settings BASS display The operation procedure is basically the same as that of the BASS display. Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback via MIDI Receive The explanations here apply to the BASS display to be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on page 177. These settings let you determine the bass note for Style playback, based on the note messages received via MIDI. The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the bass note of the chord of Style playback. The bass note will be detected regardless of the [ACMP] or split point settings. When several channels are simultaneously set to “ON,” the bass note is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels. Displaying the Voice Program Change Number Determines whether or not the Voice bank and number are shown in the Voice selection display. This is useful when you want to check which bank select MSB/LSB values and program change number you need to specify when selecting the Voice from an external MIDI device. You can set this in the display called up by the following operations: [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY →TAB [√][®] CONFIG 2. Switch the DISPLAY VOICE NUMBER menu ON and OFF. Operation Select the channel and set the “ON/OFF” for that channel. Use the All OFF item to set all channels to OFF. CHORD DETECT display Setting the Chord Type for Style Playback via MIDI Receive Using Your Instrument with Other Devices The explanations here apply to the CHORD DETECT display to be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on page 177. These settings let you determine the chord type for Style playback, based on the note messages received via MIDI. The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the notes for detecting chords in Style playback. The chords to be detected depend on the fingering type. The chord type will be detected regardless of the [ACMP] or split point settings. When several channels are simultaneously set to “ON,” the chord type is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels. 182 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual n • The numbers displayed here start from “1.” Accordingly the actual MIDI program change numbers are one lower, since that number system starts from “0.” • For the GS Voices, this feature is not available (the program change numbers are not shown). Appendix Troubleshooting Overall The instrument does not turn on. • Securely insert the female plug into the socket on the instrument, and the male plug into a proper AC outlet. A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off. • Electrical current is being applied to the instrument. This is normal. Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers. • Noise may be heard if a mobile phone is used near the instrument or if the phone is ringing. Turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from the instrument. The letters in the display cannot be read, because the display is too bright (or dark). • Use the [LCD CONTRAST] knob to adjust for optimum visibility. • Adjust the brightness of the display (page 20). The overall volume is too low, or, no sound is heard. • The master volume may be set too low. Set it to an appropriate level with the [MASTER VOLUME] dial. • All keyboard parts are set to off. Use the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 1]/[RIGHT 2]/[LEFT] button to turn it on. • The volume of the individual parts may be set too low. Raise the volume in the BALANCE display (page 41). • Make sure the desired channel is set to ON (page 105). • Headphones are connected, disabling the speaker output. Unplug the headphones. • The [FADE IN/OUT] button is on, muting the sound. Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button to turn the function off. • Make sure the Local Control function is set to ON (page 180). Not all simultaneously played notes sound. • You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony (page 187) of the instrument. When the maximum polyphony is exceeded, the earliest played notes will stop sounding, letting the latest played notes sound. The keyboard volume is lower than the Song/Style playback volume. • The volume of the keyboard parts may be set too low. Raise the volume in the BALANCE display (page 41). – There is a slight difference in sound quality among different notes played on the keyboard. – Some Voices have a looping sound. – Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher pitches, depending upon the voice. • This is normal and is a result of the instrument’s sampling system. Some Voices will jump an octave in pitch when played in the upper or lower registers. • This is normal. Some voices have a pitch limit which, when reached, causes this type of pitch shift. The Main display does not appear even when turning the power on. • This may occur if a USB storage device has been installed to the instrument. Installation of some USB storage device may result a long interval between turning the power on and appearance of the Main display. To avoid this, turn the power on after disconnecting the device. Files/Folders Some characters of the file/folder name are garbled. • The language settings have been changed. Set the appropriate language for the file/folder name (page 19). An existing file is not shown. • The file extension (.MID, etc.) may have been changed or deleted. Manually rename the file, adding the appropriate extension, on a computer. The data contained in the USB storage device is not shown on the instrument itself. • Data files with names of more than 50 characters cannot be handled by the instrument. Rename the file, reducing the number of characters to 50 or less. Demo How can I stop the demo? • Press the [EXIT] button. Keys do not sound at the proper pitch. • Make sure the Performance Assistant function is off on the operation display (page 44). Appendix Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch. The Scale parameter has probably been set to something other than “Equal,” changing the tuning system of the keyboard. Make sure “Equal” is selected as the Scale in the Scale Tune display (page 99). PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 183 Voice The Voice selected from the Voice Selection display does not sound. • Check whether or not the selected part is turned on (page 78). • To select the Voice for the right-hand key range, press the PART SELECT [RIGHT 1] button. For the Voice to be layered in the right-hand range, press the PART SELECT [RIGHT 2] button. To select the Voice for the left-hand key range, press the PART SELECT [LEFT] button. The sound seems strange or different than expected when changing a rhythm Voice (drum kit, etc.) of the Style or Song from the Mixer. • When changing the rhythm/percussion Voices (drum kits, etc.) of the Style and Song from the VOICE parameter, the detailed settings related to the drum voice are reset, and in some cases you may be unable to restore the original sound. In the case of Song playback, you can restore the original sound by returning to the beginning of the Song and playing back from that point. In the case of Style play, you can restore the original sound by selecting the same Style again. Tremolo/Trill cannot be applied to the Organ Flute Voice. • This is normal; Tremolo and Trill settings in the Harmony/Echo display are not effective for Organ Flute Voices. The Harmony function does not operate. • Harmony cannot be used with the Full Keyboard or AI Full Keyboard fingering modes. Select an appropriate fingering mode (page 104). When a Voice is changed, the previously selected effect is changed. • Each Voice has its own suitable preset settings, which are automatically recalled when the corresponding Voice Set parameters are turned on (page 98). The Voice produces excessive noise. • Certain Voices may produce noise, depending on the Harmonic Content and/or Brightness settings in the FILTER page of the Mixing Console display (page 86). Appendix The sound is distorted or noisy. • The volume may be turned up too high. Make sure all relevant volume settings are appropriate. • This may be caused by certain effects. Try canceling all unnecessary effects, especially distortion-type effects (page 88). • Adjust the sound using the [8π†] (TOTAL GAIN ADJ.) buttons from the display shown in step 6 of “Editing and Saving the selected EQ” (page 91), if you are using the Master EQ. • Some filter resonance settings in the VOICE SET display (page 94) can result in distorted sound. Adjust these settings if necessary. • Noise may occur depending on the settings made in the Filter display of the Mixing Console. Adjust the Harmonic Content or Brightness controls in the Filter display (page 86). 184 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual The sound does not change when replacing Voices with the Song Auto Revoice feature. • Depending on the particular Song data, there are some instances where Song Auto Revoice has no effect, even when replacing Voices. The sound of the Voice doesn’t change, even when editing the Voice. • Keep in mind that adjustments made to the parameters may not make much change in the actual sound depending on the original settings of the Voice. Voices other than those in the Preset display cannot be selected for Step recording. • This is normal. Style Style playback does not start. • Make sure to press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button. • MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL” (page 180). Only the rhythm channel plays. • Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned on; press the [ACMP] button. • You may be playing keys in the right hand range of the keyboard. Make sure to play keys in the chord range of the keyboard. Styles cannot be selected. • If the size of the Style data is large (about 120 KB or greater), the Style cannot be selected because the data is too large to be ready by the instrument. The desired chord is not recognized or output by the auto accompaniment. • You may not be playing the correct keys for indicating the chord. Refer to “Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode” of the Data List. The Data List is available at the Yamaha website. (See page 5.) • You may be playing the keys according to a different fingering mode, and not the one currently selected. Check the accompaniment mode, and play the keys according to the selected mode (page 104). Synchro Stop cannot be turned on. • Synchro Stop cannot be turned on when the fingering mode is set to “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard,” or when the [ACMP] button is set to off. Make sure the fingering mode is set to something besides “Full Keyboard” or “Al Full Keyboard” and set the [ACMP] button to on. Auto accompaniment chords are recognized regardless of the split point or where chords are played on the keyboard. • This is normal if the fingering mode is set to “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard.” If either of these is selected, chords are recognized over the entire range of the keyboard, irrespective of the split point setting. If desired, select a different fingering mode (page 104). When playing back one Style and selecting another, the newly selected Style doesn’t play at the proper Tempo. • You can select whether the appropriate tempo will be called up automatically or not by using the TEMPO parameter in the STYLE CHANGE BEHAVIOR function. Starting a Song while playing back a Style stops Style playback. This is because Song playback has priority. The two ways shown below let you play back a Style and Song simultaneously. • Set the Song to Synchro Start standby, then start the Style. • Start the Style playback after playing back a Song. The level balance of the various Parts becomes wrong or unexpected sounds are output when selecting a Style or a Voice after selecting a Song. • The level balance of the Parts can change and unexpected sounds can be produced because of the effects applied to each Part. The “Off” setting is not shown for the Play Type parameter in the Assembly (Style Creator) feature. • The selected section is set to record enable. Release the recording assignment by pressing the appropriate [1†][8†] button in the recording channel display (TAB [√] button → BASIC tab → [F] REC CH). The channels BASS-PHR2 cannot be edited in Channel Edit. • This is normal; BASS-PHR2 channels of the Preset Styles cannot be edited. Registration memory The Song/Style registered to the Registration Memory cannot be called up. • If the registered Song/Style is contained on USB storage device and the USB storage device is not connected to the instrument, the Song/Style cannot be called up. Connect the appropriate USB storage device containing the Song/Style data. The order for calling up Registration Memory settings is not shown on the Registration Sequence setting display. • The bank containing the Registration has not been selected. Select the appropriate bank (page 132). Song Songs cannot be selected. • This may be because the language settings have been changed. Set the appropriate language for the Song file name. • If the size of the Song data is large (about 300 KB or greater), the Song cannot be selected because the data is too large to be read by the instrument. Song playback does not start. • “New Song” (a blank Song) has been selected. Make sure to select an appropriate Song in the Song Selection display (page 36). • Make sure to press the SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button. • The Song has been stopped at the end of the Song data. Return to the beginning of the Song by pressing the SONG [J] (STOP) button. • In the case a Song to which write-protect has been applied (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the Song name), the original file may not be in the same folder. It cannot be played back unless the original file (showing “Prot.2 Orig” at the upper left of the Song name) is in the same folder. • In case of a Song to which write-protect has been applied (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the Song name), the original file name may have been changed. Rename the file with the original file name (so that “Prot.2 Orig” is shown at the upper left of the Song name). • In case of a Song to which write-protect has been applied (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the Song name), the file icon may have been changed. Songs to which write-protect has been applied cannot be played back when the file icon of the original has been changed. • MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL” (page 180). Appendix When using the Freeze function of the Registration Memory, the On/Off setting of the Left Part does not change even when changing the Registration Memory setting. • The Left Part On/Off setting is included in the Style group. Remove the checkmark from “STYLE” in the Freeze setting display (page 134). Even though a Registration Memory setting containing a User/USB voice is selected, the File Selection display shows a Preset Voice. • This is normal; even with the Preset Voice shown, the actual sounding Voice is the selected User/USB Voice. When a User/USB Voice is saved to the User/USB drive, the actual data is divided into two separate types: 1) the source Preset Voice itself, and 2) the parameter settings as set in the Voice Set. When you recall a Registration Memory setting containing a User/USB Voice, the instrument selects the Preset voice (on which the User/USB Voice is based), then applies the relevant parameter settings to it — so that your original User/USB Voice is sounded. Song playback stops before the Song is finished. • The Guide function is turned on. (In this case, playback is “waiting” for the correct key to be played.) Press the [GUIDE] button to turn off the guide function. PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 185 The Song last selected before turning off the power is no longer available. • If the Song last selected before turning off the power is contained in a USB storage device, you’ll need to reconnect the same USB storage device to call up the Song again. The measure number is different from that of the score in the Song Position display, shown by pressing the [G]/[H] (REW/FF) buttons. • This happens when playing back music data for which a specific, fixed tempo is set. In the AB Repeat function, the B point cannot be set. • The A point has not been set. Set the B point only after setting the A point. When playing back a Song, some channels do not play. • Playback of these channels may be set to “OFF.” Turn playback on for those channels that are set to “OFF” (page 142). A Song to which write-protect has been applied (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the Song name) cannot be moved to an external media such as a SmartMedia card or floppy disk. • A Song to which write-protect has been applied cannot be moved to an external media such as SmartMedia/ floppy disk, etc. Use the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal to move the song to a USB flash memory device connected to this instrument. Guide The melody still plays back, even when specifying Track 1 as the part to be muted for one-handed practice. • A part other than the melody part has been assigned to Track 1. Reassign the channel containing the melody to Track 1 (page 141). Score When displaying the music score, long notes that have been entered, such as whole notes and ties, are not displayed correctly. • Long notes, such as whole notes and ties, may not be shown in the music score display exactly as they were entered. Selecting “Tenuto” by pressing the [H] button before inputting each note in the Step Record display (page 149) may solve the problem. Appendix The tempo, beat, measure and music notation is not displayed correctly. • Some Song data for the instrument has been recorded with special “free tempo” settings. For such Song data, the tempo, beat, measure and music notation will not be displayed correctly. 186 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual The note name partially obscures the note in the display. • When several notes occur close to each other, the note name may obscure the note at left. The music score of the right-hand/left-hand part is not displayed. • The appropriate channels have not been assigned to the right-hand and left-hand parts. Set the Track 1 and Track 2 channels to “AUTO” (page 141). The notation in the display is cut off, with the middle of a measure starting on the next line. • When all the notes of a measure cannot fit on one line, the remaining notes in the measure are carried over to the next line. Dotted notes are indicated as rests. • This is normal; sometimes dotted notes are indicated as rests. Chords are not displayed. • If the selected Song does not contain chord data, chords are not displayed. Lyrics (Karaoke) Lyrics are not displayed. • If the selected Song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are not displayed. Some of the lyrics overlap each other. • This happens for Songs containing many lyrics. Performance assistant technology Performance assistant technology does not work appropriately. • Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop Song playback, then set the [ACMP] and PART ON/OFF [LEFT] to off. Finally, restart the Song. Specifications PSR-OR700 Sound Source AWM Stereo Sampling Keyboard 61 keys (C1–C6 with Initial Touch) Display 320 x 240 dots QVGA B/W LCD Music Score, Lyrics Polyphony (max) 96 360 voices + 480 XG voices 22 Drum/SFX Kits + GM2 + GS voices for GS Song playback Voice Selection Voice MegaVoice 10 Live! Voice 14 Cool! Voice 18 Sweet! Voice 11 Organ Flutes! Voice 10 Regular Voice 297 Voice Editing (Voice Set) Effect Blocks Effects 6 Reverb/Chorus/DSP Reverb: 34 Preset + 3 User Chorus: 29 Preset + 3 User DSP 1: 191 Preset + 3 User DSP 2-4: 106 Preset + 10 User Effect Types Part EQ Accompaniment Styles Pro Styles Session Styles MegaVoice/Style Style Creator Edit 4 for each Style YES YES 5 samples Guide Follow Lights, Any Key, Karao-Key Performance assistant technology YES Quick Recording, Multi Recording, Step Recording, Song Editing Recording Record Channels RAM Capacity 16 300 KB 4 Pads ✕ 80 Banks Preset USB Flash Memory YES Floppy Disk (2HD, 2DD) External Adaptor (via USB TO DEVICE) Hard Disk External Adaptor (via USB TO DEVICE) Flash Memory (Internal) Tempo Range 560 KB External Adaptor (via USB TO DEVICE) Appendix Memory Card (SmartMedia, etc.) 5 - 500, Tap Tempo Metronome Yes Sound Registration Memory 12 120 KB Preset Songs Tempo 302 YES Preset RAM Capacity Memory Device 314 YES OTS Link Multi Pad 28 Parts Single Finger, Fingered, Fingered On Bass, Multi Finger, AI Fingered, Full Keyboard, AI Full Keyboard OTS (One Touch Setting) Song 5 Preset + 2 User YES Fingering Music Finder YES Reverb/Chorus/DSP Master EQ Accompaniment Style YES Buttons Regist. Sequence / Freeze Bell on/off 8 YES PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 187 PSR-OR700 Demo Language for Display Others Direct Access Transpose Scale Type Computer Connection USB to HOST USB to DEVICE YES Keyboard/Song/Master 9 YES YES VOLUME, SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, SOFT, GLIDE, PORTAMENTO, PITCHBEND, MODULATION, DSP VARIATION, SONG PLAY/PAUSE, STYLE START/STOP, etc. Pedal Functions Amplifiers 12 W ✕ 2 Speakers (12 cm + 5 cm) ✕ 2 Power Consumption 35 W Dimensions [W ✕ D ✕ H] 1003 mm ✕ 433 mm ✕ 148 mm (39 5/8" ✕ 17 1/8" ✕ 5 7/8") Weight 11.5 kg (25 lbs., 5 5/8 oz) Headphones Footswitch Foot Controller Optional accessories 5 Languages (English, German, French, Spanish, Italian) PHONES, MIDI (IN, OUT), FOOT PEDAL (1, 2), AUX IN (R, L/L+R), OUTPUT (R, L/L+R), LAN Other Connectors Amplifiers/ Speakers YES HPE-150/HPE-30 FC4/FC5 FC7 Floppy Disk Drive UD-FD01 AC Power Adaptor PA-300 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha Keyboard stand L-6/L-7 (The exterior size of the PSR-OR700 is beyond the limits as described in the L-6 Assembly Instructions. However, we have determined through tests that the stand can be safely used for the instrument.) Appendix * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. 188 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Index Numerics 1–16 .................................................................. 148, 158 A A-B Repeat ................................................................... 42 AI ............................................................................... 104 AI FINGERED ............................................................. 104 AI FULL KEYBOARD .................................................. 104 Any key ...................................................................... 142 ASSEMBLY ................................................................. 119 Auto Accompaniment Feature ...................................... 46 AUTO REVOICE SETUP ............................................... 87 B BALANCE ..................................................................... 41 BASIC ......................................................................... 115 BASS .......................................................................... 182 BAYAT ....................................................................... 100 Brightness ..................................................................... 20 C Chain Playback .......................................................... 138 CHANNEL ......................................................... 123, 158 CHANNEL ON/OFF ................................................... 105 Characters .................................................................... 71 CHORD ............................................................ 148, 158 CHORD DETECT ....................................................... 182 CHORD FINGERING ................................................. 103 Chord Tutor function .................................................... 50 COMMON ................................................................... 93 CONFIG 1 .....................................................35, 48, 105 CONFIG 2 ........................................................... 20, 182 Contrast ........................................................................ 19 CONTROLLER .............................................................. 93 Cool! ............................................................................ 77 COPY ........................................................................... 68 CUT ............................................................................. 69 D Data List ......................................................................... 5 DELETE ........................................................................ 69 Demo ........................................................................... 24 Demo (Voice) ............................................................... 32 [DEMO] button ............................................................ 12 [DIGITAL RECORDING] button ................................... 12 Direct Access ............................................................... 61 DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) ............................... 177 Drums .......................................................................... 77 Effect Return Level ........................................................ 89 Effect Type ................................................................... 88 EFFECT/EQ ................................................................... 95 Entering characters ....................................................... 71 EQ (Equalizer) .............................................................. 86 EQUAL TEMPERAMENT ............................................ 100 ESEQ .......................................................................... 176 EXIT ............................................................................. 65 F Factory Reset ................................................................ 72 Factory-programmed Settings ....................................... 72 FADE IN/OUT (Song) ................................................. 137 FADE IN/OUT (Style) .................................................... 48 Fade In/Out time ........................................................ 137 FADE IN/OUT/HOLD TIME ........................................ 105 Fast forward ............................................................... 138 Favorite ...................................................................... 110 File ............................................................................... 64 File Selection Display ............................................ 27, 66 File Selection Display Basic Operation ......................... 65 File Selection Display Configuration ............................. 64 File/Folder Operations .................................................. 66 FILTER ................................................................. 86, 165 FINGERED ................................................................. 104 FINGERED ON BASS ................................................. 104 Flash Memory .............................................................. 23 Folder ........................................................................... 64 Follow lights ............................................................... 142 FOOT PEDAL ............................................................. 168 FOOTAGE ............................................................. 96, 97 Format .......................................................................... 66 FREEZE ....................................................................... 134 FULL KEYBOARD ...................................................... 104 Function display ........................................................... 28 G GM System Level 1 .................................................... 177 GM System Level 2 .................................................... 177 GROOVE ................................................................... 121 GS .............................................................................. 177 Guide .................................................................. 40, 141 H HARMONY .................................................................. 95 HARMONY/ECHO ....................................................... 82 Headphones ................................................................. 18 Hz ................................................................................ 81 I E ICON ........................................................................... 70 EDIT ........................................................................... 118 Edit (Effect) ................................................................... 89 Edit (EQ) ....................................................................... 91 Edit (Lyrics) ................................................................. 158 Edit (Music Finder) ..................................................... 111 Edit (OTS) ..................................................................... 51 Edit (Song) .................................................................. 158 Edit (Style) .................................................................. 120 Edit (Voice) ................................................................... 92 EFFECT ......................................................................... 86 K PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Appendix Karaoke ........................................................................ 57 Karao-key ................................................................... 142 Keyboard Parts ............................................................. 78 KEYBOARD/PANEL ............................................... 33, 58 KIRNBERGER ............................................................. 100 189 L Language ...................................................................... 19 LCD ............................................................................. 12 Left ............................................................................... 78 Left Hold ...................................................................... 50 Live! ............................................................................. 77 Lyrics .................................................................. 57, 166 M Main Display ......................................................... 26, 62 MASTER TUNE ............................................................. 81 [MASTER VOLUME] dial .............................................. 17 MEAN-TONE ............................................................. 100 MEDIA ........................................................66, 140, 172 MegaVoice ................................................................... 77 MELODIC MINOR ..................................................... 126 Messages ...................................................................... 60 Metronome .................................................................. 34 MIDI .......................................................................... 174 MIDI recording .................................................... 43, 143 MIDI Settings .............................................................. 177 MIDI Templates .......................................................... 179 MIXING CONSOLE ...................................................... 84 Modulation Wheel ....................................................... 34 MULTI FINGER .......................................................... 104 Multi Pad Creator ....................................................... 128 Multi Pads .................................................................... 13 Multi track recording .................................................. 143 Music Finder ................................................................ 55 Music Rest .................................................................... 18 N NAME .......................................................................... 70 Notation ....................................................................... 39 O One Touch Setting ....................................................... 51 One-Handed Practice ................................................... 40 Organ Flutes .......................................................... 77, 96 OTS Link ...................................................................... 51 Owner Name ............................................................... 21 P Appendix PANEL PART ................................................................ 85 PARAMETER .............................................................. 124 Part .............................................................................. 78 PASTE ................................................................... 68, 69 Pause ......................................................................... 138 Pedal polarity ............................................................. 168 percussion sounds ........................................................ 32 performance assistant technology ................................. 44 Phrase Mark ............................................................... 138 Pitch ............................................................................. 81 Pitch Bend Wheel ........................................................ 33 Portamento Time .......................................................... 93 Practice Function ....................................................... 141 PRESET ......................................................................... 27 Pro ............................................................................. 103 PROPERTY ................................................................. 172 Prot. 1 .......................................................................... 68 190 PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual Prot. 2 Edit ................................................................... 68 Prot. 2 Orig .................................................................. 68 PURE MAJOR ............................................................. 100 PURE MINOR ............................................................ 100 PYTHAGOREAN ........................................................ 100 Q QUANTIZE ................................................................ 123 Quick Recording ........................................................ 143 QUICK START ............................................................ 139 R RANDOM .................................................................. 138 RAST .......................................................................... 100 Realtime Recording .................................................... 114 REC MODE ................................................................ 158 RECEIVE ..................................................................... 181 Record ......................................................................... 43 Record (Song) ............................................................. 143 Record (Style) ............................................................. 114 REGISTRATION MEMORY ......................................... 131 REGISTRATION SEQUENCE ...................................... 134 REPEAT MODE ................................................... 37, 138 Repertoire .................................................................... 56 Revoice ........................................................................ 87 Rewind ....................................................................... 138 Right 1 ......................................................................... 78 Right 2 ......................................................................... 78 S SAVE ............................................................................ 67 Save (Music Finder) .................................................... 112 SCALE TUNE ................................................................ 99 Score ............................................................................ 39 Search (Music Finder Records) ................................... 108 Section Set ................................................................. 107 Session ....................................................................... 103 Set the polarity of the pedal ........................................ 168 SFX ............................................................................... 77 SINGLE FINGER ......................................................... 104 SMF (Standard MIDI file) ............................................ 176 Song ...................................................................... 12, 36 SONG CH 1-8/9-16 ..................................................... 85 Song channels ............................................................ 147 SOUND ....................................................................... 94 Sound effects ................................................................ 32 [STANDBY/ON] switch ......................................... 12, 17 Step Recording .................................................. 114, 143 Stop ACMP ................................................................. 106 Style ...................................................................... 12, 46 Style Assembly ........................................................... 114 Style Change Behavior ............................................... 107 Style Creator ............................................................... 114 Style File Format (SFF) ................................................ 176 STYLE PART ........................................................ 85, 147 STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT .................................... 106 Style Structure ............................................................ 114 Style Touch ................................................................ 106 Sweet! .......................................................................... 77 Synchro Start (Song) ................................................... 137 Synchro Start (Style) ...................................................... 48 Synchro Stop ................................................................ 49 Synchro Stop Window ................................................ 106 SYS/EX. ....................................................................... 158 SYSTEM ...................................................................... 180 T Tap function ............................................................... 137 TAP TEMPO ................................................................. 48 Tempo .......................................................................... 34 Time Signature ............................................................. 35 Top ............................................................................ 138 TOUCH ................................................................ 33, 53 TRANSMIT ................................................................. 180 Transpose .............................................................. 58, 81 TUNE ........................................................................... 86 U UP ................................................................................ 65 USB Storage Device ..................................................... 23 [USB TO DEVICE] terminal .......................................... 13 [USB TO HOST] terminal ............................................. 13 USER ............................................................................ 27 V Vibrato ......................................................................... 95 Voice .................................................................... 30, 77 VOICE buttons ............................................................. 13 Voice Program Change Number ................................. 182 VOICE SET ................................................................... 92 VOL/VOICE .................................................................. 85 Volume balance ........................................................... 41 VOLUME/ATTACK ....................................................... 97 W WERCKMEISTER ........................................................ 100 X XF .............................................................................. 176 XG ............................................................................. 177 Appendix PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual 191 Panel Button Chart The position of the button on the panel can be confirmed by the Panel Controls (page 14). Number [1π†]–[8π†] ...................................................................... d A [A]–[J]............................................................................ ] [ACMP] ......................................................................... T [AUTO FILL IN] ............................................................. S O B [BALANCE].................................................................... ^ [BREAK]......................................................................... W [CHANNEL ON/OFF] .................................................... b [PART SELCT], [PART ON/OFF]..................................... m [PITCH BEND] wheel .................................................... 3 D R DATA ENTRY dial ......................................................... j [DEMO]......................................................................... 9 [DIRECT ACCESS].......................................................... c Drum Kit Icons .............................................................. ~ [DSP]............................................................................. { REGIST BANK [–]/[+]..................................................... o REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8]................................. r [REPEAT] ....................................................................... C E ENDING/rit. [I]/[II]/[III] .................................................. X [ENTER]......................................................................... k [EXIT] ............................................................................ i [EXTRA TR].................................................................... E F [FADE IN/OUT] ............................................................. Q [FREEZE]........................................................................ p [FUNCTION]................................................................. f G [GUIDE] ........................................................................ D H [HARMONY/ECHO]...................................................... w I INTRO [I]/[II]/[III]........................................................... U L S SCALE MEMORY buttons............................................... 7 SCALE SETTING buttons ................................................ 5 [SCALE TUNE]............................................................... h [SCORE] ........................................................................ A SONG [F/K] (PLAY/PAUSE) ................................... J SONG [G]/[H] (REW/FF) ......................................... K SONG [J] (STOP) ..................................................... I SONG [REC] ................................................................ H SONG [SELECT] ............................................................ 0 [STANDBY/ON] ............................................................ 1 STYLE buttons................................................................ L STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] .................................. [ [SUSTAIN]..................................................................... y [SYNC START]............................................................... Z [SYNC STOP] ................................................................ Y T TAB [√][®]................................................................... e [TAP TEMPO] ................................................................ O TEMPO [–]/[+] ............................................................... P [TOUCH] ...................................................................... x [TR 1] ............................................................................ G [TR 2] ............................................................................ F TRANSPOSE [–][+] ........................................................ M U [LCD CONTRAST]......................................................... \ [LYRICS] ........................................................................ B Appendix ONE TOUCH SETTING [1]–[4] ..................................... v [OTS LINK].................................................................... R P C M MAIN VARIATION [A]/[B]/[C]/[D]................................. V [MASTER VOLUME] ...................................................... 2 [MEMORY] (SCALE MEMORY) ...................................... 6 192 [MEMORY] (REGISTRATION MEMORY) ....................... q [METRONOME] ............................................................ N [MIXING CONSOLE]..................................................... a [MODULATION] wheel ................................................ 4 [MONO] ....................................................................... z MULTI PAD CONTROL [1]–[4] ..................................... t MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT].................................. s MULTI PAD CONTROL [STOP] .................................... u [MUSIC FINDER]........................................................... l PSR-OR700 Owner’s Manual UPPER OCTAVE [–][+] .................................................. } [USB]............................................................................. g V [VARI.] .......................................................................... | VOICE buttons............................................................... n Limited Warranty 90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models included in the following series of products: PSR SERIES OF PORTATONE ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect in material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor. If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha will, subject to the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as warranty replacements. THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state. CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities: 1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below. 2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an explanation of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts under warranty. 3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely. *Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days. IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed. 4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and to follow all safety precautions. EXCLUSIONS This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to failures and/or damages that may occur as a result of: 1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity. 2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha. 3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia, and Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country. Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below. Model________________________ Serial #_____________________________ Sales Slip #_____________________________ Purchased from______________________________________________________ (Retailer) Date__________________________________ YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue Buena Park, CA 90620 KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL! FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/ uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder. This product contains a high intensity lamp that contains a small amount of mercury. Disposal of this material may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal information in the United States, refer to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site: www.eiae.org * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (class B) (mercury) (standby) COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Electronic Keyboard Model Name : PSR-OR700 IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (FCC DoC) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. (2 wires) For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte Madero Este-C1107CEK Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 011-4119-7000 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/ HUNGARY/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-868-07-57 Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDIA Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd. 5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India Tel: 0124-466-5551 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 080-004-0022 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 SINGAPORE NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) Office 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia Tel: 495 626 0660 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 EKB50 Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Digital Musical instruments Division © 2007 Yamaha Corporation WT89490 00?APZC?.?-01D0 Printed in Indonesia